DL5000

P61
REF: J44-2000
DL
Electric power industry profession standards of the People's Republic of China
P DL 5000 -2000
Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel Power Plants
Issued on Nov.13, 2000 Effective 2001-01-01
Issued by
State Economic & Trade Commission of the Peoples Republic of China

Electric power industry profession standards of the People's Republic of China
DL 5000 -2000
Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel Power Plants
Compiled by: China Electric Power Construction and Consultant Company

Approved by: National Economy and Trade Committee, People's Republic of
China
Approval No. GJMDL [2000] 1048
China Electric Power Publishing House
2000, Beijing
DL 5000-2000
Preface
This code is a mandatory professional standard in articles, in which some clauses
underlining are obligatory ones. If there are some obligatory contents in tables, they
shall be prompted in the table annotation.
Since the standard DL 5000-1994, Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel Power
Plant was issued and implemented, it has played an active role and achieved a
satisfactory result to implement the national capital construction policy for electric
power construction, to reflect the national economic and technologic policies, to unify
and clarify the construction standards, to ensure newly built and extension of fossil
fuel power plants to be technically advanced, capable of realizing the requirements for
safety, economy, full output and stable generation, as well as to satisfy the
environmental requirements.
With the reform deepening and technology advancement, the standard DL 5000-1994,
Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel Power Plant has no longer met the
requirements of electric power construction and development in some aspects. For
this, the Electric Power Planning and Engineering General Institute has revised and
compiled the standard DL 5000-1994, Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel
Power Plant according to the item 42 in the Approval No. DL (1999) 40,
Notification Upon Affirming of Electric Power Industry Profession Standard System
and Revision of Planning Item in 1998 issued by the Electric Power Department of
State Economic & Trade Commission, Peoples Republic of China.
This revision work implements the basic policy of electric power construction,
carefully fulfils the policy of safety, economy and national conditions and a series of
measures that control the construction cost, actively popularizes the advanced, mature
and reliable designing technology, pays attention to economize the coal, water,
electricity and land utilizations as well as to control the scale and standard for
non-production facilities, and takes notice of adapting to the socialist market economy
system so as to make ready for design technology that the electric power construction
steps into the 21 century.
This revising and compiling work has not made a great revision to the framework of
the standard DL5000-1994, and only the contents in the relevant chapters have been
altered, deleted and added, in which the partial chapters and sections are properly
adjusted.
It is a new development orientation of electric power industry in 21 century to

popularize and apply the steam and gas turbine combined-cycle power generation
technology, flue gas desulphurizing technology and clean coal power generation
technology. However, comparing with the conventional coal-fired power generation
technology, the practical experience at home is less and deficient of mature
technology. For this, this revision and compilation is based on the forward looking,
and only partial well-rounded articles are compiled.
This code is put forward by the State Electric Power Company.
This code is paced under the administration of the China Electric Power Planning and
Engineering Institute.
The drafting organization for this code: China Electric Power Construction and
Consultant Company
The principal drafters for this code: Yang Xuzhong, Gaolin, Guo Yali, Wang
Zengyong, Jia Yuying, Li Shufang, Lijing, Qian Boai, Liuqing, Xie Boyu, Shi
Chongguang, Zhang Jiangzhong, Sun Jianxing, Fan Xinkuan, Yule, Hu Peiwen, Li
Jushun, An Xudong, Chenlin, Ge Simin, Li Jingzhen, Li Wuquan and Zhaomin.
The China Electric Power Construction and Consultant Company will be responsible
for the explanation of this Code.
DL 5000-2000
Table of Contents
Preface............................................................................................................................ 3
1. Scope .......................................................................................................................... 6
2. Cited Codes and Standards ........................................................................................ 7
3. General Provisions ................................................................................................... 15
4. Site Selection ........................................................................................................... 19
5. Overall Planning ...................................................................................................... 25
6. Arrangement of Main Power Building ..................................................................... 43
7. Coal Handling System ............................................................................................. 53
8. Boiler Equipment and Systems ................................................................................ 61
9. Ash and Slag Handling Systems .............................................................................. 77
10. Steam Turbine Equipment and Systems ................................................................ 83
11. Water Treatment Equipment and System ............................................................... 94
12 Thermal Engineering Automation......................................................................... 101
13 Electrical Appliances and System ......................................................................... 114
14Water Supply Facilities and Systems ..................................................................... 135
15 Auxiliary and Ancillary Facilities ......................................................................... 147
16. Building and Structure ......................................................................................... 150
17. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning .......................................................... 158
18 Environmental Protection ..................................................................................... 167
19. Labour Safety and Industrial Hygiene ................................................................. 172
20 Fire-fighting .......................................................................................................... 177
Appendix A (standard appendix) ............................................................................... 181
Appendix B (Appendix to Suggestion) ...................................................................... 182
Appendix C (Appendix to Suggestion) ...................................................................... 186
Appendix D (Appendix to Suggestion)...................................................................... 188
1. Scope
This Code stipulates the principles and construction standards that shall be observed
for designing large fossil-fired power plant.
This Code is applicable to the condensing fossil-fired power plant with turbine
generator unit of 125MW 600MW and the cogeneration power plant with heat
supply turbine unit of 50MW and above. It is used as reference for the units of
600MW and above.
This Code applies to the designing of the newly built or extension of fossil fuel power
plants, and it can be referred and used for designing rebuild project.
2. Cited Codes and Standards
Clauses included in the following codes and standards constitute clauses in this Code
through citation. All editions of them are valid since this code is published. However,
due to the fact that any code or standard will be revised earlier or later, all parts
planning to adopt those codes and standards shall study the possibility of adopting the
latest editions of them.
GBl50-1998 Steel Pressure Vessels
GB/T1596-1991 Coal Ash Used in Cement and Concrete
GB3095-1996 Ambient Air Quality Standard
GB3096-1993 Code of Environmental Noise in Urban Area
GB3097-1997 Quality Standards of Seawater
GB3838-1998 Environmental Quality Standards for Surface Water
GB4053.1-1993 Safety Specifications for Fixed Type Steel Vertical Ladders
GB4053.2-1993 Safety Specifications for Fixed Type Steel Inclined Ladders
GB4053.3-1993 Safety Specifications on Fixed Type Industrial Guard Rails
GB4053.4-1983 Fixed Type Industrial Steel Platforms
GB/T4064-1993 Safety Design Guidelines for Electrical Apparatus
GB4792-1984 Fundamental Standard for Radiation Health Protection
GB4830-1984 Pressure Range and Quality of Gas Sources for Industrial

Automation Instruments
GB5083-1985 General Rules for Safety and Health Design of Production

Equipment
GB5084-1992 Quality Standard o Farm Irrigation Water
GB5749-1985 Hygienic Standard for Drinking Water
GB/T7064-1996 Technical Requirements for Turbo Synchronous Motors

GB/T7409-1997 Excitation System of Synchronous Motors
GB8173-1987 Standard for Control of Pollutants in Agricultural Coal Ash
GB8196-1987 Safety Requirements for Protective Hoods of Mechanical

Equipment
GB8702-1988 Regulations on Electromagnetic Radiation Protection
GB8703-1988 Regulations on Radiation Protection
GB8978-1996 Code for Sewage Composite Discharge
GB9137-1988 Maximum Allowable Concentration of Air Pollutants against

Protected Crops
GBl0070-1988 Code for Environmental Vibration in Urban Area
GBl0434-1989 Hygienic Standard for Local Vibration at Operational Fields
GBl0436-1989 Hygienic Standard for Microwave Radiation at Operational

Fields
GBll607-1989 Quality Standard for Fishery Water
GBl2348-1990 Criteria for Noise around Factories of Industrial Enterprises
GBl2523-1990 Limitation of Noise around Construction Sites
GBl2525-1990 Limitation and Measuring Scheme for Noise at Railway

Borderlines
GBl2941-1991 Quality Standard for Landscape and Recreational Water
GBl3015-1991 Codes for Pollution Control of Wastes Containing Polychlorinated

Biphenyls
GBl3223-1996 Discharge Standard for Air Pollutants from Thermal Power

Plants
GBl3271-1991 Discharge Standard for Air Pollutants from Boilers
GBl4285-1993 Technical Regulations on Relay Protection and Safety Automation

Apparatus
GB/T14848-1993 Quality Standard of Underground Water
GBl5618-1995 Environmental Quality Standards for Soil Irrigation
GB50033-1991 Standard for Lighting Design for Industrial Enterprises
GB50034-1992 Standard for Illumination Design for Industrial Enterprises
GB50040-1996 Code for Design of Dynamic Machine Foundation
GB50050-1995 Code for Design of Industrial Circulating Cooling Water

Treatment
GB50057-1994 Code for Lightning Protection Design for Constructions
GB50058-1992 Electrical Installations Design Code for Explosive

Atmospheres and Fire Hazards
GB50059-1992 Design Code for (35-110) kV Transformer Stations
GB50060-1992 Design Code for3-100kV high voltage electrical installation
GB50065-1994 Code for Grounding Design for AC Electric Apparatus
GB50116-1998 Code for Design of Automatic Fire Alarm System
GB50129-1995 Code for Design for Water Spray Extinguishing Systems
GB50151-1992 Code for Design for Low Expansion Foam Extinguishing

System
GB50156-1992 Code for Design of Small Petroleum Deposits Automobile

Fueling Stations
GB50191-1993 Design Code for Anti-Seismic of Special Structures
GB50210-1994 Flood Control Criteria
GB50217-1994 Code for Design of Cables of Electric Work
GB50222-1995 Code for Fire Prevention in Design of Interior Decoration of

Buildings
GB50229-1996 Code for Fire Protection Design Power Plants and Substations
GB50260--1996 Code of Earthquake Resistant Design for Electric Power

Facilities
GBJll-1989 Code for Earthquake Resistant Design for Buildings
GBJl2-1987 Design Code for Full Gauge Railways of Industrial Enterprises
GBJl6-1987 Fire Prevention Code for Building Design
GBJl9-1987 Design Code for Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning
GBJ22-1987 Design Code for Roads in plants and Mines
GBJ74-1984 Code for Design of Oil Depots
GBJ84-1985 Design Code for Automatic Fire-Sprinkling Systems
GBJ87-1985 Design Code for Noise Control in Industrial Enterprises
GBJl01-1987 Code for Modular Coordination for Construction Stairways
CJl8-1986 Quality Standard for Sewage Drained to Urban Sewers
DL408-1991 Safe Working Rules for Electric Utilities (Power Plant and
Transformer Station - Electric Part)
DL435-1991 Code for Explosion Protection for Combustion Chambers of

Pulverized Coal Firing Boilers in Thermal Power Plants
DL612-1996 Rules for Supervision for Pressure Vessels of Boilers in Power

Industry
DL/T620-1997 Over-Voltage Protection and Insulation Coordination of AC

Electric Apparatus
DL/T621-1997 Grounding of AC Electric Apparatus
DL/T639-1997 Detailed Rules for Safety Protection for

Manufacturing/Operating/Testing/Maintaining Personnel of
Sulfur Hexafluoride Electric Apparatus
DL/T650-1998 Technical Conditions for Self-Shunt Excitation and Static

Excitation Systems of Large-Scale Turbo Generators
DL5003-1991 Technical Regulations on Dispatching Automation Design for

Electric Systems
DL50251993 Technical regulations on Design of Microwave

Communication Projects for Electric Systems
DL/T5029-1994 Design Standard for Architectural Ornament for

Thermoelectric Power Plants
DL5032-1994 Design specifications for Layout for Roads and

Transportation in Thermoelectric Power Plants
DL5053-1996 Design Specifications for Labor Safety and Industrial Sanitation

for Thermoelectric power Plants
SDJ2-1988 Technical Regulations for Design of 220-500kV Transformer

Stations
SDJ5-1985 Technical Regulations for Design of High-Voltage Power

Distribution Apparatus
SDJ9-1987 Technical Regulations for Design of Electrical Measuring

Instruments
SD268-1988 Technical Conditions for Boilers in Coal Fired Power Plants
SD269-1988 Technical Conditions for Fixed Type Generating Condensing

Steam Turbines
SD270-1988 Technical Conditions for Turbo Generators
SD271-1988 Technical Conditions for AC Exciter Systems of Turbo

Generators
TJ36-1979 Hygienic Standard for Design for Industrial Enterprises
Law of Electric Power of P. R. China, passed on 17th Standing Committee Session, 8th
People's Representative Conference in 1995, issued in 60th Chairman Ordinance
Law of Construction of P. R. China, passed on 28th Standing Committee Session, 8th

People's Representative Conference in 1997, issued in 91st Chairman Ordinance
Law of Environmental Protection of P. R. China, passed on 11th Standing Committee
Session, 7th People's Representative Conference in 1989, issued in 22nd Chairman
Ordinance
Law of Water Pollution Prevention of P. R. China, passed on 5th Standing Committee

Session, 6th People's Representative Conference in 1996, amended on 19th Standing
Committee Session, 8th People's Representative Conference
Law of Solid Waste Pollution Prevention and Cure of P. R. China, passed on 16th
Standing Committee Session, 8th People's Representative Conference in 1996, issued
in 58th Chairman Ordinance
Law of Environment Noise Pollution Prevention and Cure of P. R. China, passed on

22nd Standing Committee Session, 8th People's Representative Conference in 1996,
issued in 77th Chairman Ordinance
Law of Ocean Environment Protection of P. R. China, passed on 13th Standing

Committee Session, 9th People's Representative Conference in 1999, issued in 26th
Chairman Ordinance
Law of Atmospheric Pollution Prevention of P. R. China, passed on 15th Standing

Committee Session, 9th People's Representative Conference in 1995, issued in 32nd
Chairman Ordinance
Regulative Statute for Prevention and Cure of Pollution of Coastal Construction

Projects to Ocean Environment of P. R. China, issued in Ordinance [1990] 62 of the
State Council
Regulative Statute for Prevention and Cure of Pollution of Terrestrial-Sourced

Pollutants to Ocean Environment of P. R. China, issued in Ordinance [1990] 61 of the
State Council
Law of Water of P. R. China, passed on 24th Standing Committee Session, 6th People's
Representative Conference in 1988, issued in 61st Chairman Ordinance
Law of Water and Soil Conservation of P. R. China, passed on 20th Standing

Committee Session, 7th People's Representative Conference in 1991, issued in 49th
Chairman Ordinance
Law of Labor of P. R. China, passed on 8th Standing Committee Session, 8th People's
Representative Conference in 1994, issued in 28th Chairman Ordinance
Ordinance for Nature Reserves of P. R. China, issued in Ordinance [1994] 167 of the
State Council
Law of Earthquake Prevention and Disaster Control of P. R. China, passed on 29th

Standing Committee Session, 8th People's Representative Conference in 1997, issued
in 29th Chairman Ordinance
China Seismic Intensity Zoning Chart (1990), issued in Ordinance [1992] 160 by
State Seismological Bureau and Earthquake Announcement Office of Ministry of
Construction
Ordinance for Protection of Radiation of Radioisotope and Radiation Apparatus,

issued in Ordinance [1989] 44 of the State Council
Regulative Statute for Environmental Protection of Construction Projects, issued in

Ordinance [1998] 253 of the State Council
Rules for Safety Technology Supervision for Steam Boilers, issued by Ministry of
Labor (1996)
Reply for Issues Related with Acid Rain Control Area and Sulfur Dioxide Pollution
Control Area Issued by the State Council, State Letter [1998] 5
Technical Specifications for Port Works, Standard of Ministry of Transportation

1987
Rules for Safety Technology Supervision for Pressure Vessels, GF [1999] 154 of
Bureau of Quality and Technology Supervision
Safety Code for Electric Appliances at Explosive Risk Locations or P. R. China, LRH
(87) 36
Tentative Specifications for Water and Soil Conservation Work for Electric Power
Construction Projects, SB (1998) 423, State Electric Power Corporation, Ministry of
Water Conservancy
Administrative Provisions for Environmental Surveillance in Thermal Power Industry,

DJ (1996)-280, Ministry of Electric Power Industry
Administrative Provisions for Final Acceptance of Environmental Protection for

Construction Projects, Ordinance [1994] 18 of State Environmental Protection Bureau
Management Method for Environmental Protection for Electromagnetic Radiation,

Ordinance [1997] 18 of State Environmental Protection Bureau
Regulations on Safety Technologies for Pressure-Type Oxygen Extractors in Power
Plants, NYAB [1991] 709
3. General Provisions
3.01 This Code is specially compiled to achieve the following objectives:

To implement the national capital construction policy for electric power construction;
To reflect the national economic and technical policies
To unify and clarify the construction standards
To ensure newly built and extension of fossil fuel power plants (hereinafter referred to
as "power plant") to be technically advanced, capable of realizing the requirements for
safety and economy, to meet the national conditions as well as to satisfy the
sustainable development requirements;
To be able to obtain maximum comprehensive economic and social benefits with
reasonable investment.
3.0.2 In the planning and design of power plant, the following principles must be
observed:
To reflect all around perspective, and to rely on technology advancement;
To carry out exploration work earnestly, and to complete design work consciously;
To summarize experiences successively, and to actively and carefully popularizing
advanced technologies at home and abroad;
To employ matured new materials, new equipment, new technologies, new
arrangement and new structures, according to suitable locations and conditions;
To strenuously promote mechanization and automation based on actual necessity;
To improve the working condition and living condition of the staff;
To work out optimum schemes in order to enhance the reliability, economy, labor
productivity, and the level of civilized operation, as well as to lay the foundation for
economizing the usage of land, water, material and for decreasing in plant cost and
shortening of construction schedule, and also creating the condition for civilized
construction;
To fully consider the future countrywide electric power system networking, resource
optimization configuration throughout the country, and the electric power market
requirements from separation between the power network and power plant and access
to the network through competitive price.
3.0.3 The design of power plant must be in accordance with the national capital
construction procedure. The design document for power plant shall be complete in
content and in depth according to related regulations, and shall be presented and
approved accordingly.
3.0.4 For the projects with the introduction of complete set of equipment from the
abroad and direct utilization of the foreign capital, its construction standard shall
employ this Code for reference, and also shall consider the general international
standards and the standards where the supplier is located.
3.0.5 Newly build or extension power plant shall use coal as the principal fuel.
The kinds of design code and check coal, and the coal analysis are the fundamental
basis of the design and will affect the selection of equipment and system, plant
construction cost, power plant safety production, and economical operation. The
administrative department and project entity shall pay full attention to proceed with
necessary investigation and study, and to decide rationally, thus ensuring that they can
be present the actual type of coal used in long duration. Oil or natural gas for coal
fired power plant boiler ignition and for supporting combustion at low load, shall have
reliable source.
Condensing type power plant burning low heat value coal (low-grade raw coal,
washed middlings, lignite, etc.) shall be built nearby the fuel production districts.
When conditions allowed, mine-mouth power plant shall be constructed. The mining
district where mine-mouth power plant is located, shall have enough exploitable coal
reserve and reliable coal production to continuously supply coal to the power plant for
30 or more years, based and calculated on the planned capacity of the power plant.
For power plant with relatively long coal transport distance (exceeding 1,000 km )
steam coal with heat value above 21.0MJ/kg shall be used.
For power plant located at the acid-rain and sulfur-dioxide-pollution controlling
districts, it shall satisfy the environmental protection requirements of sulfur content in
coal category, oxysulfide emission concentration, discharge amount and gross amount
controlling.
Anthracite or coal with slagging characteristics, shall be concentrated and supplied to
several designated power plants, and necessary measures for safety operation of the
boilers shall be taken.
3.0.6 The design of extension and the renovation of power plant project shall be in
conjunction with the features of the existing general arrangement, the production
system, the equipment arrangement, the building structure, the operation and
management experiences, etc; and the overall uniformity and the coordination of the
whole plant shall be paid more attention to.
3.0.7 The unit capacity of the power plant shall be selected based on planned
power system capacity, load increase rate, and configuration of the network. The
unit with relatively large capacity and high efficiency shall be selected. The capacity
of the largest unit shall not be more than 10 percent of the total system capacity.
3.0.8 Load regulating characteristics of power plant unit shall satisfy the
requirement of power system operation. Especially the lowest load carrying capacity
without fuel oil support for boiler stable combustion and other indexes of the unit
shall meet the system requirement. The selection of various auxiliary equipment and
system design shall also fulfill the requirements respectively.
3.0.9 The number of units in the power plant shall not exceed six units, and the
unit capacity shall not exceed 2 categories. Same capacity turbine-generators and
boilers shall be supplied by the same manufacturers, of same type or of improved type.
The type of accompanied auxiliary equipment shall also be the same.
Newly built power plant shall be constructed in a single stage or in two stages
according to planned capacity considering the load demand and assured financing
conditions. Large capacity power plant shall be designed in one stage with multiple
similar large capacity and high efficiency units, and successively put into operation.
3.0.10 When there is heat load demand, and when the heat supply distance and
technical and economical conditions are reasonable, the power plant shall consider
cogeneration of heat and electricity as a priority.
3.0.11 The following items shall be based on the approved feasibility study report:
location of the power plant, planned capacity, the capacity and the construction
schedule of the current stage of project, capacity of the units selected, form of
connection to the power system, source and kind of fuel, investment control indexes,
etc. In the course of design, if there is necessity to alter some original stipulations due
to changing condition, report shall be submitted in time to the original approval
organization for examination and approval.
3.0.12 Under the premise of assured safety generation and that being technically and
economically rational, the power plant may cooperate with neighboring industrial
enterprises or other organizations to jointly construct portion of engineering facilities,
if conditions suitable.
3.0.13 The design of power plant shall attain the integrity of production, livelihood
facilities, as well as overall uniformity of the whole plant. When the construction is
divided into stages, the design of each stage project shall in principle only include the
portion necessary for the current stage, but must be unitarily arranged as a whole
according to plant capacity, to satisfy the requirements of various stages, especially
for the operation and the maintenance requirements at the preliminary stage
commissioning. For items difficult or unreasonable to be constructed in separate
stages, it shall be constructed according to planned capacity at one time, according to
specific conditions.
3.0.14 In the design of power plant, the following laws and codes of the People
Republic of China, about environmental protection must be observed: "Electric Power
Law, P.R.C", "Building Law, P.R.C", "Environment Protection Law of P.R.C",
"Atmospheric Contamination Prevention Law, P.R.C", "Marine Environment
Protection Law, P.R.C", "Water Contamination Prevention Law, P.R.C", "Environment
and Noise Contamination Prevention Law, P.R.C", "Labor Law, P.R.C" etc.. Effective
measures shall be taken to alleviate the impact to environment caused by emission
from the power plant, including: flue gas, waste water, ash and slag, noise, and
discharged water. The emission of various harmful products must conform to related
stipulations of the environment protection as well as codes for labor safety and
industrial hygiene.
Engineering facilities for prevention and control of pollution must be simultaneously

designed, constructed and commissioned together with the main engineering
installations.
If comprehensive utilization of ash and slag can be assured locally, coordinated

provisions shall be provided in the power plant designed to facilitate the
implementation of the policy of: "Storage and utilization in conjunction, and utilize
strenuously".
3.0.15 The seismic design of power plant must execute the policy of taking
precautionary measure mainly. According to the seismic basic intensity of the region
where the power plant is located, and according to related code for seismic design to
implement seismic design, the process and civil design must take effective aseismic
measures to alleviate seismic damages accordingly.
3.0.16 In power plant design, technical requirement for main equipment, major
auxiliary equipment and systems shall be integrally coordinated, and technical
specifications shall be submitted. Optimized selection of the equipment shall be based
on technical performance of similar equipment, reliability, supply condition, price, as
well as the pass business achievement and technical service quality of the
manufacturers. Where conditions suitable, standard series of products and energy
saving products shall be selected in preference.
3.0.17 In power plant design, the up-to-date reference design, generic design and
advanced designing methods and means shall be strenuously employed to raise the
design quality, control plant construction cost as well as continuously innovate in
conjunction with the project characteristics.
3.0.18 In power plant design, besides executing the regulations in this code, related
national and profession standards in force shall also be conformed.
4. Site Selection
4.01 The power plant site selection shall be carried out in two stages: the planned
site selection stage and the engineering site selection stage; and shall be included as
the main task content of the preliminary feasibility study and the feasibility study
respectively. The planned site selection shall be based on the medium or long-term
power planning, while the engineering site selection shall be based on the approved
project proposal and reviewed preliminary feasibility study report.
4.02 The power plant site selection shall be totally considered with factors
including requirements of the medium or long-term electric power planning, fuel
supply, transportation conditions, regional natural conditions and environment
protection regulations, as well as construction planning, etc. In the site selection,
overall situation shall be first considered with a correct dealing with the relations of
the adjacent agriculture, industrial and mining enterprise, city planning, national
defense facilities and people's livelihood, etc.
4.03 In site selection of the power plant, the conditions to be studied shall include:
electric network configuration, electric power and heat load demand, fuel supply,
water resources, communications, transportation of fuel and large equipment,
environment protection regulations, ash and slag handling, outgoing transmission
lines corridor, geology, seismic situation, topography, hydrology, meteorology,
removal of existing buildings, construction, and adjacent industrial and mining
enterprise impacting on the power plant etc. so that preliminary schemes can be drawn
up for the site selected. After technical and economical studies and economic benefit
analysis, demonstration and assessment shall be submitted.
In the planned site selection stage, wherever several plant sites are recommended, the
construction sequence and the construction scale for each site shall be commented.
When the site is decided, the construction scale and the completion period limit shall
be commented. The number of units and unit capacity to be installed shall be
proposed.
4.04 In the site selection, economization of land shall be considered, so as to

utilize non-cultivable land and arid land as much as possible. Furthermore, less
removal of buildings and population as well as less amount of excavation and filling
of soil and rock shall be considered.
4.05 The designed ground elevation of the plant site shall be fully considered for
the flood prevention standard corresponding to the power plant grade (see Table
4.0.5).
In case the elevation is lower than the standard stipulated in Table 4.0.5, the plant area
shall the surrounded by flood prevention dike or other reliable flood prevention
facilities:
Table 4.0.5 Power Plant Class and Standards of Flood Prevention

Grade of power Planned Flood prevention standards (repetition
plant capacity period)
MW
I > 2400 100 and 200 year1) high water level (or
tide level)
II 4002400 100 year high water level (or tide level)
III < 400 50 year high water level (or tide level)
Note: The index in this table is mandatory.
1) For super-large scale power plant located at the seashore in severely storm tide
regions, 200 year high water level is indicated.
The top elevation of the flood prevention dike (or wave protection dike) of the power
plant located at the seashore shall be determined according to requirements stipulated
in Table 4.0.5 Flood Prevention Standard (repetition period), plus the wave
climbing height of 1% frequency recorded within 50 years of repetition period, and
plus 0.5 m extra height for safety. For the power plant located at the riverside and
lakeside, the top elevation of the flood prevention dike shall be 0.5 m higher than the
high water level of 1% frequency. In case that the influence of wind, wave and tide is
relatively significant, the top elevation of the flood prevention dike shall be
determined with reference to the seashore power plant. The flood prevention dike
design standard shall be submitted to the local conservancy organization for
affirmation.
When the power plant is built in the waterlogging region, the elevation of the
waterlogging prevention enclosure dike shall be determined according to the designed
waterlogging level of 1% frequency (when hardly determined, it can adopt the highest
waterlogging historical level), plus the safety extra height of 0.5 m. In case
waterlogging drainage facilities are adopted, the dike-top elevation shall be
determined according to the designed waterlogging level, plus a safety height of 0.5
m.
For the power plant located at the mountainous regions, torrent prevention and
drainage measures shall be considered and designed according to a mountain torrent
of 1% frequency.
The enclosure dike or torrent prevention and drainage facilities shall be completed in
one time according to the planned scale in the initial phase of the project.
4.06 In site selection, investigation and exploration of the geological conditions of

the plant site and its surrounding area shall be carried out to establish the exploration
technologic scheme, conduct the reasonable exploration work, and submit the
exploration report. In the planned site selection stage, the main task is the collection
and analysis of the information available from site survey and investigations. If
necessary, small amount of exploration work shall be done to ascertain the
unfavorable geological conditions of the siting so as to evaluate the stability of the site
area. In the engineering site selection stage, the impact of the geological conditions to
the stability of the side area shall be further determined by different means, such as
engineering geological mapping, exploration, in situ survey and testing, etc. according
to the degree of complexity of the plant site ground so as to evaluate the stability of
the plant site and its engineering geological conditions.
4.07 The seismic basic intensity of the power plant shall be determined according
to the "China Seismic Intensity Zoning Map", promulgated by the State Seismic
Bureau and Quake-proof and Disaster-reduction Law, P.R.C . According to the
specific conditions of electric power engineering, the intensity checkup and seismic
risk analysis shall be carried out for the following newly built projects:
1. The intensity checkup shall be carried out for the power plant located at
the neighborhood of the boundary line of the seismic intensity zone;
2. The intensity checkup shall be carried out for the large power plant located
at the far bordering region, where seismic study is inadequate and the
detailed data are not available, at the same time the planned capacity of the
plant is larger than or equal to 600MW;
3. The intensity checkup or seismic risk analysis shall be carried out for the
large power plant with the planned capacity of larger than 2400MW and its
seismic basic intensity is higher than or equal to VII;
4. The intensity checkup and the seismic risk analysis shall be carried out for
the power plant with the planned capacity larger than or equal to 600MW
and located at seismic intensity zone of IX;
5. The intensity checkup and seismic risk analysis shall be carried out for the
important power plant sitings with especially complex seismic and
geological conditions, affirmed by the high engineering authorities.
Where horizontal seismic acceleration value is required, the following figure shall be
referred to: 0.05g for 6 degree, 0.10g for 7 degree, 0.20g for 8 degree, 0.40g for 9
degree.
4.08 The power plant site shall not be located at regions where the landslide and
the rocky desertification are highly developed, or at the active seismic fault belt as
well as at regions where seismic basic intensity is higher than IX. The power plant
with the unit capacity of 300MW and above or with the total installed capacity of
1200MW and above may not be built in seismic zone with intensity IX.
The power plant site shall keep away from the key protected natural and humane ruins,
and shall not be located at mineral resources of important exploitable value or on top
of the mined-out area.
The power plant site in the mountainous area may be selected at a relatively flat
sloping field or at hillside land. Attention shall be kept not to demolish the natural
topography, and to keep away from the land sections with the dangerous rocks, rolling
rocks and mud rock flow.
4.09 The source of water supply must be practicable and reliable for selection of
power plant site, and the influence of water conservancy and hydropower planning to
the water sources changes shall be considered.
Where river water is used as the source of water supply, the location of the water
intake shall be selected at the riverside section where the river bed is stable during the
whole year round, and where the water intake is not affected by muddy sand, grass
and wood pieces, icicles, floating wastes, discharged water return flow, etc. If
necessary, model experiment shall be carried out.
When underground water is used as the source of water supply, the hydrogeological
exploration shall be carried out according to the requirements of the "Code of
Hydrogeological Prospecting of Water Supply" and the assessment report of the
exploration shall be submitted to and approved by the relevant water resources
authority.
4.0.10 Once-through circulating water power plant shall be located near to the water
source, and the influence of inlet and outlet of water flow to the water region
navigation, environment, ecology and urban domestic water shall be considered.
4.0.11 In regions neighboring the coal mines and where the construction conditions
are favorable but short of water resources, power plants using air cooled condensing
turbine generator unit may be considered, if technical and economical studies prove it
reasonable.
4.0.12 In site selection, the transport conditions for fuel and large equipment shall
be ascertained. For power plant using railway transport for fuel shall consider the
interconnection of the power plant special purpose railway line to the state railway
lines, or to the special service railway lines of other industrial enterprises. The
interconnection distance shall be short, and any construction of large bridge and
tunnel as well as cross over with the state railway lines shall be avoided.
For the power plant using water transport for fuel, a good section of the riverside
within the plant sphere or its neighborhood shall be selected according to the
requirements of the shipping tonnage and shipping berth to locate the fuel wharf; and
within the section, the river course shall be stable, the water flow even and slow, the
waterway broad, the water depth suitable, and the geological conditions favorable.
For the power plant using highway transport for fuel, it shall make use of existing
highway conditions.
For the power plant located near to the fuel supply mines, the possibility of selecting
long belt conveyors or truck transportation for the coal supply shall be considered.
4.0.13 In the site selection of a coal-fired power plant, suitable ash storage yard
must be selected. The ash storage yard shall occupy no or less agricultural land.
Moreover, the floodwater storage and the floodwater flowing areas of rivers and lakes
shall not be occupied randomly; while relevant requirement of environment protection
shall be satisfied.
The total storage capacity of the ash storage yard shall be able to store the ash and
slag quantity calculated for about 20 years operation under the planned capacity of
the power plant. Generally, the ash storage yard shall be constructed in stages and
blocks. The storage capacity in the initial stage, together with the acquisition of land,
shall be able to store the ash and slag quantity calculated for about 10 years operation
under the planned capacity within the stage.
4.0.14 In site selection, outgoing transmission lines conditions shall be fully

considered. The outgoing corridor for the transmission lines shall be reserved
sufficiently according to the planning requirements of the power plant to be
interconnected to the Electric network.
4.0.15 The power plant site shall be selected in regions where the atmospheric
dispersion and dilution capacity is relatively strong and the background concentration
of atmospheric pollution substances is relatively low.
Except for the cogeneration power plant, the coal-fired power plant shall not be newly
constructed at the urban area for large and medium cities and its neighboring suburbs.
4.0.16 In site selection, attention shall be paid to the mutual impact of the waste gas,
the waste water and the slag discharged from the power plant and from the other
industries.
4.0.17 The power plant shall be located at up wind side of the neighboring city or
residential area according to the minimum frequency wind direction in normal year.
In the selection of the location of residential areas for the power plant, the living
convenience of the staffs and workers shall be considered. For the power plant in the
city or in this suburb, the residential areas shall be arranged in combination with the
municipal planning.
4.0.18 In the determination of site selection, documents of approval or of

confirmation from the relevant authorities shall be acquired, mainly for: utilization of
land, supply of fuel and water resources, railway transportation and railway
connection of the power plant special service railway lines, highway and wharf
construction, corridors available for the outgoing transmission lines and heating
network, and the environment protection, etc.
In case airport or military facilities are in the power plant neighborhood, their impact
to the plant site shall be considered in the determination of the site selection; at the
same time, the documents of approval or of confirmation by the relevant authorities
shall be acquired.
5. Overall Planning
5.1 General Regulations

5.1.1 The overall planning of the power plant shall be based on the requirements of
production, construction and livelihood, in combination with the natural conditions of
the plant site and its neighboring areas as well as the construction planning. Then the
following factors shall be planned as a whole, beginning from recent phases and
stretching to the far future, according to the approved planned capacity of the power
plant: the plant area, the construction area, the residential area, the locality of water
source, the water supply and discharge facilities, the waste water treatment facilities,
that ash handling pipelines, the ash storage yard, the comprehensive utilization of ash
and slag, the communications and transportation, outgoing transmission lines
corridors, the heating network, etc.
5.1.2 The overall planning of the power plant must follow the rule of
economization of land use. The area of land use for plant production, plant front area,
construction site, and residential areas shall all follow the regulations of the relevant
State and the profession standards in force.
The scope of land to be used for the power plant shall be determined according to the
requirements of buildings and construction for the plant of planned capacity. The land
use for plant shall be expropriated it in stages and in batches.
5.1.3 The overall planning of the power plant shall also satisfy the following
requirements:
1. The technological process flow rational;
2. The communication and transportation convenient;
3. The relationships between plant interior and exterior, between production
and livelihood, between production and construction well handled;
4. The planning of township or industrial districts well coordinated;
5. Convenient to construction, and favorable to future extension;
6. Rationally utilizing of topographic form and geologic condition;
7. Minimizing of field excavation works under the conditions of convenient
operation;
8. Low project cost, small operating expenses, and high economic benefit;
9. Conforming to the requirements of environmental protection, labour safety
and industrial hygiene.
5.1.4 The overall planning of the power plant shall also meet the following
requirements:
1. The plant is divided into sectional area according to their different functions,
e.g. main power buildings area, switchgear yard, coal facilities area,
auxiliary production facilities area, residential area, construction area, etc.
2. The arrangement of buildings in different areas shall consider the
sunshine bearing and wind direction, and the requirement of reasonable
compactness; the auxiliary and the subsidiary buildings as well as the
administrative management and public welfare buildings shall adopt
combination arrangement and the multistory structures.
3. The configuration of the space between buildings and the coordination of
the building group shall be noted to beautify the surroundings, under the
integrity point of view.
4. A practical greening program shall be carried out, utilizing the free land
in the production area and the residential area to plant trees and grow
grass. The greening covering coefficient not less than 15 percent of the
plant total occupied area shall be considered, but any expansion of plant
occupied area for greening shall not be allowed.
5. The uncovered land in the outdoor switchgear yard shall be covered with
grass, crushed stones or pebbles. In regions where flying dust are
produced, such as coal and ash storage yards besides adopting dustproof
measures, trees shall be planted, when conditions allowed, so as to
isolate the regions. For the power plant located at the regions where the
blow sand is severe, the plant-out protective belts can be established
according to the specific conditions locally.
5.1.5 The arrangement of the buildings in the power plant area and in the residential
area shall comply with the fight prevention requirements.
The fire risk and the lowest fireproof class of all the production buildings in the power
production process shall be in compliance with Table 5.1.5-1 and 5.1.5-3.
Table 5.1.5-1 The Fire Risk Type and the Lowest Fireproof Class of the Buildings
in Production Process
Serial Name of buildings Fire risk Lowest

No. type in fireproof
production class
process
1 Main power buildings (steam turbine house, D Class 2
deaerator bay, bunker bay, boiler house,
centralized control building or central control
room)
2 Induced draft fan room D Class 2
3 Dedusting structure D Class 2
4 Chimney D Class 2
5 Indoor coal unloading facilities and wagon D Class 2
tipper house
6 Coal crusher room, transfer station and coal C Class 2
distributing building
7 Enclosed coal conveyor trestle, coal handling C Class 2
tunnel
8 Dry coal shed, thawing room C Class 2
9 Ignition oil tank, supply and unloading oil C Class 2
pump house and platforms (diesel oil, heavy
oil and residual oil)
10 Electrical control building (main control E Class 2
building, electric network control building),
microwave building and relay room1)
11 Indoor switchgear building (having oil-filled C Class 2
equipment, each with capacity more than
60kg)
12 Indoor switchgear building (having oil-filled D Class 2
equipment, each with capacity less than or
equal to 60kg)
13 Outdoor switchgear yard C Class 2
14 Transformer room C Class 2
15 General emergency oil storage pond Class 2
16 Riparian water pump house and central water E Class 2
pump house
17 Ash and slag slurry pump house, ash E Class 2
precipitating pond
18 Domestic and firefighting water pump house E Class 2
19 Stabilizer room and chemical feed equipment E Class 2
room
20 Water intake structures E Class 2
21 Cooling tower E Class 3
22 Chemical water treatment room and E Class 3
circulating water treatment room
Note:
1 Except for the building (structure) stipulated in this table, the fire risk type and
fireproof class for other building (structure) shall be in accordance with the relevant
provisions stipulated in the GBJ16 Architectural Design Fireproof Code in force.
2 The index in this table is mandatory.
1)
For the electrical control building (main control building, electric network control
building), microwave building and relay room, if they have not taken the measure
that prevents the cable igniting from afterburning, the fire risk type shall be C.
Table 5.1.5-2 The Fire Risk Type and the Lowest Fireproof Class of the Auxiliary
Plant Buildings and Structures
production class
process
1 Startup boiler house D Class 2
2 Oil treatment room and outdoor oil bunker C Class 2
3 Hydrogen generating station and hydrogen A Class 2
storage tank
4 Oxygen storage tank B Class 2
5 Air compressor room (with oil lubrication) D Class 2
6 I & C (thermal process), electrical and metal D Class 2
testing laboratory
7 Overhead bridge E Class 2
8 Overhead bridge (with cable mezzanine C Class 2
beneath)
9 Transformer repair shop C Class 2
10 Drainage and sewage pump house E Class 2
11 Maintenance shop of different divisions E Class 2
12 Sewage treatment structures E Class 2
13 Cable tunnels C Class 2
14 Diesel engine generator room C Class 2
Note:
fireproof class for other buildings (structures) shall be in accordance with the
relevant provisions stipulated in the GBJ16 Architectural Design Fireproof Code
in force.
Table 5.1.5-3 The Fire Risk Type and the Lowest Fireproof Class of the Ancillary
Buildings
production class
process
1 Office buildings Class 3
2 Material warehouses C Class 2
3 Material storage shed E Class 3
4 Locomotive garage D Class 2
5 Truck garage, bulldozer garage D Class 2
6 Firefighting station D Class 2
7 Guard and reception room Class 3
8 Bicycle shed Class 4
Note:
fireproof class for other buildings (structures) shall be in accordance with the
relevant provisions stipulated in the GBJ16 Architectural Design Fireproof Code
in force.
5.2 Plant Area Planning

5.2.1 Plant area planning of the power plant includes two parts: the production area
planning and the plant front area planning.
The production area planning shall follow the principle of rational technological
process flow, and practically arranged, placing the main power buildings at the center
and all the production facilities and systems centralized in different areas according to
their functions, the compactly matched together.
The plant front area planning shall follow the principle of convenience in
management, and rationally arranged by locating the buildings of administration and
living welfare at areas so as to facilitate their connections with the production area
and to provide a clean and quiet circumstances, convenient to daily life, and with a
beautiful appearance of the power plant.
When the plant front area is separately arranged, the land use area shall be strictly
controlled, based on the planned capacity of the power plant, and according to the
requirements of the prevailing relevant state and profession standards.
5.2.2 The arrangement of the plant area buildings, besides implementing the
requirements of the prevailing relevant state fire prevention standards, specifications
as well as the relevant environmental protection principle requirements, shall also
comply with the following requirements:
1. The main power building shall be arranged at suitable location of the plant
area. When once-through circulating water system is adopted, it shall be near
the water source. The main power buildings and the chimney shall be placed at
the location where the soil quality is even and the subsoil load bearing
capacity is relatively high. Whenever conditions allowed, the permanent end
of the main power buildings and the plant front area shall face the direction of
the city.
When direct air-cooled condensing generating units are selected, the orientation of
the main power buildings shall consider the influence of the summer
prevailing wind direction to the heat dispersion of the air-cooled condenser.
2. The indoor and outdoor layout of the switchgears shall consider the
convenience of the incoming and outgoing transmission lines, avoiding
cross-over lines to the best possible.
3. The cooling tower layout shall be considered according to the topographical,
the geological, the neighboring facilities layout conditions and the normal year
wind direction. In the initial stage of the project, the cooling tower shall not be
arranged at the extension end of the main power building.
4. The coal storage yard shall be arranged at the upwind of the yearly minimum
frequency wind direction of the main buildings in the plant area.
5. Hydrogen generating station, oil supply and unloading oil pump room and the
ignition oil tanks shall be separated from the other auxiliary production
buildings, and arranged independently, or formed as an independent region.
6. The discharge water outlet of the qualified treated waste water and sewage
shall be located far away from the domestic water intake, and at its
downstream. However, if the outlet undetected, it shall not be connected to the
main trunk sewage pipelines for discharge.
7. The plant area of the power plant shall have two exits/ entrances. Their
locations shall be convenient for connections internally and externally, and
shall separate the communication stream of people and goods. In the
construction period, the construction special purpose exit and entrance shall be
provided. The main exit/ entrance of the plant area shall be located at the
permanent end of the plant area.
5.2.3 The minimum spacing of different buildings and structures of the power
plant shall execute the stipulations in Table 5.2.3.
The following regulations shall be observed in carrying out the provisions set out in
Table 5.2.3:
Table 5.2.3 The Minimum Spacing (m) of Various Buildings and

Structures of the Power Plant
Serial Name of Building Type C, D, E Outdoor Natural Mechanical Open-air Coal
No Building Switchgear Draft Draft Unloading
Fireproof Cooling Cooling Facility, or
Class Tower Tower Coal Storage
Class Class yard
1,2 3
1 Type C, D, E Class 10 12 10
Building Fireproof 1,2 20 35 15
2 Class Class 12 14 12
3
3 Outdoor Switchgear 10 12 __
4 Main Transformer <10 12 15
5 or Outdoor >1050 15 20 __
6 Auxiliary >50 20 25
Transformer Oil 40 60 50
Quantity (t/unit)
7 Natural Draft Cooling Tower 20 40 0.5D1) 4050 2530
8 Mechanical Draft Cooling 35 60 4050 2) 4050
Tower
9 Open Air Coal Unloading 15 50 2530 4050 __
Facility, or Coal Storage Yard
10 Hydrogen Generating Station 12 14 25 20 25 When
11 Hydrogen Storage Tank 12 15 25 Storing
12 Ignition Oil Tank 20 25 Lignite,
13 Open Air Oil Storage Tank 12 15 25 25
14 Administration Class 10 12 10 30 35 15
and Living Welfare 1,2 25
15 Building Class 3 12 14 12
16 Fence 5 5 __ 10 15 5
Continued.
Hydrogen Hydrogen Ignition Open Administration/ Center line of Road Road inside Fences
generating storage oil tank air oil living welfare railways outside the plant
Serial
station tank storage buildings the (Roadside)

tank Class Class Outside Inside plant Main Seco-
1, 2 3 plant plant (Road- ndary
side)
1 12 12 20 12 10 12 With exit 56 No exit, 1.5; with exit, 5
2 14 15 25 15 12 14 No exit 35 no lead way, 3; with
lead way, 79
3 25 25 25 10 12 __ __ 1.5 __
4 40 30 15 20 __ __ __ __
5 20 25 __ __ __ __
6 25 30 __ __ __ __
7 20 30 25 15 25 10 10
8 25 35 35 20 35 15 15
9 15 __ __ 10 5 1.5 5
When storing lignite, 25 __ __
10 12 12 25 15 25 30 20 15 10 5 5
11 12 3) 25 25 20 15 10 5 5
12 25 4) __ 25 32 30 20 15 10 5 5
13 15 25 __ 5) 15 20
14 25 25 15 6 7 with exit 56, with exit 3, 5
15 32 20 7 8 no exit 35 no exit 1.5
16 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 1.0 __
Note: The index in this table is mandatory.

1) D indicates the base diameter of the counter-flow natural draft cooling tower
at 0 m elevation, taking the diameter of the neighbouring larger tower.
2) The spacing between the mechanical draft cooling towers:
When the prevailing wind direction is parallel to the longitudinal side of the
tower group, use 0.5 to 1.0 times the tower length according to the staggering
condition of the tower group;
When the prevailing wind direction is perpendicular to the longitudinal side of
the tower group, and the two rows are arranged in a straight line, the net
spacing of the tower top end shall not be less than 9 m;
3) Indicates the diameter of the neighbouring larger hydrogen storage tank;
4) To be implemented according to the Code for Fire Prevention Design of
Buildings in force;
5) For one group of open-air oil storage tanks area having total oil storage
capacity not more than 1,000 m3, and the oil storage tanks are arranged in
group of two rows, the spacing between tanks shall not be less than 1.5 m.
1. The minimum spacing shall be calculated according to the nearest distance

between the external wall of 2 neighboring buildings. If the external wall has
projections with inflammable structures, the calculated spacing shall start from the
protection of external wall.
2. For two neighboring buildings, when the higher wall of one building is fireproof,
the minimum spacing is not limited; but for the type A buildings, the minimum
spacing shall not be less than 4 m.
3. The minimum spacing between high-storeyed buildings (with height over 24
meters, plant building and store house with 2 storeys or more) or between the
high-storeyed building and other buildings shall add 3 m to the value in this table.
4. For the two buildings of type C,D,E, when the two neighboring external walls are
all built with the non-flammable material, and have no exposed inflammable
building brims, while the surface area of the door or window openness of each
wall is less that 5 percent of the wall surface area, and the door and window
openness are not opposite to each other, the fireproof spacing may decrease 25%.
5. The fireproof spacing between type A, B buildings and civil buildings shall not be
less than 25 m, while the minimum spacing from the important public buildings
shall not be less than 50 m.
6. The fireproof spacing between type A plant buildings and between type A plant
buildings and other plant buildings shall add 2 meters to the value in the table. For
the type E buildings, in-between fireproof spacing may decrease 2 meters from the
value in this table.
7. For two Class 1, 2 fireproof plant buildings, when the neighbor lower building
external wall is the fireproof wall and the fireproof limit of the lower plant
building roof is not less than 1h, then the fireproof spacing may suitably be
decreased. But for type A, B plant buildings, the spacing shall not be less than 6m,
and for type C, D, E plant building, not less than 4m.
8. For the 2 fireproof Class 1, 2 plant buildings, when the window and door openings
of the neighboring higher building side external wall are equipped with the ruling
curtains and water screens, the fireproof spacing may be suitably decreased; but
for type A, B plant buildings, the spacing shall not be less than 6 m, and for type C,
D, E plant buildings, not less than 4m.
9. For the several plant buildings with fireproof not lower than Class 2 (except those
otherwise specified in this specification), when their fine risk characteristics
belong to type C building, with the total occupied ground area not exceeding
8,000 square meters (single storey) or 4,000 square meters (multi-storey), or type
D, E building not exceeding 10,000 square meters (single, multi-storey), they may
be arranged in groups, and the spacing between the buildings in the group, when
the height is not exceeding 7 m, it shall not be less than 4 m, and when the height
exceeds 7 m, it shall not to be less than 6 m.
10. For the outdoor oil-immersed transformers, the minimum clearance shall not be
less than 10 m; when the clearance between the external wall of building to the
two sides of the transformer outer shell is 3 m each, and fireproof door and
non-inflammable fixed window are built on the wall of building below the level
3m above the top of the transformer, then the spacing of the transformer outer
shell to the wall of building shall be 5 to 10 m; when the aforesaid wall has no
windows or no ventilation opening, the spacing to the transformer outer shell shall
be within 5 m.
11. The minimum spacing from the outdoor switchgears shall be calculated from the
structural frame; and spacing between the outdoor oil-immersed transformers shall
be determined according to the process requirements.
12. For the in-between spacing of the natural draft cooling towers and mechanical
draft cooling towers, the large value shall be adopted for cooling surface larger
than 3,000 square meters, and the small value for cooling surface equal to or less
than 3,000 square meters. When air-cooled condensing generating units are
selected, the spacing in-between air-cooled towers or from the air cooled tower to
the other cooling tower shall be 0.5 D or 40 50 m: for generating unit capacity
equal to or less than 125MW, use the small value, and for generating unit capacity
equal to or larger than 200MW, use the large value.
13. The spacing between the cooling towers and the main power building shall not be
less than 50 m.
14. The fireproof spacing from the ignition oil tanks and the unloading oil pump to the
railway loading and unloading equipment shall not be less than 10m and 12m
respectively.
15. The spacing from the in-plant railway to the oil-unloading equipment shall not be
less than 20m for Class A, B liquid, and not less than 10m for Class C liquid.
16. The spacing from the oil-unloading pump room to the pick pipe shall not be less
than 8m.
17. For the spacing from the open-air coal unloading devices or coal storage yard to
the cooling towers, use the large value when the cooling towers are located at the
leeward side of the dust sources under yearly prevailing wind direction; and use
the small value when the towers are located at the windward side.
18. The net spacing from the pipelines supporting column or single column to the
roadside shall not be less than 1m.
19. The spacing from the plant-in roadside to the center line of the plant-in railway
lines shall not be less than 3.75m.
5.2.4 The design of the special service railway lines of the power plant shall
comply with the requirements of the GBJ12 "Code for Design of Standard Gauge
Railway for Industrial Enterprises" in force.
This supplementary railway lines connected to the plant special service railway inside
the power plant shall be planned at one time according to the planned capacity of the
power plant, and constructed in stages. The supplementary railway lines shall be
determined according to coal consumption at plant planned capacity, mode of coal
unloading, oil consumption for boiler ignition and combustion support at low load,
demand of construction, etc..
5.2.5 For the power plant depending mainly on water transportation, its wharf
location, scale of Construction and plant layout shall be comprehensively arranged
according to the planned capacity of the power plant, the site, the natural conditions of
the navigation course and the local handling facilities.
The wharf design shall conform to the relative regulations of the "Technical
Specification for Harbor Engineering" in force.
The wharf shall be located at the section where the water depth is suitable, the
navigation course is stable, the muddy sand movement is relatively weak, the water
flow is even and smooth, the effect of wave and flowing speed is relatively small, the
geological condition of the land section is relatively good, and shall be matched with
the topographical elevation of the site land area.
In front of the wharf, there shall be a relatively broad water area. A suitable distance
shall be kept apart between the wharf and intake and outlet of circulating water.
5.2.6 The road design inside the power plant shall comply with the requirements of
the GBJ22 "Specification for Road Design of Factories and Mines" in force.
5.2.7 In-between the different buildings inside the power plant, roads for vehicles,
firefighting cars and pedestrians shall be built according to the demand of the
production, the likelihood and the firefighting.
The ring road or firefighting card passage shall be built surrounding the main power
building, the switchgears, the coal storage yard, and the oil tank area. Roads shall be
built between the boiler back and the precipitators for generating units of capacity
300MW and above.
5.2.8 The width of the vehicle passage of the trunk road at the main entrance of the
plant area shall be the same as the connected plant entrance road, or 7 m shall be
selected; the secondary trunk road (ring road) width surrounding the main power
building shall be 7 m, and in the case of difficult circumstances, it shall also be 6 m;
the width of secondary road shall be 4 m, and in the case of difficult circumstances, it
shall also be 3.5 m. The width of the pedestrian road leading to the entrance or exit of
buildings shall comply with door width.
For the large power plant depending on the water transportation and built with the
heavy cargo wharf, the width of the road from the bridge approach of the heavy cargo
wharf to the ring road surrounding the main power building shall be 6 - 7 m.
5.2.9 The main road inside the power plant shall use cement, concrete or asphalt
pavement.
5.2.10 The layout of the plant area fence shall be uniform and in good looking to the
best possible under the prerequisite of economization of land use.
5.2.11 The outdoor switchgears and the oil tank area etc. shall be built with the grill
enclosures. The oil tank area shall also be built with the fireproof dike or fireproof
wall. The hydrogen generating station shall have enclosure wall built with
non-inflammable materials with height not less than 2 m.
5.2.12 The vertical arrangement of the power plant area shall be comprehensively
considered according to the production requirement, the engineering geology, the
hydrometeorologcial conditions, the elevation of the site, etc, at the same time shall
1. For the plant area without large dike and dike enclosure, the design elevation
of the ground outside the main power building shall be 0.5 m higher than the
high water level of 1% frequency.
2. The determination of the elevation of all the buildings, structures, railway and
roads shall all satisfy the convenience of the production usage. The elevation
and layout of foundations of the surface and underground structures, pipelines,
pipeline support, piping trenches, tunnels and underground rooms shall be
arranged comprehensively to attain reasonable crossover, convenience in
maintenance and future extension, and unblocked drainage.
3. The volume of earth and stone works in present project phase and future
extension shall all be kept to a minimum, the expenses for foundation
treatment and leveling of site area shall be kept at least, the balance of the
filling and excavation of earth and stone shall be attained approximately.
When the balance is not attained, the location to acquire the soil or to dispose
of the soil shall be ascertained.
4. The minimum slope and the inclination of slope of the plant area siting shall in
principle be able to drain all the surface water quickly, and shall match with
the installations of rainwater drainage openings, drainage inspection wells for
the buildings, the roads and the site area. These installations shall be
determined according to the local rainfall quantity and soil conditions of the
site.
5. The vertical arrangement of the power plant on the hillside slope shall, under
the prerequisite of satisfying the process requirements, reasonably utilize the
topographic conditions so as to save the earthwork and stonework and to
ensure the stability of the slope.
5.2.13 When the elevation difference of the plant area natural topography is larger
than 3%, stepped layout shall be adopted. The division of steps shall consider the
requirements of production, convenience of communication and transportation, and
reasonable layout of underground facilities. At the interface of two steps, measures to
stabilize the site slope shall be fully considered according to geological conditions.
5.2.14 The design of the plant site area drainage system shall be comprehensively
considered according to the factors of topography, engineering geology, underground
water, etc; at the same time shall comply with the following requirements:
1. The site drainage system design shall be totally considered according to the
planned capacity of the power plant, and shall assure the drainage unblocked
in each phase of the project. The plant site area drainage shall, according
to a practical conditions, be connected either to the main trunk pipeline
inspection well of the city model roadway sewage system through rainwater
drainage openings, or to the highway-model roadway rainwater drainage
system through open ditches. Whenever conditions allowed, gravity
drainage shall be adopted. For the power plant with stepped layout, every
step shall have its drainage measures. For the power plant in mountainous
region or in the hilly area, facilities to prevent torrent rushing into the plant
area shall be provided at the plant area boundary.
2. When the outdoor ditches are higher than the designed ground elevation,
overflow preventive measures shall be taken or drainage facilities shall be
built at both sides of the ditches.
3. Drainage facilities shall be built surrounding the coal storage yard, and
precipitating pond and muddy coal clearing measures shall be provided.
5.2.15 The ground floor elevation of the production buildings shall be 150 to 300
mm higher than the designed outdoor ground elevation, and the inference of the
building settlement shall be considered according to geological conditions.
5.2.16 The main pipelines and pipe channels in plant area shall be unitedly planned,
and centrally arranged based on plant planned capacity, providing sufficient reserves
pipeline corridors.
The pipelines and pipe channels shall be arranged along the roadway. Underground
pipelines and pipe channels shall generally be arranged outside vehicle passage way
of the road.
5.2.17 The layout of the underground the pipelines and overhead pipelines shall also
1. The process flow reasonable, and the construction and maintenance
convenient;
2. In case of piping faults, no secondary disaster shall occur, especially the
infiltration of polluted water into the domestic water piping and the
infiltration of harmful and inflammable gases into other tunnels and
underground rooms shall be prevented;
3. Mechanical damage and corrosion shall be avoided;
4. Liquid freezing inside the pipelines shall be avoided;
5. Infiltration of surface water, underground water and water from other pipe
ducts into the cable ducts and tunnels shall be prevented; at the same time,
any flow back of all sorts of water into the cable ducts and cable tunnels
shall be avoided;
6. Fireproof isolating wall shall be built in the cable duct or cable tunnel at the
entrance to the buildings or at a suitable distance and section from the
buildings; fireproof door shall be built in the fireproof wall of the cable
tunnel.
5.2.18 The horizontal distance from the pipe channels and the underground pipeline
to the buildings, the railway, the road and the other pipelines as well as the vertical
distance of pipelines cross-overs shall be comprehensively determined according to
factors, including: embedded depth of the underground pipelines and pipe channels,
foundation structures of buildings, construction and maintenance, etc.
In the cross-over layout of the high voltage overhead power transmission lines
crossing over the road, railway or other pipelines, necessary safety net spacing shall
be retained according to regulations.
For overhead pipelines crossing over the road, net overhead spacing of 4.5 to 5.0 m
shall be maintained; when large equipment transportation is required to pass or large
hoisting facilities have to pass through the road during maintenance period, net
spacing shall be determined according to requirements. In crossing over the railway,
the ordinary pipelines shall maintain a net spacing of 5.5 m above the rail top surface;
when inflammable or burnable liquid or gas pipelines are crossing over, net clearance
spacing shall maintain 6.0 m; when electric locomotive is used in traction, net spacing
shall maintain 6.55 m.
5.2.19 The pipeline layout mode shall be considered according to the following
principles:
1. For pipelines having the possibility to centralize the overhead layout,
combined pipe supporting frame shall be adopted; in regions where
underground water level is relatively high and erosive soil or shallow rocks
unsuitable for underground ditch construction, comprehensive underground
pipe corridor shall be adopted.
2. Production, domestic, firefighting water supply pipeline, and rainwater and
sewage water drainage pipeline shall be laid underground.
3. Hydrogen pipeline, coal gas pipeline, compressed air pipeline, oxygen
pipeline, ignition oil pipeline, and heating pipeline shall all be laid overhead.
4. The acid and alkali liquid pipelines shall be laid in ditches, and may also be
laid overhead. Ash handling pipelines, whenever conditions allowed, shall
be laid on low supporting frame or on pipe sleeper. Pipelines having the
possibility of spreading disaster during pipeline failures shall not be laid in
the same ditch.
5. The various mode of cable layout in the plant area such as direct embedment,
underground ditches, cable conduits, tunnels or overhead layout, etc, shall be
adopted according to actual conditions. But the electrical cables shall not be
laid in the same ditch with other pipelines.
5.3 Off-site Facilities Planning

5.3.1 The power plant off-site facilities, located outside the plant area, include those
for communication and transportation, water supply and water drainage, ash and slag
handling and treatment, electric power transmission lines and heat supply pipelines,
living or residential area, construction area, etc, shall be totally considered and
comprehensively planned according to the power plant planned capacity and the
natural conditions of the plant site, after the determination of plant site and the
ascertaining of different main systems inside the power plant.
5.3.2 The off-site communication and transportation planning of the power plant
shall be in accordance with the following requirements:
1. The special service railway lines shall be connected to the State and local
railway or to the special service railway line of other industrial enterprises,
and the regional development planning shall be coordinated. The special
service railway line shall not be connected to the regional railway line, and
shall avoid the intersection with the regular railway line of the junction
station, and shall not increase too much rebuilt expenses of the junction
station.
For the large power plant, the possibility and rationality of the junction of
power plant special service railway line to the junction railway station shall
be studied and proved practicable in the site selection stage.
The fuel and goods traffic train of the power plant shall be preferentially
adopted with the goods unloading mode sending heavy and taking light.
And the power plant shall not be equipped with the plant front junction
station.
In the severely cold regions, if the coal passes through the national trunk
railway and the coal conveyor requires being defrozen, the plant front
junction station shall be set up for junction.
2. For the power plant mainly using water transportation, when the wharf is
arranged outside the plant area, or when the wharf operated with other
enterprises, coordination shall be carried out with the planning organization
and the relevant enterprises to assure the possibility of the wharf
construction, and to determine the construction expenses and mode of
operation after completion of construction, at the same time, the necessary
arrangement documents shall be acquired so as to assure a good and smooth
communication and transportation passage-way between the wharf and the
power plant area.
3. In the neighborhood of the power plant, when the local coal is available for
main source of supply, combined the transportation of highway and railway
or long belt conveyor mode may be considered by optimization of different
programs.
4. The main entrance road to power plant shall be connected to the highway
leading to the city or town, and the connection shall be short, speedy, and
convenient to traffic, and shall also avoid crossing the railway line. For the
horizontal crossing of power plant entrance road with the railway line,
guarded crossing and other safety facilities shall be provided.
Road shall be built to connect the plant area to the off-site water supply and
water discharge structures, water source area, wharf, ash storage yard,
residential area, etc, and existing road shall be utilized or special road shall
be built.
The width of the main entrance road shall be 7 m, and cement, concrete or
asphalt pavement shall be adopted; the width of the other off-site special
service road shall be 4.0 m, and in the case of difficult conditions, it shall
also be 3.5m; the width of the road connecting the residential area shall be 7
m, and in the case of difficult conditions, it shall also be 3.5 m. The road
connecting the residential area shall also adopt cement, concrete or asphalt
pavement. The standard for special purpose ash handling road and coal
conveying road to power plant shall be reasonably determined according the
factors, such as the transportation capacity and unloading conditions etc.,
and cement, concrete or asphalt pavement shall be adopted.
5.3.3 The planning of the power plant off-site water supply and water drainage
facilities shall be reasonably arranged after the alternatives study according to the
planned capacity water resources, water resources, topographic conditions,
environment protection regulations and relationship between present stage of
construction and future extension; at same time shall comply with the following
requirements:
1. When once through circulation water system is adopted, proper layout of

the water intake and water discharge structures as well as the riparian (or
central) water pump house shall be carried out, and the route of the
circulating water pipeline (or channels) shall be properly selected.
2. For the circulating water system and the domestic water supply system, the
location of the off-site water source wells(or the catchment pond) , and
water pump house, the make-up water pipelines shall be properly selected.
3. The necessary communication, transportation, living and sanitary facilities
shall be considered for the water pump house located far away from the
plant area.
4. The recovery of water energy and repeated use of water shall be
considered.
5.3.4 Combining with the engineering specific conditions, the flood (waterlogging)
prevention and drainage planning of the power plant shall be properly carried out, and
shall fully utilize the existing flood (waterlogging) prevention and drainage facilities.
Whenever it shall have to be rebuilt, the flood (waterlogging) prevention dike and
flood (waterlogging) drainage ditch or water-blocking enclosure wall can be selected
according to the local conditions.
5.3.5 The off-site external ash and slag handling facilities shall comply with the
following requirements:
1. The ash storage yard shall be near to the power plant, and the neighboring
valley, depression, sea beach, beach land, and subsided area can be used to
build ash storage yard, multistep transportation shall be avoided.
2. The building of ash storage yard shall select the region where dam
construction work is small, and topography is favorable to arrange the
flood control and flood drainage structures; neighboring the dam site,
sufficient dam construction materials shall be available, possible
conditions to divide the construction into stages by using the ash and slag
shall be considered.
3. When valley is used as ash storage yard, any harm of ash water from the
ash storage yard to the likelihood of the neighboring village inhabitants
shall be avoided; influence of the flood discharge structures to the
downstream inhabitants shall be considered; its design shall be determined
after a comprehensive study in combination with the locally planned flood
control capability. When the ash storage yard is located at the river bank,
influence of the constructed ash dam to the river course shall be considered,
and agreement from the relevant organization shall be acquired.
4. The ash pipelines shall be laid along the roadside and river network edges,
and land section with small elevation difference, less climbing, less
crossing and less turning shall be selected; at the same type, prevention of
any influence to the agricultural cultivation shall be noted.
5. When ash and slag are transported by railway, truck or boat, the traffic
capability of railway, highway, and river course together with the possible
pollution to the environment shall be fully studied, and corresponding
measures shall be taken.
6. Necessary communication, transportation, the living and sanitary facilities
shall be considered for the ash and slag pump house and booster pump
house located far away from the plant area.
5.3.6 The outgoing transmission lines corridor of the power plant shall be totally
planned for power plant planned capacity according to the power system planning,
transmission lines outgoing direction, voltage level the number of circuits, avoiding
cross-over to the best effort. The outgoing transmission lines corridor shall be planned
extending to the outskirts of the city or town or the planned industrial districts. For
the important facilities inside the district, influenced by the high electric voltage,
documents of approval or of confirmation from the relevant organizations along the
route of transmission lines shall be acquired.
The 220KV and above high voltage outdoor switchgears may be arranged outside the
plant area if conditions are limited or when the layout is advantages to the power
system.
5.3.7 The off-site heating pipelines shall be rationally planned, and its coordination
with the general arrangement of the power plant shall be noted.
The off-site overhead heating network pipelines shall adopt the layout of common
frame for multi-pipelines.
5.3.8 The residential area of the power plant shall be planned according to the
principle of favorable to production and convenient to likelihood of the staff.
For the power plant neighboring city or industrial and mining district, the residential
area shall be arranged in combination with the inhabitant area planning of the urban or
industrial and mining district. Whenever conditions allowed, the power plant shall
have priority to consider purchasing the commercial housing, and the residential area
of power plant shall not be set up. For the power plant located far away from the
urban or industrial and mining district habitant area, when independent residential
area has to be established, the residential area shall not be too far from the power
plant, a suitable isolating zone shall be preserved between the plant area and the
residential area.
The residential area shall be planned at one time according to the number of the
residing person when the power plant reaches its planned capacity, and following the
regulations of the relevant state and profession standards in force, and shall be
constructed in stages.
5.3.9 The construction area of the power plant shall be comprehensively planned
according to the planned capacity, and shall comply with the following requirements:
1. The layout shall be compact and reasonable, with economization of use of
land.
2. The construction temporary buildings, materials and equipment storage yard,
construction work in site and construction water supply and power supply
mainline route shall be properly arranged according to the requirements of the
construction process flow.
3. The construction site drainage and the construction passageway shall be built
in combination with the permanent facilities.
4. The construction site leveling shall minimize the earthwork and stonework by
utilizing the site topography, and large area damage of the construction area
surface earth layer shall be avoided, and soil erosion shall be prevented.
5. The layout of the construction site and passage-way shall minimize the
interference to the production, especially when part of the generating unit is
already in commission. The layout shall be favorable to the production, and
also convenient to the construction.
6. The layout of the construction temporary architecture shall not affect the
extension of the power plant.
6. Arrangement of Main Power Building

6.1.1 The main power building arrangement of power plants shall be adapted to the
requirements of electric power production technological process, as well as to attain
the followings: rational equipment arrangement and space utilization; piping and
wiring connections short and neatly laid; facilities within the building arranged
properly and compactly to ease operation and maintenance.
6.1.2 Main power building arrangement shall meet the following requirements
of the related standards in force: to attain a safety operation of the power plant; to
create a good working circumstance for overhaul, maintenance and civilized
production; to provide a thorough passages for tour inspection; to have the equipment
arranged conforming to related regulations currently in force for firefighting,
anti-explosion, moisture-proof, dust-proof, anti-corrosion, anti-freezing, etc. Inside
the building, air quality, ventilation, natural and artificial lighting, noise level, etc,
shall conform to the regulations of related standards in force.
6.1.3 The color of the main power building and the color of equipment, panels,
pipings, platforms and stairs, etc, inside the building shall be harmonized and
coordinated. The form and sizing of platforms, steps and hand railings shall be unified
for the whole plant or for different sections of the plant.
6.1.4 Under the prerequisite of satisfying technological process requirements and

the facilitating maintenance, number of sizes of main power building column spacing
shall be reduced. For reinforced concrete structure main power building, column
spacing, building span and height between floors shall consider the requirements of
modular system.
6.1.5 Main power building arrangement shall consider the requirements for
extension based on overall planning.
6.1.6 Main power building arrangement shall take notice of the plant site
topography, the equipment characteristics, the construction conditions, etc, for
reasonable arrangement.
When there are several units to be successively constructed, the main power building
shall have conditions for parallel and successive construction.
6.2 Types of Arrangement

6.2.1 Main power building may be arranged in the sequence of boiler house, coal
bunker bay, deaerator bay (or combined coal bunker and deaerator bay) and turbine
house, and its main size shall not exceed the reference and design dimension for
similar units main power building. According to specific conditions of the project,
other types of arrangement may also be employed, when technically and economically
reasonable.
The comparable building ratio of the main power building shall not exceed the
reference and design data for similar units main power buildings.
6.2.2 When the same column spacing is used for both the turbine house (or deaerator
bay) and the boiler house (or coal bunker bay), the detached layout (i.e. single row of
columns) shall not be adopted between the two of them. When technically and
economically reasonable, detached layout (i.e. double row of columns) may be
adopted in case of different column spacing between the turbine house (or deaerator
bay) and the boiler house (or coal bunker bay).
Partition wall shall be provided between the turbine house (or deaerator bay) and
boiler house (or coal bunker bay).
6.2.3 Heating network heater station may be arranged in the main power building.
When large capacity horizontal hitters for heating network are selected for the heater
station, the hitters station may be outdoor arranged in non-severely cold regions.
6.3 Boiler House Arrangement

6.3.1In non-severely cold regions, the boiler may be outdoor or semi-outdoor
arranged.
For severely cold or strongly sandy wind regions, when tower type boiler is employed,
each boiler may be tightly enclosed with outer wall boards. When other type besides
tower type boiler is employed, the boiler may employ tightly enclosed arrangement or
indoor arrangement. The arrangement shall be decided according to the characteristics
of the equipment and the specific conditions of the project.
When climatic conditions are suitable, for well sealed boilers, the boiler top
compartment and rain shield may not be necessary.
6.3.2 When the boiler is the outdoor or semi-outdoor arranged, the boiler
manufacturer shall be requested to supply boiler suitable for outdoor or semi-outdoor
arrangement, i.e. the boiler proper and its auxiliary systems, as well as piping and
ducting, shall have rainproof, anti-freezing, anti-corrosion protections, and measures
to reduce heat losses.
6.3.3 Large capacity outdoor or semi-outdoor arranged boilers shall employ island
type arrangement, i.e. boiler operation floor without large platform. If coal feeders are
arranged around the furnace, coal feeder floor may have large platform. If the bottom
part of the boiler proper or the auxiliary equipment arranged on the bottom floor is not
suitable for outdoor arrangement, or if there are other requirements, the portion below
operation floor may employ enclosed type.
If outdoor or semi-outdoor boiler needs to arrange boiler front operation zone, low
enclosing type may be employed.
The space at the boiler front shall be reasonably compacted, under the conditions that
the equipment arrangement, installation, operation and maintenance requirements are
satisfied. When conditions allowed, the arrangement mode incorporating with the
boiler front column and coal bunker bay column may be adopted.
6.3.4 Outdoor arrangement principles for boiler major auxiliary equipment are as
following:
Ash removal equipment shall employ outdoor arrangement. If there is a possibility of
freezing during operation, anti-freezing measures shall be taken.
For non-severely cold regions, the induced draft fans of the boiler shall be arranged
outside. When the boiler is the outdoor arranged in island type, the forced draft fans
and the primary fans also shall be outdoor arranged. For outdoor arranged auxiliary
machinery, totally enclosed type electric motor shall be employed.
6.4 Coal Bunker Bay Arrangement

6.4.1The elevation of coal feeder floor of the coal bunker bay is determined by the
spacing required by coal pulverizers, pulverized coal piping, and the spacing required
for their maintenance and hoisting equipment. For convenience of operation and
maintenance, the elevation of this floor shall be the same as the boiler operation floor.
6.4.2 The elevation of coal bunker floor of the coal bunker bay shall be determined
according to the design requirements of raw coal bunker and pulverized coal bunker.
On both sides of the belt conveyor, there shall be necessary operation passages. At the
coal bunker floor, locations and necessary ventilation and dust removal installations
shall be considered. At the head end of belt conveyor, maintenance and hoisting
devices shall be provided.
6.4.3 The coal storage capacity of raw coal bunker and pulverized coal bunker is
determined according to the followings:
For direct firing pulverizing coal system, besides the raw coal bunker for stand-by
coal pulverizer, the total effective coal storage capacity of all other raw coal bunkers,
shall satisfy 8 h and above of coal consumption at boiler maximum continuous
evaporation rating.
For bin storage type pulverizing coal system, the effective pulverized coal storage
capacity of pulverized coal bunkers shall satisfy 2 h and above of pulverized coal
consumption at boiler maximum continuous evaporation rating. The total effective
coal storage capacity of raw coal bunkers and pulverized coal bunkers shall satisfy 8 h
and above of coal consumption at boiler maximum continuous evaporation rating.
To realize the two-shift system operation of coal conveying system, the effective
pulverized coal storage capacity of raw coal bunkers in the direct firing pulverizing
coal system or total effective coal storage capacity of raw coal bunkers and pulverized
coal bunkers in bin storage type pulverizing coal system shall satisfy 10 h and above
of pulverized coal consumption at boiler maximum continuous evaporation rating
when technically and economically reasonable.
6.4.4 The design of raw coal bunker shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Raw coal bunker of large capacity boiler shall employ steel structure
cylindrical silo type, and the inner wall shall be smooth and wearable. The
geometry structure of the raw coal bunker shall be made for smooth flow
of coal; stainless steel plates, inner lined stainless steel plates or other
smooth and wearable materials may be used at the outlet section where
blockage easily occurs. The external wall of the bunker may be provided
with vibration devices or other devices in prevention of blockage.
2. In the severely cold regions, steel structure raw coal bunkers, as well as
reinforced concrete raw coal bunkers which are near to building outer wall
or exposed to outside, anti-freezing insulation installations shall be
installed on its bunker walls.
3. Raw coal bunkers shall be installed with the coal level measure devices.
Large capacity boiler steel structure raw coal bunkers may install coal
flow measuring devices.
6.4.5 The design of pulverized coal bunker shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. The pulverized coal bunker shall be enclosed tightly, with plane, smooth,
wearable and non dust accumulated inner surface. The geometry
structure of the pulverized coal bunker shall be made for smooth and
automatic flow.
2. Pulverized coal in bunker shall be prevented from being heated or wetted,
and thermal insulation measures shall be taken for external wall of metal
bunkers. In severely cold regions, for pulverized coal bunker near
building external wall or exposed to outside, anti-freezing and thermal
insulation measures shall be taken.
3. Pulverize the coal bunker shall be equipped with devices for measuring
pulverized coal level and temperature, as well as facilities for fire
extinguishing, and pulverized coal discharge. For other coal species
besides anthracite coal, the pulverized coal bunker must be employed
with the explosion-proof facilities.
6.5 Deaerator Bay

6.5.1 The installed elevation of deaerator feed water storage tank shall guarantee
that the feed water pump or feed water booster pump intake water shall not be
vaporized, when the steam turbine is under instantaneous load rejection conditions.
The deaerator and feed water storage tank may be arranged in the deaerator bay or in
the combined deaerator and coal bunker bay. Based on the actual arrangement
condition of the main power building, and after study and comparison of various
schemes, the deaerator and feed water storage tank may also be arrangement at other
reasonable location. When weather and arrangement conditions permit, deaerator and
feed water storage tank may be arranged outdoor.
When deaerator and feed water storage tank are really necessary to be arranged above
the unit control room, the top roofing slab of the unit control room shall employ cast
in situ reinforced concrete structure, and the deaerator floor shall take reliable water
proof measures.
6.5.2 Horizontal type heater for unit of 300MW and above, the booster pump of
turbine driven feed water pump, the start-up/stand-by motor-driven feed water pump,
etc, may be arranged in deaerator bay, if conditions suitable (including maintenance
measures).
In other cases, if viable, part or all of the plant auxiliary service switchgear may be
arranged within the deaerator bay, and the lighting, dust-proof and ventilation shall be
considered.
6.6 Turbine House Arrangement

6.6.1 For 200MW and above turbine generator unit, longitudinal arrangement in
the same direction shall be adopted. If conditions suitable, transverse arrangement
may be also adopted after economically and technologically reasonable.
For units below 200MW, whether adopting longitudinal arrangement or transverse
arrangement, may be based on project actual conditions, and determined through
studies and comparisons.
For unit adopting direct air-cooled condensing system, longitudinal arrangement in
same direction shall be employed.
6.6.2 The turbine room operation floor of 300MW and above units shall adopt the
large platform type arrangement. Natural ventilation, heat exhaust, moisture removal
and hoisting shall be considered in case of large platform arrangement.
For 200MW units, whether adopting the large platform type arrangement or the island
type arrangement, shall be based on project actual conditions, and determined through
studies and comparisons.
For units of 125MW and below, island type arrangement may be adopted.
6.6.3 For 300MW and above units, when the exhaust steam of the steam turbine
for driving to feed water pump is led to the main condenser, the steam driven feed
water pump may be arranged on the turbine operation floor, and may also be arranged
on the ground floor of turbine house B-row column side, or arranged on the ground
floor of deaerator bay.
When turbine generator unit is island type arranged and when motor-driven feed
water pump is employed, the feed water pump may be arranged on the ground floor of
the turbine house, or on the ground floor of deaerator bay. Where conditions suitable,
feed water pump may also be arranged on semi-high level.
6.6.4 The main oil tank, oil pump, oil cooler, etc, of large capacity steam turbine,
shall be arranged at zero elevation floor on the turbine front end at A-row column side,
as well as far away from high temperature pipings. For 200MW and above units,
composite oil tank and double layer sleeving oil pipe may be employed, as well as to
installed unit package type oil purification device.
For main oil tank and oil system of steam turbine, fire prevention measures shall be
considered. At suitable place outside the main power building, emergency oil tank (pit)
shall be provided, and the elevation and design of oil piping shall satisfy the
requirements for discharging oil fluently in accidents. The capacity of emergency oil
tank (pit) shall not be less than the oil quantity of the oil system for one large unit.
The emergency oil discharge valve shall be arranged at the location which is safe and
easy to reach for operation, and can be reached for two separate walking passages.
6.6.5 When large capacity unit is longitudinally arranged, the circulation water
pump shall not be arranged in the turbine house. Condenser rubber ball cleaning
device shall be installed nearby the condenser.
When mixed type condenser is used for units adopting indirect air-cooled condensing
system, the circulating water pump and the hydraulic turbine generator shall be
installed in or near the turbine house.
6.6.6 Condensate polishing installation may be arranged in the turbine house, and
may also be arranged at other places nearby the main power building.
6.7 Central Control Building and Unit Control Room

6.7.1 For longitudinally arranged large capacity turbine generator units, the central
control building may be used for both units, and arranged between two boilers. If
conditions suitable, the central control building may be extended into the deaerator
and coal bunker bay. After demonstrating for reasonable, central control building may
be jointly used by several units. Unit control room may be arranged in an independent
central control building, and may also be arranged at the operation floor of deaerator
and coal bunker bay or other suitable locations.
6.7.2 The equipment, panels and activity space in the central control building and
unit control room shall be compact, reasonable and convenient for operation and
maintenance. The layout in the unit control room shall be selected based on the actual
engineering situation and features; the total area of the central control building shall
not be extended for equipment and living facilities not related with the control room.
6.7.3 The entrance and exit to unit control room shall not be less than two. The net
height of unit control room shall not be less than 3.2m. Good air conditioning,
lighting, heat insulation, dust proof, fire prevention, flood prevention, anti-vibration
and anti-noise measures shall be taken in the unit control room and electronic
equipment room.
Below the unit control room, there shall be the cable mezzanine. The mezzanine
neighboring the main power building portion shall be sealed off.
Unit control room shall have an integral water-proof roofing.
6.7.4 In the unit control room, electronic equipment room and cable mezzanine, fire
alarm and signal devices shall be installed. Steam, water and oil piping must be
strictly prohibited to pass through the cable mezzanine.
6.8 Maintenance and Repair

6.8.1 At suitable location in the turbine house, maintenance space and place for
storage and repair tools shall be provided.
When the turbine operation floor is of large platform arrangement, every two units
shall be provided with the zero elevation site for installation and maintenance. The
area may be determined by the requirement for lifting large components and for
turning over of the turbine cylinder.
When the turbine operation floor employs island type arrangement for 200MW and
below units, every two to four units shall be provided with the zero elevation site for
maintenance. For unit of 300MW and above, every two units shall be provided with a
zero elevation site for maintenance. The set up of site for installation shall be decided
according to the location of equipment entering the turbine house, and as far as
possible shall be considered in conjunction with the site for maintenance.
6.8.2 The bridge type crane in turbine house shall be selected according to the
1. Two similar lifting capacity bridge type cranes shall be installed for four
and more 125 - 200MW units, or for two and more 300MW and above
units.
2. The lifting capacity of bridge type crane shall be selected according to
the heaviest piece to be lifted during maintenance (not including the
generator stator).
3. The installed elevation of bridge type crane shall be decided according to
the lifting height required by the equipment to be lifted.
6.8.3 Main and auxiliary equipment in the main power building shall have necessary
space for maintenance, and lay down area and transport passages. The longitudinal
passages of the main power building ground floor shall be thorough and directly
possible, with large doors at the tow ends. Besides, for the intermediate site for
maintenance at the zero elevation neighboring A-row column side, large size door
shall also be considered. All large doors shall be connected to plant area roads. When
the main transformer has to be repaired in the turbine house, requirements for
transporting the transformer, and for lifting the transformer shell shall also be
satisfied.
Inside the main power building, transverse passages for operation and maintenance
shall also be provided.
6.8.4. The number of elevators may be decided according to the following

requirements, based on number of boilers, boiler capacity and type of arrangement:
1. For 220t/h boiler, one elevator shall be provided for every four boilers.
2. For 400-410t/h boiler, one elevator shall be provided for every two boilers.
3. For 670t/h boiler, one elevator shall be provided for each boiler, when the
tow boilers are arranged quite distant. One elevator shall be provided for two
boilers, when the boilers of arrangement quite near.
4. For 1000t/h and above boiler, one elevator shall be provided for each boiler.
5. The elevator may be selected for both passenger and goods purposes, with
lifting capacity of 1-2ton, lifting and lowering speed not less than 1m/s. The
elevator shall be able to stop at various major platform levels of the boiler
proper.
6. The elevator may be arranged between the boiler and control room, and near
the boiler front side.
6.8.5 In the main power building, besides the bridge type crane for lifting
equipment, there shall also be arranged necessary lifting devices according to the
following principles:
1. Equipment, pipes and valves with the lifting weight exceeding 1 ton
necessary for repair, shall be provided with lifting devices.
2. Lifting devices with the lifting capacity exceeding 3t and to be
frequently used, shall be motor operated.
3. Lifting devices with the lifting capacity of 10t or more, shall be motor
operated.
4. In the main power building, movable lifting devices may be set up where
fixed maintenance platform and hoisting devices are not suitable.
5. Outdoor arranged equipment may employ movable or fixed lifting
devices according to the surrounding conditions.
6.8.6 In the main power building, necessary openings for lifting and
prospective lifting device shall be provided:
1. In the boiler house, there shall be motor operated lifting devices and
lifting openings for lifting material from zero elevation to the boiler top
platform. Lifting capacity shall be 1-3 t.
2. At the permanent end of the coal bunker bay, there shall be lifting
opening from the ground floor to coal bunker floor, with the lifting
device installed.
6.9 Requirements for Combined Facilities
6.9.1 The main power building of large capacity unit may not arrange (or less
arrange) underground piping and cable trenches. The ground floor drainage water may
employ underground funnels, draining water to sump through drainage water piping
network. Industrial water drainage may employ pressurized piping, overhead arranged
or directly imbedded underground.
The place where trenches are really necessary, cross-over of trenches shall be avoided,
and stagnant water shall be prevented.
The turbine house of large capacity units shall not arrange basement room. When
there are too many equipment at the zero elevation floor of turbine house, and when
underground water level is not high, partial basement room may also be arranged,
after technical and economical comparison, and based on necessity of actual
arrangement. Basement room arrangement shall consider problems of communication,
water drainage, moisture-proof, ventilation, lighting etc.
6.9.2 The cables in the main power building shall be laid on special overhead cable
racks, in cable tunnels or inside cable conduits. Power cables and control cables shall
be separately arranged, and power cables shall be laid in conduits when conditions
allow. When cables are laid on overhead racks and in cable tunnels, measures to
prevent the accumulation of coal dust, and to prevent fire spreading, shall be taken.
Corridor for overhead cable racks shall be considered simultaneously with the
arrangement of main equipment and pipings in the main power building, and shall
keep away from the applications vulnerable to fire hazard. The routes and
arrangement for overhead racks shall enable using least quantity of cables, and shall
be accessible for cable laying and for normal maintenance, as well as shall be neat and
aesthetic.
The cable tunnel must strictly be prohibited from being used as water drainage
passages of other pipes and trenches. When cable tunnels cross over with other pipe
trenches, good water-proof measures shall be taken.
6.9.3 The window area of main power building shall be decided by the architectural
discipline in coordination with other engineering disciplines, and conjunction with the
full considerations of ventilation, lighting, heating, energy conservation, window
cleaning, as well as architectural treatment, etc. Installing large area glass windows
and shall be avoided.
6.9.4 Power plant shall be provided with a general emergency oil storage pit, and its
capacity shall be decided according to the oil quantity of the largest transformer. The
general emergency oil pit shall be equipped with oil and water separation facility.
Outdoor oil filled electrical equipment with the oil content of 600kg and above, shall
have oil storage pit below the equipment. The outside dimension of oil storage pit
shall be larger than outside dimension of the equipment, and the pit shall be filled
with pebbles layer with a thickness of not less than 250 mm. The oil storage pit shall
also be provided with facilities to discharge the oil to the general emergency oil
storage pit.
6.9.5 The inlet and outlet to the main power building, the stairs to various floors and
passages, shall conform to the following requirements:
1. There shall be inlet and outlet at both ends of the turbine house and
the boiler house on the ground floor.
2. The permanent end shall be provided with the stairs to various floors
and to roof of building. When the power plant reaches its planned
capacity, the extension end shall also be provided with the stairs to
reach each of the various floors and roof of the building. Whether or
not required to otherwise set up the dispersing stairs, it shall be
determined according to the State Fire Prevention Specifications.
3. When the longitudinal length of main power building exceeds 100 m,
there shall be provided intermediate inlet and outlet and intermediate
stairs, with interval distance not exceeding 100 m.
4. For air-cooled condensing unit, the turbine house A-row column side
shall have inlet and outlet to outside of turbine house.
5. In the main power building, the main passages shall not be zigzagged,
the width shall not be less than 1.5 m, and shall be arranged near to
stairs and inlet and outlet openings.
6.9.6 For large capacity units employing unit system arrangement, the principal
structure of the main power building shall also be divided into the unit sections. The
expansion joint shall be arranged between two unit sections.
6.9.7 Major valves, baffle plates and their actuating devices shall be able to be
normally operated and convenient for maintenance. When necessary, platform for
operation and maintenance shall be provided.
6.9.8 Boiler water and feed water chemical dosing devices, and steam and water
sampling devices, shall be arranged near to their dosing and sampling point and at a
suitable location in the main power building. The necessary chemical storage depot
for dosing chemicals, may be located on ground floor near to the dosing devices.
7. Coal Handling System

7.1.1 The coal handling system for a newly built power plant shall be designed
according to the planned capacity, kinds of coal, mode of incoming coal transportation,
local meteorological conditions and shall be planned in coordination with the capacity
of the current stage as a whole and shall be constructed in several stages or completed
in one stage.
7.1.2 The coal handling system design of an extension power plant shall fully
utilize the inherent facilities and equipment and in coordination with the inherent
systems.
7.2 Coal Unloading Facilities

7.2.1 When incoming coal is transported by railway, the capacity of the coal
unloading machineries shall be determined according to the capacity of the power
plant and the conditions of incoming train. Under normal condition, the time from the
train entering the plant site and taking its position to the completion of unloading can
be considered as not more than 4h, while in the severely cold regions, the time for
unloading coal can be suitably prolonged.
The number of railway owned wagons entering the plant site for each time shall be
determined according to daily coal consumption:
1 1/3 train for power plant with daily coal consumption below 2,000t
2 1/2 train for power plant with daily coal consumption 2,000 4,000t
3 Whole train for power plant with the daily coal consumption above
4,000t.
When single railway line slot type coal unloading trench is used for unloading coal,
the effective length of the coal trench shall be the length of ten wagons, the maximum
length shall not be longer than 1/2 the length of each incoming train. When double
railway line slot type coal unloading trench is used, the length of each coal trench
shall not be longer than the length of ten wagons, the maximum length shall not be
longer than 1/4 the length of the incoming train.
7.2.2 When power plant is constructed in the coal mine area, belt conveyors or self
unloading type hopper wagon shall be adopted for transportation of coal outside the
power plant.
The length of the coal unloading facility for self unloading type hopper wagon shall
be determined according to the type of coal unloading facility, the mode of unloading,
buffering capacity of the system and the practice of a train dispatching. Short coal
unloading trench may be considered when conditions are suitable and its output
capacity shall match with the unloading capacity. When slot type coal trench
unloading coal in groups, is adopted, the effective length of the coal unloading trench
shall be determined according to Clause 5.2.1. The reserve quantity of hopper wagons
shall be determined according to the actual condition, but not less than 15%.
7.2.3 The coal unloading facility composed of screw type unloading machine and
slot type coal trench may be used in the power plant with the generating capacity not
more than 600MW or coal consumption less than 350 t/h.
7.2.4 When single route belt conveyor is used under the slot type coal trench, one
reserve impeller feeder shall be provided for standby.
7.2.5 When the incoming coal of the power plant is transported by railway and the
coal consumption is 250 t/h and above, or the capacity of the power plant is 400MW
and above, rotary coal dumper may be considered for unloading coal. For power plant
of 600 MW and above or coal consumption 350-800 t/h, two rotary dumpers shall be
provided.
When lump coal, frozen coal are used in the power plant and its coal consumption is
200 t/h and above, rotary dumper can also be considered.
When random wagons are existed in the incoming coal train, which can not be
dumped by rotary dumper, its coal unloading facilities shall be combined with the
empty wagon clean-up, and ground hardened treatment with area of about 50m shall
be carried out at side of empty train line. When the proportion of random wagons is
larger, appropriate coal unloading facilities may be added.
When only one rotary dumper is considered for planned capacity of the power plant,
reserve coal unloading facilities shall be provided.
7.2.6 For large capacity power plant in the severely cold regions where the
incoming coal by railway is deeply frozen and difficult to unload, thawing facility
shall be provided. While during the feasibility study stage, the topic report shall be
discussed in terms of thawing devices.
7.2.7 When coal is transported by water-way, wharf coal unloading machinery

shall be installed. The total rated output of the unloading machinery shall be
determined according to the tonnage of the coal ship and the coal unloading time
agreed by the communication authority but shall not be less than 300 percent of the
total coal consumption of all the boilers at MCR. The installed coal unloading
machinery provided for the whole power plant shall not be less than 2 sets.
Unloading machinery in large wharf shall use bridge type batch traction unloading
machine.
Bunker cleaning machinery shall be provided at the coal wharf for unloading 10,000
ton class or above non-self-unloading ships.
When conditions allowed, continuous unloading machinery or self-unloading ship
process system shall be considered.
7.2.8 When the power plant has a part or total of the incoming coal transported by
highway, the highway transportation receiving station shall be built according to the
quantity of annual incoming coal transported by trucks, and the coal pile unloading
mode shall not be adopted on both dumper type and batch type coal storage yards.
The power plant has a part of the incoming coal transported by highway, the capacity
of railway unloading facilities shall be considered comprehensively and suitably
adjusted in conjunction with the capability of the coal receiving facility for highway
transportation.
1. When the quantity of annual incoming coal transported by highway is
3105 tons and below, the highway transportation receiving station shall
be incorporated and arranged with the coal storage yard, i.e. a certain
region or several regions within the coal storage yard can be used as the
receiving station where the batch type crane, loader and coal transporter
are adopted as facility that cleans up the coal receiving station space.
When coal is mainly transported by auto-trucks, simplified unloading
machinery shall be built in the coal receiving station.
The coal receiving station is adopted with underground coal receiving
wagon to output, and its output system shall be shared by the coal
storage yard.
3105 6105 tons, the receiving station can employ multiple coal
receiving wagon arrangement in series or slot type coal trench
arrangement; when coal is mainly transported by auto-trucks, unloading
machinery shall be built in coal receiving station.
Output system in coal receiving station shall be as much as possible
shared by coal storage yard.
6105 tons and above, coal receiving station shall employ the slot type
coal trench unloading facilities; when coal is mainly transported by
auto-trucks, coal receiving station shall be equipped with truck
unloaders.
7.3 Belt Conveyor System

7.3.1 Double route shall be provided for the belt conveyor entering the boiler
house and the conditions of simultaneous operation both routes shall be considered.
The output of each route of belt conveyor shall not be less than 150% of the total coal
consumption of all the boilers in the power plant at MCR.
7.3.2 The rising inclined angle of the belt type coal conveyor shall be 16 degree,
but shall not be greater than 18 degree.
7.3.3 Enclosed type belt conveyor trestle shall be adopted in the cold, windy and
sandy regions. In the region where climate conditions are appropriate, outdoor type
may also be adopted. Semi-enclosed type or light enclosed type may be adopted in
other regions.
Protective cover for belt conveyor shall be installed where outdoor belt conveyor
trestle is adopted.
The corridor dimensions of the belt conveyor trestle (tunnel) shall be determined
according to the following requirements:
1. The net width of the operation corridor shall not be less than 1 m;
2. The net width of the maintenance corridor shall not be less than 0.7 m;
3. The net height of conveyor trestle for belt width 800mm and below shall
not be less than 2.2m;
4. The net height of conveyor trestle for belt width 1000mm and above
shall not be less than 2.5m.
5. The net height of the underground belt conveyor tunnel shall not be less
than 2.5 m
6. When double drum coal and loader is adopted for the belt conveyor in
the coal bunker floor, the net space of the corridor on both sides of the
coal unloader during traveling shall not be less than 0.8 m, the distance
between the unloader and column side shall not be less than 0.6m; the
net height of the corridor where coal unloader passes shall satisfy the
needs of operation and maintenance of the coal unloader.
7.3.4 In the coal handling system of the power plant burning lignite and high
volatile, easy of spontaneous combustion type of coal, non-inflammable rubber belt
shall be used for the belt conveyor with the spraywater facility provided.
7.3.5 Sealing measures shall be taken for the belt conveyors in the coal bunker bay
to prevent spreading of fly ash during coal unloading.
7.3.6 Water wiper shall be installed on the outdoor belt conveyor when arranged
horizontally.
7.4 Coal Storage Yard and Equipment

7.4.1 The capacity and the coal storage facilities of the coal storage yard shall be
considered according to the mode of transportation and transport distance, the
meteorological conditions, the capacity of the power plant as well as the factors of the
importance of the power plant in the power system as a whole.
The design capacity of the coal storage yard shall be determined according to the
1. When the incoming coal of the power plant is transported through state
trunk railway line, the capacity of the coal storage yard shall be designed
for 15 days coal consumption of the whole power plant. For 300MW and
above generating units or 200MW and above co-generation units, the
capacity of the coal storage yard shall be designed for 20 days coal
consumption of the whole power plant.
Under the condition that no effective measures for prevented
spontaneous combustion are taken, the capacity of lignite coal storage
yard shall not be more than 10 days coal consumption of the whole
power plant and not exceed 15 days coal consumption as a maximum.
2. When the incoming coal of the power plant is transported by highway or
belt conveyor without passing the State trunk railway line, the capacity
of the coal storage yard shall not be less than 5 days coal consumption.
Under the condition that the coal supply can assure a steady and full
generation of the power plant, the coal storage yard may not be
necessary, if technical and economical study proves it.
When the truck transportation is the only way of coal delivery for the
power plant, the storage volume shall exceed the maximum continuous
stopping days of coal consumption in terms of truck transportation.
3. The construction of dry coal storage facilities for the power plant in
rainy region shall be determined by the physical properties of the coal,
the coal pulverizing system, the type of coal yard equipment, etc. When
it is necessary to construct dry coal storage facilities, a capacity of not
less than 3 days coal consumption of the whole power plant shall be
considered. The capacity of the dry coal storage facilities shall be
included in the calculation of the total storage capacity of the coal
storage yard.
7.4.2 When regional coal storage yard pass to be built to increase the coal storage
capacity by in cooperating with the newly built or extension project due to the
necessity in the network, official approval documents of the feasibility study is
required as the design basis.
7.4.3 The output and the quantity of the coal storage yard equipment shall be selected
according to the fallen requirements:
1. The stacking capacity of the coal yard equipment shall satisfy the
requirement of the output capability of the unloading facilities; the coal
reclaiming capability shall be the same as the output of the coal handling
system entering the boiler house, no reserve is required. In the initial
stage, when one stacker/reclaimer is provided as the large size coal yard
equipment, reserve facilities with an output of not less than the total coal
consumption of all the boilers in the power plant at MCR shall be
considered.
In the large capacity power plant where rotary dumper and self
unloading hopper wagons with short trench are installed or the incoming
coal is transported by water way, buffering facilities shall be considered
in the system.
2. When multi-purpose gantry type (loader/ unloader) or bridge type grab
crane is used as unloading, stacking, reclaiming and blending coal
facility, the total rated output shall not be less than 250% of the total coal
consumption of all the boilers in the power plant at MCR. No reserve is
required. But when only one coal grab crane is provided, reserve
reclaiming machinery (such as stacker, etc.) shall be provided. When
gantry type (loader/unloader) or bridge type grab crane is used together
with the crawler grab, the total average output also shall not be less than
250% of the total coal consumption all the boilers in the power plant at
MCR.
7.4.4 The quantity of the coal yard auxiliary equipment (such as bull dozer, etc.)
shall be determined according to the auxiliary stacking and reclaiming activities and
amount of work for leveling and compacting of coal pile, handling of spontaneous
combustion coal, etc.
7.4.5 Coal silo shall be adopted as the coal storage facility of the power plant when
the physical properties of the coal is appropriate and the necessary preventive
measures for choke up of coal shall be considered. When the lignite and high volatile,
easy of spontaneous combustion type of coal are stored, anti-explosion, ventilation,
temperature monitoring and water spray facilities shall be provided and strictly
controlled on coal storage period.
The storage capacity of the coal silo can be determined by the following conditions:
1. As a coal blending facility, the capacity shall be one day coal
consumption of the whole power plant;
2. As a buffering facility of the coal handling system, the coal silo at this
time, shall be incorporated with the operation of single bucket wheel
stacker/reclaimer and the capacity shall be one day consumption of the
whole power plant;
3. For heat supply power plant in the city, due to the narrow site area or
higher environmental demand, construction of outdoor coal yard has no
suitable condition, or is not allowed, then the coal silo may be provided.
The capacity of the coal silo shall not be more than 7 days of the total
coal consumption of the power plant.
7.5 Coal Blending Equipment

In the power plant project, where burning different kinds of coal is approved by
related authority and blended coal is necessary, special coal blending facility shall be
provided.
7.6 Coal Screening and Crushing Equipment

Single stage screening and crushing equipment shall be provided in the coal handling
system. The size of coal after screening and crushing shall be suitable to the demand
of the coal mill, usually not larger than 30 mm.
7.7 Control Mode
7.7.1 The centralized control system shall be adopted in the coal handling system of
the newly built power plant. When conditions permit, sequence control shall be
adopted and special centralized control room shall be built. Automatic interlock and
the signal devices shall be provided between different coal handling facilities in the
coal handling system and necessary dispatching communication equipment and
industrial TV monitoring system shall be installed.
7.8 Coal Handling Auxiliary Facilities and Auxiliary Buildings

7.8.1 In each route of the coal handling system, single stage magnetic iron separator
shall be installed at the first transfer station after unloading facility, the outlet of the
coal yard belt conveyor and in front of the coal crusher. When medium speed or
high-speed coal mills are used, single stage or double stage magnetic iron separator
after the coal crusher shall be increased.
The facility for collecting and casting away the iron pieces separated from the coal
stream to the ground shall be provided.
When condition allows, the facility for handling wood block, stones, and lump coal at
the first transfer station shall be installed.
7.8.2 Weighing devices for plant incoming coal and the coal entering the boiler shall
be installed in the newly built power plant as well as in the extension project, when
condition permits.
In the coal handling system, real object verification measures shall be provided for the
coal entering the plant site. A simulative or real object verification measures shall be
taken for the coal entering the boiler. When railway weigh-bridge for incoming coal
by railway transportation and underground weigh-bridge for incoming coal by
highway transportation are installed, the real object verification device for incoming
coal is not required.
7.8.3 Mechanical continuous sampling device shall be installed for coal entering the
boiler in the coal handling system of a newly built power plant. Mechanical sampling
device shall be added in the power plant where incoming coal is transported by
railway, when condition permits.
7.8.4 The following measures shall be taken for the design of the receiving coal
hopper and the coal chute in the coal handling system:
1. The included angle between the intersection of two adjacent walls of a
rectangular receiving coal hopper and the horizontal plane shall not be
less than 55 degrees. It shall also satisfy the intersection angle between the
wall surface and the horizontal plane not as less than 60 degrees. The
inner lining of the intersection angle of two adjacent walls shall be made
in arc shape, the radius of the arc shall not be less than 200 mm. The
intersection angle between the bottom hopper wall of a round coal silo
and the horizontal plane shall not be less than 60 degrees. The sloping
internal wall surface shall be lined with smooth and wearable materials.
2. The angle of inclination between the coal chute and horizontal plane shall
not be less than 60 degrees. Under restricted condition, when the angle of
inclination can not reach 60 degrees, measures to prevent coal choking
shall be taken according to the water content of the coal, the size
composition, the cohesiveness, etc, such as installation of vibrator, etc, but
the angle of inclination of the coal chute at this time also shall not be less
than 55 degrees.
3. The cross-sectional area of the coal hopper outlet shall be enlarged as
much as possible. In the arrangement of the coal handling system the drop
of coal chute shall be diminished to the greatest extent and bends shall be
avoided. Antiwear measures shall be taken for the surfaces in contact with
the coal in the coal chute.
7.8.5 For the convenience of maintenance and repair of coal handling equipment,
necessary lifting facilities and maintenance space shall be provided.
7.8.6 Water flushing or vacuum cleaning shall be adopted for cleaning the coal
handling buildings. When water flushing is adopted, the arrangement of equipment
and related processing and the design of building shall satisfy the requirements of
water for flushing and the facilities for precipitating and recovery of fine coal shall be
provided.
In the design of underground coal unloading trench, rotary dumper room, transfer
station, coal crusher room and belt conveyor floor in the coal bunker bay, measures
for preventing flying coal dust shall be taken.
Spray water facility shall be installed in the coal storage yard.
8. Boiler Equipment and Systems
8.1 Boiler Equipment

8.1.1 The type, number and capacity of power plant boilers shall be selected
1. The type selection of boiler equipment and the technical requirement shall be
in accordance with the SD268-1998 "Technical Requirements for Coal Fired
Utility Boilers", in force.
The type of boiler equipment must be suited to the characteristics of the fuel
coal used. The physical and chemical test and analysis of the coal and its ash
must be carried out to obtain the normal or abnormal characteristic data.
2. For the condensing power plant, the unit system - one boiler to one turbine,
without spare of boiler, shall be adopted. The maximum continuous
evaporation rating of the boiler shall match the maximum inlet steam flow of
the turbine.
3. For the power plant with the cogeneration type turbines, when the largest
boiler in the plant is out of service, the other boilers and the other utilizable
and reliable heat sources, shall be able to satisfy the following requirements:
1) The quantity of process steam required for the continuous production of
the heat end users;
2) 60% - 75% of the winter thermal load for heating, ventilation and
domestic usages of the end users. In severely cold regions, the higher
limit shall be adopted. In the meantime, the portion of the electrical
power generation may be reduced.
4. For the condensing power plant, the selection of external heating capacity
shall be considered together with other sources in the same network; when the
largest boiler in the plant is out of service and the steam capacity of other
boilers can not satisfied the requirement for steam supply in article 3, the
balance shall be made up by the other heat resources in the same heating
network.
8.1.2 The rated steam pressure drop at superheater outlet of the large utility boiler,
shall be 5% of the inlet steam of the turbine, and the rated temperature of superheated
steam at the superheater outlet, shall be 3 degree higher than the rated inlet steam
temperature of the turbine. For the subcritical and below units, the inlet steam
temperature shall be 5 degrees higher than the rated value. The rated temperature of
steam at reheater outlet shall be to degrees higher than the temperatures of the
intermediate cylinder inlet steam of the turbine. At rated conditions, the pressure
drops of the cold reheat steam piping, reheater and hot reheat steam piping, shall be
1.5% - 2.0%, 3.5% - 3.0%, respectively of the HP cylinder exit steam pressure at rated
condition of the turbine; the rated temperature of steam at reheater outlet shall be 2
degrees higher than the temperature of the intermediate cylinder inlet steam of the
turbine.
8.1.3 The designs of combustion, pulverizing system and equipment for coal-fired
boilers shall be in accordance with the design of the boiler proper and the boiler safety
protection, monitoring and control system, and must conform to the DL435 "Codes on
Anti-explosion in Pulverized Coal Boiler Combustion Chamber of Fossil Fuel Power
Plants".
8.2 Pulverized Coal Preparation

8.2.1 The type selection of coal pulverizer (mill) and pulverizing system shall be
based upon following factors, namely: the coal abrasive characteristics, scope of
possible variation of coal, load nature of power plant, applicable conditions of coal
mill, boiler combustion chamber design and type of burner configuration. The
technical and economical comparison shall be carried out to determine the type of
pulverizer.
1. When suitable type of coal is available for large capacity units, the medium
speed mills shall be the priority choice.
When lignite with high moisture content and less abrasiveness is available for
power generation, the fan mill shall be adopted.
When low volatile lean coal, anthracite, or coal of high abrasiveness is the
available fuel, tube mill shall be adopted.
When the low volatile lean coal, anthracite, highly abrasive and explosive type
of bituminous coal is available for power generation, tube mill with a double
entry and then double exit configuration, may also be adopted, if the capital
investment for this choice is reasonable.
2. Direct firing pulverizing system shall be adopted, when medium speed mills,
fan mills, or tube mills with a double entry and double exit are used.
When medium speed mills are used, the coal handling system shall be equipped
with the effective facilities for separation and disposal of tramp iron, wood
blocks, stone blocks, and over size coal pieces. Furthermore, measures for
separating the pyrites from coal shall also be taken into consideration.
When medium speed mills and tube mills with a double entry and double exit
are used, and the air preheater can meet the relevant requirements, the positive
pressure cold primary air fan system shall be adopted.
When tube mills of the single entry and exit configuration are used, pulverized
the coal bin storage system shall be adopted.
8.2.2 The number of mills and their output capacity for direct firing pulverizing
system shall be selected according to the following requirements:
1. When high or medium speed mills are adopted, stand by mill shall be
provided.
Not less than 4 medium speed mills shall be provided for boilers of 200MW
and above; not less than 3 medium speed mills provided for boilers of
200MW and below, of which, one mill as standby.
2. When the tube mills with double entry and double exit are adopted, generally,
standby mill is not required. At least two mills shall be provided for each
boiler.
3. Not less than 3 fan mills shall be provided for a boiler, of which, one mill as
standby.
4. When each boiler is equipped with six or more fan mills, one as operation
standby, and one as maintenance standby, shall be provided.
5. There shall be spare margin in the calculated output capacity of coal mills:
1) For high and medium speed tube mills, when pulverized the design coal,
the total mill capacity, excluding the spare mills, shall not be less than
110 percent of the fuel coal consumption of boiler at maximum
continuous evaporation rating; and when pulverized the check coal, the
total output capacity of all the mills before maintenance, shall not be less
than the coal consumption of boilers at maximum continuous
evaporation rating.
2) The calculated output capacity of tube mills with a double entry and
double exit, shall not be less than 115% of the coal consumption of
boiler at maximum continuous evaporation rating, when the calculation
is based on design coal. However, when the calculation is based on
check coal, mill output capacity shall not be less than the coal
consumption of boiler at maximum continuous evaporation condition.
When one of the tube mills is in operation at side, the total continuous
output of the mills shall satisfy the requirements for turbine under the
rated conditions.
3) The calculated output capacity of the mills, for media speed mills and
fan type mills, shall be made according to the output of middle and late
periods; for the tube mills with double entry and double exit, the tube
loading capacity shall be selected according to the capacity
recommended by the manufacturer.
8.2.3 The number and output capacity of the tube mills for the pulverized coal bin
storage system, shall be selected according to the following requirements:
Not less than 2 tube mills shall be provided for each boiler, and no standby mill is
required.
The calculated output capacity (large mill under optimal tube loading capacity) of
tube mills for each boiler shall not be less than 115% of the coal consumption of
boiler at maximum continuous evaporation rating, when the calculation is based on
design coal. However, when the calculation is based on check coal, the mill output
capacity shall not be less than the coal consumption of boiler at maximum continuous
evaporation rating.
When one of the tube mills is out of operation, the calculated output of the remaining
mills, on design coal basis, shall be able to maintain safe end stable operation of boiler,
without support of fuel oil. However, the pulverized coal from the neighboring
boiler(s) may be delivered through the screw conveyor, if necessary.
8.2.4 The type, number, and output of coal feeders shall be selected according to the
1. Selection of coal feeders shall be based upon the arrangement of the
pulverizing coal system, loading requirements of boiler, performance of coal
feeder regulation, and reliability of operation, combining with coal metering
requirements. Coal feeders for the positive pressure direct firing pulverizing
system, must be backed with good sealing properties, and able to withstand
the pressurized condition of the process. Coal feeders for pulverized coal bin
storage system shall also have good sealing properties to reduce air leakage.
1) For the direct firing pulverizing coal system that has adopted the
high-speed mills, measurable scraper type coal feeders shall be adopted.
2) For the direct firing pulverizing coal system that has adopted the
medium speed mills, coal feeders of the weighing belt type shall be
adopted.
3) For the direct firing pulverizing coal system that has adopted the tube
mills of the double entry and double exit type, the coal feeders of
scraper type shall be adopted.
4) For the pulverized coal bin storage system with the tube mills, the coal
feeders of scraper type or belt type shall be adopted. For small
generating units, the vibration type coal feeders may also be adopted.
2. The number of coal feeders shall be the same as that of the coal mills. For
the generating units adopting the double entry and double exit tube mills for
coal polarization, two coal feeders shall be provided for one mill.
3. The calculated output of the coal feeders shall be according to the following
requirements:
1) The calculated output of the vibration feeder shall not be less than 120%
of the maximum calculated output of the mill;
2) For the coal feeders with double entry and double exit tube mills, the
calculated output for a single piece shall not be less than that of a mill
under unilateral operation;
3) For other types of feeders, the calculated output shall not be less than
110% of the mill.
8.2.5 The number of pulverized coal feeder, and their maximum output, shall be
selected according to the following requirements:
1. The number of pulverized coal feeder shall be the same as that of the primary
air connections of burners for the boiler. For double connection feeders with
good distribution, 2 primary air connections may be provided.
2. The maximum output of each pulverized coal feeder shall not be less than
130 percent of the maximum design output of the connected burner.
8.2.6 For pulverized coal bin storage system, the pulverized coal handling facilities
shall be set up according to the specific requirements. The chain type screw conveyor
or other type of conveyor may be chosen. The principle of set up and the conveyor
capacity shall be determined according to the following requirements:
1. When each boiler is equipped with two coal mills, the pulverized coal bins
of two neighboring boilers shall be interconnected through screw conveyor.
2. When each boiler is equipped with four coal mills and two pulverized coal
bins, the two neighboring pulverized coal bins of each of the boiler, or the
neighboring two pulverized coal bins of two neighboring boilers, shall be
interconnected through screw conveyor.
3. The pulverized coal screw conveyor capacity shall be considered according
to the calculated output of the largest coal mill connected.
4. When the conveying distance of pulverized coal exceeds 40m, double ends
driving mode shall be adopted.
5. Good sealing properties are required for the pulverized coal conveyors.
6. When proper layout is adopted, the dropping pipe of the fine ash separator
shall be able to deliver directly to the neighboring two pulverized coal bins
and the screw conveyor will not be required.
For high volatile bituminous coal and lignite, no screw conveyor is required.
8.2.7 Anti-explosion and fire extinguishing facilities must be provided for the
pulverizing coal system (with the exception of firing entirely with anthracite).
Facilities for access of nitrogen and carbon dioxide gases, or other fire extinguishing
media, shall be provided for pulverized coal bins, coal mills and coal pulverizing
system.
8.2.8 The type, number, air flow volume and pressure head of primary air fans shall
be selected according to the following requirements:
1. For the positive pressure, direct firing pulverizing coal systems, the bin
storage type pulverizing coal system with hot air as carrier medium for
pulverized coal firing, the single speed centrifugal fan shall be adopted as
cold primary air fan, when trisector regenerative air preheater is used.
Moreover, the moving blade regulating type axial fan may also be adopted
for cold primary air fan.
For the positive pressure, firing pulverizing coal system, and when the
bi-sector regenerative air preheater is used, the single speed centrifugal fan
shall be adopted for the hot primary air fan
2. The number of cold primary air fans shall not be less than 2, whereas no
standby positive pressure firing pulverizing coal system is provided.
The number of hot primary air fans shall match with that of the pulverizing
mill.
3. The air flow and pressure head of primary air fans shall be adopted according
to the characteristics of air preheater and different pulverizing coal systems.
1) When the trisector regenerative air-preheaters are adopted, the cold
primary air fans for the positive pressure, direct firing pulverizing coal
system, shall be selected according to the following requirements:
Volume of air flow of fan shall include the volume of primary air flow
required for boiler at maximum continuous evaporation, the sealing air
volume for all mills, and manufacturers guaranteed air leakage for air
preheaters.
Margin for air flow of fan shall be 35%, plus temperature margin, which
may be determined according to the "Calculated Outdoor Temperature
for Ventilation in Summer"; the margin for pressure head of the fan shall
be 30%. For the cold primary air fan connected to the forced draft air
fans, the pressure head margin can be increased to 35%.
2) When the trisector regenerative air preheaters are adopted, the cold
primary air fans for the bin storage type pulverizing coal system shall be
Basic volume of air flow of fan is calculated according to the design
coal, and shall include the primary air flow volume required by the
boiler at maximum continuous evaporation, and air leakage at the
bottom of air preheaters guaranteed by the manufacturers after 1 year of
operation.
Margin for air flow of fan shall be 20%, plus temperature margin, which
may be determined according to the "Calculated Outdoor Temperature
for Ventilation in Summer"; and the pressure head margin of the fan
shall be 25%.
3) When the bi-sector or pipe box type regenerative air preheaters are
adopted, the hot primary air fans for the positive pressure, direct firing
pulverizing coal system shall be selected according to the following
requirements:
Volume of air flow of the fan is calculated according to the design coal,
and it shall be that of the primary air at rated output of each mill minus
the sealing air flow for each mill.
Margin for air flow of fan shall not be less than 5%, plus temperature
margin shall be selected according to the upper limit within the moisture
content in the firing coal; the pressure head margin of fans shall not be
less than 10%.
8.2.9 The number, air flow, and margin for pressure head of exhauster the shall be
selected according to the ball there requirements:
1. The number of exhausters shall be the same as that of the pulverizing
mills.
2. The basic air volume of the exhausters shall be calculated according to
the design coal pulverizing system.
3. The margin of air flow of exhausters shall not be less than 5%. The
pressure head margin shall not be less than 10%; the maximum design
point of the fans shall be able to satisfy the ventilation requirements for
the maximum tube mill loading.
8.2.10 In the positive pressure, direct firing pulverizing coal system, the medium
speed mill and tube mill with double entry and double exit shall be required to set up
the sealing fans. The number, margin for air flow and the margin for pressure head of
the sealing fans shall be selected according to the following requirements:
1. Not less than two sealing fans shall be provided for each boiler, of which,
one as standby. When every mill has its own sealing fan, no spare sealing
fan shall be provided.
2. The margin for air flow of sealing fan, shall not be less than 10%; the
margin for the pressure head of sealing fan shall not be less than 20%.
8.3 Equipment for the Combustion System

8.3.1 The type, number, air flow and the pressure head of the forced draft fan shall
be selected according to the fallen requirements:
1 For large boilers, the forced draft fan shall be the type of axial-flow fan with
moving blade regulation, or the high efficiency centrifugal fan; while the
type of axial-flow fan with static blade regulation may also be adopted.
When double speed centrifugal fan is adopted, during the operation of fan at
slow-speed regime, the steam turbine shall be able to carry rated load and
the fan operated within the high efficiency zone.
Through technical and economical comparison, other type of
speed-regulating fan may also be adopted for the forced draft fan.
2 Two forced draft fans shall be provided for each boiler and no spare fan is
required.
3 The air flow and pressure head of forced draft fan shall be selected
1) The air-flow of forced draft fan is considered to be the sum of the
combustion air required, when firing the design coal at maximum
continuous evaporation rating of boiler, and the net leakage air at air
supply side of the air preheater guaranteed by the manufacturer after one
year of operation.
2) When the tri-sector regenerative air preheaters shall be adopted, the
margin for air flow of forced draft fan shall not be less than 5%, plus the
temperature margin, same as primary air fanand the margin of pressure
head of the forced draft fan shall not be less than 10%.
3) When the exit of forced draft fan shall be connected with cold primary
air fan, the margin of air flow for forced draft fan shall be calculated
respectively, in which the margin of air flow for primary air system shall
be selected according to the item 1) and 2) of Clause 3 in Chapter 8.2.8,
and the margin of air flow for forced draft fan shall not be less than 10%.
4) When bi-sector or pipe box type regenerative air preheaters shall be
adopted, the margin of air flow of forced draft fan shall be 10%, and the
margin of pressure head shall be 20%.
4 For boilers that fire the low calorific value or low volatile coal as fuel,
when two forced draft fans are provided for each boiler, the checking
computation for combustion stability of boiler at low load operation with
a single forced draft fan, without supporting fuel oil for stabilization shall
be carried out.
8.3.2 The type, number, air flow and pressure head of the induced draft fan shall be
1 For large boilers, the induced draft fan shall be the type of high efficiency
centrifugal fan, or axial fan with static blade regulation. If the dust
concentration of flue gas at the fan inlet satisfies the fan requirement and the
technical and economic comparison supports such selection, then the axial
fan with moving blade regulation may be adopted. When double-speed
centrifugal fans are selected, it is required that during operation at the low
speed regime of the fans, the rated load of steam turbine shall be satisfied,
while the fans are operating within the zone of high efficiency.
The other type of speed-regulating fan may also be adopted, when technical
and economical comparison supports such selection.
2 Each boiler shall be provided with two induced draft fans, and no spare is
required.
When the load variation is relatively large, and the fuel structure is
complicated, or when the generating unit capacity is 600MW and above, the
number of induced draft fan for a boiler can be more than two.
3 Air flow and pressure head of induced draft fan shall be selected according to
the following requirements:
1) The basic air flow of induced draft fan is considered to be the sum of the
flue gas flow at maximum continuous evaporation rating of the boiler
when burning design coal, the air leakage to the gas side of air preheaters
guaranteed by manufacturer after one year of operation and the air
leakage of flue gas ducting of the boiler.
2) The margin for air flow of induced draft fan shall not be less than 10%,
plus the temperature margin not less than 10 degrees.
3) The margin for pressure head of induced draft fan shall not be less than
20%.
4 For boiler burning low calorific value coal or low volatile coal, when each
boiler is provided with two induced draft fans, the checking computation for
combustion stability of boiler at low load operation with a single induced
draft fan, without burning auxiliary fuel oil for stabilization of combustion,
shall be carried out.
8.3.3 Two centrifugal fans shall be selected as cooling air fans for a large boiler, in
which, one fan is in operation, and one for spare.
The margin for air flow of fan shall be 15%.
The margin for pressure head of fan shall be 25%.
8.3.4 When ignition fan is needed for large boilers, ignition fan may be provided,
but no spare is required.
The margin for air flow of ignition fan shall be 15%.
The margin for pressure head of ignition fan shall be 25%.
8.3.5 The ash removal equipment shall be so selected, that the quantity of fly-ash
emission and dust concentration of the exit gas shall be in conformance with the
requirements in the environmental protection standards, in force. Moreover,
considerations shall be given to the ash properties, technical process and the
requirements of comprehensive utilization of the ash and slag.
Electronic precipitator for a boiler shall not be less than two. For 220t/h-420t/h boilers,
the number of such precipitator for a boiler shall be one according to the specific
conditions for project.
The selected electronic precipitator shall still be able to attain the guaranteed
ash-removal efficiency under the following conditions:
1 When one of the electric supplying sections of the precipitator is out of
operation;
2 Gas-low volume for electrostatic precipitators shall be calculated
according to the gas-flow at the boiler exit, when the design coal is fired, and
the boiler that maximum continuous evaporation rating. The margins of the
gas-flow shall be 10%.
3 The gas temperature shall be the designed temperature, plus the 10
degrees.
8.3.6 The number, type, height and exit flue gas velocity of the chimney stack shall
be determined according to the requirements for environmental protection, and the
anticorrosion considerations of the stack, together with the considerations of number
of boilers to be built at a time, and the economical viability of the structure, etc.
The number of boilers to be connected to single flue chimney stack shall be selected
within the following range:
1 For 300MW and below generating units, one stack for 2-4 boilers;
2 For 600MW generating units, one stack for two boilers;
8.4Fuel Oil System for Ignition and Combustion Stabilization

8.4.1 The type of fuel oil for ignition and combustion stabilization of boilers, shall be
selected according to the capacity and number of boilers, kind of coal, source of fuel
oil supply, cost of fuel oil, conditions of fuel oil transportation, etc, while the technical
and economical comparison is necessary to support such determination. The
following type of selection may be adopted, namely:
1 Light fuel oil for ignition and low load combustion stabilization;
2 The extension of power plant shall be based on the existing conditions for the
old power plant. The light fuel oil for ignition, Mazut for startup and low load
combustion stabilization may be adopted;
3 When conditions suitable, the combustible gas for ignition and low load
combustion stabilization may also be adopted; at this time, the related safety
technical specifications shall be referred to design.
4 When the supply of mazut and its quality are guaranteed, mazut for ignition
and low load combustion stabilization may also be adopted.
8.4.2 The design output of ignition and fuel oil system for entire power plant shall
1 The system output for single fuel oil shall not be less than the sum of the
maximum fuel oil consumption for ignition and the maximum fuel-oil
consumption for startup and combustion stabilization; when the two
different fuel oils are used both for ignition and startup and stabilizing, the
output of ignition fuel oil system for the entire plant shall not be less than the
ignition fuel-oil consumption for one largest boiler in the power plant; the
output of fuel oil system for startup and stabilizing shall not be less than the
startup fuel oil consumption for one largest boiler in the power plant; when
the boilers burn the kind of coal which needs fuel oil support for combustion
stabilization at low load conditions, the system output shall not be less than
the sum of fuel oil consumption for one boiler startup and one conditions
stabilization.
2 The fuel oil quantity of boiler ignition shall be determined according to the
fuel oil quantity required by the ignitor and a part of total output utilized by
the ignitor at this time.
3 The fuel oil quantity for boiler startup shall be selected according to the kind
of coal, type of furnace and arrangement characteristic of ignitor:
When the boiler burns the bituminous coal and high-volatile lean coal, 10%
of input heat quantity under boiler maximum continuous evaporation rating
conditions shall be adopted;
When the boiler burns the anthracite and low-volatile lean coal, 20% of
input heat quantity under boiler maximum continuous evaporation rating
conditions shall be adopted.
4 The fuel oil quantity of boiler low load combustion stabilization shall be
determined according to the kind of coal, the minimum load level of boiler
without supporting fuel oil for stabilization and boiler operation mode. If
necessary, 5% of input heat quantity shall be adopted under the boiler
maximum continuous evaporation rating conditions.
5 The system oil return quantity shall be determined according to the design
characteristics of fuel oil nozzle, requirements of burning safety protection
and fuel oil parameters, and shall not be less than 10% of system design
output.
6 The system design output shall be the sum of the fuel oil quantity and the
minimum oil return quantity, and its margin shall be 10%.
8.4.3 The number and volume of the fuel oil tanks for ignition, startup and
combustion stabilization shall be comprehensively considered and determined
according to the volume of single boiler, kind of coal, type of fuel oil, fuel oil
consumption, mode of delivery, period of delivery and the total installed capacity of
the power plant; at this time, shall satisfy the following requirements:
1 For the light fuel oil, two fuel-oil tanks built; for heavy oil, three fuel oil tanks
built.
2 The volume of fuel oil tanks for ignition, startup and combustion stabilization
shall be selected according to the following stipulations:
1) For boiler capacity of 420t/h class and below, its volume is 2500m3 or
3200m3;
2) For boiler capacity of 670t/h class, its volume is 21000m3 or 3500m3;
3) For boiler capacity of 1000t/h class, its volume is 2(1000m3 1500m3)
or 3(1000m3 1500m3) , this depends on the kind of coal and type of
oil;
4) For boiler capacity of 2000t/h class, its volume is 2(1500m3 2000m3)
or 3(1000m3 1500m3) , this depends on the kind of coal and type of
oil;
5) For boiler capacity of 2000t/h class and above, its volume is 22000m3
or 31500m3.
3 When the fuel oil for ignition, startup and combustion stabilization is two
different oil sources, the volume of fuel oil tank for ignition shall be selected
according to the following stipulations:
1) For boiler capacity of 1000t/h class and below, its volume is 2100m3;
2) For boiler capacity of 1000t/h class and above, its volume is 2200m3.
4 When the kind of coal fired in the boiler is that requires fuel oil support for
combustion stabilization at low load operation, the capacity of single fuel oil
tank for combustion stabilization shall not be less than the monthly average
fuel oil consumption of the entire power plant.
5 When the oil tanks for boiler combustion stabilization are located
comparatively far away from the main power building, or when there are
many boilers that require different qualities of fuel oil, the daily use fuel oil
tank shall be provided, and placed nearby the main power building. Generally,
the configuration of one daily use fuel oil tank to one boiler shall be adopted.
The capacity of daily use fuel oil tank shall be selected according to the
following:
1) For 200MW and below units 100 m3 per unit
2) For 300MW unit 200 m3 per unit
3) For 600MW unit 300 m3 per unit
When a common daily use fuel oil tank is provided for a number of boilers, the
daily use oil tank capacity may be considered according to the fuel oil
consumption for 3 hours of the startup fuel oil system of the entire plant.
8.4.4 Railway, highway or waterway transportation may be adopted for delivery of

fuel oil for ignition, startup and combustion stabilization of boilers; at this time, shall
satisfy the following requirements:
1 When railway transportation is adopted for fuel oil transportation, the
length of the unloading station for fuel oil, shall be considered for
accommodating 4-10 oil wagons. From the entering of the fuel oil
wagons into the power plant to completion of unloading the oil wagons,
a lapse of time from 6-12h, shall be considered;
2 When the fuel oil source is nearby, the fuel oil delivery through highway
may be considered. .
3 When fuel oil delivery is through waterway transportation, the
construction of the wharf for fuel oil unloading shall be carried out in
combination with the construction of the wharf for handling the ash and
slag, the wharf for handling large machine parts, and/or the coal wharf.
4 When the fuel oil source is nearby, the fuel oil delivery through piping
may be considered.
8.4.5 Mode of fuel oil unloading shall be based on the fuel oil characteristics, mode of
transportation, oil tank conditions, etc, and shall be determined through technical and
economical comparison for the optimum choice. The type, number, and capacity of
the pumps for fuel oil unloading shall be selected according to the following
requirements:
1 The type of oil pumps for fuel oil unloading shall be selected according
to the viscosity of the fuel oil and the mode of fuel oil unloading.
2 Number of fuel oil pumps for unloading shall not be less than two. When
the largest fuel oil pump is out of service, the total flow capacity of the
other fuel oil pumps shall be sufficient to unload the oil wagons or oil
tankers within the stipulated period of time.
3 The pressure head of oil pumps for fuel oil unloading, and the capacity of
the electric motors shall be considered according to the condition of fuel
oil delivery at maximum viscosity. The margin for pressure head shall be
30%.
8.4.6 The type, flow quantity and number of fuel oil delivery pumps shall be
1 The type of fuel oil delivery pump shall be determined according to the oil
quality and the parameters of oil delivered.
2 The number of fuel oil delivery pump shall be either 3 sets, or 2 sets, and its
volume may be adopted according to 2 x 100% +1 x 30% and/or 3 x 50%, or
2x100%, respectively; and when the largest one of them is out of service, the
total capacity of the remaining fuel oil delivery pumps shall not be less than
110% of the sum of oil quantity for the startup fuel oil system for the entire
power plant and its recirculating oil flow quantity.
3 A margin for the pressure head of oil pumps shall not be less than 10%, a
margin for delivery lift not less than 5%, and the margin of total resistance
(excluding oil gun atomizing pressure and drop in level) for fuel oil pipings in
delivery lift calculation not less than 30%.
4 When the screw type oil pumps are adopted a spare oil pump shall be provided
as maintenance standby.
8.4.7 The oil pump room for oil handling from the oil tanks shall be located nearby
the oil tank district, while the oil pump room for oil supply to boilers shall be nearby
the boiler house. In the oil pump room, suitable lifting facilities, maintenance space
and shift operator room shall be provided. However, when the automatic controls and
fire extinguishing facilities can satisfy well the operation needs without attendant,
then the shift operator room shall be dispensed with.
8.4.8 A single pipeline for supplying fuel oil to boiler house shall be adopted.
However, when there are many boilers in the power plant, and the fuel oil supply to
the boiler house is directly from the oil tank district, then double pipelines may also
be adopted for delivering the fuel oil for boiler combustion stabilization.
For the ignition fuel oil and the combustion stabilizing fuel oil, separate recirculating
pipelines, one for each kind, shall be adopted.
For the fuel oil system in the boiler house, single ring piping shall be adopted.
The oil flow measuring device shall be provided for the main oil supply piping and
the main recirculating piping, as well as for the oil supply and recirculating piping for
each boiler.
Quick-response isolating valve(s) shall be provided for the oil supply line(s) of each
boiler, and shall have the bypass valves for testing. The return oil line(s) of each
boiler shall be equipped with the quick-response isolating valve(s), and may be
adopted with the cutoff valve(s).
8.4.9 For the fuel oil with high viscosity and easy solidification properties, its
unloading, storing and supplying systems shall be provided with heating and purging
facilities. The heat tracing pipings and stream or compressed air purging pipings may
be provided for the fuel oil pipings. Means for preventing the backward flow of fuel
oil into the steam purging system shall be provided.
8.4.10 Outdoor arrangement for fuel oil heaters may be adopted. They may be
placed at the vicinity of the boiler house, if the condition for such arrangement is
suitable.
For the mazut, two heaters shall be provided, of which, one as standby.
8.4.11 Waste-oil pond shall be provided for the fuel oil system, and related facilities
shall be provided for handling the waste oil from the waste oil pond to the oil
treatment equipment.
8.4.12 The fuel oil system design shall be in accordance with the requirements in
the standard GBJ74 Code for Design of Oil Storage, in force.
The design for static electricity prevention and thunderbolt prevention for fuel oil
tank(s), piping for oil delivery and fuel oil piping, shall be in accordance with the
related requirements in the standard DL/T621 Technical Code for Grounding Design
of Electrical Equipment and the standard DL/T620 Code for Over Voltage
Protection Design of Electrical Equipment, in force.
8.5 Boiler Blowdown and Exhaust Steam Systems

8.5.1 Equipment for continuous and periodical blowdown systems of boiler shall
1 For drum type boiler, a single stage continuous blowdown expansion system
shall be adopted. For the drum type boiler in the cogeneration plant where high
pressure unit is installed, according to the expanded steam utilizations, the two
stage continuous blowdown expansion system shall be adopted. In the
continuous Blowdown system, bypass for switching over the continuous
Blowdown to the periodic Blowdown shall be provided.
2 For generating units of 100 MW and below, one set of blowdown expansion
system shall be provided for tow boilers; while for units of 125MW and above,
one Blowdown expansion system shall be provided for each boiler.
3 The requirements of boiler emergency Blowdown shall be considered in the
election of the capacity of periodic blowdown expansion tank. When the
calculated value of boiler emergency blowdown is excessively great, the
properly limited flow rate measures shall be taken by negotiation with the
boiler factory.
4 For the drum boiler with subcritical parameters, when conditions suitable, the
continuous blowdown system can not be provided.
8.5.2 The noise control of boiler steam that exhaust to atmosphere during startup of
boiler, shall satisfy the requirements of environmental protection. The boiler igniting
steam exhaust pipe that discharges to atmosphere during startup of boiler and pressure
relief valve (PCV) exhaust pipe, shall be equipped with silencers; while for the drum
and super-heater safety valves that trip pressure are lowest and reheater safety valve
exhaust pipe for medium pressure cylinder startup units, silencers may be provided.
The periodic blowdown expansion tank exhaust pipe can be equipped with silencer;
and in severely cold regions, the exhaust pipe steam separator may also be installed.
8.5.3 To prevent the air preheater from low temperature corrosion and blocking ash,
the air heating system of air preheater inlet shall be provided according to the actual
demands, the air heating system, such as the air heater and hot air recirculating or
topping air preheater etc., can also be selected in accordance to the technical and
economical comparison. When the coal kind is better, and the environmental
temperature is higher or the cold end of air preheater is adopted with the anticorrosive
materials, the air heating system can not be provided if it is really able to guarantee
the air preheater not to be corroded and blocked.
1 The air heater system may be selected according to the following
requirements:
1) The setting place of air heater shall be determined through the
technical and economical comparison; for the severely cold regions at
the North, the air heater shall be installed at the forced draft fan inlet.
2) For rotor rotating type trisector regenerative air preheater, when the
flue gas at first heats up the primary air, the air heater cannot be installed
at one side of primary air for air preheater.
3) The requirements of freezing protection, blocking prevention and
corrosion protection shall be considered in the structure and arrangement
of air heaters. For the air heaters that the number of annual service hours
is not higher, the mobile structure can be selected, or the bypass air chute
may also be installed.
4) The selection of the environmental temperature used by air heater
may be adopted for the winter heating temperature or monthly average
temperature at the coldest month in winter.
2 The hot air recirculating system shall be used for the tube type air preheater
or the regions where the condition of coal kind is better and the
environmental temperature is higher. When the rotary type air preheater is
adopted with the hot air recirculating system, the requirements of ash
carrying and friction protection for both fan and air chute shall be considered,
and the hot air recirculating rate shall not be excessively high; and the hot air
extraction port shall be arranged at the place where the flue gas content is
lower.
8.5.4 To eliminate the blocking ash of air preheater, beside the steam sootblowing
system is configured, the air pulse installation or hydraulic flushing installation
(utilizing at furnace shutdown) can also be selected according to the technical and
economical comparison.
8.6 Auxiliary Boiler for Startup

8.6.1 For power plants that need to install auxiliary boilers for startup, the number
and capacity of, and fuel for the auxiliary boilers, shall be considered in connection
with the specific conditions of the district, the requirements of the generating units
and the mode of startup, and shall be determined through calculation:
1 In the calculation, only the amount of steam required for startup is considered,
without marginal allowance. Furthermore, it is not necessary to take into
account of the steam quantity for test-runs of steam turbine, the steam quantity
for construction that can be stopped temporarily, and the other steam
consumption not for startup.
2 The number and capacity of auxiliary boiler for startup shall be selected
according to the following range:
1) 300MW and below unit is 1x10t/h (at non-heating regions and
transitional regions) 2x20t/h (at heating regions);
2) 300MW unit is 1x20t/h (at non-heating regions and transitional regions)
2x20t/h (at heating regions)
3) 600MW unit is 1x35t/h(at non-heating regions and transitional regions)
2x35t/h (at heating regions).
3 The startup boiler shall be designed to the oil fired and quick-installing boiler.
In the severely cold districts, the auxiliary boiler for startup may be considered
in connection with the boiler supplying steam for construction purpose, and
coal shall be used. For other districts, the auxiliary boiler for startup may be
designed to use fuel oil.
8.6.2 The steam parameters of startup boilers shall be provided for the low
pressure (1.27MPa) boiler, the related systems of the auxiliary boilers for startup shall
be simple, reliable and easy to operate, whereas no space auxiliary for startup boiler
shall be provided. The design of coal fired startup boiler house may be simplified, but
process system design shall satisfy the requirements of production and environmental
protection.
8.6.3 For extension of existing power plant, the auxiliary steam of the existing
plant shall be used as the steam source for startup of the extension units, and no
startup boiler is required.
9. Ash and Slag Handling Systems

9.1.1 Selection of the ash and slag handling system shall be based upon: the quantity
and the chemical and physical properties of ash and slag; the type of ash precipitator
and bottom ash removal equipment; the flushing water quality and quantity; the
distance between, and the elevation difference of the power plant and the disposal
area; and the topographic, geologic and meteorologic conditions of the power plant
site and the ash storage yard. Moreover, the technical and economical comparison of
the system shall be carried out for determination of the optimum selection.
In the design of the ash and slag handling systems, full consideration shall be given to
the comprehensive utilization of ash and slag, the environment protection
requirements and the implementation of the water saving policy.
9.1.2 When conditions for comprehensive utilization of ash exist in the power plant,
the principle of separate handling of the wet and dry ash, fine and coarse ash, fly ash
and bottom ash, shall be followed in designing the ash handling, storing and
transporting systems.
In case comprehensive utilization of ash and slag is required, but the conditions are
temporarily unavailable, reservations for such construction shall be provided in the
design.
9.1.3 The system capacity of ash and slag handling shall be computed according to the
total amount of ash and slag discharged from the system. Besides the installation of
ash and slag transportation system according to the requirement of comprehensive
utilization, facilities for transporting the total amount of ash and slag to ash storage
yard shall also be provided.
9.2 Dry Type Ash and Slag handing System

9.2.1 Dry handling of slag (bottom ash) shall be adopted when the boiler is equipped
with slag scrapers and transport of dry slag to the outside of power plant is necessary.
9.2.2 Dry type ash handling systems shall be selected according to the transport
distance, quantity of ash and its characteristics, the arrangement of ash collector
hoppers, etc, upon technical and economical comparison of alternatives, the
pneumatic ash handling system of the negative pressure type, low positive pressure
type, positive pressure type, as well as the ash handling system of the pneumatic
chutting type, the buried scraper conveyor type, the screw conveyor type, etc, and a
combination of the above-mentioned modes, may be selected.
9.2.3 Pneumatic ash handling system for large capacity generating units, shall be
classified according to the capacity of the generating units, as stipulated below:
1 For unit of 300MW:
One unit pneumatic ash handling system shall be provided for serving
12 generating units;
2 For unit of 600MW:
One unit pneumatic ash handling system shall be provided for serving
one generating unit.
9.2.4 The design capacity of the pneumatic ash handling system shall be determined
according to the discharge ash volume of the pneumatic ash handling system, type of
the pneumatic ash handling system, and operation mode etc. For the pneumatic ash
handling system adopted with the continuous operation mode, the design capacity of
the pneumatic ash handling system shall be provided with a margin of not less than
50% of the system ash handling capacity when this system is burning the design coal
kind, at this time shall satisfy the transport requirements when burning the check coal
kind and reserve 20% margin. For the pneumatic ash handling system adopted with
the interrupted operation mode, the design capacity of the pneumatic ash handling
system shall be provided with a margin of not less than 100% of the system ash
handling capacity when this system is burning the design coal kind, and facilities for
handling emergency shall be provided when necessary.
The design capacity of the pneumatic ash handling system shall be provided with a
margin of not less than that of the quantity of ash collected in 8 h.
9.2.5 The total volume of the ash silo (s) shall be determined according to the external
transit conditions:
1 When the ash silo is used for the purpose for transit or buffering storage, an
8 h ash storage of the system shall be considered;
2 When the ash silo is used for the purpose of storing the ash for external
transportation, storage of 24 h of ash shall be considered.
3 The ash silo for both units with capacity of 300MW600MW shall be
incorporated, and shall also provided according to two coarse ash silos and
one fine ash silo. For 600MW unit, if the ash volume is larger, according to
the specific actual conditions, both units shall share three coarse ash silos, or
each of two units shall build two coarse ash silos.
9.2.6 The ash unloading facilities of ash silo shall be provided, according to the
1) When hydraulic ash handling is used for the external transportation (outside
of power plant), the slurry preparation equipment shall be provided;
2) Suitable facilities shall be provided to prevent dry ash particles flying up
during unloading and loading to wagons (barges);
3) For external transportation of wetted ash water mixture, stirrers shall be
provided for preparing the ash water mixture.
9.2.7 The negative pressure type pneumatic ash handling system shall be provided
with air evacuation equipment special for the system.
In the unit system that normally has1~2 set (s) of air evacuation equipment in
operation, a spare one shall be provided.
9.2.8 Pressurizing air fan (s) shall be provided, especially for the low positive pressure
type pneumatic ash handling system.
The unit system that has normally 1~2 air fan (s) in operation, a spare one shall be
provided.
In the air supply unit system that normally has 1~2 air compressor (s) in operation, a
spare one shall be provided; In the unit system that normally has 3 or more air
compressors in operation, two spare ones shall be provided.
9.2.9 The carbon steel tube shall be adopted at the straight tube for pneumatic ash
handling system; for the tube that flow rate of transporting medium is higher and
abrasion severe, the antifriction tube can also be adopted through the technical and
9.3 Hydraulic Ash and Slag Handling system

9.3.1 When the dry type ash separators are used, the way of having the dry ash
concentrated, prior to making ash slurry, may be adopted, if the hydraulic ash
handling system is that of the dense or comparatively dense slurry type.
When wet type ash separators (scrubbers) are used, the dense, comparatively dense, or
less dense slurry handling system shall be selected on the basis of technical and
economical comparison of alternatives.
9.3.2 According to the type of equipment used for the bottom ash removal, the boiler
house arrangement, the plant site arrangement, and the mode of transiting the ash and
slag to the outside of power plant, two types of hydraulic ash and slag handling
system, viz, the pressurized pipeline type and the sluice trough type, may be adopted
for such handling, within the plant site.
9.3.3 In the separate handling system for ash and slag, the slag dewatering bin scheme
may be adopted, when hydraulic means is used for slag transport, and slag
de-watering bin scheme may be adopted, when hydraulic means is used for slag
transportation to the outside of power plant. If the technical and economical
comparison shows that the slag precipitating pond or the dewatering sieve scheme is a
more rational choice then either one of them may be adopted .For slag tap boilers, the
slag precipitating pond scheme shall be adopted.
9.3.4 When centrifugal slurry pump is adopted in the hydraulic ash and slag handling
system, if the lift of a single stage slurry pump could not satisfy the requirement,
connecting the slurry pumps directly in series may be adopted.
9.3.5 For the separated or mixed handling system of ash and slag, the displacement
slurry pump system may be adopted. If the mixed handling of ash and slag system is
used, the process of having the slag sieved, before grinding the slag, shall e adopted.
9.3.6 According to the following factors, namely, the quantity of ash and slag slurry,
the size analysis of ash and slag particles, velocity of sedimentation, and the external
transportation conditions, etc, the geometrical dimension of the precipitating pond for
ash and slag shall be determined. The effective volume of each compartment of the
precipitating pond shall be considered according to the 24 h discharge quantity of the
ash and slag handling system.
The volume of dewatering bins or slag bunkers shall be determined according to the
factors of the boiler bottom ash discharge quantity and the external transportation
conditions. The effective volume of slag storage bunker or for each dewatering bin,
shall be able to satisfy the quantity of the 2436 h slag discharge quantity of the ash
and slag handling system.
When the slag storage bunker is only used as the transfer or buffering slag silo, the
slag storage bunker shall be able to satisfy the quantity of 8 h slag discharge quantity
of the ash and slag handling system.
9.3.7 An emergency outlet shall be available in the thickener for the ashwater
mixture. When such emergency outlet is not available, an extra thickener shall be
provided as standby.
9.3.8 For a complete hydraulic ash and slag handling system, the number of major
equipment is stipulated as follows:
1 For clear water pump that operates daily, a spare one shall be provided as
standby.
2 Within one pump room, the number of spare pumps required as standby for
the ash and slag (slurry) pumps and displacement slurry pumps, shall be
determined as the following principles:
1) When one unit is in operation, a spare one shall be provided;
2) When 23 units are in operation, two spare ones shall be provided;
3) For displacement slurry pumps, when only one is used as standby, it can
reserve the foundation for the second standby pump.
9.3.9 When the number of ash and slag (slurry) pipes in operation is from 1~3, a spare
pipe shall be provided as standby. If three pipes are in operation and are heavily
scaled, two spare slurry pipes shall be provided.
Under the prerequisite that the ash and slag transportation has been satisfied for the
separate handling system of ash and slag, a common pipe may be provided as standby.
9.3.10 Under the prerequisite that the water requirements for hydraulic ash handling
have been satisfied, the clarified water from thickener, sedimentation chamber, and
dewatering bin, as well as the cooling water overflown from slag removal equipment
of boiler, shall be considered for reuse and impurities pumps for delivery shall be
selected.
9.3.11 The stone coal handling system shall be adopted with the hydraulic ejector
handling system, mechanical handling system or other handling mode according to
the conditions, such as the quantity of stone coal, the transporting distance and
arrangement etc., in connection with the technical and economical comparison.
9.4 Transportation with Wagons, Barges and Mechanical Means

9.4.1 Based upon the transportation conditions, the freight volume and the wagon
loading requirements, the self-dumping wagons of comparatively large capacity, the
railway open freight cars or the bulk weight sealed wagons, may be adopted, when
wagon transportation has been chosen for transport of ash and slag.
The truck loading capacity shall be selected in conformance with the design loading
capacity of roadway and bridges in the routing, inside and outside of the power plant
site.
9.4.2 When shipping is adopted for transportation of ash and slag, the ash wharf and
barge loading facilities shall be provided according to the freight volume of ash and
slag, as well as the type(s) of shipping vessel adopted.
9.4.3 When the belt conveyor is adopted, the slag shall be cooled and dewatered,
while the ash shall be properly wetted with regulated amount of water, which shall
have the measures of short term storage.
The belt conveyor shall be designed to single route; its design output capacity shall be
determined based on the system conveying volume, conveying distance and mode of
operation etc., and shall have the margin that is not less than 100% of the maximum
ash and slag conveying volume calculated by the power plant according to the
planning capacity.
Beside the severely cold regions, the belt conveyor shall not be adopted with the
enclosed trestle, while the necessary protective cover shall be installed.
9.5 Mode of Control and Auxiliary Maintenance Facilities

9.5.1 The mode of control for the ash and slag handling system shall be determined
according to the complexity of the system and operation requirements of the
equipment, and the centralized control, the automatic programmed control, or the
lo-cal control may be adopted, accordingly.
For the ash and slag handling system adopted with automatic programmed or
centralized control, the local control facilities shall not be provided, but the local
control button for the purpose of commissioning may be provided according to the
control requirements.
The control (shift) room of the ash and slag handling system shall be combined with
the control room of electrostatic precipitator.
9.5.2 The necessary maintenance area, lifting fac1lities, and store place for tools and
spare parts shall be provided at the location where the ash and slag handling
equipment are centralized.
9.5.3 The necessary facilities for floor washing, floor sweeping and drainage facilities
shall be considered at the location where the ash and slag handling equipment are
centralized.
10. Steam Turbine Equipment and Systems
10.1 Steam Turbine Equipment

10.1.1 The selection and technical requirement of the steam turbine equipment shall
be in accordance with the stipulations in the standard SD269 Specification for
Stationary Utility Condensing Steam Turbine in force.
10.1.2 The steam turbine shall undertake the base load or the varying load according
to the load requirement of the power system. The characteristics of equipment and
system of the generating units, which undertake varying load in the power network,
shall satisfy the requirement for peak load regulation and shall ensure the life
expectancy of the units.
10.1.3 It is recommended that large capacity reheating type steam turbine unit shall be
selected as priority according to the electric power load demand. In regions where
heat load co-exists, when technical and economical comparison proves to be
reasonable, co-generation units shall be adopted. The type, capacity and number of
co-generation units shall be determined according to the magnitudes and
characteristics of the heat loads in the near future and the planned heat loads, after
technical and economical comparison under the principle of: Electric power
generation is decided by heat load. The extraction type co-generation turbine of high
steam parameters and large capacity shall be selected as priority. When there are
stable and reliable heat loads, the back-pressure type unit or back-pressure type unit
with extraction shall be adopted, and shall be used in conjunction with extraction type
cogeneration unit.
10.1.4 The steam turbine equipment and its system shall have reliable measures to
prevent water induction to the steam turbine.
10.1.5 For the first unit of newly developed or renovated type steam turbine of large
capacity, their regenerative heat cycles shall be determined by optimizing calculation.
10.1.6 The back pressure of steam turbine and the cooling surface of condenser shall
be determined after optimizing calculation based on the engineering
hydrometeorological conditions and the circulating water supply system scheme. The
rated back pressure of steam turbine shall adapt to the design water temperature of
circulating water system. The design water temperature shall be adopted with the
annual average water temperature, which is integrated.
10.1.7 The steam turbine shall be required to give out the nameplate output (rated
output) under the capability conditions, while the unit property check and system
optimization shall be based on the rated conditions.
The steam intake of the steam turbine under its adjusting valve fully opening, shall
not be less than 105% of steam intake under the steam turbine maximum continuous
output.
10.2 Main Steam and Reheat Steam Systems

10.2.1 For the power plants installed with high-pressure co-generation units, the steam
piping system with change-over common main shall be adopted. For the power plants
installed with the reheating condensing type or the reheating co-generation type units,
unit system shall be adopted.
10.2.2 For the first newly designed or remodeled steam turbine unit, the pipe diameter
and number of pipe lines of the main steam, reheat steam pipings etc, shall be
determined by optimizing calculation.
10.2.3 The installation and the type, capacity and control level of the by-pass system
of reheating turbine unit shall be determined according to the type, structure,
performance of the steam turbine and the boiler, as well as the turbine unit operation
mode required by the electrical network.
10.3 Feedwater System and Feedwater Pump

10.3.1 The feedwater system will be selected according to the following principles:
1 For power plants installed with high-pressure co-generation units, piping
system with feedwater main shall be adopted.
2 For power plants installed with the reheating condensing type or the reheating
co-generation type units, unit system shall be adopted.
3 If the fixed speed feedwater pumps are adopted, the number and capacity for
feedwater regulating valve system shall be determined according to the
adjusting scope required by the boiler, number of feedwater pipings and the
property study of regulating valves.
If the variable-speed feedwater pump(s) are adopted, the main feedwater pipings shall
not be equipped with the regulating valve system, while the startup branch pipe shall
be equipped with the regulating valve according to the regulating characteristics of the
variable-speed feedwater pumps.
10.3. 2 For each feedwater system, the total flow at the feedwater pump outlet (i.e the
maximum feedwater consumption, excluding the standby feedwater pump) shall all
ensure the feedwater supply of the connected systems required by all the boilers at
MCR with a certain margin as follows:
For drum type boiler: 110% of boiler MCR.
For once-through boiler: 105% of boiler MCR.
For reheating turbine units, the total flow at the feedwater pump inlet shall add the
flow extracted from the intermediate stage of the pumps used for reheat steam
attemperation, as well as the flow difference between leak-out and in-flow of the
pump sealing water .The total flow at the booster feed pump discharge shall be equal
to the sum of the total inlet flow of the feedwater pumps and extracted flow between
booster pumps and feedwater pumps.
10.3.3 When the largest feed water pump in the feed water system with feedwater
main is shut down, the remaining feedwater pumps shall be able to satisfy the
feedwater requirement of the whole system.
10.3.4 For 125 MW and 200 MW units, two turbine-driven feedwater pump, each
with a capacity of 100% maximum feedwater flow may be provided, or three
motor-driven variable speed feedwater pumps each with a capacity of 50%maximum
feed water flow, may also be provided. For 200MW units, if turbinedriven feedwater
pump is necessary to be installed as operating feedwater pump, it shall be determined
after technical and economical comparison, proving it reasonable.
10.3.5 For 300 MW units, two turbine-driven feed water pump, each with a capacity
of 50% maximum feedwater flow or one turbine-driven feed water pump with a
capacity of 100% maximum feedwater flow may be provided.
For 600 MW and above units, two turbine-driven feedwater pumps, each with a
capacity of 50% maximum feedwater flow may be provided.
10.3.6 For 300 MW units, when operating feedwater pump is one turbine-driven
feedwater pump with capacity of 100%, one motordriven variable speed feedwater
pump with a capacity of 50% maximum feedwater flow may be adopted as
start-up/standby feedwater pump; when operating feedwater pump is two
turbine-driven feedwater pump with capacity of 50%, one motordriven variable
speed feedwater pump with a capacity of 25%~35% maximum feedwater flow may be
adopted as start-up/standby feedwater pump; at this time, one motor-driven fixed
speed feedwater pump and one throttle valve with great differential pressure can also
be provided.
For 600 MW and above units, one motor-driven variable speed feedwater pump with
a capacity of 25%~35% maximum feedwater flow may be provided.
10.3.7 For 300MW and above units, if one of following cases being happened, and the
technical and economical comparison proves reasonable, three variable-speed
motordriven feedwater pumps, each with a capacity of 50% maximum feedwater
flow, may be provided.
1 When steam turbine body backheating system and generator margin are suitable
to adopt the motor-driven feedwater pumps as operating feedwater pump;.
2 Unit adopted with the air-cooling system;
3 Steam extraction heat supply unit.
10.3.8 The rated discharge head if feedwater pump shall be calculated as the sum of
the following items:
1) The total friction loss due to fluid flowing from the deaerator feedwater
tank outlet to the economizer inlet (calculated on the basis of feedwater
flow at boiler MCR): for drum type boiler, 20% margin shall be added;
for once-through boiler, 10% margin shall be added.
2) For drum type boiler: the static pressure difference of water column
between normal water level in boiler drum and normal water level in
deaerator feedwater tank.
For once-through boiler, the static pressure difference of water column
between the average elevation of the starting and completion point of
vaporization of boiler water in boiler water walls and the normal water
level elevation of deaerator feedwater tank.
if the static pressure difference is already included in the total friction loss
of boiler proper provided by the manufacturer, then only the static
pressure difference of water column between economizer inlet and
normal water level of deaerator feedwater tank shall be taken.
3) The feedwater pressure at economizer inlet when boiler is operated at
MCR.
4) Rated working pressure of deaerator (take negative value).
When there are booster feed pump(s), the total friction loss due to fluid
flowing and static pressure difference between booster pump outlet
discharge to feed-water pump inlet suction shall be calculated, the head
requirement necessary to ensure no vaporization at feedwater pump inlet
suction during transient load shedding of turbine unit shall also be
satisfied.
10.3.9 The feedwater bypass installed at high pressure heaters shall be capable of
fast changeover during operation, and shall have measures to repair the high- pressure
feedwater heater, with turbine unit in operation.
10.4 Deaerator and Feedwater Storage Tank

10.4.1 For the deaerator of reheating turbine unit the sliding pressure operation mode
shall be adopted.
10.4.2 The total capacity of deaerator shall be selected according to the maximum
feedwater consumption; one unit of deaerator shall be provided for each turbine.
Onestage high-pressure deaerator shall be adopted for the high-pressure and
reheating condensing turbine units, For the high-pressure co-generation turbine unit or
reheating co-generation turbine unit, under the conditions of ensuring satisfactory
oxygen content of feedwater, onestage high-pressure deaerator may be adopted.
Otherwise, condenser with bubbling deaeration shall be adopted or a lowpressure
deaerator shall be provided to deaerate the makeup water.
10.4.3 The storage capacity of the deaerator feedwater tank shall be determined
For the storage capacity of 200 MW and below, the storage capacity is 10-15 min
feedwater consumption at boiler MCR.
For generating units above 200MW, the storage capacity is 5-10 min feedwater
consumption at boiler MCR.
The storage capacity of feedwater tank is specified as the capacity of the tank from
normal water level down to the level at the top of outlet pipe of the tank.
10.4.4 The startup steam source of the deaerator shall come from the extracted steam
of one higher pressure stage of the regenerative extractions, which would be used for
low load conditions of the steam turbine.
10.4.5 In designing the deaerator and its related system, reliable measures shall be
taken to prevent overpressure explosion of the deaerator and shall be in accordance
with the Technical Regulations for Safety of Pressure Deaerator in Power Plant in
force.
10.4.6 For the deaerator feedwater tank in unit system, startup feedwater circulating
pump or reboiling tube may be used as the heating method during startup period.
When the reboiling tube is used, the steam used shall be regulated by pressure and
measures shall be taken to prevent water hammer and vibration liable to happen in
operation.
The capacity of startup feedwater circulating pump shall not be less than 30% rated
flow rate of the nozzle block used during startup of deaerator.
10.5 Condensate System and Condensate Pump

10.5.1 Number and capacity of the condensate pumps for condensing turbine unit
shall be selected according to the following requirements:
1 Two condensate pumps shall be installed for each condensing turbine unit, each
with a capacity of 110% maximum condensate flow; if three condensate pumps,
each with a capacity of 55% maximum condensate flow, are required for large
capacity turbine units, it shall be determined after technical and economical
comparison.
2 The maximum condensate flow shall be the sum of the following items:
1) The condensed steam flow of steam turbine at maximum steam throttle flow
conditions;
2) The constant inlet drain flow to the condenser;
3) The normal make-up water flow entering into the condenser;
For reheating turbine units installed with by-pass system of large capacity, the
capacity of their condensate pumps shall also satisfy the requirement of delivering the
condensate flow from the bypass system when put into operation. Then, the stand-
by pump may be put into operation for a short time.
10.5.2 For co-generation turbine unit, the number and capacity of the condensate
pumps shall be selected according to the following requirements:
1 For industrial extraction turbine or dual extraction turbine for industrial and
district heating, each of them may be equipped with two or three condensate
pumps.
1) When turbine unit immediately supplies heat after being put into operation,
two condensate pumps with a capacity of 110% condensate flow designed
under heat load or two condensate pumps with a capacity of 55%
maximum condensate flow shall be installed, and comparing the calculated
flow values, of which, the larger flow value shall be adopted.
2) When turbine unit is required for a long time to operate under pure
condensing conditions or low heat load conditions after being put into
operation, three condensate pumps with a capacity of 110% condensate
flow under design heat load or three condensate pumps with a capacity of
55% maximum condensate flow shall be installed, and comparing with the
calculated flow values, of which, the larger flow value shall be adopted.
2 For extraction turbine supplying district heating, three condensate pumps, each
with a capacity of 55% maximum condensate flow, may be installed.
3 The maximum condensate flow shall be;
1) When the make-up water normally is not delivered into the condenser, the
flow calculation is based on pure condensing conditions, the method being
the same as condensing type steam turbine;
2) When the make-up water normally is supplied into the condenser, the flow
calculation is also based on the maximum extraction conditions, with the
addition of make-up water flow, then compared with the calculated flow
under pure condensing condition. The larger flow value shall be adopted.
4 The condensate flow under design heat load shall be:
1) Condensate flow of turbine unit operation under design heat load
conditions;
2) The usual delivery water supplied into the condenser and normal make-up
water.
10.5.3 Onestage condensate pump shall be adopted in the condensate system; when
all of the condensate is required to be treated and low pressure condensate polishing
equipment is adopted, condensate booster pumps shall be installed, and shall be with
the same number of units and capacity as condensate pumps. When equipment
conditions are available, tandem shaft condensate pump with booster pump shall be
adopted.
10.5.4 When there is no polishing plant, the total head of the condensate pump shall
be calculated as the sum of the following items:
1) The friction loss due to fluid flowing, calculated on the basis of maximum
condensate flow, from the hot well of condenser to the condenser inlet of
deaerator, including atomizing nozzles, and added with 10%-20% margin;
2) The static pressure difference of water column between condensate inlet of
deaerator and lowest water level in condenser hot well;
3) Maximum working pressure in the deaerator, added with 15% margin;
4) Maximum vacuum in the condenser.
When there is condensate polishing plant, the total head of the condensate pump and
condensate booster pump may be calculated with reference to the above principles,
and be added with the friction loss of the polishing plant.
10.5.5 Before the make-up water of the reheating turbine unit enters the condenser,
make-up water tank and make-up water pump shall be setup according to the
requirements of the system.
Capacity of make-up water tank: for the units of 125MW and 200MW, it shall not be
less than 50m3; for the units of 300MW, it shall not be less than 100m3; for the units
of no less than 600MW, it shall not be less than 300m3.
There is no back-up unit for make-up water pump, and its total capacity shall be
selected in accordance with the make-up water volume at the time of the startup of the
boiler.
10.5.6 The capacity of low pressure heater drain pump shall be considered according
to the drain flow of the pressure heater connected with the pump suction when steam
turbine is operating at maximum steam throttle flow conditions, added with10%
margin.
10.5.7 The total head of low pressure heater drain pump shall be calculated as the sum
of the following items:
1) The friction loss due to fluid flowing, calculated on the basis of the condition
of the steam turbine corresponding to the maximum condensate flow, from the
low pressure heater to the condensate inlet of deaerator, including atomizing
nozzles, added with 10% to 20% margin;
2) The static pressure difference between the condensate inlet of deaerator and the
lowest water level in the low pressure heater;
3) Maximum working pressure in the deaerator, added with 15% margin;
4) Vacuum in the low pressure heater at condition corresponding to the maximum
condensate flow (if it is a positive pressure, then take negative value).
10.6 Elevation Drain Facility

10.6.1 The reheating turbine unit can have no drain tank and drain pump.
10.6.2 For the power plant with steam main piping system, two drain tanks shall be
installed, with total capacity of 30m3. Two drain pumps shall be adopted, and the
capacity of each shall be selected according to the requirement to pump out the total
storage in one drain tank within half an hour.
When number of units is more than four, a second group of drain facility may be
installed.
10.6.3 When the main steam piping system with steam main is adopted, and the low
point drainage flow is relatively large and the water quality is good and available for
utilization, then one low elevation collecting tank with a capacity of 5 m3.and one
collecting water pump shall be installed. The capacity of collecting water pump shall
be selected according to the requirement to pump shall be selected according to the
requirement to pump out the total storage in the low elevation collecting tank within
half an hour.
When number of units is more than four, a second group of low elevation drain
facility may be installed.
10.7 Industrial Water System

10.7.1 The industrial water of power plant shall have reliable water sources. Industrial
water with different water quality shall be capable of being supplied according to the
special requirement of equipment.
Independent water supply and drainage systems shall be provided for the industrial
water, and requirements for power plant extension shall be considered.
The carbonate hardness of industrial water shall be less than 250mg/L (calculated as
CaCO3),Ph value shall not be less than 6.5 and shall not be more than 9.5. For bearing
cooling water of rotating machines, its content of suspended mater shall be less than
100mg/L.
10.7.2 When fresh water is used as cooling water sources and it can be used as
industrial water without necessary of treatment, the open-cycle cooling system shall
be adopted. When treatment is necessary, opencycle or closedcycle, or open-cycle
and closed-cycle combined cooling system may be adopted according to the concrete
situation.
The open-cycle cooling water shall adopt the condenser cycle cooling system, which
adapts to supply the cooling water source to the facilities, which the water
consumption is great and the water quality of cycle cooling water able to satisfy its
demands, as well as the heat exchanger of closed-cycle cooling water.
The closed-cycle cooling water shall adopt the demineralized water or condensate,
which adapts to supply the cooling water source for facilities that the water
consumption is lower and the requirement of water quality is higher.
10.7.3 When sea water is used as cooling water sources for the condenser,
demineralized water closed-cycle cooling system may be adopted for industrial water,
at this time the heat exchanger for closed-cycle cooling water shall be adopted with
sea water as the cooling water source. For 200MW and below units, when the
technical and economical comparison proves reasonable, the special purpose fresh
water cooling tower open-cycle cooling system may also be adopted for the auxiliary
equipment water.
10.7.4 The service water system can provide water source for the power building,
device maintenance flushing and the facilities with small water consumption and
un-convenience for recovery.
10.7.5 Closed-cycle cooling system shall be equipped with two heat exchangers with
65% heat exchange area. When the sea water is used for the cooling water source of
heat exchangers for closed-cycle cooling water, the heat exchangers shall be made of
titanium materials.
10.7.6 The closed-cycle cooling water system shall be equipped with two cooling
water circulating pumps. The capacity of cooling water circulating pump shall not be
less than 110% of maximum cooling water flow. The head of circulating pump shall
satisfy the demand of maximum water consumption of the industrial water system to
which they are connected, with an addition of 20% margin.
The open-cycle cooling water system shall calculate and determine whether the
booster pump is provided, or the scope of booster pump water supply is required. If
required, two booster pumps shall be installed, the capacity for each of them shall not
be less than 100% of cooling water required to boost. The total head of booster pump
shall be calculated as the sum of the following items:
1 The maximum resistance of system piping calculated according to the maximum
cooling water consumption;
2 The static pressure difference of water column between the highest point and the
center line of booster pump (take negative value);
3 The water pressure difference between the inlet and outlet pipes for circulating
water.
10.7.7 The closed-cycle cooling water system shall be equipped with the high position
expansion device and make-up water system.
10.7.8 At the location of heat exchanger for the closed-cycle cooling water, the
operating pressure at the side of the closed-cycle water shall be larger than that of
open-cycle water.
10.7.9 The air cooling generating units shall be equipped with a separate auxiliary
equipment cooling water system, and the cooling tower shall also be provided. When
the power plant is simultaneously installed with one air cooling generating unit and
several conventional units, the auxiliary equipment cooling water of the air cooling
generating unit may also be acquired from the conventional units.
10.7.10 For the industrial water system of turbine units with unit capacity of 125 MW
and above, unit system shall be adopted, and enlarged unit system shall also be
adopted after the technical and economical comparison proves reasonable. The service
water system shall adopt two turbines as a unit or whole plant is regarded as one unit.
10.8 Heaters for District Heating Network and their Systems

10.8.1 The capacity and number of heaters for district heating network shall be
selected on the basis of heat load of district heating, ventilation and daily livelihood;
no stand-by heater shall be installed. But when any one of the heaters is shut down,
the remaining heaters shall satisfy 60%-75% of the heat load demand (for severely
cold region, the large value will be adopted). Whether it is necessary to reserve space
for adding corresponding district heating heaters or not, shall be determined on the
basis of the possibility of heat load increase and the steam supply capacity of the
steam turbine heating extraction during design period.
Installation of peak load heaters for district heating shall be studied and determined
comprehensively according to the factors, including: characteristics of heat load,
distance of supply, local climate, district heating system, etc.
10.8.2 The other equipment in district heating system shall be selected according to
the following requirements:
1 District heating network water pumps, not less than two, with one as stand-by;
2 Condensate pumps for district heating network heaters, not less than two, with one
as standby;
3 When make-up water can not be supplied directly into the district heating network,
two make-up water pumps shall be installed for the district heating network, with one
as stand-by. The stand-by make-up water pump shall be capable of putting into
operation automatically. When make-up water can be supplied directly into the district
heating network, but the static pressure required by the district heating network can
not be assured when district heating network water pumps shut-down, then one
make-up water pump for district heating network shall be installed, otherwise district
heating network make-up water pump may not be installed.
When the normal make-up water flow in the closed-cycle district heating network
equals to 1%-2% of the circulating water flow in the district heating network, the
capacity of make-up water equipment shall ensure a supply of 4% circulating water
flow in the district heating network, of which 2% of the flow (but not less than 20t/h)
the deaerated and chemically softened water as well as the boiler blow-down water
shall be adopted, and for the remaining 2% of the flow, the industrial water (or
potable water) will be adopted.
In order to strictly control the make-up portion of industrial water (or potable water),
register-type flowmeter shall be installed in the system.
10.8.3 For the cogeneration plant equipped with extraction type steam turbine (s) or
back pressure type steam turbine(s), one unit of pressurereducer and attemperator
shall be installed as stand-by according to each industrial extracted steam or the
exhaust steam parameter with a capacity equals to the maximum extracted steam flow
or maximum exhaust steam flow of one largest steam turbine.
When any one steam turbine is shut down, if the remaining steam turbines can supply
60%-75%(in severely cold region the larger value will be adopted) of the heat
consumption of heating, ventilation and daily livelihood, stand by pressure reducer
and attemperator for the heating extraction steam may not be installed.
For pressure reducer and attemperator constantly in operation, one unit for stand-by
shall be installed.
10.8.4 When heat consumer can return the condensate, and the technical and
economical conditions are reasonable, return water collecting equipment shall be
installed. Return water booster pump shall not be less than two units, with one as
standby. The number and capacity of return water tank will be determined according
to the concrete situations, but shall not be less than two.
10.9 Condenser and Its Auxiliary Facilities

10.9.1The material of tube sheet and tube bundle of the condenser shall be determined
according to the quality of the circulating cooling water.
For turbine units of large capacity, where sea water or river water affected by the sea
tide with relatively high chlorine radical content is used as circulating cooling water
when the sand content in water is high and with heavy abrasiveness, then condensers
made of titanium shall be adopted.
10.9.2 For steam turbine condensers, sponge rubber ball cleaning device shall be
installed. But for direct cooling water supply system, when the sand content in water
is relatively high or under other conditions, and it can be proved that it neither scales
nor deposits on the tube, the sponge rubber ball cleaning device may not be installed.
For the surface type condenser of air cooled condensing steam turbine, installation of
sponge rubber ball cleaning is not necessary.
10.9.3 The condenser shall be equipped with a reliable vacuum extraction facility. For
turbine units with capacity of 300MW and below, two water circulating type vacuum
pumps or other type vacuum extraction facilities (e.g. water jet air ejector) shall be
provided, and the capacity for each of vacuum extraction facilities shall be able to
satisfy the requirements of vacuum extraction when the condenser is normally
operating. For turbine units with capacity of 300MW and above, three water
circulating type vacuum pumps may be provided, and the capacity for each of them
shall be capable of satisfying the demands that the vacuum extraction reaches to 50%
at condenser normal operation.
10.9.4 For turbine units with capacity of 300MW and above, leakage detecting device
for condenser shall be installed.
11. Water Treatment Equipment and System
11.1 Pretreatment of Raw Water

11.1.1 The requirements for the selection of raw water sources shall be determined
according to the following principles:
1 Power plant shall have appropriate and reliable raw water sources, adequate water
quality total analysis data of recent years shall be obtained, paying attention to the
variation trend of water quality of the water sources. When several water sources are
available, selection shall be made after technical and economical comparison.
2 If the water quality of the selected water source presents seasonal worsening
condition, reserve water source may be provided after technical and economical
comparison; in case the salinity or sand content is too high within a short period of
time, water pond (reservoir) may be added according to the trend of variation and the
measures of preventing secondary pollution of water quality shall be taken into
account.
11.1.2 The method of raw water pretreatment shall be considered according to the
following principle:
1 Presettling facilities shall be provided to reduce the sand content if the sand
content of the water is too high.
2 When surface water is taken as water source, contact coagulation, filtration or
coagulation, clarification and filtration shall be respectively adopted as
pretreatment according to the low or high content of suspended matters in the
raw water.
3 When underground water is taken as water source, in case the raw water
contains sand or a relatively high content of colloidal silica, relevant measures
shall be taken if the quality of boiler steam checked by calculation can not
meet the requirements.
4 When the organic matter content of the raw water is relatively high,
chlorination coagulation, clarification and filtration may be adopted. If the
intake requirements of next-grade facility can not be satisfied after
above-mentioned treatment, the active carbon, adsorptive resin or other
methods may be synchronously taken to eliminate the organic matter.
5 After the raw water is pretreated, the turbidity of the clean water and the
contents of free chlorine and organic matter shall meet the technological
requirements of the later stages of the water treatment.
6 When the carbonate hardness of the raw water is relatively high, lime
pretreatment may be adopted.
11.1.3 The clarifier(s)(ponds)installed shall not be less than 2 units. In case the
suspended matter is high during a short period of time, for seasonal pretreatment
purpose, only one unit of clarifier may be required, but by-pass and contact
coagulation facility shall be proved.
The number of units (or compartments) of filters (ponds) shall not be less than two.
11.2 Boiler Make-up Water Treatment

11.2.1The boiler make-up water treatment system, including predemineralization
system, shall be selected according to the factors, including the quality of raw water,
the quality standard of feed water or boiler water, the make-up water rate, the
blow-down rate, the supply conditions of equipment and chemicals, etc. The decision
of the system shall be made after technical and economical comparison.
11.2.2 The normal boiler blowdown rate shall not exceed the following values:
1) 1% for the condensing type power plant with chemical demineralized water as
make-up water;
2) 2% for the cogeneration plant with chemical demineralized water or distilled
water as make-up water;
11.2.3 The total output of the water treatment equipment shall be determined
according to the total normal steam and water losses of the power plant, and
considering the additional output of water treatment equipment increased for unit
startup or for contingency through necessary checkup calculations.
The output of water treatment equipment required for various normal steam and water
loss of the power plant and the increase of water treatment output considered for unit
startup or for contingency shall be calculated according to Table 11.2.3.
11.2.4 When the solid maters dissolved in raw water is 500mg/L-700mg/L, the system
economical and technical comparison shall be carried out to determine whether the
predemineralization facility (e.g. reverse osmosis apparatus) is adopted. When the
solid maters dissolved in the raw is more than 700mg/L, the predemineralization
facility, such as reverse osmosis apparatus, can be adopted.
11.2.5 The demineralization facility is selected according to the following principles:

1 For each type of single stage ion exchanger not less than 2 units shall be
installed. For each unit, 1-2 times of normal regeneration shall be considered
for each day and night. The determination shall be optimized based on the
conditions of project.
2 For condensing type power plant, when no standby ion exchanger for
regeneration is installed, the quantity of reserved water required during
regeneration can be accumulated in the demineralized water tank. For
cogeneration plant, adequate capacity of demineralized (softened) water tank
shall be installed for storing reserved water used during regeneration or
standby ion exchanger for regeneration shall be provided.
3 When one train (unit) of equipment is under maintenance, the remaining
equipment shall satisfy the normal requirement of make-up water for the
whole power plant.
4 When the predemineralization facility such as the reverse osmosis apparatus
adopted, besides the output of water treatment system shall meet the quantity
of normal make-up water for entire plant, and shall also satisfy the
requirement of storing up all demineralized water tanks within 7 days.
Table 9.2.3 The Output of Water Treatment Equipment Required for Various
Normal Steam and Water Losses and the Increase of Output Considered for
Startup or Contingency of Generating Unit in the Power Plant
Increase of output
No Kinds of losses Normal losses considered for output
increased for startup or
contingency of
generating unit (for 4
units)
1. Loses in above 200MW 1.5% of the boiler 6% MCR of the largest
the steam MCR boiler in whole power
and water 100-200MW 2.0% of the boiler plant
cycle MCR
inside the Below 3.0% of the boiler 10% MCR of the largest
power 100MW MCR boiler in whole power
plant plant
2. Losses for external steam According to given
supply data
3. Losses of steam and water According to given
for other plant use data
4. Losses of boilerdrum According to

blowdown calculation but not
less than 0.3%
Losses of closed cycle 0.5% of cooling
5 auxiliary equipment water quantity
cooling system
6 Losses of closed cycle hot 1%-2% of the water 1%-2% of the water
water heating network contained in the contained in the heating
heating network or network, but the sum of it
according to given and normal losses not
data loss than 20t/h
7 The quantity of water used According to given
outside the power plant data
Note:
1 Normal boiler blowdown rate is calculated according to the normal losses of items
1,2 and 3 in this table;
2 The appropriate mode of steam supply and make-up water treatment for other plant
use of steam and hot water as well as the make-up water for closed cycle hot water
heating network shall be determined through technical and economical comparison;
3 When demineralized water is used as circulating cooling water for air-cooled
condensing unit the quantity of make-up water required owing to system leakage
11.2.6 The capacity of various kinds of water tanks shall meet the requirements of
process technology and regulation.
1 The total effective capacity of the demineralized (softened)water tanks shall be
able to coordinate with the output of the water treatment equipment to satisfy
the quantity of water required for acid cleaning of the largest boiler, or startup
of a unit and this shall be 2 maximum continuous evaporation rating of the
largest boiler; while for the cogeneration plant it may also be 1h normal
make-up water flow.
2 When standby ion exchanger for regeneration is not provided, the
demineralized (softened) water tank shall take into account the quantity of
reserved water required during shut down for regeneration.
3 For the cogeneration power plant, the water treatment system shall adopt the
two-shift system operating mode in connection with the capacity and
arrangement of demineralized water tank, system output and connection mode
and control mode for demineralized water pumps.
11.2.7 The capacity of demineralized water pump and the make-up water pipe from
water treatment room to the main power building shall be selected according to the
quantity of make-up water to be delivered during startup of the largest unit or the
quantity of water required for boiler chemical cleaning and the normal make-up water
required by the other units.
When the total number of make-up water pipe is two or more, during the outage of
any one pipe, the remaining pipe(s)shall be able to meet the requirement of delivering
normal make-up water to all units.
11.3 Condensate Polishing for Steam Turbine Unit

11.3.1 Condensate polishing for steam turbine unit, which is capable of adopting the
iron removal (or silica removal) or continuous ion exchanging mode for startup, shall
be determined according to the factors including the type and parameters of the boiler,
the quality of cooling water and condenser materials etc.
1 For the steam turbine unit with the main steam supplied by once-through boiler,
all the condensate shall be polished. If necessary, iron removal facility may be
provided for the unit startup.
2 For the steam turbine unit with the main steam supplied by subcritical drum
boiler, the comprehensively technical and economical comparison may be
carried out, in combination with the selection of condenser materials, to
determine the selection of iron and silica removal treatment systems or ion
exchanging treatment system.
3 For the steam turbine unit with the main steam supplied by high pressure and
super-high pressure drum boilers, if startup and shutdown frequent, the technical
and economical comparison shall be carried out to determine whether adopting
the condenser iron removal facility for unit startup in accordance with the
factors, such as the discharge capacity of unit startup, furnace stopping
protection measures, condenser materials and operating management level etc.
4 When the indirect air cooling system with the fixed type condenser adopted, the
condensate polishing for turbine unit shall be carried out in full capacity, and the
special purpose iron removal facility shall also be provided for unit startup.
5 The condensate of direct air cooling turbine unit shall be adopted with the iron
and surfeit removal treatment facilities..
11.3.2 Medium pressure condensate polishing system shall be adopted for steam
turbine unit with subcritical and above parameters.
11.3.3 Filters and ion exchangers in condensate polishing system shall be determined
according to the following principles:
1 When the filter is used only for iron removal during the startup of the unit, no
stand-by is provided.
2 For external regeneration ion exchanger adopted by the 300MW steam turbine
unit and boiler with subcritical parameters, no spare one shall be provided.
3 For the condensate polishing adopted by 600MW steam turbine unit and boiler
with subcritical parameters, if the iron removal facility is synchronously
installed, then the standby external regeneration ion exchanger is not provided.
11.3.4Under permissible condition, one common unit for external regeneration in the
condensate polishing systems of two generating units shall be provided.
11.4 Production Return Water Treatment

11.4.1When the heat consumer is able to supply the return water, the reclamation of
the return water as well as the installation of the return water treatment equipment
shall be determined according to the quantity and quality of return water through
technical and economical comparison.
11.5 The Correction Treatment of Condensate, Feedwater and Boiler Water and
the Steam and Water Sampling of the Thermodynamic System
11.5.1According to the type and parameters of the boiler and turbine and the regimes
of water chemistry, corresponding chemicals feeding facilities shall be provided for
the correction treatment of condensate, feedwater and boiler water.
11.5.2 For 300MW and above turbine units with condensate polishing system, if
once-through boiler adopted, the make-up water shall be adopted with the neutral
adding oxygen or combined adding oxygen and ammonia treatment when conditions
allowable.
11.5.3 For the thermodynamic system with units of different parameter, corresponding
centralized steam and water sampling facilities and monitoring instruments shall be
provided. The signal of sampling and analysis shall be able to be used as the input
signal controlled by the corresponding system, and at this time the site water and
steam control lab shall not be provided.
11.5.4 The relatively centralized arrangement shall be adopted by the condensate and
make-up water within the main power building, furnace water correction treatment
facilities and water and steam sampling and analysis installations of thermodynamic
system together with the condensate polishing system, and the centralized control and
data management shall also be carried out.
11.6 Circulating Cooling Water Treatment

11.6.1 When the growth of biological organisms, corrosion and scaling are possible to
occur in the cooling water system and inside the condenser, corresponding preventive
measures shall be taken through technical and economical comparison and
verification tests.
11.6.2 The concentration and blowdown rates for cycle cooling water system shall be
determined according to the quantity of entire plant water, water quality balance and
consideration of condenser materials through technical and economical comparison
and verification tests. If necessary, the corrosion and encrustation prevention shall be
adopted by the selection of adding sulphuric acid, adding antiseptic and antiscale,
make-up water softening treatment and circulating cooling water bypass treatment as
well as above-mentioned methods combined treatment etc.
1 The power plant located at the places in short of water, the make-up of
circulating cooling water shall adopt the lime treatment or acid deficient ion
exchanging treatment to remove the carbonate hardness. The disposal ratio for
make-up water shall be optimized and determined on the basis of water
quantity balancing conditions in power plant.
2 For the cycle cooling water system, when the concentrating ratio is higher, the
bypass filtering treatment of circulating cooling water may be adopted in
accordance with the dust content in ambient air and suspended matter content
in make-up water etc. after the technical and economical comparison rational.
11.6.3 The adding chlorine or throwing other anti-biologic pollutant treatment may be
provided for the organism protection pollution treatment.
1 If adding chlorine treatment required, the electrolysis (salt water or sea water)
chloros facility or vacuum adding chlorine machine shall be adopted.
2 The adding chlorine metering shall be determined on the basis of experiment.
While the anti-biologic pollution results are achieved, the residual chlorine
concentration at discharge port shall satisfy the requirements of discharge
standard.
11.6.4 For the circulation cooling water of the air cooled condensing turbine unit,
chemicals feeding facilities shall be provided according to the requirement of the
system.
11.7 Chemicals Store, Chemical Laboratory and Maintenance Room
(Space)
11.7.1The size of chemical store for chemical water treatment shall be determined
according to the factors, including the chemicals consumption, distance of
transportation, packaging, conditions of supply, transportation, etc.
In the chemical store, corresponding anticorrosion measures shall be taken and the
necessary mechanized facilities for loading and unloading and transportation shall be
provided.
11.8 Anticorrosion
11.8.1 In the water treatment system, all the equipment, valve and pipes which are in
contact with corrosive mediums and affecting the quality of effluent water, shall be
coated or lined with appropriate anticorrosive layer or shall be made of anticorrosive
materials.
12 Thermal engineering automation
12.1 General regulations

12.1.1 When designing the thermal engineering automation systems and facilities of
power plants, the rules of Safety and reliable, economical and suitable, conform to
the conditions of China must be observed, and the designs must be done according to
the properties of the units, in order to meet the requirements of safety, economical
operation and starting and stopping.
12.1.2 When designing the thermal engineering automation systems and facilities of
power plants, the facilities and elements made of advanced technique and reliable
quality shall be selected.
For new products and techniques, they shall be adopted in the design after the
experience of operation has been got.
For the imported products from other countries, including thermal engineering
automation systems in the complete set of imported systems, they are also the systems
and products with advanced techniques and ripe experiences.
12.2 The level of the thermal engineering automation

12.2.1 The level of the thermal engineering automation must be comprehensively
shown in many respects. They are the control mode, the arrangement and function of
the thermal engineering automation systems, operation and organization, the layout of
the control room and controllable properties of the main and auxiliary facilities, and
etc.
12.2.2 The level of the thermal engineering automation shall be defined according to
the unit function in electrical net, the capacity of the unit and its features, as well as
the estimated operating and managing level of the power plant and etc.
12.2.3 Concentrically controlled units shall have a higher thermal engineering

automation level. They shall be able to supervise and adjust the starting and stopping
and the operation situations, as well as the trouble shutting in a control room with the
help of the tour inspections and a few operations of the on site personnel.
12.2.4 Scatter controlled systems shall be adopted for the main thermal engineering
automation system of the unit. Its functions include data accumulating and handling,
simulated data controlling, sequence controlling and safety supervising of the inner
furnaces. For the units of 50MW to 200MW, the function can be simplified
adaptively.
For the units of 300MW or larger, if the response speed allows and the successful
experiences have been got, the protection to the turbines can be integrated into the
scatter controlled system.
12.2.5 The inspecting meters and operating facilities provided and equipped as a
complete set together with the main and auxiliary facilities shall meet the
requirements of the unit operation, the functions of the thermal engineering
automation system and the interface technique and etc.
12.3 The control mode and the control room

12.3.1 The new units with the capacity of 125MW and above, as well as the enlarged
units with the capacity of 200MW and above shall be under a concentrated control in
the unit control room of furnaces, mechanism and electricity. The enlarged modular
unit with the capacity of 125MW, the concentrated control can be either furnaces,
mechanism and electricity or furnaces and mechanism according to the actual
situations..
In bus tube system power plants, the shop or furnace concentrated control can be used.
On site control can also be used.
12.3.2 De-oxygen water providing system of modular system or enlarged modular

system shall be controlled in the unit control room or furnace and mechanism
concentrated control room.
12.3.3 The heating net system of thermal power plants providing city heating and
industrial steam shall be controlled in the unit control room, or set up a separate
control room for the heating net.
12.3.4 For the unit of 300MW and above, the cycling water pump shall be controlled
in the unit control room. When adopting modular water supplying systems, the control
of the cycling water pump shall be integrated into relative modular unit scatter control
system. When adopting enlarged modular water supplying system, the control of the
cycling water pump shall be integrated into a common scatter control system net of
two units. If the pump room is far out from the plant area, it can be controlled in the
shop.
For the adjacent auxiliary shops or auxiliary technological systems of similar feature,
the control systems and their control points shall be merged. The control points shall
not exceed 3 (coal transportation, ash elimination, water dissolving), the rest shops
can be all designed according to the situation of non-person operation.
12.3.5 The air cooling system of the air cooling unit shall be better to be controlled in
the unit control room.
12.4 Thermal engineering inspection

12.4.1 Thermal engineering inspection includes the following:
1. The operation parameters of the technological system;
2. The operation situations of the auxiliary;
3. The opening and closing modes of electrical, pneumatic and hydraulic
valves and the opening of the adjusting valve;
4. The supply situations and operation parameters of the electrical source, gas
source, water source used to meters and controls and other needed
conditions;
5. Necessary environment parameters.
12.4.2 The supervision of the parameters and conditions of the main electrical systems
and facilities shall also be included in the scatter control system of concentrated
controlling furnaces, mechanism and electricity.
12.4.3 For the furnaces whose capacity is 410t/h and above, the industrial TV
supervising the flame in the furnaces shall be set up.
For the turbine generator units with single unit capacity of 200MV and larger, one set
of vibration supervising and trouble diagnosing system shall be equipped for several
units. The shaft vibration signals are connected in from the turbine supervising
meters.
For the furnaces with 300MW and larger capacity units, one set of furnace tube
leakage supervising system shall be set up for several furnaces.
12.4.4 For the units with single unit capacity of 300MW and above, the supervising
signals of the metal temperature of the furnaces and turbines, coil of the generators
and the iron core temperature shall be sent into the scatter control system by a
separate remote I/O through a data interface. If reasonable in the technical and
economic respects, it can be done by a remote I/O of a scatter control system directly.
12.4.5 The meters that can only be used one time for measuring oil, water, steam and
others shall not be led into the control room. The relative grade anti-explosion
procedures shall be used to the meters measuring the parameters of the burnable gas.
Leading its meters that can only be used one time into the control room shall be
forbidden strictly.
12.4.6 The instruments and meters that contain the harmful substances to humans
shall not be used in the power plant. The usage of the meters that contain mercury are
forbidden strictly.
12.4.7 The necessary on-site thermal engineering inspection meters shall be set up in
power plants for operators to check and operate on site.
12.5 Thermal engineering alarm

12.5.1 The thermal engineering alarm consists of the normal alarm and/or the alarm
function in the data accumulating system. Thermal engineering alarm shall include the
following:
1. The thermal engineering parameters in the technological system offset the
normal operation range;
2. The thermal engineering protection functions improperly and troubles occur
in the main auxiliary facilities;
3. Troubles occur in the thermal engineering supervising system;
4. Troubles occur in the thermal engineering power supply and gas supply.
5. Main electrical facility troubles;
6. Auxiliary system troubles.
12.5.2 When the normal alarm is set, the input signal shall not be got from the output
of the scatter control system.
All the simulated data inputs, numeral data inputs, simulated data outputs, numeral
data outputs, intermediate variables and the calculated values of the scatter control
system can be all used as the alarm sources of the data accumulating system.
12.5.3 There shall be the functions of automatic flash, repeat sound and man-made
confirmation in the normal alarm systems of control rooms. They shall have the
functions of light testing, sound testing and returning.
12.5.4 All the alarm items in the function range of the scatter control system shall be
displayed on the cathode-ray tubes and printed on printers. The wrong alarm signals
shall be restrained during the periods of unit starting and stopping.
12.6 Thermal engineering protection

12.6.1 The thermal engineering protection shall meet the following requirements:
1. There shall be the procedures of preventing the thermal engineering
protection systems from wrong function and action refusal during designing
thermal engineering protection systems. The power supply of the protection
system turns off or resets, and the wrong action instruction can not be sent.
2. The thermal engineering protection system shall observe the following
stand alone regulations:
1) The logical control unit of the furnace and mechanism protection system
shall be set separately and redundantly.
2) There shall be a separated I/O passage in the protection system, and
procedures of electrical insulating.
3) Redundant I/O signals shall be led through different I/O modular parts.
4) The switch meters of the trigger unit cut protection signals and transmitters
shall be set separately. If having difficulties indeed and they need to be
shared with other systems, the signals shall be entered into the protection
system at first.
5) The instruction of unit cut shall not be transmitted by the communication
bus.
3. The action test to the unit cut protection circuit whose capacity is 300MW
and above can be done in the condition of not stopping its protection
functions and not affecting its normal operations during the unit operation.
4. The main fuel cut, the cut button of stopping the turbine and the cut button
of stopping generator must be set on the control panel. The cut buttons
shall be connected directly to the drive circuit of stopping furnaces and
machines.
5. The reasons of the protection actions such as furnace stopping and
machine stopping shall be recorded on the event sequences. The modular
units shall also have memory functions.
6. The operation instructions from the output of the thermal engineering
protection system shall be prior to any other instructions. That is, the rule
of protection first has to be observed.
7. Any operation facilities for operators to cut off or put into protection shall
not be set in the protection system.
12.6.2 For the units that the unit protection functions are not be integrated into scatter
control systems, the functions can be realized by the programmable controllers or
relays. When using programmable controllers, there shall be communication
interfaces with scatter control systems, and the supervision information are sent to the
scatter control system.
12.6.3 If one of the following situations appears, there shall be the protection of
stopping the unit operations:
1. Furnace emergency stopping;
2. Turbine emergency stopping;
3. The main protection action of the generator;
4. The generator operation stopping because of any reasons if no rapid load
cutting function is set on the modular unit.
12.6.4 The following protection shall be set to furnaces:

1. There shall be following engineering protections in the furnace water
providing system.
1) The level protections of steam packages for the steam package furnaces;
2) Lower flow protections of the DC furnace water providing systems.
2 There shall be the following thermal engineering protection in furnace steam
systems:
1) The overpressure protections of the main steam;
2) The overpressure protections of the re-heated steam;
3) The water splashing protections of the re-heated steam.
3. The safety protection of furnace chambers shall include the following
functions:
1) Blowing and cleaning of furnaces;
2) Testing the leakage of oil systems;
3) Putting out fire protection;
4) The pressure protection of the furnace chamber.
4. If one of the following situations appears in furnaces during the operation,
main fuel cut instructions shall be sent to realize the emergency furnace
stopping protection:
1) Manual furnace stopping instruction;
2) The flame in the whole furnace chamber is put off;
3) Overpressure or too low pressure in the furnace chamber;
4) Too high or too low steam package level;
5) All the wind transmitters cut off;
6) All the wind leaders cut off;
7) When the coal burning unit is put into operation, all the fans that can
only be used one time cut off;
8) Fuel is suspended thoroughly;
9) Too low total wind amount;
10) No electricity in the safety supervising systems of furnace chambers;
11) Other furnace stopping protection conditions required by furnace
features such as the over temperature of re-heating units for which the
dry burning is not allowed and the cutting off of all the furnace water
cycling pumps that force the furnace cycling.
12.6.5 The following protections shall be equipped in turbines:

1. The emergency stopping protection shall be provided in case of one of the
followings in turbine generator units during operations:
1) The turbine over speed;
2) Too low vacuum in steam condensing units;
3) Too low lubricant pressure;
4) Larger bearing vibration;
5) Larger axial displacement;
6) Trouble in the cooling systems of generators;
7) Stopping manually;
8) No electricity in the numerous electro-hydraulic control systems of
turbines;
9) Other protection items provided by turbine and generator manufacturers.
2. The following thermal engineering protections shall also be provided:
1) Steam extracting for the protection of the reverse flow;
2) The protection preventing low-pressure cylinder from over temperature;
3) The protection preventing turbines from water entering;
4) The protection preventing turbines from lower vacuum.
12.6.6 The following thermal engineering protections shall also be provided in the
thermal systems of power plants:
1. Water level and pressure protection for de-oxygen units;
2. Water level protection for the heating units of high and low pressures;
3. The protections for the low pressure of the temperature reducing water in
turbine bypass systems and high temperature at the output ports;
4. Relative protections for air cooling units.
12.6.7 The thermal engineering protections of main auxiliary machines in power

plants (such as water providing pumps, wind transmitting units, suction fans and etc.)
shall be designed according to operation requirements of the thermal systems and
burning systems in power plants, and referring to the technical specifications of the
auxiliary manufacturers.
12.7 The control and interlock of the switch

12.7.1 The switch control functions shall meet the requirements of the unit starting,
stopping and normal operation conditions, and finish the control operations in unit
troubles and emergencies for the unit safety. The switch control shall have the
following functions:
1. The sequence control of rotating the main or auxiliary units, valves, stopping
plates, control operations and testing operations;
2. The interlock control of large auxiliaries with relative cooling systems,
lubricant systems and sealing systems;
3. Interlocked starting the backup facilities when the local ones are cut off by
troubles;
4. The condition alarm, interaction, and protections of single rotating unit.
12.7.2 Sequence control shall be adopted for the auxiliary technological systems that
often need regular operations. The sequence control systems shall include the
sequence control systems for the main and auxiliary units of modular units, and the
sequence control systems of the auxiliary systems in power plants. The sequence
control of units shall be mainly relied on the sub-function groups. That is the
sequence control of the relative facilities in an auxiliary technological system.
12.7.3 The following interlocked items shall be provided to furnace auxiliary units:
1. The sequence interlock in case of the cutting off caused by the starting,
stopping and emergency of furnace suction fans, rotating air pre-heating units
and wind transmitters;
2. The cutting off sequences of furnace suction fans, rotating air pre-heating units
and wind transmitters, as well as the opening and closing interlock of the three
above with relative stop plates in smoke and wind passage ways;
3. In case that all the wind transmitters stop operations, the operation stopping
interlock of the burning systems and powder producing systems;
4. The sequence interlock when the coal providing machines, coal grinding
machines, fans only used one time, or powder deposit machines are cut off
because of the starting, stopping and emergency;
5. The interlock between the powder depositing and providing machines in the
powder transportation system;
6. The interlock between the starting and stopping of the smoke recycling fans
and the wind output door and cool wind door;
7. The interlock of the large auxiliaries and their lubricating systems, cooling and
sealing systems, as well as the self-starting interlock of the backup pumps
when the working pumps are cut off because of the pump emergencies in the
systems.
12.7.4 The following interlocks shall be provided in turbine auxiliaries:

1. The interlock between the AC lubricating pumps, DC lubricating pumps, top
shaft pumps and jigger units and lubricating oil pressure;
2. The interlock between water providing pumps, water condensing pumps,
pressure raising pumps of condensed water, vacuum pumps, cycling water
pumps, water drainage pumps as well as all kinds of water pumps and the
pressures in their relative systems;
3. The interlock of backup pump self-starting when working pumps are cut off
caused by emergencies;
4. The interlock between all kinds of pumps and electrical valves at the input and
output ports.
12.7.5 When not integrated into scatter control systems, the unit sequence control
functions shall be realized with programmable controllers. There shall be a
communication interface between the programmable controllers and scatter control
systems. The switch control of auxiliary technological systems can be finished by
programmable controllers.
12.7.6 The rule of putting protection and interlock operations in the first position shall
be followed in the sequence control design. If the protection and interlock instructions
are given during the sequence control process, the control process shall be interrupted,
and assure that the technological systems can be operated according to the protection
and interlock instructions.
If any troubles occur in the sequence control, or the sequence control is interrupted by
operators during the automatic operations, the working program shall be interrupted,
and the technological system shall be in its safety condition.
There shall be procedures of preventing mis-functions in sequence control systems.
12.8 Thermal engineering simulated amount control

12.8.1 There shall be perfect thermal engineering simulated amount control systems
in units of all kinds of capacities. The coordinated control of machines and furnaces
shall be adopted in modular units, and can be taken part in the first and second
frequency modulations. The functions shall be selected according to the unit
capacities. The operation modes of coordinated control systems with capacity of
300MW and above shall be better to include the coordination of machines and
furnaces, machine tracing, furnace tracing and manual modes.
The control circuit of all the simulated amount control systems shall be designed
according to the rules of reality and reliability, and suitable for the needs of the unit
safe operations during the starting and different load operation if possible. The
procedures of coordinated control with relative interlock shall also be taken into
consideration in the conditions of unit troubles and mis-functions.
The given load control systems of furnaces with the given pressure verified at the
steam bus tubes shall be adopted for the bus tube units.
12.8.2 The electrical adjusting systems shall be provided to the units of 125MW and
above. There shall be at least the functions of rotation speed control, load control,
automatic starting and stopping control as well as tension supervision in turbine
electrical adjusting system of 300MW unit or above.
12.8.3 The switching logic and double direction non-disturbing switching function
shall be provided between all kinds of control modes in machine and furnace control
system.
12.8.4 Two grade (or three grade) set shall be adopted in transmitters of the important
thermal engineering simulated amount control projects.
12.9 The scatter control system of units

12.9.1 Turbine plants shall be responsible for the turbine numerous electro-hydraulic
control systems and water pump turbine numerous electro-hydraulic control systems.
The rule of ripeness and reliability shall be insisted on during the selection. When the
selection of the turbine numerous electro-hydraulic control system is not in
accordance with the selection of the scatter control system, a communication interface
shall be provided to realize the information exchanges with the scatter control system.
12.9.2 When the sequence controls of generator and transformer combination of

modular units and the plant used power supply system are integrated into scatter
control systems, the automatic switching functions of the automatic voltage adjusting
units in generator exciting systems, automatic simultaneous units, relay protections,
trouble wave recorder as well as plant used power supply shall be realized by special
units.
12.9.3 If many common systems are integrated into the modular duty personnel
controls in the projects, (for example: common plant used power supply system, water
cycling pump room, compressor station), a common net shall be provided for two
units. These systems shall be integrated into common scatter control system net, and
connected with the scatter control systems of two units by communication interfaces.
The common systems above-mentioned shall be able to be supervised and controlled
in two scatter control systems, and assure that only one unit can give the valid
operation instructions at any time. Under the condition of no successful operation
experiences and enough discussions, the direct coupling of the two unit scatter control
system net caused by the common plant used power supply system shall be avoided.
12.9.4 When adopting scatter control system including 4 functions in units, very few
operation facilities shall be provided to assure the safe stopping. One modular unit
shall be designed according to the rule of concentrated controlled by modular unit
duty personnel.
The backup supervising facilities shall be provided according to the following
regulations:
1. When the overall or significant troubles occur in scatter control systems, (such as
the power supply disappears in scatter control systems, communication is
interrupted, all the operator stations lose their functions, important control stations
lose their control and protection functions and etc.), the following backup
operating procedures that are independent of scatter control systems shall be
provided in order to assure the emergency safety stopping of the units.
1) Turbine cut off;
2) Main fuel cut off;
3) Generator and transformer combination cut off;
4) Furnace safety door (it can not be provided when using mechanical type);
5) The emergency drainage door of steam packages;
6) Vacuum destroying door of the turbine;
7) DC lubricating oil pump;
8) AC lubricating oil pump;
9) De-magnet switch of generators;
10) Engine start.
2. For the modular unit sequence control systems and simulated amount control
systems, the backup operating units can not be provided.
3. Only when the scatter control systems can not reach the accuracy, other
indicating and recording meters except the electrical scale meters for
recognizing time and trouble wave recorders shall not be provided.
4. The alarm units with normal lightened word plates shall not be provided to
machines and furnaces. If necessary, the alarm windows with less than 20
lightened word plates can be provided according to the following rules to each
modular unit:
1) The most important parameters offset the normal values;
2) The main protections of modular unit cut off ;
3) The power supply troubles of the important control units.
When the function range of scatter control system used for 200MW and below is
less than 4 functions, the control systems not integrated shall be provided with
supervision facilities according to the needs.
12.9.5 Scatter control system shall be designed according to the layered regulation.
The hardware and software of drive grade in auxiliaries and valves (stop plates) shall
be operated independent to the former grade, and assure the allowed safety starting
and stopping conditions of the auxiliaries, and the protection signals are directly led
into the control modules in the drive grades.
The thermal engineering protection, interlock signals and logic can be integrated into
scatter control systems (or programmable logical controllers) together with the
sequence control logic.
12.10 Plant level supervision and management information system

12.10.1 When the planed capacity of power plants is 1200MW and above and the
single unit capacity is 300MW and above, the plant level real time supervising
systems can be provided. The perfect communication interfaces between the plant
level real time supervising system and the scatter control systems in modular units as
well as the control systems of common auxiliary systems.
12.10.2 In the machine and furnace coordinated control system of 125MW and above
modular units, the interface to the automatic generating control of electrical net shall
be provided. The motion terminals shall be connected with the machine and furnace
coordinated control system by the rigid connections. When the plant level supervision
system is provided, the dispatching automation system of the electrical net shall also
be connected with plant-level supervision system and communicate and exchange
dispatching instructions and information with the unit scatter control system.
12.10.3 The dispatching end shall send the signals of the generating power set values,
the remote control mode instructions on giving or eliminating the unit loads, as well
as the automatic generating control and exiting control of the electrical net to the
power plant.
The power plant shall transmit the signals of current, maximum and minimum output
forces of the unit, the control mode (remote or local), unit trouble subtract load,
exiting one time frequency modification and allowing the remote controls to the
dispatching end.
12.10.4 The installation of the management information system in power plant shall
be done step by step by every separate power plant according to the real needs and
comprehensive plan on the technique development reality. The end function mainly
includes the commercial management, facility and repair management, operation
management, fuel management, key instruction inquiry, safety and environment
management, money and material management, personnel source management, office
automation and etc.
12.11 Thermal engineering power supply

12.11.1 The voltage grade of the input power supplies in thermal engineering control
cabinets (plates) must not exceed 220V. The AC and DC power supplies entering the
control cabinets (plates) shall have two ways for each and be backup each other
besides not affecting the safety by a period of electricity turning off. If there is a
trouble in a working power supply and it needed to be switched to another one, the
automatic switch unit shall be provided.
12.11.2 There shall be a two-way input power supply in the thermal engineering AC
power supply box of each group. They are led from different sections of low-pressure
bus wire. In the power plants that have emergency safety power supplies, one of the
input power supplies shall be led from the sections of the emergency safety power
supply used only for the plant.
12.11.3 For the control power supply for scatter control systems, turbine
electro-hydraulic systems, unit protection circuits, fire checking units and fire
checking cooling fans, AC non-interrupt power supply shall be used in one way, and
the other way is from the safety sections of the power supply that is only used in its
own plant.
12.11.4 The AC non-interrupt power supplies can be concentrated installed for each
unit, and can also be distributively installed.
12.12 The cables pipelines and on-site facility layout used in thermal
engineering
12.12.1 The core material of the cables and wires used in the thermal engineering
measurement, control, power circuits shall be made of copper. The core material of
the compensating cables or compensating wires used for the measurement and control
shall be the same as those of thermal coupling wires connected or matched with the
thermal electricity features.
For the meters and the computer lines required to anti-disturb, the insulating cables of
the relative insulating type shall be used.
For some of the thermal engineering meters and control facilities, when there are
special requirements on the specifications of connecting cables and wires supposed by
the manufactures, the design shall be done according to the requirements of the
facility producers.
12.12.2 The thermal engineering cables shall be laid in the cable bridge frame. The
bridge frame passage ways shall not subject to the hazards of the mechanical external
forces, over heat, corrosion as well as the materials that are easy to be burned and
exploded and others. They shall be insulated according to the requirement of
preventing fire hazard.
12.12.3 The source getting parts shall be installed on the technological facilities
(pipelines) that can truly show the media parameters measured. The materials of the
first grade pressure guiding tubes and first grade valves shall be selected according to
the possible highest pressure and temperature the measured media possibly reaches,
and the weld technological requirements shall be taken into consideration. The
materials of the second grade guiding tubes, second grade valves, dirt exhausting
valves, testing valves and the pipe accessories shall meet the highest temperature
requirements possibly reached at the highest pressure and when exhausting dirt.
12.12.4 The casing of the thermal engineering facilities, the circular plate without
necessary of floating, the metal bridge frame, and the armored layer of the armored
cables shall be protectively ground. The protection ground shall be fastened and
reliable, and shall not be ground through a series connection. The resistance value of
the protection ground shall be in accordance with the current ground regulations on
the electricity protection.
Computer systems shall be commonly ground with the ground net of the whole plant.
The special separate ground net shall not be installed. The stable and reliable bus
ground plate (box) shall be respectively provided to different kinds of ground in all
the computer systems, such as power supply ground, logical ground, machine and
cabinet ground after being suspended and etc. If the computer producers have special
requirements, the design is done according to their requirements.
The insulating layer of the computer signal cable must be ground.
12.12.5 The necessary procedures of protections, preventing from being frozen, as

well as preventing from explosion for the on-site installed thermal engineering
facilities shall be adopted.
12.13 Simulating machines for training

12.13.1 Whether to install the simulating machines for training for the unit of 600MW
and above capacity shall be discussed according to the local coordination rules by all
the separate power plants.
12.13.2 The simulating machines for training shall be simulated according to the
whole range and whole process. Secondary auxiliary system can be simplified
adaptively.
13 Electrical Appliances and System
13.1 Electric generator and main transformer

13.1.1 The type selection and technical requirements of an electric generator and its
excitation system shall conform to GB/T7064 Technical Requirements for Turbine
Type Synchronous Machine, GB/T7409.1--7409.3 Excitation System of Synchronous
Machine, and DL/T650 Technical Conditions for Large-sized Steam Turbo-generator
Self Shunt Excitation Static Excitation System respectively.
13.1.2 For some of the technical conditions for an electric generator with a capacity
no less than 300MW, the following requirements shall be conformed to:
1 The selection conditions for the capacities of an electric generator and a steam
turbine shall reach an intercoordination. With rated power factor and rated
hydrogen pressure, the rated capacity of an electric generator shall be selected
based on matching the nominal rating of the steam turbine, and the
maximum-continuous capacity of the electric generator shall be selected based
on matching the maximum continuous rating, but the water inlet temperature of
the electric generator's cooler shall be in accordance with the temperature of
cooling water of the steam turbine under the corresponding working condition.
2 The natural torsional vibration frequency of a steam turbo-generator's shaft line
shall not be power frequency and twice power frequency.
3 The structure strength of any component of a steam turbo-generator shall not
only withstand malfunctions such as sudden short-circuit of any type at its tip
under a rated load and 105% rated voltage but also withstand the single-pole
reclosing of a breaker in a high-tension transmission line that is connected to it.
4 In accordance with the requirements for an electric system, an electric generator
shall possess capacity for leading phase, peaking, and asynchronous operation
with a short-time loss of excitation;
5 The characteristics and parameters of an excitation system shall meet the
requirements of an electric system with different kinds of modes of operation,
and it is preferred to adopt a mature mode recommended by the manufacturer.
When the system's stability calculation shows that the ceiling voltage multiple
really require no less than two times, by a comparison of technical economy, a
self shunt excitation static excitation system made by the plant that produces the
host machine can also be adopted.
13.1.3 For the main transformer that is connected with an assembling unit with a
capacity of 300MW, if it is not confined by transportation conditions, a three-phase
transformer shall be adopted; for the main transformer that is connected with a
assembling unit with a capacity of 600MW, transportation conditions and manufacture
conditions shall be taken into consideration comprehensively, and by a comparison of
technical economy, single-phase or three-phase transformer can be adopted.
When a single-phase transformer is adopted, whether it is required to install a standby
phase shall be determined according to the connected electric system and equipment
conditions.
13.1.4 For a power plant having a generating set with a capacity no greater than
60MW, there shall be at least two main transformers that are connected with the
generator voltage bus bares. The total capacity of the two main transformers shall
meet the following requirements based on considering the load development year by
year:
1 When the load of a generator voltage bus bar is the minimum, they can deliver the
surplus power into the electric system.
2 When the electric generator of the maximum capacity connected with a generator
voltage bus bar shut down, or the output of this plant needs to be confined due to
the variation of heating generating set's heat load, they are able to receive power
from the electric system to meet the requirement of the peak load for the generator
voltage bus bar.
13.1.5 When a kind of unit connection exists between a main transformer and an
electric generator with a capacity no less than 200MW, the capacity of this
transformer can be selected according to the electric generator's maximum continuous
capacity deducting the calculated load of a station-service working transformer, as
well as the average temperature difference of the transformer winding being not more
than 65 under a standard ambient temperature or temperature of cooling water.
13.1.6 The outlet voltage of a power plant whose minimal generating set has a
capacity no less than 100MW shall not exceed two kinds. The small amount of loads
for the neighborhood of the power plant is preferred to be supplied by a regional
electric network.
The power supply voltage and delivery order for the load in the vicinity of a heat
power plant shall be determined by a cost-effectiveness analysis.
13.1.7 When a power plant with a maximum unit capacity of no greater than 125MW
supplies consumers with power by two kinds of boosting voltages or is connected
with an electric system, it is preferred to adopt a three-circuit transformer as the main
transformer; however, the throughput of every winding shall reach 15% of the rated
capacity of the transformer.
It is preferred to adopt a three-circuit transformer for a generating set with a capacity
on less than 200MW. If connection between high voltage and medium voltage is
required, an interconnecting transformer can be set up in the power plant or the
connection can be realized by way of a transformer station.
It is not preferred that there are more than two three-circuit transformers connecting
two kinds of boosting voltages.
If two kinds of boosting voltages belong to a neutral-point solid ground system and
cost-effectiveness analysis is in reason, an autotransformer can be adopted. But the
primary direction of tide shall be power transmission from low voltage and medium
voltage to high voltage.
13.1.8 For the interconnecting transformer with a great variation in tidal current and
voltage excursion, an on-load tap-changing transformer can be adopted.
13.2 Main electrical scheme

13.2.1 The generator voltage of a generating set with a capacity of no greater than
60MW can be selected according to the following conditions:
1 When there is straight wiring of generator voltage, 6.3kV or 10.5kV can be
adopted according to the requirements of a local network;
2 When a kind of unit connection exists between an electric generator and the
main transformer, and station-service branch wires draw out the power, it is
preferred to adopt 6.3kV.
13.2.2 If the unit capacity of the power plant accessing an electric system is relatively
small and does not match the electric system, and the cost-effectiveness analysis is
reasonable, two electric generators and one transformer (two-winding transformer or
split winding transformer) can be connected with an enlarged unit connection, and
also a combined unit connection can be realized by two sets of electric generators and
one two-winding transformer sharing a high-tension side breaker.
13.2.3 Double bus bar or double bus bar sectioning can be adopted as the mode of
connection for generator voltage bus bar. In order to limit the short circuit current,
electric reactors can be installed in the circuit of sectioning of bus bar. If the method
fails to meet the requirements, split reactors can be installed in the circuit of electric
generator or main transformer, and also electric reactors can be installed in the
straight wiring.
13.2.4 The rated current of a bus-sectionalizing reactor shall be selected in accordance

with the electric current that possibly passes through the electric reactor when the
electric generator with the maximum capacity is switched off. When there are no
accurate data about load, the rate current can also be selected according to 50%80%
of the rated current of the generator.
13.2.5 When the cost-effectiveness analysis is reasonable, a unit connection mode of

electric generatortransformerwiring can be adopted for the generating set with a
capacity no less than 200MW.
13.2.6 Disconnecting switches shall not be installed in a lightning arrester of 330kV

500kV. It is preferred to use a suite of disconnecting switches for the bus bar lightning
arrester and voltage transformer of 220kV and below. It is not preferred to install
disconnecting switches for 1l0kV500kV line voltage transformers and coupling
condensers or capacitance voltage transformers. And it is also not preferred to install
disconnecting switches in a line lightning arrester of 220kV and below as well as the
lightning arresters connected to the outgoing lines of an electric generator and
transformer; a disconnecting switch shall not be installed in a transformer's neutral
point lightning arrester.
13.2.7 It is not preferred to install breakers or load switches in a parallel reactor

circuit of a 330kV500kV line, but with some specific functions and mode of
operation, the installation is possible.
It is preferred to adopt a mode of connection of single bus bar for the connection
between the parallel reactor on low voltage side of the 330kV 500kV
interconnecting transformer and its power supply.
13.2.8 When it is a unit connection between an electric generators with a capacity no

greater than 125MW and a two-winding transformer, it is preferred to set up a breaker
between the electric generator and the transformer; When it is a unit connection
between an electric generator and a three-circuit transformer or an autotransformer, it
is preferred to set up a breaker and a disconnecting switch between the electric
generator and the transformer; and the station-service branch wires shall be connected
between the transformer and the breaker.
When it is a unit connection between an electric generator with a capacity of
200MW 300MW and a two-winding transformer, no breaker, load switch or
disconnecting switch can be set up between the electric generator and the transformer,
but a releasable connection point shall be available.
If the cost-effectiveness analysis result is reasonable, a breaker or load switch can be
set up in the electric generator outlet of a generating set with a capacity of 600MW; at
this point, a mode of load voltage regulation shall be adopted for the main transformer
or the high voltage station-service working transformer.
When an enlarged unit connection is adopted for two electric generators and one
transformer, or a combined unit connection is adopted for two electric generators and
two-winding transformer groups, breakers and disconnecting switches shall be set up
between the electric generator and the transformer.
13.2.9 A fully connected split phase enclosed bus bar shall be adopted for the outlets
of electric generators with a capacity no less than 200MW, for the station-service
branch wires, as well as for the down leads of circuit of a voltage transformer or a
lightning arrester.
13.2.10 For the grounding mode of a generator neutral point, being ungrounded or
being connected to earth by way of arc suppression coils or high resistance can be
adopted. For the electric generator with a capacity no less than 300MW, neutral point
through an arc suppression coil or high resistance can be adopted as the grounding
mode.
13.2.11 The mode of connection of a 35kV220kV power distribution unit shall be
determined in accordance with the status of the power plant in the electric system, the
importance of the load, the number of outgoing circuits, the characteristics of
equipment, the type of power distribution unit, and the stand-alone and planning
capacity of the power plant.
If the power distribution unit is very important in an electric system, the load is high,
the variation of tidal current is great, and the number of outgoing circuits is big, it is
preferred to adopt a connection mode of double bus or double sectioning bus.
For the 110kV220kV power distribution unit of single bus bar or double bus bar,
when electric appliances of sulfur hexafluoride complete shut-off association are
adopted, no bypassing facilities shall be set up; when the breaker is of sulfur
hexafluoride type, it is not preferred to set up bypassing facilities; when the breaker is
of oil-minimum type, it is preferred to set up bypassing facilities except for the
switch-off overhaul of breaker conditionally; when the 220kV outgoing lines are of
four circuits and above and the 1l0kV outgoing lines are of six circuits and above,
by-pass buses with dedicated bypassing breakers can be adopted.
If a double bus sectioning connection is unable to meet the requirements of the
electric system stability and regional power distribution reliability, and it is reasonable
in terms of technical economy, a mode of connection by using a semi-breaker can be
adopted for the 220kV power distribution unit in a power plant having a generating
set with a capacity no less than 300MW.
When a single bus bar sectioning connection is adopted for a 35kV63kV power
distribution unit as well as the breaker is under overhaul by power off unconditionally,
a by-pass bus without dedicated bypassing breakers can be set up; When a double bus
connection is adopted, it is not preferred to set up a by-pass bus; if possible, a
bypassing disconnecting switch can be set up.
It is not preferred that the breaker on the high-voltage side of a generator transformer
is connected to a by-pass bus.
In the early stage works, a transition mode of connection with a few breakers can be
adopted; but the arrangement of power distribution units shall be convenient for the
ultimate connection.
13.2.12 When a power plant is connected to a system with a 220kV voltage, if double
bus sectioning connection is adopted, section breakers can be set up according to the
following conditions:
1 For the generating set with a capacity no greater than 200MW, when the
total installed capacity of the power plant is no less than 800MW and the
number of the incoming and outgoing feeders of the 220kV power
distribution unit reaches 1014, a double-bus single sectioning connection
can be adopted; when the total installed capacity of the power plant is no
less than 1000MW and the number of the incoming and outgoing feeders of
the 220kV power distribution unit reaches 15 or above, a double-bus double
sectioning connection can be adopted.
2 For the generating set with a capacity of 300MW, if the total installed
generator number of the power plant is 3 or above, in the adoption of a
double bus sectioning connection, the requirements such as the stability of
the electric system and the regional power distribution reliability shall be
taken into consideration. When any of the breakers goes wrong or refuses
operation, whether a double bus single sectioning connection or a double bus
double sectioning connection is adopted depends on the number of outgoing
circuits as well as the number of generating sets that are permissible to be
switched off according to the system stability and the regional power supply.
For a large-sized electric system with a capacity exceeding 10000MW, if the
power plant is outfitted with 34 generating sets, a double bus single
sectioning connection can be adopted; if the number of generating set
exceeds four, a double bus double sectioning connection can be adopted. For
a medium size electric system with a capacity of 5000MW10000MW,
when the power plant is outfitted with three generating sets, a double bus
single sectioning connection can be adopted; When the power plant is
outfitted with four generating sets, a double bus double sectioning
connection can be adopted.
3 If the arrangement of a 220kV power distribution unit with a double bus
double sectioning connection is difficult, the adoption of a double bus single
sectioning connection can be taken into consideration.
13.2.13 The connection for a 330kV500kV power distribution unit must meet the
requirements of system stability and reliability as well as operational flexibility and
constructive economical efficiency. If the number of incoming and outgoing feeders is
6 or above, and the power distribution unit is very important in the system, it is
preferred to adopt a semi-breaker connection; if the number of incoming and outgoing
feeders is less than 6, and the requirements of system stability and reliability can still
be met, a double bus connection can also be adopted.
In the connection of a semi-breaker, power lines are preferred to match the load lines
and form strings, and homonymous circuits shall be arranged in different strings. In
the early stage when there are only two strings, homonymous circuits are preferred to
access bus bars in different sides, and disconnecting switches shall be installed for
incoming and outgoing feeders. When the number of the connections of a
semi-breaker is 3 or above, homonymous circuits can be connected to the bus bars in
the same side, and it is not preferred to install disconnecting switches for incoming
and outgoing feeders.
In a double bus sectioning connection, it is preferred that power lines and load lines
be evenly distributed in bus bars of all sections.
13.3 Station-service electrical system

13.3.1 In a power plant, 3kV6kVand 10kV can be taken as high-tension station
service voltage. For the generating sets with a capacity no greater than 60MW, if the
generator voltage is 10.5kV, 3kV can be adopted; if the generator voltage is 6.3kV,
6kV can be adopted; for the generating sets with a capacity of 100MW ~ 300MW, it is
preferred to adopt 6kV; For the generating sets with a capacity of 600MW, in
accordance with actual conditions of works, 6kV alone or a combination of 3kV and
10kV can be adopted as high-tension station service voltage.
For a generating set with a capacity no less than 200MW, the low voltage station
service electrical system in the main generator hall shall adopt a supply mode of
separation between power supply and illumination supply. It is preferred to adopt
380V as the voltage of the power network.
13.3.2 When the electric current of the direct earth capacitance of a high voltage
station service electrical system is below 7A, it is preferred to adopt a high-resistance
grounding mode for its neutral point, or an ungrounded mode can also be adopted;
When the electric current of the direct earth capacitance is no less than 7A, it is
preferred to adopt a low-resistance grounding mode for its neutral point, or an
ungrounded mode can also be adopted;
13.3.3 A high-resistance grounding mode is also preferred for the neutral point of the
low voltage station service electrical system in a main generator hall, or a
neutral-point solid grounding mode can also be adopted.
13.3.4 The load impertinent to the production of a power plant shall not be connected
to a station service electrical system.
13.3.5 For the electric generators adopting a unit system connection mode, if there are
no breaker or load switch in the outlet, pressure adjustment with load shall not be
adopted for the high-voltage station-service working transformer that is connected to
station-service branch wires; for a heavy-duty generator with a requirement of leading
phase operation, the mode of voltage regulation of its station transformer shall be
determined after an all-sided cost-effectiveness analysis.
The selection of both the impedance and the mode of voltage regulation for a high
voltage station service standby transformer shall be determined by calculation and
cost-effectiveness analyses.
13.3.6 For the operational power supply of high voltage station service, the following
leading modes can be adopted:
1 When there are generator voltage bus bars, it is led by the bus bar of every section,
and supplied with the station-service load of the generating set of this section of bus
bar;
2 When a unit connection exists between the electric generator and the main
transformer, it is led from the low-tension side of the main transformer, and supplied
with the station-service load of the generating set.
13.3.7 It is preferred that the capacity of a high voltage station-service working

transformer be determined based on the sum of the calculated load of a high-tension
motor and the calculated load of the low voltage station service supply. If the public
load is supplied by the first high voltage station service startup/standby transformer
(group) normally, when the high voltage station service startup/standby transformer is
under overhaul, the first high voltage station service startup/standby transformer
(group) supply the whole public load or the public load supply is shared by the first
and the second high voltage station service working transformers (groups) by
fifty-fifty.
A 10% margin shall be left for the capacity of a low voltage station transformer.
13.3.8 For a generating set with a capacity no greater than 125MW, it is preferred to
set up a breaker in the station service branch wires; when there are no breakers with
appropriate breaking capacity to be adopted, the breaker that can meet the
requirement of dynamic stability can be adopted, but corresponding measures shall be
taken to make the breaker switch off the short circuit fault within a range of allowable
dropout current; the disconnecting switches or connection straps that meet the
requirement of dynamic stability can also be adopted.
When a split phase enclosed bus bar is adopted as a station service branch wire, no
breaker and disconnecting switch shall be installed in the branch wire, but there shall
be a releasable connection point.
13.3.9 Standby power supply shall be set up for the high voltage and low voltage
station service bus bars with class I load. When a dedicated standby mode is adopted
for standby power supply, automatic throw-in equipment for the standby power
supply shall be provided.
Manually switching standby power supply shall be provided for the high voltage and
low voltage station service bus bars with class II load.
It is not necessary to set up standby power supply for the load of class III.
13.3.10 For the high voltage station service standby or startup/standby power supply,
the following leading modes can be adopted:
1 When there are no generator voltage bus bars, it is led from the lowest class
voltage bus bar with reliable supply in the high tension bus bar or the third
(low voltage) winding of the interconnecting transformer, and it shall be
guaranteed that when the whole plant has a power supply failure, adequate
power supply can be obtained from an exterior electric system, including
power supply of the medium-tension side obtained from the high-tension side
of a three-circuit transformer.
2 When there are generator voltage bus bars, one type of standby power supply
can be led from the bus bars.
3 When it is reasonable in terms of technical economy, dedicated lines can be
led from an external electric network for power supply.
4 When there are two or more high voltage station service standby or startup/
standby power supplies in the whole plant, they shall be led from two types of
relatively independent supply.
13.3.11 The capacity of a station service standby transformer (electric reactor) or a
startup/standby transformer shall meet the following requirements:
1 The capacity of a high voltage station service standby transformer (electric
reactor) or a startup/standby transformer shall not be less than that of the high
voltage station service working transformer (electric reactor) with the maximum
capacity; when a startup/standby transformer has a public load, the capacity also
shall meet the requirement of acting as a standby transformer for the largest high
voltage station service working transformer (electric reactor).
For a generating set with a capacity of 600MW, when there are breakers or load
switches installed in the electric generator outlet, the capacity of a high voltage
station service standby transformer can be selected in a range between 60%
100% of the capacity of a high voltage station service working transformer.
2 The capacity of a low voltage station service standby transformer shall be the
same as that of the largest low voltage station-service working transformer.
13.3.12 It is preferred to adopt a transformer with split windings as the high voltage
station service operation power supply for a 200MW300MW generating set; One or
two transformers can be adopted as the high voltage station service operation power
supply for a 600MW generating set.
13.3.13 The arrangement of high voltage station service standby transformers (electric
reactors) shall meet the following requirements:
1 For the generating set with a capacity lower than 100MW, and the number of
high voltage station service working transformer (electric reactor) is no less
than 6, the second high voltage station service standby transformer can be set
up.
When a unit control mode is adopted for the generating set with a capacity of
100MW125MW, and the number of high voltage station service working
transformer is no less than 5, the second high voltage station service standby
transformer can be added.
It is preferred to connect the secondary sides of both high voltage station service
standby transformers.
2 For the generating set with a capacity of 200MW300MW, a (group of) high
voltage station service startup/standby transformer(s) can be set up for every
two generating sets.
3 For a generating set with a capacity of 600MW, when there are no breakers or
load switches installed in the electric generator outlet, one or two high voltage
station service startup/standby transformer can be set up for every two
generating sets. When it is equipped with two standby transformers, whether
the overhaul of one of the high voltage station service startup/standby
transformers has an impact on the start and stop of any of the generating sets
shall be taken into consideration; when the electric generator outlet is
equipped with breakers or load switches, a high voltage station service standby
transformer can be set up for four or less generating sets, and a non-connection
high voltage station service working transformer can be set up for five or more
generating sets of the same capacity.
13.3.14 The mode of connection on the high tension side of a high voltage station
service startup/standby transformer of a generating set with a capacity of 300MW
600MW shall meet the following requirements:
1 When the public loads of station service supply of a 600MW generating set is
supplied by two high voltage station service startup/standby transformers that
are standby one for each other, it is preferred to set up a breaker on the
high-tension side of every high voltage startup/ standby transformer.
2 When a public load is supplied by a high voltage station service startup/
standby transformer, and the high voltage/ standby working transformer as its
standby power supply or the public load is supplied by the high voltage station
service working transformer, every two high voltage station service startup/
standby transformer can be equipped with a disconnecting switch on their
high-tension sides respectively and share a breaker.
3 When a breaker is set up for a high voltage station service startup/standby
transformer, it shall be supplied by one-circuit power lines; when two or more
breakers are set up, it is preferred to supply them by two-circuit power lines.
13.3.15 When a dedicated standby transformer is adopted for a low voltage station
service standby power supply, for the generating set with a capacity no greater than
125MW, the number of low voltage station service working transformer shall be 8 or
more, and a second low voltage station service standby transformer can be added; for
the generating set with a capacity of 200MW, it is preferred to set up a low voltage
station service standby transformer for every two generating sets; for the generating
set with a capacity no less than 300MW, it is preferred to set up a low voltage station
service standby transformer for every generating set.
When low voltage station transformers are set up in pairs, the loads for mutual
standby shall be supplied by two transformers respectively; no automatic throw-in
device of emergency supply shall be set up for two transformers that are standby for
each other. For the class II loads away from the main generator hall, it is preferred to
adopt two neighbor transformers that are standby for each other. For the low voltage
station transformers of being mutually standby, no dedicated standby transformer
shall be set up any longer.
13.3.16 A single bus bar connection shall be adopted for high voltage station service
bus bars. When the boiler capacity is below 400t/h, every boiler can be supplied by a
section of bus bar; when the boiler capacity is 400t/h or above, every level
high-tension station service voltage of every boiler shall be supplied by at least two
sections of bus bar.
A single bus bar connection shall be adopted for high voltage station service bus bars.
When the boiler capacity is of level 220t/h, and there is a load of class I in the bus bar
that is connected with the boiler and the electromotor, it is preferred to conduct
corresponding sectioning according to the boiler and the electromotor; when the
boiler capacity is of level 400t/h670t/h, every boiler can be supplied by two
sections of bus bar, and the electromotor with bimodal suite auxiliaries shall be
connected to both sections of bus bar. One transformer can supply both sections of
bus bars; when the boiler capacity is 1000t/h or above, two sections of bus bars shall
be set up for every boiler, and it is preferred to supply each section of bus bar by one
transformer.
13.3.17 For the generating set with a capacity of 200MW, alternative emergency
power supply shall be set up. It is preferred to adopt fast start diesel generating set to
produce the alternative emergency power supply.
The alternative emergency power supply's voltage and neutral point grounding mode
shall be in accordance with the low voltage station service electrical system.
13.3.18 When computer based supervisory control is adopted for the generating set;
AC uninterrupted power supply shall be set up for generating sets. It is preferred to
adopt a static state inversion device as the alternative uninterrupted power supply, and
no standby shall be set up any more.
13.3.19 A fixed alternative low voltage overhaul supply network shall be set up in a
power plant, and overhaul power boxes, power supply welders, electric tools, and test
equipment shall be provided for every overhaul site
13.3.20 The arrangement of auxiliary switchgear shall be determined by considering

the arrangement of the main generator hall; the cable consumption shall be as low as
possible; and the locations of humidity, high temperature, and dust shall be avoided.
For the generating set with a capacity of 200MW, it is preferred to arrange the
auxiliary switchgear in the steam engine room. If the arrangement place in the steam
engine room is confined, the auxiliary switchgear can also be arranged in a centralized
control building or other appropriate locations.
13.3.21 For the generating set with a capacity of 200MW or above, dry type
transformers shall be adopted as the low voltage station transformers in the main
generator hall and network control building.
13.3.22 It is preferred to adopt a combination unit of vacuum breaker and

high-tension fuse string vacuum contactor as the high voltage station service open
circuit equipment for the generating set with a capacity of 200MW. It is preferred to
adopt an oil-minimum type device as the high voltage station service open circuit
equipment for the generating set with a capacity of 125mw; and a combination unit of
vacuum breaker or high-tension fuse string vacuum contactor can be adopted in the
station-service circuits where start and stop is frequent.
13.4 Direct current system
13.4.1 In a power plant, storage batteries shall be installed to supply the loads for
generating set's control, signal, relay protection, and automatic devices (hereafter
referred to as simply control loading) as well as the loads for direct current oil pumps,
alternative uninterrupted power supply devices, breaker's switch-in devices, and
emergency lighting (hereafter referred to as simply power loading). The storage
batteries shall act in a way of whole float charging.
For the power plant with a main control room, when the total capacity of the
generating set is 100MW and above, it is preferred to furnish two sets of storage
batteries. In other cases, a set of storage battery can be enough in general.
For the generating set with a capacity of 125MW and above, when a unit control room
is adopted as the control mode, a set of storage batteries can be provided for every
generating set. For the generating set with a capacity no less than 200MW and its
boosting voltage is no greater than 220kV, in every generating set one set of storage
batteries (merging power supply for control loading and power loading) or two sets of
storage batteries (separate power supply for control loading and power loading) can
be installed. For the generating sets with a capacity no less than 300MW, in every
generating set it is preferred to furnish three sets of storage batteries (of which two
sets provide power for control loading, and one set provides power for power loading)
or two sets of storage batteries (merging power supply for both control loading and
power loading).
When the network control in a power plant including 500kV electrical appliances, two
sets of storage batteries shall be furnished; in a power plant with a planning capacity
no less than 800MW, it is preferred to set up two sets storage batteries for the 220kV
network control part. In other cases, in general a set of storage battery can be enough.
13.4.2 The voltage of the storage battery in a power plant shall meet the following
requirements:
1 It is preferred to adopt 110V as the voltage of the control loading's dedicated storage
battery (for a network control room other direct current loads are also included)
2 It is preferred to adopt 220V as the voltage of the dedicated storage battery of power
loading.
3 It is preferred to adopt 220V as the voltage of the common storage batteries shared
by control loading and power loading.
13.4.3 For the storage batteries dedicated to control loading, end batteries shall not be
set up; for other storage batteries, it is not preferred to set up end batteries. When a
storage battery has end batteries, there shall be measures to prevent end batteries from
being sulphured.
13.4.4 The load statistics of the storage batteries in a power plant shall meet the
1 In the installation of two sets of storage batteries with the same voltage, for
control loading, the statistics for every set can be conducted based on the whole
loads belonging to the control room; for direct current emergency lighting
loading, the statistics for every set can be conducted based on 60% of the whole
loads belonging to the control room; for power loading, it is preferred to
distribute the loading in two sets of storage batteries equally, so the statistics for
every set can be conducted based on the loading connected.
2 For a unit control room, when two sets of storage batteries are interconnected
with each other, the statistics for each set shall be conducted based on the
loading connected, and in statistics the loading will not increase due to
interconnection.
13.4.5 In the selection of storage battery capacity, the unscheduled interruption hour
of the alternative station-service power in the power plant connected to an electric
system shall be based on 1h; the calculation hour of the direct current loading used for
the alternative uninterrupted power supply shall be based on 0.5h.
13.4.6 The layout of facilities for charging and float charging of storage battery shall
meet the following requirements:
A charging device shall be furnished for every set of storage batteries. For every two
sets of storage batteries of the same voltage, another charging device can be set up as
a public standby. If there is only one set of storage batteries, two charging devices can
be installed.
The capacity of a charging device and the regulating range of its output voltage shall
meet the requirements of a storage battery's float charging and charging.
13.4.7 It is preferred to adopt a single bus bar connection or single bus bar sectioning
connection as the mode of connection for the direct current system of a power plant.
When a single bus bar sectioning connection is adopted, every set of storage batteries
and the corresponding charging devices shall be connected in the same bus bar; the
charging devices for public standby shall be able to switch to the corresponding two
sections of bus bars.
13.4.8 When an AC excitation system is adopted, the manufacturer shall take

necessary standby measures, and no excitation devices shall be furnished.
13.5 High voltage switchgear

13.5.1 The design of a high voltage switchgear in a power plant shall conform to the
provisions stipulated by SDJ5 Technical Regulation for Design of High Voltage
Switchgear as well as GB50060 Specification for Design of 3110kV High Voltage
Switchgear.
13.5.2 The type selection of a power distribution unit shall meet the following
requirements:
1 It is preferred to adopt an indoor type for the power distribution unit with a rated
voltage of 35kV or below;
2 110kv220kv power distribution unit
1) If possible, semi-high type or high type arrangements shall be adopted for an
outdoor type switchgear; an outdoor medium size arrangement can be
adopted in the region where the basic seismic intensity is eight degree or
higher or the soil is very poor, and with this method the protective insulation
level shall be determined according to the atmosphere contamination.
2) In the area where the atmosphere is severely polluted (based on the
contamination characteristics, operating experience, measured equivalent
covering salt density, as well as the grade scale of contamination) or the site
is restricted, the power distribution unit shall adopt an indoor type; if the
sulfur hexafluoride complete shut-off combined electric appliances are
required truly, it is essential to conduct a monographically technical and
economic evaluation.
3 For a 330kV 500kV power distribution unit, an outdoor medium type
arrangement shall be adopted; in the area where the atmosphere is severely
polluted (based on the contamination characteristics, operating experience,
measured equivalent covering salt density, as well as the grade scale of
contamination) or the site is restricted, sulfur hexafluoride complete shut-off
combined electric appliances can also be adopted after a technical and economic
evaluation.
13.6 Electric control building

13.6.1 The location of an electric control building (main control building or network
control building) shall be convenient for operation and be helpful for saving control
cables.
13.6.2 It is preferred that the main control building be connected with the building
with power distribution units. When the main control building and the main generator
hall are arranged separately, an over-bridge shall be built for connection.
It is not preferred to set up an over-bridge between the network control building and
the main generator hall. If possible (for example, a small distance or the ease of
linking them), it can link the upper patrol walkway of the power distribution unit with
an arrangement of outdoor high type.
13.7 Electrical measuring instrument

13.7.1 The design of electrical measuring instrument in a power plant shall conform
to the provisions stipulated by SDJ9 Technical Regulation for Design of Electrical
Energy Metering Devices.
13.7.2 Transformers, transducers, AC sampling units, and metering devices shall meet
the requirements of economic accounting for the accuracy of measurement.
13.7.3 In a power plant, a terminal unit used to charge the electrical energy shall be
installed to realize such functions as measuring, time-sharing storing, and processing
the electrical energy going into the network as well as corresponding with the main
station. Equipment shall meet the requirements of the design of a charging system of
electrical energy going into the network.
13.8 Small wiring

13.8.1 For the power plant having generating sets with a capacity no greater than
100MW, it is preferred to adopt a main control room way as the control mode; For the
power plant having generating sets with a capacity of 125MW, it is preferred to adopt
a unit control room way as the control mode; For the power plant having generating
sets with a capacity no less than 200MW, it is preferred to adopt a unit control room
way as the control mode.
For the power plant where the control mode is a unit control room one, it is preferred
to set up the control section of the electric network in the first unit control room.
13.8.2 The electric elements in a unit control room shall be controlled by adopting a
heavy-current control or decentralized control system; the electric generator's control,
signal, measuring and automatic devices shall be in tune with the thermodynamical
instrument and control. In a signal system, heavy current or light current connection
can be adopted or its connections go into a decentralized control system.
For part of the electric elements of an electric network, computer based supervisory
control or heavy current control connection can be adopted; for a signal system, heavy
current or light current connection can be adopted or its connections go into a
computer supervisory control system. In building a computer supervisory control
system for an electric network, long term monitoring shall be taken into consideration.
For the electric elements of the main control room, it is preferred to adopt a heavy
current connection; for a signal system, both heavy current connections and light
current connections can be adopted.
13.8.3 The equipment and components that shall be controlled in the main control
room are as follows: electric generators, main transformers, interconnecting
transformers, sectioning of bus bars, electric reactors, bus bar connections, connecting
lines, bypass lines, wiring of 35kV or above, high voltage station service supply lines,
station-service working and standby transformers, spare exciters, direct current
systems, and fire pumps shared by the whole plant.
13.8.4 The equipment and components that shall be controlled in a unit control room
are as follows: electric generators, generator transformer sets, high voltage station
service power lines, dedicated standby power supply in the main generator hall,
mutually standby low voltage station transformers, as well as the other equipment and
components that needs to be centrally controlled in this unit. For the common
equipment share by the whole plant, it is preferred to give them a centralized control
in the first unit control room, or network control room, or any other appropriate
location.
The equipment and components controlled by the electric network are as follows:
interconnecting transformers, high tension bus bar equipment, lines with a voltage of
110 (63) kV or above, and parallel reactors. In addition, there shall be signals and
necessary measuring signals of the breakers on the high-tension side of all elementary
generator's transformer banks as well as of the high voltage station service standby or
start-up/standby transformers.
When a semi-breaker is adopted for wire connection, the two breakers that are related
to the generator transformer shall be controlled in the unit control room. If a network
control room is set up, the room shall have the signals of the above-mentioned
breaker.
13.8.5 For the wiring from a 6kV or 10kV indoor power distribution unit to all
consumers, the station transformers used for all auxiliary plants, and the AC accident
emergency power supply, it is preferred to adopt a mode of local control.
13.8.6 The protective relay devices and electrical energy metering devices for all
equipment and components can be installed in the power distribution unit room or the
relay protection room of outdoor type switchgear, and they can also be installed in the
place where they are controlled.
The environmental conditions for the relay protection room of outdoor type
switchgear shall meet the requirements of a safe and reliable operation of the
protective relay devices.
13.8.7 In the main control room or unit control rooms in a power plant, automatic
quasi-synchronous devices shall be fitted, or manually operated quasi-synchronous
devices with synchronous blocking devices can be installed.
In a network control room, manually operated quasi-synchronous devices with
blocking devices or synchronous blocking devices shall be installed.
13.8.8 When the mode of heavy-current control is adopted, accident warning devices
(such as flash alarm units) shall be installed, or the emergency signal and warning
signal devices that can conduct repetition operations and automatically cancel the
sound by time delay.
To monitor the control circuit of a breaker, lamplight or audible signals can be
adopted.
13.8.9 When a remote temperature-measuring device is set up for an electric generator,

it is preferred to install the remote temperature-measuring device on the control panel
of the steam turbine. When a remote temperature-measuring device is set up for a
transformer, it is preferred to install the remote temperature-measuring device on the
control panel that controls the component.
13.8.10 Blocking devices shall be set up for disconnecting switches and their
corresponding breakers and grounding knife switches. Blocking devices can comprise
blocking of mechanical, electromagnetic or electric circuits. High-voltage serial
switch cabinets shall possess the following functions: to prevent accidentally opening
and closing breakers, to prevent pulling the disconnecting switch with load, to prevent
(hanging) closing ground leads or ground switches, to prevent closing breakers or
disconnecting switches with ground leads or ground switches, to prevent accidentally
going into electrified intervals, and so on; Near the net doors of all intervals of an
indoor power distribution unit with a voltage of 3kV or above, facilities to prevent
accidentally going into electrified intervals shall be set up.
13.8.11 In a control room, position indicators are not necessary for all the local
operating disconnecting switches used for overhaul.
13.8.12 When a heavy-current control mode is adopted, the signal lamps and buttons
in the switch-in (closing) location shall be red, and the signal lamps and buttons in the
tripping (disconnecting) location shall be green.
13.8.13 When a decentralized control system is adopted by the generating set, the
automation levels of electricity and heat control are preferred to act in concert. The
monitoring scope shall be divided according to unit plants, and necessary hard
manually operated equipment for emergency can be reserved; functions such as relay
protection, automatic quasi-synchronous, Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR),
malfunction oscilloscope, and rapid switch of station service supply shall be realized
by isolated plants.
The tripping and switching instructions generated from the relay protection and
automatic safety devices shall access the closing and tripping circuit of breaker
directly.
13.8.14 The computer based supervisory control of the network shall be an open and
distributed system, and it is preferred to adopt a double-machine and double-network
arrangement. For the local monitoring elements, if intelligent devices are adopted, it is
preferred to conduct a local arrangement.
13.9 Lighting system

13.9.1 The design of a power plant's lighting system shall conform to the provisions
stipulated by GB50034 Code for Design of Industrial Enterprise Lighting.
13.9.2 In a power plant, there shall be two separate supply networks for lighting, i.e.,
normal lighting supply network and emergency lighting supply network. It is
preferred to adopt the following delivery orders:
1. Normal lighting
When the neutral point of low voltage station-service power is a direct
grounding system, and the unit capacity is no greater than 125MW, it is
preferred that the normal lighting is supplied by the low voltage station
transformer that is shared by the power network and lighting network. When
the neutral point of low voltage station-service power is not a direct grounding
system or the unit capacity is no less than 200MW, normal lighting shall be
supplied by a lighting transformer (in the secondary side it shall be 380/220V
neutral-point solid ground) led from a high voltage or low voltage station
service electrical system. For the lighting transformer led from a low voltage
station service electrical system, dispersed layout can also be adopted.
2. Emergency lighting
In the power plant with a unit capacity no greater than 125MW, emergency
lighting is supplied by storage batteries. In a power plant with a unit capacity
no less than 200MW, the emergency lighting for unit control rooms, network
control rooms, and the diesel engine generator room used for emergency
power supply, is supplied by storage batteries; other emergency lighting is
supplied by AC emergency power supply.
Emergency lamps can be adopted for the emergency lighting in the main
generator hall's primary entrance points, passageways, and staircases, as well
as the important working places away from the main generator hall.
13.9.3 It is preferred to adopt 24V voltage for the lighting fixtures with a mounting
height lower than 2.2m in manufacturing plants as well as the light fixtures in a heat
pipeline or cable tunnel. If 220V voltage is adopted for power supply, there shall be
measures to prevent electric shocks.
13.9.4 The selection of lighting fixtures depends on a working space's environmental

conditions and operating requirements, and it is preferred to adopt lighting fixtures
characterized by a high luminous efficiency, long life or permanence, and convenient
maintenance.
Lighting fixture's indoor or outdoor installation sites shall be convenient for
maintenance. For the lighting fixtures of indoor and outdoor power distribution unit, it
shall be taken into consideration that maintenance can be conducted when the device
is charged.
13.9.5 The requirements for installing obstruction lighting devices on a chimney or

other high-rise construction or structures shall be determined by entering into a
negotiation with the administrative authority of aviation.
The requirements for installing obstruction lighting devices in water catchment,
drainage outlets and wharfs shall be determined by a negotiation with the
administrative authority of shipping.
13.10 Cable selection and laying
13.10.1 The design of cable selection and laying in a power plant shall conform to the
provisions stipulated by GBS0217 Code for Design of Power Engineering Cable.
13.10.2 For the cable laying in the main generator hall and auxiliary plants, effective
measures for flame retardant fireproofing must be taken. For the cable laid in the zone
affected by external ignition in the main generator hall (as the head of a steam turbine,
the neighborhood of explosion proof doors and slagging outlets over against the boiler
room), fireproofing measures must be taken.
13.10.3 In the main generator hall of generating sets with a capacity no less than
300MW and the places for the transportation of coal, fuel, and other inflammable and
explosive substances, it is preferred to adopt flame retardant cables of class C.
13.10.4 In the same path, the cables with important load circuits shared by the whole
plant shall be separated by taking fireproof measures or be laid in an independent
cable channel.
13.10.5 The cables in the network control building or in the main electricity control
building shall be separated by taking fireproof measures or laid in an independent
cable channel by the following scales:
1 Three generating sets with a capacity lower than 100MW;
2 Two generating sets with a capacity between 100MW125MW;
3 One generating set with a capacity no less than 200MW;
13.11 Interplant communication

13.11.1 The internal communication in a power plant shall include communication for
production control and communication for production dispatch. In a power plant with
a unit capacity no less than 300MW, communication facilities for overhaul can be set
up.
13.11.2 The capacity of the telephone exchanger used for a power plant's production
control (excluding housing areas) shall be determined in accordance with the power
plant's management system, size of personnel force, automation level, planning
installation number, and installed capacities.
1 For the generating set with a capacity no greater than 125MW, 50 threads shall
be taken as the base, and 70 threads will be added to the base for every increased
generating set;
2 For the generating set with a capacity between 125MW300MW, 70 threads
shall be taken as the base, and 70 threads will be added for every increased
generating set;
3 For the generating set with a capacity of 600MW, 90 threads shall be taken as
the base, and 90 threads will be added to the base for every increased generating
set.
13.11.3 The types of telephone exchangers used for production control

communication shall be in tune with those in the local department of posts and tele
communications as well as the communication department in the local electric system,
and stored program exchange shall be adopted.
13.11.4 In a power plant with unit control rooms and network control rooms,
dispatching telephone control boards shall be set up. When a SPC dispatching
telephone control board is adopted, it is preferred to adopt a mode that the whole plant
share a dispatching telephone control board and dispatching sub-stations are set up for
the unit control room and network control room respectively.
In a power plant with a main control room, an independent dispatching switchboard
shall be set up.
In the coal transportation system in a power plant, independent dispatching
switchboards or intercommunicating broadcast communication can be set up in
accordance with the size of the system. Necessary communication facilities shall be
set up for the auxiliary plants far away from the main generator hall
13.11.5 For the power supply needed by the communication facilities in a power plant,
one of the following delivery orders can be selected:
1 They are supplied by two sets of rectifiers of direct supply type. The AC
supply of a rectifier of direct supply type can be supplied by one circuit of
reliable station service supply and one circuit of station battery by way of an
inverter, and an automatic switchover between two circuits of supply shall be
available.
2 They are supplied by a set of storage batteries used for communication and a
set of rectifiers, and a set of standby rectifiers are set up. Two sets of rectifiers
and AC supply shall be supplied by two circuits of station service supply, and
the capacity of the storage batteries used for communication shall be selected
based on 1h discharging.
3 The AC supply used for the communication facilities in a coal transportation
system can be supplied by one circuit of station service supply.
13.12 System communication

13.12.1 In a power plant, dedicated dispatching communication facilities used to serve
electric power dispatching shall be set up. The communication means shall be
determined in accordance with the prescribed electric system communication design
or corresponding accessing system communication design.
There shall be one reliable dispatching passageway between a power plant and its
dispatching center, and in the whole system there shall be two mutually independent
dispatching passageways between the major power plants and their dispatching center.
13.12.2 For the power plants located in a communication network, their

communication design shall meet the requirements of communication networking of
the electric system to which they belong.
13.12.3 The communication hall of a power plant shall meet the requirements of
communication facilities that will be set up in late stage in the design of electric
system communication or corresponding accessing system communication, and
extension space shall be reserved in accordance with the electric system's
development prospects.
For the power plants equipped with microwave communication equipment and optical
fiber communication equipment, if the routing of microwave circuit and optical fiber
circuit allows, it is preferred to set up the microwave hall and optical fiber hall
together with the hall of other communication facilities such as electric force carrier
waves in the same building.
13.13 Other electric utilities

13.13.1 In a power plant, the relay protection and automatic safety devices, the excess
voltage protection devices and grounding, the electric installations in the places where
explosion and fire danger exist, and the design of dispatching automation shall
conform to GBl4285 Technical Regulation for Relay Protection and Automatic Safety
Device, DL/T620 Excess Voltage Protection and Insulation Coordination for AC
Electric Installation, DL/T621 Grounding of AC Electric Installation, GB50058 Code
for Design of Electric Installation in a Explosion and Fire Danger Environment, and
DL5003 Technical Regulation for Automation Design of Electric System Dispatching
respectively.
14Water Supply Facilities and Systems
14.1 Water Management

14.1.1Water is an important national resource, so the conservation of water must be
implemented. The rational use of water, the conservation of water resource and the
prevention of environmental pollution of discharged water shall be realized by water
management and engineering approaches in the power plant design.
14.1.2 The prevailing States law and standard related to the water management shall
be complied with and executed in the power plant design, such as the Water Law of
the Peoples Republic of China, Law for Prevention and Curing of Water Pollution,
PRC, GB3838 Environmental Quality Standard for Surface Water, GB5749
Sanitation Standard of Potable Water, GB8978 Integrated Wastewater Discharge
Standard, etc, in force. The related stipulations and requirements of the district where
power plant is located shall also be considered.
14.1.3 In power plant design, the overall planning, comprehensive balancing,

optimization and comparison shall be carried out for all types of water supply, water
usage and water discharge in order to achieve economical and reasonable
consumption, multi-usage and comprehensive utilization of water, increasing the
water reuse rate, lowering the water consumption index of the whole plant, and the
reduction of the waste water discharge while the discharge water quality shall comply
with the discharge standard.
14.1.3.1 For circulating and reuse water systems, the water quality balance shall
be carried out and measures for water quality improvement shall be
taken.
14.1.3.2 All waste water shall be directly reused according to the conditions of
water quality, or based on the water quality requirements raised by the
water utilizing points, the simple processing scheme shall be taken,
then shall reuse thus water treated. If the conditions of water reusing
unavailable, the waste water can only be discharged after they have
reached the standard requirements.
14.1.4 The water utilizing index of coal fired power plant shall conform to the
14.1.4.1 For the power plant using the circulating water supply system and unit
capacity of 300MW and above, the designed water consumption shall not exceed
0.8m3/s for every 1000MW of generating capacity.
14.1.4.2 For the power plant using the circulating water supply system and unit
capacity below 300MW, the designed water consumption shall not exceed 1m3/s for
every 1000MW of generating capacity.
14.1.4.3 For the power plant using sea water once-through water supply system and
unit capacity of 300MW and above, the designed fresh water consumption shall not
exceed 0.12m3/s for every 1000MW of generating capacity.
14.1.4.4 For the power plant using sea water once-through water supply system and
unit capacity below 300MW, the designed fresh water consumption shall not exceed
0.20m3/s for every 1000MW of generating capacity.
14.1.5 Necessary flowmeters and monitoring devices shall be provided for various
kinds of water system in power plant where the water quality and quantity control are
necessary.
14.1.6 The selection of water ash storage yard or dry ash storage yard in the power
plant shall be determined according to the condition of local ash yard, transporting
distance, meteorological condition, water balance, comprehensive utilization and
environmental protection requirements etc., as well as combined with the plant inside
and outside ash handling system through the economical and technical comparison.
14.2 Water Supply Systems

14.2.1 Power plant water supply system shall be selected according to the water
source condition and the planned capacity of the power plant after technical and
The once-through or combined flow water supply system may be used when the water
source condition is allowable. The circulation or hybrid water supply system may be
used when the water the water source is limited.
14.2.2 When surface water is used as water source, the necessary water quantity for
full load operation of the power plant shall be guaranteed under the following dry
water conditions:
(1)For water taken from natural river, the minimum, water flow with guaranteed
frequency of 97% shall be considered;
(2) When the river is regulated by the reservoir, the minimum discharge of the
reservoir with guaranteed frequency of 97% shall be considered, and the official
data from the reservoir administration shall be acquired;
(3) For water taken from reservoir, the low water year with guaranteed frequency
of 97%shall be considered.
14.2.3 When underground water is used as make-up water source, the water taken
shall be determined according to the water consumption of the district industries and
agriculture, and after water balance calculation based on dry water year or continuous
dry water years. The quantity of water taken from underground shall not exceed the
quantity of the allowable exploitable water quantity. The official approval document
from the relevant water resource administration shall be acquired.
14.2.4 For once-through or combined flow water supply system, the optimizing
calculation shall be carried out according to the monthly average water level and
water temperature over years, combined with the turbine characteristics and system
arrangement in order to determine the optimized surface area of the condenser, the
cooling water quantity, the water pump and the economic arrangement of water intake
and discharge pipings or culverts.
The optimized cooling water quantity, under the conditions of highest calculated
cooling water temperature, shall guarantee the turbine backpressure does not exceed
the maximum allowable value at full load operation.
14.2.5 For once-through or combined flow water supply system, the maximum
calculated temperature of cooling water shall be determined according to the years
average water temperature of day and night at frequency of 10%during the hottest
period (calculated for three months), and the effect of the warm discharge water to the
intake water temperature shall be considered.
14.2.6For circulating water supply system, the maximum calculated temperature of

cooling water shall be calculated according to the years average meteorological
condition at frequency of 10% during the hottest period (calculated for three months).
14.2.7 The cooling water of auxiliary equipment may be taken from the circulating
water inlet. In case the water temperature is too high, or the water contains too much
silt and floating matters in flood period, or sea water is used as cooling water, then
corresponding measures shall be taken, or other water source shall be used.
When surface water is used as cooling water make-up, and the content of the
suspended matter is exceeding 50mg/l100 mg/l, then the pretreatment shall be
carried out. After treatment, the content of the suspended matter in the surface water
shall not exceed 20mg/l so as to conform to the requirements in the standard
GB50050 Design Regulations of Industrial Circulating Water Treatment, in force.
The water used for hydraulic ash removal shall be taken from the cooling water outlet
of the condenser, or other drainage water may be used.
14.2.8 The discharge of once through water supply system and the blow down of the
circulating water system may be used of or agriculture or other industries under the
condition that the economic operation of the power plant is not affected and the
requirement of usage is satisfied. For the discharged water from once-through, hybrid
or combined flow water supply system, the utilization of the hydraulic energy shall be
considered of possible.
14.2.9 The unit water supply system or enlarged unit water supply system shall be
adopted for power plant with unit capacity of 200 MW and above.
14.2.10 For once-through combined flow or hybrid water supply system, the location
and type of water intake and discharge shall be determined through technical and
economical comparison, and based on the various factors such as: the features of the
water source, the impact of the warm water discharge, the sedimentation, the project
construction, etc., and the model experiment or digital analogy calculation shall be
carried out if necessary.
14.2.11 Motordriven device shall be provided for the outlet and inlet valves and
interconnecting valve of condenser, pump discharge valve with a diameter of 400 mm
and above, other valves with a diameter of 600mm and above as well as the valves
requiring automatic control.
In the area far away from the power source, other valves with a diameter of 800mm
and below may also be manual operated.
14.2.12 For air cooled condensing system, the mode of cooling system, the initial
temperature difference value adopted, and the selection of turbine designed
back-pressure shall be optimized for determining the type of air cooling and the
appropriate number of heat radiators.
14.3 Water Intake Structure and Pump House

14.3.1 The design of surface water intake structure and pump house shall be based on
the low water level with guaranteed frequency of 97% and checked with the low
water level with guaranteed frequency of 99%.
14.3.2 The surface water intake structure shall be divided into several individual
chambers and bar screens or bar screen with mechanical cleaning trash rake, plane
screens or traveling screens, and flushing or measures for cleaning the garbage shall
be provided according to water source water quality and the quantity of intake water.
When the water carries ice or large amount of silt and water weeds thereby affecting
the water intake, appropriate measures shall be taken in the design of water intake
structure and shall be determined by hydraulic model experiment under complicate
construction conditions.
14.3.3For water intake with gravity flow pipe, the number of intake pipes shall not be
less than two at planned capacity. During the out age of one of the pipes, the water
demand of the equipment matching with the system shall be satisfied by the
remaining intake pipe or pipes.
14.3.4 The flow-passage of the pump house inflow chamber shall be arranged
according to the characteristics data provided by the pump manufacturer, and the
requirement of relevant hydraulic condition shall also be satisfied. It may be
determined by model experiment if necessary.
14.3.5 The +0.00floor elevation of the riparian pump house(the designed elevation of
ground surface at pump house entrance) for surface water supply shall be the flood
level (or tide level) of 1%frequency plus the wave height of 2%frequency and plus
0.5m of extra height, while measures to prevent from wave climb-up shall be taken.
The +0.00n floor elevation, determined by the above statement, shall not be lower
than the flood level of 0.1%frequency, otherwise measures to prevent from flood shall
be taken for the pump house.
In case the flood level difference between 1% and 0.1% frequency is very large for
the rivers in mountainous district, the +0.00m floor elevation of pump house shall be
referred to the site elevation, and determined after analysis and study.
The wave height of 1%of wave train accumulated frequency of 50years recurrence
multiplied by a coefficient of 0.6-0.7 may be used as the wave height of 2%frequency.
14.3.6 For the unit water supply system, two circulating water pumps shall be
provided for each turbine unit. The total output of the two pumps shall be equal to the
maximum calculated water flow of the unit. The adjustable blade water pump or water
pump driven by variable speed motor may be used if the pump supply condition
permits and technical and economical study proves it reasonable.
14.3.7 For central pump house with water main supply system, not less than four
circulating water pumps shall be installed in the pump house when reaching the
planned capacity of the power plant. The total output of the water pumps must satisfy
the maximum calculated cooling water flow required and no standby pump shall be
provided. The pumps may be installed in stages according to the schedule of
construction, but not less than two pumps shall be installed in the first stage.
14.3.8When sea water is used as cooling water, the main component of the pump and
parts directly in contact with the sea water and not easily replaceable in maintenance,
shall be made of different types sea water and corrosion-resistant materials according
to different conditions. In addition, the parts of the traveling screen, flushing pump,
drainage pump and valves directly in contact with seawater shall also be made of sea
water corrosionresistant materials.
14.3.9 When sea water is used as cooling water, measures taken to prevent from the
marine organisms growing and adhering to the surface of the intake/discharge
structures and equipment shall be considered.
14.3.10 Check valve may not be installed at the outlet of the circulating water pump.
The motor-driven butterfly valve or hydraulic damping butterfly check valve shall be
used for discharge valve of the pump according to the system arrangement and
characteristics of the pump.
14.3.11 The number of make-up water pumps for centralized intake shall not be less
than three sets, in which, one as standby.
14.3.12 When tube wells are used to take underground water as make-up water for the
power plant, standby wells shall be provided. The number of standby wells shall not
be less than 15%.
14.3.13 Lifting equipment shall be provided for the pump house and the intake
chamber. Flushing pump and drainage pump shall be installed in the pump house, and
maintenance space and shift control room shall also be provided. Maintenance
platform and other facilities shall also be provided for the intermediate bearing of the
pump if necessary.
Lifting device shall be provided for the change-over valves room.
14.4 Piping and Culvert

14.4.1 For unit water supply system, one inflow pipe and one discharge pipe/culvert
for each unit shall be provided.
For water mains system, not less than two inflow pipes and two discharge
pipes/culverts shall be provided when reaching the planned capacity of the power
plant, and may be constructed in stages according to the specific condition of the
project. When one pipe is shut-down, the other pipe or pipes shall be able to
deliver75%of the maximum calculated water flow.
14.4.2 The number of make-up water main pipes shall be considered according to the
planned capacity of the power plant and the condition of the water source. Two main
pipes shall be adopted, and may be constructed in stages according to the specific
condition of the project. One main pipe may also be adopted if there are other water
supply sources.
In case each make-up water main pipe can guarantee to supply 60% of make-up water,
the connecting pipe between the two main pipes may not be provided.
Flowmeters shall be installed at the main pipe of the make-up water system and at the
branch pipes of main consumers.
14.4.3 The culvert may be constructed in one stage according to the planned capacity.
The culvert design, the influence of the change of the existing surface drainage system
and the effect of the rise of ground water level to the farmland and building in the
neighboring district shall be considered.
14.4.4 The material of pressure pipe lines shall be determined through technical and
economical comparison in accordance with the pipe line working pressure, water
quality, geological conditions along pipeline route, construction, supply of material,
etc.
14.4.4.1 Prestressed concrete pipes may be used for the sea water delivery pipe.
14.4.4.2 Prestressed concrete pipes may be used for large diameter circulating
water pressure pipe, expect those sections near the main power
building where steel pipe shall be used.
14.4.4.3 Prefabricated three stage prestressed concrete pipes may be used for
make-up water pipelines, steel muff prestressed concrete pipes or prestressed concrete
lining muff laminated pipes.
The reinforced concrete structure may be used for gravity flow pipes and culverts.
14.5 Cooling Pond and Cooling Tower

14.5.1 Reservoir, natural lake, or river network may be utilized as cooling pond of
power plant. The impacts on industry, agriculture, fishery and navigation by the
changes of water quantity, water quality and water temperature shall be considered in
the design, and the approval documents from the relevant administration shall be
acquired.
The design of cooling pond shall based on the digital analogy calculation (or model
experiment data under similar conditions) and protomer observing data.
14.5.2 In general, the natural draft cooling tower shall be adopted in selection of the
type of cooling tower used by the units, while the mechanical draft cooling tower can
be used in high temperature and high humidity district, or used in combined water
delivery system and other special circumstances.
The natural draft cooling tower with the steel concrete structure shall be adopted for
the air cooling tower in the indirect air cooling system, while the mechanical draft
cooling mode may be adopted for the air cooling condenser in the direct air cooling
system.
14.5.3 For large capacity turbinegenerator units, one natural draft cooling tower shall
be provided for each unit.
14.5.4 The factors of aerodynamic disturbance, ventilation, maintenance and

arrangement pipes and culverts shall be considered in the arrangement of cooling
towers. Prevention from the return flow effect of moist warm air shall be considered
when the cooling tower is arranged in mountainous area and hilly zone.
The net spacing between towers, and that between tower and neighboring buildings
shall be complied with the stipulations specified in Section 5.2.3 (Table 5.2.2) of this
Code.
14.5.5 The sectional type of low air flow resistance shall be adopted for the pillars at
the inlet of the natural shaft cooling tower and the members at the air passing place
inside of cooling tower.
14.5.6 Drift eliminators shall be installed in newly constructed cooling tower.
14.5.7 The fills of cooling tower shall be selected according to the conditions of
thermal characteristic, air-flow resistance, endurance, price, supply of material, and
shall be easy to construct and to repair. When conditions are similar, the lightweight
type fills shall be used.
14.5.8 For cooling towers (including air cooling tower) located in the cold district,
anti-freezing measures shall be taken.
14.5.9 The structure and size of the air cooling tower shall be determined by
optimization combined with the process arrangement. Measures taken to reduce the
impact to heat dissipating effect of heat dissipating effect if the air cooling tower by
the strong natural wind shall be considered in the arrangement of heat radiators.
14.5.10Lifting device for maintenance of heat radiators shall be considered in the air
cooling tower design. Water flushing device shall be provided for removing the dust
on the heat radiators of the air cooling tower.
14.5.11 For the unit using the direct air cooling system, the air cooling condenser shall
be installed at the ground platform outside of turbine house A column, and shall be
longitudinally arranged along the turbine house. At this time, the attention shall be
paid to the relationship between the main power building and summer prevailing wind
direction.
14.5.12 For the unit using the direct air cooling system, the repair lifting device and
maintenance platform shall be provided for the axial flow fan and its reducing gear at
bottom of the radiator. In the severely cold regions, the proportion of reverse radiating
elements shall be increased.
14.5.13 When the noise level of the cooling tower is limited by environment,
measures of prevention and curing shall be taken.
14.6 Off-plant Ash Disposal and Ash Storage Yard

14.6.1 The pressurized ash slurry pipe outside the plant area shall be laid on the
ground surface. If there is reliable evidence to prove that the scaling and erosion of
the pipes are not serious, it may also be laid underground directly.
The ash slurry pipe inside the plant area may be laid in the culvert, or laid along
ground surface or over-head if condition is allowable.
The slope of the ash slurry pipe shall not be less than 0.1% and measures for easy
drain out of the pipe shall be taken.
14.6.2 The ash slurry pipe outside the site area shall be laid along the road side to
fully utilize the existing road for maintenance. If it is necessary to build a road or part
of road for maintenance, a simply built type road shall be constructed and attention
shall be paid to save land and not to affect the farming of land.
14.6.3 In the design of ash slurry pipeline, suitable material for pipes shall be selected
according to the ash/slag and ash water characteristics. Steel pipe may be used for ash
/slag conveying pipe. For the ash slurry pipe with serious erosion, the thin wall steel
pipe (or reinforced concrete pipe) with basalt lining shall be used.
14.6.4 In the design of dike for valley type water ash storage yard and flood drainage
structure, the flood regulation function of the ash storage yard shall be considered. In
the design of valley type dry ash storage yard, the diversion facilities for flood
interception and flood drainage shall be considered.
14.6.5 For the water ash storage yard where the low concentration of fresh water is
used to convey ash, the perfect ash and water recovery facilities shall be built. For the
mudflat ash storage yard where the sea water is used to convey ash, the recovery of
ash water from the ash storage yard shall be determined according to the project
condition and requirement of the environmental protection.
14.6.6 When dry ash disposal system is adopted, the following requirements shall be
complied with in the design of dry ash storage yard.
14.6.6.1 The dry ash storage yard shall be relationally planned and used in
stages and in blocks consecutively. When the ash is filled up to the
design level of each plot, back fill with earth for farming or greenery
by vegetation shall be followed.
14.6.6.2 When there is convergent water flow around the dry ash storage yard, it
shall be cutoff and guided into the down stream; the collected run-off
is not allowed to flow into the dry ash yard.
14.6.6.3 Dry ash storage yard shall be provided with necessary scraping
/compacting machineries for construction and operation of the ash yard
with appropriate reserve.
14.6.6.4 The dry ash storage yard shall be provided with necessary water spray
devices to prevent dry ash flying.
14.6.6.5 The greenery isolating belt shall be provided around the plain type ash
storage yard.
14.7 Potable Water Supply and Waste Water Drainage

14.7.1 When the power plant and its living quarters are near to the city or other
industries and enterprises, the piping network of the potable water supply and
drainage system shall be connected to the water supply and drainage system of the
city or other industries and enterprises.
For power plant with its own potable water system, the selection of water source, the
water source sanitary protection and curing, and the water quality shall be complied
with the stipulation of GB5749 Sanitation Standard of Potable Water, in force.
14.7.2 Completely separate flow system shall be used for the drainage systems of
sewage, production waste water and rain run-off within the power plant area.
14.7.3 The waste water which contains corrosive substances, oil or other harmful
substances, and waste water with temperature higher than 40, as well as sewage
shall be drained into the production waste water and rain run-off pipe or culvert after
being treated to the required quality.
14.7.4 The rain water depositing tank for coal storage yard shall be built in the power
plant.
14.8 Hydraulic Structures

14.8.1 The design of hydraulic structures shall be determined according to the
hydrological, meteorological, geological, construction conditions, and supply of
construction material, as well as the local specific condition, and through technical
and economical comparison.
14.8.2 For hydraulic structure design, the related stipulation in Chapter 16 Building
and Structure shall be executed.
14.8.3 The hydraulic structure shall be planned unitedly according to the power plant
planned capacity, and may be constructed in stages where the condition is suitable. It
may also be construction, limitation in arrangement, as well as economically
unreasonable for construction in stages.
14.8.4 For pump house and intake/discharge structures located inside the plant site
area, their architectural appearance shall be coordinated with that of the other
buildings. For pump house and intake structures outside the site area, the treatment of
the architectural appearance shall be coordinated with the surroundings.
14.8.5 For the pump house far away from the plant site area, necessary facilities for
production and living shall be provided.
14.8.6 The terrazzo surface may be provided for the ground surface of electric
operating floor of circulating water pump house and electric motor floor of the
vertical pump. The cement surface may be used for other ground surface, but the
surface shall be smooth.
14.8.7 The drainage port shall be built at the connections between the drainage open
channel and river bed, and the type of drainage port can be determined according to
the conditions of landform and geology, energy dissipation and heat emission
requirements etc.
14.8.8 Material of anti-corrosive to sea water shall be used in sea water structures or
other effective anti-corrosion measures shall be taken, and related stipulations in the
Technical Specification for Harbour Engineering shall be complied with. Special
protection must be considered for steel pipeline used for sea water intake.
14.8.9 When the hydraulic structure is to be built on the weak foundation soil, the
deformation and stability of foundation soil shall be considered. Foundation soil
treatment measures shall be taken if the design requirement cannot be satisfied.
Subsidence observation points shall be installed around the buildings.
14.8.10 The dam of the ash storage yard shall be planned according to the planned
capacity of the power plant, and constructed in stages. If it is necessary to construct in
one stage, it shall be determined through technical and economical comparison.
Shift room with necessary living, communication, lighting etc. facilities for operation
and management shall be provided nearby the ash storage yard.
14.8.11 The design standard for dams of valley type ash storage yard shall be
executed according to Table14.8.11.
Table14.8.11 Design Standard for Dams of Valley Type Ash Storage Yard
Class Classification index Torrent Extra height of Factor of safety against slide
Total ash Final frequency (%) dam(m) Downstream Up-stream
yard volume, height of slope slope
8
V(10 ) dam, H(m) Design Check Design Check Basic Special Basic Special
I V>1 H>70 1 0.2 1.0 0.5 1.25 1.05
II 0.1<V1 50<H70 2 0.5 0.7 0.4 1.20 1.05 1.15 1.00
III 0.01<V0.1 30<H50 3 1 0.5 0.3 1.15 1.0
Note:
1 when the dam is built of ash/slag, the extra height and factor of safety against slide shall be raised by one
class;
2 when using ash dam, the operational mode of ash discharge in front of the dam shall be adopted;
3 when the dam height is not corresponding to the total storage volume, the design standard may be raised
or lowered one class, for example:
0.1<V1, H>70m; may be designed by raising one class.
0.1<V1, H<50m; may be designed by lowering one class
14.8.12 The design standard for dike of ash storage yard at the river, lake and sea
beach (shoal) shall be executed according to Table 14.8.12, and shall also be approved
by the local relevant organization.
Table 14.8.12 Design Standard for Dikes of Ash Storage Yard at
River, Lake and Sea Beach(shoal)
Class Max. tide level Wave Dike extra Factor of safety against slide
(flood recurrence(a) height (top of
Down-stream Up-stream
level)recurrence wave retaining
slope slope
(a) wall )(m)
Design Check Design Check Design Check Basic Special Basic Special
I 50 100 50 50 0.4 0.0 1.20 1.05 1.15 1.00
II 20 100 50 20 0.4 0.0 1.15 1.00 1.15 1.00
Notes:
1 The class of the dike in the Table shall be determined according to the storage volume of ash
yard, the degree of hazard after the dike failure, and the local design standard of dike, land
reclamation, etc.
2 The extra height from the surface of the disposed ash to the top of the dike shall not be less
than 1.0m.
3 The wave climbup height of corresponding recurrence and wave height with accumulated
frequency of the project area shall be included in calculating the wave height. The standard
for designed wave height with accumulated frequency may refer to related regulations of in
the Technical Specification for Harbor Engineering.
14.8.13 The flood interception trench shall be provided for the valley type dry ash
storage yard, and the design standard shall be designed according to the flood
recurrence period of one tenth frequency.
14.8.14 When the flood detention dam is used at the upstream of valley type dry ash
storage yard, the regulating storage capacity, dam height and drainage facility shall be
determined according to the hydrologic calculation and optimization. The design
standard of flood detention dam can be executed with reference of Table 14.8.11, but
it shall be controlled on basis of upstream flood storage capacity.
The height of downstream enrockment rib shall be determined according to the
landform of ash storage yard, and shall not be less than 3m.
14.8.15 Local construction material shall be used for the dike-body structure of the
ash storage yard. The secure, economic and rational type of dike shall be selected
through technical and economical comparison.
14.8.16 When the dike is built in the seismic region with seismic basic intensity of
VII and above, the measures to prevent the liquification of the dike body and
foundation soil shall be taken.
15 Auxiliary and Ancillary Facilities
15.0.1 The inspection and repair of newly built and extension power plants shall
depend on the centralized repair mode of professional inspection and repair company
or regional cooperation, and the central maintenance workshop shall not be installed.
15.0.2 The repair shop for boiler, steam turbine, electrical, thermal process, fuel
handling, ash handling, chemical, etc. shall be established in the power plant. The
installed equipment and the area of repair shop shall be determined according to the
relevant prevailing stipulations.
The repair shop of transformer shall not be built in the power plant, while the
necessary conditions (e.g. places etc.) for inspection and repair of 220kV and below
transformers on site or nearby shall be provided. The 220kV and below transformers
shall also be repaired in the steam turbine house if conditions are suitable.
15.0.3 The apparatus and meter for metallurgical laboratory, chemical laboratory,
electrical laboratory, thermal process laboratory, environmental protection monitoring
station and labor protection monitoring station shall be provided according to the
related stipulations and actual demands. The overall arrangement for the apparatus
and meter with low utilization rate and high cost shall be made according to the
regional cooperation principle. Based on the specific conditions of project and
principle of cut down staff and increasing efficiency, the combined arrangement
scheme shall be properly carried out for the above-mentioned laboratories and
monitoring stations.
15.0.4 The acetylene generation station and oxygen generation station shall not be
established in the power plant.
15.0.5 The compressed air system for maintenance and thermal process control shall
be built in the power plant. The compressed air system and its air compressor in the
power plant shall be designed to meet to the following requirements:
15.0.5.1 For 300MW and above units, one set of service compressed air system and
one set of thermal process control compressed air system shall be provided for two
units. Unit system can also be considered when it is rational after technical and
economical comparison. For 200 MW and below units, theses two compressed air
systems can be provided for whole power plant usage.
15.0.5.2 The compressed air system for maintenance and thermal process control shall
be adopted with the same type and capacity of air compressors, and they shall be
installed in combination and centrally arranged. The air compressor outlet shall be
connected with header pipe, while the air storage tanks and air supply systems for
both systems shall be installed separately. The working pressure of the compressed air
system shall meet the requirements of air utilizing ends. The stainless steel pipes shall
be used for the air supply pipes of the compressed air used by the thermal process
control.
15.0.5.3 The number of service air compressors shall be two, its total capacity shall be
able to satisfy the required amount of the maximum continuous air consumption for
the pneumatic facilities used by the thermal process control, and two standby
compressors shall be provided.
15.0.5.4 When all air compressors are shut down, the capacity of air storage tank for
the compressed air system used by the thermal process control shall be capable to
maintain the air consumption not less than 5 minutes. The special purpose pressure
regulating air storage tank shall be provided for the pneumatic protection facilities and
air utilizing points far away from the air compressor house.
15.0.5.5 The dust collecting filter and air drier shall be provided for the compressed
air system for the thermal process control, and the quality of air supply shall conform
to the relevant requirements stipulated in the standard GB4830Scope and Quality of
Air Source Pressure for Industrial Automation Instrumentation. The capacity of air
drier shall match with the capacity of service air compressor.
15.0.6 The design of insulation and painting in the power plant shall meet the
15.0.6.1The major insulation material shall be rationally selected according to the
temperature of the heat medium. Priority shall be given to those materials which have
low heat conductivity, low unit weight, reasonable price, convenience to installation
and easy for maintenance.
15.0.6.2The calculation of economic thickness of the insulation layer shall be carried
out in the design, and the surface temperature of the insulation layer shall not be
higher than 50.
15.0.6.3The design of insulation and painting in the power plant shall also conform to
the stipulation of the State standards and profession standards in effect.
15.0.7 In the power plant design, anticorrosion and upkeep measures shall be
considered during the outage of major thermal equipment.
15.0.8 Oil purification equipment and oil storage tanks for turbine oil and insulating
oil shall be installed in the power plant, and shall also meet the following
requirements:
15.0.8.1 In the power plant with unit capacity of 200MW and above, each unit shall
install one set of turbine oil purification equipment. One set of turbine oil storage tank
shall either be provided for both units, or provided for single unit. The capacity of oil
storage tank shall not less than the oil amount of lubricating oil system in one largest
unit. If conditions available, the oil storage may also be combined with the emergency
oil tank stipulated in Clause 6.6.4.
For units with capacity of 125MW and below, both units shall install one set of
turbine oil purification equipment and oil storage tank.
The turbine oil purification equipment shall arrange in the turbine house, while the
turbine oil storage tank shall install one appropriate location outside of the turbine
house.
15.0.8.2 The output of the turbine oil purification facility shall be selected according
to disposal of 20% of total oil amount within system per hour. The capacity of each
turbine oil storage tank shall not be less than 110% of the oil system capacity of one
turbine unit.
15.0.8.3 One set of insulating oil purification facility and two insulating oil storage
tanks shall be provided for the entire power plant, and the oil purification and oil
storage tank shall be arranged at the vicinity of booster pump. The capacity of
insulating oil storage tank shall not be less than 110%of the oil system capacity of one
largest transformer.
If the selection of entrusting mode available, i.e. the oil purification task shall be
undertaken by the professional insulating oil Purification Company, the insulating oil
purification shall also not be installed.
15.0.9Hydrogen generation station may be provided for power plant installed with
hydrogen-cooled generator. If qualified hydrogen can be obtained from nearby
hydrogen generation factory, then the hydrogen generation equipment is not required.
The total capacity of the hydrogen generation equipment shall be considered
according to the normal consumption of all the hydrogen cooled generators, as well as
adding the accumulation in about 7 days hydrogen quantity, equivalent to the amount
of filling hydrogen for startup the largest hydrogen cooling generator once. The total
effective volume of the hydrogen storage tank shall be considered according to the
sum of the storage of normal hydrogen consumption of all hydrogen cooled
generators during the overhaul period of the hydrogen generation equipment, together
with the filling of hydrogen for startup the largest hydrogen cooled generator once.
The permissible leakage rate of hydrogen of the generator shall refer to the related
stipulations and guaranteed value given by the manufacturer.
When hydrogen vessel is used for buying hydrogen, the total effective capacity of the
hydrogen storage tanks and hydrogen cylinders shall satisfy 10days normal
consumption of all hydrogen cooled generators and filling hydrogen for startup of the
largest hydrogen cooled generator once.
When pipe is used for delivering hydrogen from hydrogen generation factory to the
power plant, the total effective volume of hydrogen storage tanks in the power plant
shall be determined according to the condition of storaging hydrogen in the hydrogen
generation factory, and the degree of reliability of the hydrogen delivery piping; but at
least it shall satisfy 4 days normal hydrogen consumption of all the hydrogen cooling
generators
The moisture content in the hydrogen delivered to the hydrogen cooled generator shall
satisfy the requirements of the generators operated under different hydrogen pressure.
15.0.10 Fixed facility for boiler chemical cleaning shall not be installed but necessary
cleaning and treatment facilities shall be provided according to the chemical cleaning
and waste liquid treatment alternatives of the project approved in the project
preliminary design.
16. Building and Structure

16.1.1 Civil works design for power plant shall completely implement the principles
of safety, applicability, economy and aesthetics.
16.1.2 Architectural design shall be based on the factors of production process,

usage requirement, natural conditions, surrounding environment, building material,
building technique, etc, and in integration with the technological design to achieve a
good plan arrangement, space organization, architectural configuration and color
treatment of the building and the selection of enclosure structure; and also to match
with the technological engineering in solving the problems of internal communication,
fire protection, explosion protection and explosion relieving, water protection, erosion
protection, noise protection, dust protection, protection, from small animals, seismic
resistant, vibration isolation, thermal insulation, heat isolation, sunshining, lighting,
natural ventilation, living facilities, etc, inside the buildings. In the configuration
design, outlook and interior treatment of the plant architecture, the color of the
building and technological equipment shall be considered as a united integrity and the
group of buildings shall be in harmony with the surrounding environment.
16.1.3 The fire protection design of the various buildings inside the power plant
shall meet the requirements of the standard GB50229 Fire Prevention Code for
Designing Fossil Fuel Power Plants and Substation and the relevant prevailing fire
protection standard and codes.
16.1.4 The principle of area division for building fire protection of the main power
building is that no transverse partition wall is to be provided for the different divisions.
The partition walls between the turbine house, deaerator bay (including the combined
deaerator bunker bay) with the boiler room and bunker bay shall be considered for fire
protection.
16.1.5 The fire protection and explosion protection requirements of the outdoor
switchyard structures shall be in accordance with the relevant requirements of the
standard GB50060 Design Code for Substation (35-110kV) , SDJ2 Design Code
for Substation (220-500kV) and SDJ9 Technical Code for Design of High Voltage
Switchgears, in force.
16.1.6 The size and area of the plant auxiliary, ancillary and living buildings shall be
implemented in accordance with the relevant prevailing State and profession
regulations; multi-storied or combined structures may be adopted.
16.1.7 The characteristics at different regions shall be considered according the
locally actual conditions for selection of building materials.
16.1.8 The structural design shall meet the requirements of production usage on the
loading capability, stability, deformation, endurance, etc, and the construction
conditions shall be considered at the same time. For concrete structures, cracking
resistance or cracking width of the structures shall be analyzed, if necessary. Dynamic
analysis shall be conducted for those structures affected by dynamic loads.
Pulverized coal bins shall be seal treated and the requirement of explosion protection
shall be considered. The bins shall be designed to withstand the internal explosion
pressure of 9.8 kPa.
When conditions suitable, the three-dimensional space analysis methods shall be
adopted.
16.1.9 The maximum interval of longitudinal temperature expansion joint of the

main power building shall not be more than 75 m for reinforced concrete structures,
100 m for prefabricated reinforced concrete structures, 150 m for steel structures. The
temperature expansion joint may be arranged between the buildings of two generating
units.
When effective measures have been taken or temperature stress analysis has proven
that the design requirements can be met, the interval of temperature expansion joint
may be suitably increased.
Double columns, double trusses may be employed for the main building temperature
expansion joint. Cantilever structure may be used for the beam slab and enclosure
structure at the expansion joint.
16.1.10 For the exposed structures of power plant located at seaside, the salt-mist and
corrosion resistance measures shall be taken.
16.2 Seismic Resistant Design

16.2.1 Seismic resistant design for power plant shall insist on the principle of
prevention first, so as to mitigate the damage of the buildings, to avoid personnel
casualty and to reduce economical losses of buildings after taking seismic resistant
measures.
16.2.2 Seismic resistant measures shall be adopted for buildings in the region with
seismic basic intensity of and above.
Seismic resistant measures for power plant buildings shall be taken in accordance
with theGBJ11 Code for Seismic Design of Buildings, GB50191 Seismic Design
code for Structures and GB50260 Seismic Design code for Electric Power
Facilities, in force.
1 The main structures of the main power building, boiler frames, chimney, flue
gas duct, coal conveyor trestle, coal crusher room and coal transfer station,
main control building (including central control building), indoor switchgear
building, communication building for uninterruptible communication,
network control building, etc, of the power plant with generating unit of 300
MW and above and planned total capacity of 800 MW and above, as well as
the power plant owned by especially important industrial and mining
enterprises, shall be designed with the seismic resistant measures in
accordance with the requirement for Type B building in the standard GBJ11
Code for Seismic Design of Buildings.
2 Main production buildings and buildings of continuous production operation
and public use buildings, important warehouses, etc, of power plant with
unit generating capacity below 300 MW and planned total capacity below
800 MW, shall be designed with seismic resistant measures in accordance
with the requirement for Type C building in the standard GBJ11 Code for
Seismic Design of Buildings.
3 Secondary buildings like general warehouse, plant fence, bicycle shed ,etc,
shall be designed with seismic resistant measures in accordance with the
requirement for Type D building in the standard GBJ11 Code for Seismic
Design of Buildings.
16.3 Main Power Building Structures

16.3.1 Reinforced concrete structures shall be adopted for the main power building
frame, while composite structures can also be adopted conditionally. Composite
structures of steel beams with concrete slab may be used for the operating floor
platform of turbine and boiler. When necessary, steel structures can be used for the
main load bearing structures of the main power building for the generating unit of 300
MW and above.
16.3.2 Roof structural systems with purlins, non-purlin, slab-beam (truss) combined
structure can be selected for the roof structure of the main power building. When
construction condition and material are available, prestressed large roof slabs may be
used for the building with non-purlin system. Small channeled slab or cast-in-place
reinforced concrete roof slab with channeled steel deck plate as the bottom form can
be used for the purlin system roof.
16.3.3 Reinforced concrete truss can be used for main power building truss with
span of 18 m and below. Prestressed reinforced concrete truss of steel truss may be
used for span of more than 18 m. Steel truss shall be used for span larger than 33 m.
16.3.4 The enclosure structure of main power building shall be in coordination with
the load bearing structure system, and hollow earthen bricks, masonry bricks or
reinforced concrete wall panels can be used. When necessary, new type light wall
panels can also be used.
16.3.5 Settlement joint and seismic joint shall be reserved between different
structural sections of the main power building in compliance with the loadings
engineering geology and the fortification intensity for aseismic design.
16.3.6 Independent type arrangement may be adopted for the suspension boiler
supporting frame. Reinforced concrete structure can be used for the boiler supporting
frame. Steel structure shall be used for the boiler supporting frame of generating unit
of 300 Mw and above.
16.3.7 Turbine generator foundation shall be designed in accordance with the

standard BG50040 Code for Design of Dynamically Loaded Foundation in force
and in reference with the requirement of the manufacturer. Model test may be carried
out for the foundation of the first unit of new type of renovated type of 600 MW and
above.
16.4 Foundation Base and Foundation

16.4.1 For the design of foundation base and foundation, the safe, economical and
reasonable type of foundation base and foundation shall be adopted according to the
engineering geological investigating information data, combined with the usage
requirement of the different buildings (structures) of the power plant, fully absorbing
the experiences of local construction works, and considering comprehensively those
factors such as the type of structure, the supply of material, the construction
conditions, etc.
16.4.2 In designing the main power building foundation, same type of foundation
base shall be adopted. Different types of foundation base and different supporting
layer for pile foundation can be also employed according to the different engineering
geological conditions or different structural elements of the building.
16.4.3 Besides calculating the bearing capability of the foundation base, the
deformation and stability of the foundation base shall be analyzed when necessary. If
the bearing capability, deformation and stability of the foundation base can not meet
the design requirement, artificial foundation base shall be adopted.
16.4.4 The selection of the types of foundation for the plant building is mainly
determined by the bearing capability of the foundation base and the type of treatment
of the foundation base. Individual spread footing may be used when the geological
condition is comparatively favorable, otherwise strip type, mat type or caisson type
foundation can be adopted respectively in order, providing that the deformation
requirements of the foundation base are satisfied.
16.4.5 According to the geological conditions, stacking load effect shall be

considered for the buildings within or nearby the coal storage yard and large surface
loading region. When the foundation base can not satisfy the design requirement, the
base soil of the coal storage yard shall be treated.
16.4.6 Settlement observation points shall be provided on the main buildings. The
impact to the existing building by the extension building shall be considered in the
extension project design.
16.5 Lighting and Natural Ventilation

16.5.1 Natural day-lighting for buildings shall be considered in priority. The indoor
natural day-lighting illuminance of building shall meet the requirement of the
standard GB50033 Design Standard for Industrial Enterprise Lighting, in force. The
lighting opening shall not be too large and the arrangement shall consider avoiding
the sheltering effect by the equipment. Side windows design shall consider the
building economy of energy and convenience for cleaning so that large area glass
windows shall be avoided.
16.5.2 When the span of turbine house is larger than or equal to 30 m, the side
widows and roof combined lighting type may be adopted. The lighting class can be
designed as Class V.
16.5.3 Natural ventilation shall be adopted for general buildings. Ventilating

openings on walls and floors shall be arranged reasonably to avoid air flow shortcut
and back flow, and to reduce the dead angles of air flow.
16.6 Water Prevention and Drainage

16.6.1 Organized drainage shall be considered on the ground floor of the main
power building, deaerator floor, coal bunker floor, piping floor and the floor ground
(including coal conveyor trestle) requiring frequent flushing. The main power
building roofing (including the boiler top structure and the operating floor platform of
the outdoor boiler), the ceiling slabs of control room and the electrical equipment
buildings shall be water-proof and provided with organized drainage.
16.6.2 All indoor trenches, tunnels, basement, underground sumps, etc, shall be
provided with adequate drainage design and reliable water preventing and drainage
facilities. When drainage of gravity flow can not be guaranteed, mechanical drainage
shall be used to prevent water from flowing back.
Cable trenches and cable tunnels are strictly prohibited to be used as drainage passage
of ground flushing and other water flow.
16.6.3 In raining area, cast-in-place reinforced concrete structure may be used for
the roofing of electrical installation buildings (for roofing of prefabricated integrated
structure, a complete layer of cast-in place concrete shall be added), and high quality
water-proof layer and organized drainage shall be employed.
16.7 Indoor and Outdoor Finishing and Decoration

16.7.1 Indoor wall surface of buildings shall all be finished and decorated. The outer
wall surface shall be also appropriately treated in compliance with the requirement of
out-looking.
Besides the technological requirement, wear-resisting and easily-cleaned material may
be used for the ground surface and floor surface of the buildings.
Indoor finishing and decoration shall be in accordance with the standard GB50222
Design Code for Fire Prevention of Finishing and Decoration Inside of Buildings.
16.7.2 The interior surface of rooms (including the interior surfaces of indoor and
outdoor drainage trenches) equipped with corrosive materials (such as battery room,
acid room, etc) shall be protected from corrosion.
In rooms with combustible gas, the internal structural members shall be arranged so
that gas can be easily exhausted.
16.8 Doors and Windows

16.8.1 Steel door or steel framed wooden door may be employed for doors used in
plant transportation.
Electrical motor-driven rolling door can be used for the exit and inlet provided for
large size equipment. Doors and windows with good sealing shall be selected in cold
and severely cold regions.
Doors made of non-combustible material shall be used for the electrical equipment
buildings and rooms, measures shall be taken for doors, windows and openings on
wall to prevent small animals from entering.
16.8.2 Steel windows shall be used for buildings. Aluminum alloy windows can be
used for those rooms with special requirement, and screen windows can be added
when necessary.
Horizontally opening windows or sliding windows shall be provided for zones with
frequent activity of personnel.
Mechanically opening and closing devices shall be adopted for the high side
ventilating windows.
Convenience for maintaining and cleaning window casements shall be considered
during buildings design.
16.8.3 Doors and windows made of nonsparkling material shall be used for
electrolyzer room in the hydrogen generating station.
16.8.4 Corrosion resistant for the doors and windows of battery room and acid room
16.8.5 Corrosion resistant for the doors and windows of power plant at seaside shall
be considered.
16.9 Living Facilities

16.9.1 The living facilities, such as retiring room and dressing room, etc, shall be
provided at the places where the system operating personnel are concentrated, such as
the centralized control building, coal conveying and ash handling etc.
16.9.2 Centralized bathroom shall be provided in the plant area. Special purpose
bathroom shall be provided nearby the fuel division.
16.9.3 Potable water facilities shall be considered at the major working places of the
main production buildings and at the buildings where personnel are concentrated, and
these places shall also be equipped with the toilets and water sink for washing.
16.10 Chimney
16.10.1 Height and internal diameter of chimney at the top exit shall be selected in
accordance with the following series:
Height of reinforced concrete chimney (m): 80, 100, 120, 150, 180, 210, 240, 270 and
300.
Internal diameter at the top exit, for diameter smaller than 8 m, module of 0.5 m can
be used; for diameter equal to or more than 8 m, module of 1 m used.
16.10.2 Single shaft type, bushing shaft type or multi-shafts type can be used for the
chimney structure. The selection of chimney type can be determined according to the
strong or weak corrosiveness of the flue gas and the environmental protection
requirement, and in coordination with the particulars of the project.
1 Bushing shaft type shall be adopted for the chimney discharging strong
corrosive flue gas, and acid resistant material structure shall be adopted for the
flue gas discharging inner shaft.
2 Anticorrosive and single shaft type chimney structure can be adopted
discharging medium corrosive flue gas; and bushing shaft type chimney
structure shall also be adopted, when technical and economical comparison
supports such selection.
3 Anticorrosive and single shaft type chimney structure shall be adopted
discharging weak corrosive flue gas.
4 If multi-shafts type chimney structure is considered, the special feasibility study
shall be provided.
When anticorrosive and single shaft type chimney structure can be adopted, the
following corrosion resistant measures shall be taken:
1. To use acid resistant lining and acid resistant, heat insulating
material;
2. To increase the density and compactness of the lining structure, so
as to prevent or reduce the leakage of flue gas;
3. If the lining structure can not prevent the leakage of flue gas,
corrosion-proof isolation layer shall be applied on the internal
surface of the outer shaft, and the density and compactness of
reinforced concrete of the outer shaft shall be increased.
16.11 Coal Conveyor Trestle

16.11.1 Reinforced concrete structure can be used for the coal conveyor trestle. When
the span is larger than 24 m, steel structure shall be used.
16.11.2 Light type enclosure structure shall be used for the coal conveyor trestle.
16.11.3 Top cover of dry coal sheds shall be adopted with the steel structure. When
the span is more than 45 m, wire frame structure shall be adopted.
17. Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning

17.1.1 The regions where the years average annual number of days with mean daily
temperature stabilized below or equal to 5 is more than or equal to 90, are
specified as centralized heating regions.
Production plant building and auxiliary buildings located in the centralized heating
region shall be designed for centralized heating.
17.1.2 Regions, conforming to one of the following conditions, are specified as

transit regions:
1 The years average annual number of days with mean daily temperature
stabilized below or equal to 5, is 6089 days.
2 The successive years average annual number of days with mean daily
temperature stabilized below or equal to 5, is 4559 days; at the same time,
the years annual coldest month average relative humidity is greater than or
equal to 75%, and over the years annual average percentage of winter sunshine
is below or equal to 25%.
Some production plant buildings and some auxiliary buildings located in the transit
region may be designed for centralized heating.
17.1.3 Heating of living welfare buildings outside the plant area shall be in
accordance with the local construction standard.
17.1.4 Hot water shall be adopted as the heating medium for high or higher pressure
power plant. Turbine extraction steam directly used as heating medium of larger
heating system is not suitable.
When hot water shall be adopted as the heating medium for the centralized heating
regions, the temperature of supply and return waters shall not be less than 110
/70.
When steam used as the heat medium, the steam temperature at cold regions shall not
exceed 160, and the steam temperature at severely cold regions shall not exceed
130.
17.1.5 Chilling source of air conditioning system shall be determined according to

the conditions of the region where the plant is located, and after technical and
economical comparison. Deep well water or other natural chilling source shall be used
in priority. If the water delivery conditions of industrial water or industrial circulating
water and its water quality are in accordance with the requirements, and the water
source is able to guarantee continuously supply water, the industrial water or
industrial circulating water shall be adopted as the chilling source in priority.
17.1.6 Buildings, where transporting, storaging or production process will produce
inflammable and explosive gas or substance, are strictly prohibited from using open
fire and electronic heaters heating.
17.1.7 At power plant located in the centralized heating region and transit heating
region, standby steam source shall be provided as the heat source of heating system
using extraction steam from single turbine unit.
17.1.8 Outdoor design parameters for heating, ventilation and air conditioning shall
be implemented in accordance with the standard GBJ19 Specification for Design of
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning, in force.
In the design of winter ventilation, the calculated outdoor design temperature for
heating shall be used for the air inlet system of the turbine house, boiler house, battery
room, coal conveying underground building and other local exhaust air compensation.
17.1.9 The winter heating design indoor temperature for various buildings of the
power plant shall be determined according to the production requirements and
standard TJ36 Design Standard for Industrial Enterprise Hygiene, in force.
17.1.10 Fire protection and smoke exhaust facilities shall be considered in ventilation
and air conditioning design, and shall be in accordance with the relevant stipulations
in the standard GB50229 Fire Protection Code for Fossil Fuel Power Plant and
Substation Design in force, and interlocked with the fire fighting system.
17.1.11 When no special technological requirement is specified, the summer air

temperature at places where people are constantly working within the plant shops
shall not exceed the specified value listed in Table 17.1.11.
For working places within the plant shops with natural ventilation, if the summer air
temperature exceeds the specified value in Table 17.1.11, mechanical ventilation shall
be installed. If mechanical ventilation still cannot meet the requirement, then air
conditioning shall be installed.
Table 17.1.11 Specified Summer Air Temperature at Working Places within Plant
)
Shops(
Summer ventilating
outdoor calculation 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2932 33
Allowable temperature
difference 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
Working place temperature

32 32 3235 35
Note:
1 Working places indicate the places where workers often or periodically stop to observe and
manage the production process. If the production and operation are carried out at many
different locations in shops, then whole shop is regarded as the working place.
2 Under limited conditions, the temperature difference may be increased 12,if the
requirement listed in this table cannot be satisfied, after taking ventilating measures to reduce
the temperature.
17.1.12 Non-flammable material shall be used to fabricate the insulation layer for the
air duct and various pipings of the ventilation and air conditioning system.
17.1.13 When the productive buildings are certainly required to set up the heating
facilities according to the technical process requirements, the heating facilities can be
employed at non-heating regions.
17.1.14 The installing scope of air conditioning system and facilities shall be
determined according to the technical process requirements and actual production
demands.
17.1.15 For the shops where the dispersing amount of heat and moisture is larger, the
air temperatures at its working zones shall be accordance with the requirements in
Table 17.1.15.
Table 17.1.15 Required Summer Air Temperature at Working Zones within

Shops
Characteristics of working zones within Air temperature at working zones
shops within shops
3
Heat dispersing amount Q<23W/m Un-exceeded summer ventilation
outdoor calculated temperature of 3.
Heat dispersing amount Un-exceeded summer ventilation
3 3
23W/m Q116W/m outdoor calculated temperature of 5.
3
Heat dispersing amount Q>116W/m Un-exceeded summer ventilation
outdoor calculated temperature of 7.
Note: Working zone indicates the space that is up to 2 m above the ground where the
working place is located.
17.1.16 The ventilation designs of various buildings and shops in power plant shall
be in accordance with the following principles:
1 For buildings and shops where the amount of residual heat and surplus
humidity are larger, the ventilation quantity shall be determined based on the
larger value of air capacity required for elimination of residual heat and
surplus humidity.
2 For shops where the venomous and nocuous gases are possible to be
discharged, the ventilation quantity shall be determined according to the
ventilation times required to satisfy the indoor maximum allowable
concentration, and the indoor air shall be strictly prohibited for recirculating.
Discharge of venomous and nocuous gases shall be in accordance with the
national prevailing specifications.
3 When the surrounding environment air is severe or the dust prevention
requirements are stipulated in technical process equipment, the positive
pressure ventilation shall be adopted, and intake air shall be filtered.
4 Emergency ventilation shall be installed at shops where the explosion
protection requirements raised, and the emergency fans and motors shall be
explosion-proof type. The emergency fan can also be used as the summer
ventilation.
17.2 Main Power Building

17.2.1 Main power building heating shall be designed in accordance with
maintaining the indoor temperature at +5.The heat dissipated by the equipment
shall not be considered in the calculation.
17.2.2 In the main power building ventilation design for the indoor arranged
generating unit, the forced draft fans in summer may be utilized as the mechanical air
exhaust fan of the main power building, exhausting the hot air draft from the boiler
house and turbine house to the boiler. While in winter, the air volume drafted from the
top of boiler by the boiler forced draft fans shall be determined according to the heat
balance calculation.
17.2.3 Natural ventilation may be adopted for the main power building in summer.
Mechanical ventilation or natural and mechanical combined ventilation shall be
adopted, when natural ventilation can not meet the sanitary or production
requirement.
When hydrogen chilling is adopted for generators, the hydrogen exhausting measures
shall be taken at the highest point of turbine house roof.
17.2.4 For totally enclosed type main power building, mechanical air draft and air
exhaust ventilation shall be adopted.
17.2.5 All year round air conditioning installation shall be provided for the
electronic computer room and electronic equipment room, central control room, unit
control room and other control room. The indoor design parameters shall be
determined according to the technical process requirements; if not clearly required,
the design shall be made according to the following parameters:
In summer: Temperature 251271 and relative humidity 60%10%;
In winter: Temperature 201 and relative humidity 60%10%.
Air conditioning installations shall be installed according to the technical process
requirements at other control rooms.
17.2.6 When natural chilling source is adopted, air cooling apparatus shall be
equipped with double class type syringing room.
17.2.7 Air disposal installations of centralized air conditioning system shall be

configured according to the designed cooling load and 2 100% of wind volume, of
which, one is standby.
17.2.8 The centralized control mode shall be adopted for centralized refrigeration
and heating system and air conditioning system in centralized control buildings.
17.2.9 Vacuum purging system shall be installed at the boiler house active layers,
boiler body and its top places, which cleans up dust deposit and takes charge of
shifting dust clearing at places where water purging is unsuitable in coal bunker bay,
and shall satisfy the following requirements:
1 To select major equipment and configure delivery pipe network according to
high vacuum and suction mode.
2 To determine and install the truck mounted or fixed vacuum purging facilities
according to the following factors, i.e. whether or not the boiler is enclosed
arrangement, boiler capacity, arrangement conditions of purging installations
and ash handling system mode etc. If the feasibility study proves that it is
certainly difficult to install one fixed purging device, two fixed vacuum
purging devices may also be employed.
17.3 Electrical Buildings and Electrical Equipment

17.3.1 Air conditioning installation may be equipped for the main control room,
network control room, relay room, uninterrupted power supply room, telephone
exchanger room, power line carrier (PLC) equipment room and microwave equipment
room, excitation regulating device room and generator protection room in summer.
17.3.2 In battery room, mechanical ventilation or air condition system shall be

determined according to equipment types and local climatic conditions.
17.3.3 When the electrical equipment rooms of main power building are equipped
with the electrical equipment with large heat dissipating capacity, such as the high
voltage switch cabinet or dry type transformer, etc, the indoor environment design
temperature shall not be more than 35. When one of following conditions is
satisfied, the proper temperature drop measures shall be adopted for ventilation
system:
1 Summer ventilation outdoor calculated temperature t 33;
2 Summer ventilation outdoor calculated temperature 30 t < 33, monthly
average relative humidity at hottest month 70%.
17.3.4 The rate of ventilating air exchange in summer for the house service
switchgear room shall be not less than 10 times per hour, emergency exhaust air fan
can be concurrently used as ventilating draft fan.
17.3.5 Ventilation between electrical building and electrical equipment room and
fire protection and gas exhausting measures for air conditioning system shall depend
on the properties of fire fighting facilities.
17.4 Coal Handling and Ash Handling Buildings

17.4.1 For regions of heating design outdoor temperature equal to or below -10,
hot air curtain may be provided for the coal dumper room. For regions of heating
design outdoor temperature between 0 -10, hot air curtain may also be
provided if technical and economical comparison proves it reasonable.
17.4.2 For heating transit regions, where frequent freezing is possible during winter
in the coal handling building, heating facilities may be installed at coal crusher room
and transfer station.
17.4.3 Underground coal unloading trench, underground coal conveyor tunnel,

underground coal transfer station, etc, of the coal handling system shall be equipped
with ventilating facilities. The heat consumption of winter ventilation for underground
coal unloading trench in heating regions shall be compensated by radiator and hot air
facility in common.
17.4.4 Dedusting measures shall be considered at places of coal handling system

where flying coal dust is heavy. When coal bunker bay is equipped with enclosed type
coal pulverized conveyor layer, the necessary ventilating and dedusting measures
shall be adopted at this layer.
17.4.5 Dedusting, syringing and spraying system of the coal handling system shall
be interlocked with coal handling equipment, and the operating signals for dedusting
facilities shall be transmitted to the coal handling control room.
17.4.6 When coal thawing room is required, the defreezing mode (such as
defreezing by hot air plus steam pipings, defreezing by infrared ray, defreezing by
steam pipings, etc) shall be determined after technical and economical comparison.
17.4.7 The design ventilating air volume for the ash slurry pump house shall be
determined according to the heat volume dissipated by the equipment.
17.5 Chemical Buildings

17.5.1 Natural ventilation during summer shall be adopted for the electrodialysis
room, reverse osmosis room, filter and ion exchanger room of the chemical water
treatment plant. The heating in winter shall be calculated according to indoor
temperature 5, and no heat dissipated by equipment shall be considered.
17.5.2 Acid store house and acid metering room shall be equipped with mechanical
ventilation, and indoor air is strictly prohibited from recycling. Natural ventilation
shall be adopted for the alkali store house and alkali metering room. For centralized
heating regions and transitional regions, acid and alkali store houses shall be built
respectively. When acid and alkali are stored in the same house, ventilation design
shall meet the requirement of acid store house.
17.5.3 For other chemical buildings, ventilation mode and ventilating air volume
shall be determined according to the shops and properties of exhausted gas.
17.5.4 Anticorrosive measures shall be taken for heating and ventilation facilities,
pipings and its accessories.
17.6 Other Auxiliary and Ancillary Buildings

17.6.1 Ventilation of oil supply and unloading pump house shall be determined
For oil supply and unloading pump house above ground elevation, natural ventilation
shall be adopted. For underground oil supply and unloading pump house, mechanical
ventilation shall be adopted, and indoor air is strictly prohibited from recycling. When
mechanical ventilation adopted, ventilators shall be explosion-proof type.
17.6.2 Central and bank-side water pump houses, in summer, shall adopt the
measures that eliminate residual heat. In heating regions, the heating may be designed
to keep 5of indoor temperature in winter.
17.7 Plant Chilling, Heating Station and Piping

17.7.1 When hot water is used as the heating medium, the plant thermal network
heating station shall be built.
17.7.2 The capacity and number of equipment within plant thermal network heating
station shall be determined according to the relevant contents in Chapter 10.8, and
shall be reserved for margin of future planning possibility.
17.7.3 Condensing water recovering and utilizing measures shall be adopted for the
steam heating system.
17.7.4 The laying of plant heating piping and plant cooling piping, either overhead
or underground in the trench, shall be selected according to the actual conditions of
the project and after technical and economical comparison.
17.7.5 The main trunk pipe lines of the hot and cooling water piping shall pass
through the load concentrated area, and the type of piping design shall be reasonably
determined according to the layout of the plant area.
17.7.6 For centralized heating regions and transitional regions, when make-up water
pump house, bank-side water pump house or ash storage yard management station are
far away the power plant area, and water can not be pumped through the plant heating
piping, its production and living buildings shall adopt the partial centralized or
distributed heating mode that uses the electric energy as heat source, and no spare heat
source equipment shall be provided.
17.7.7 When cold source of air conditioning system is adopted with artificial cold
source, refrigeration station shall be built together with the plant heating station.
When the centralized refrigeration station is separately built due to technology
requirements, it is as much as possible close to the building where cold load is large.
17.7.8 Air conditioning system for entire power plant shall unitedly plan the cold
source capacity according to the specific conditions of the project, and arrange the
cold water piping.
17.7.9 Selection of artificial cold source shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:
1 Newly built power plant, under the condition of steam source having no
reliable guarantee, shall be adopted with the power-driven compression
refrigeration.
2 Rebuilt and extension power plant, under the condition of steam source having
a reliable guarantee, shall be adopted with the lithium bromide absorbing
refrigeration.
17.7.10 The type selection of refrigerating units shall be in accordance with the
1 When compressed refrigerating units adopted, the type selection shall be
carried out according to 275% or 350% of design cold load.
2 When lithium bromide absorbing type water chilling units adopted, the type
selection shall be carried out according to 260% of design cold load, of which,
no spare unit is provided.
3 When other type of water chilling units or integrated type air conditioning units
adopted, the standby capacity shall be reasonably provided according to the
design cold load.
17.7.11 Water quality of cooling water for refrigeration system shall be in accordance
with the standard GB50050 Design Specification of Industrial Circulating Cooling
Water Disposal and the related water quality requirements of products.
18 Environmental Protection

18.1.1 The related environmental protection laws, ordinances, standards and
specifications promulgated by the State, must be implemented in the power plant
environmental impact assessment report and the environmental protection engineering
and design of the power plant.
18.1.2 In the preliminary feasibility study stage for proposed power plant project,
brief and concise analyses of the environmental impacts shall be included in the study.
In the feasibility study stage, an environmental impact report shall be put forward and
a chapter on environmental protection shall be included.
In the preliminary design stage, there shall be a special chapter on environmental
protection, in which engineering measures for prevention and control of pollutants,
together with related design documents shall be put forward. Shall it be necessary to
make modifications or alterations of the prevention and control measures that have
been examined and approved in the preliminary design, they must be forwarded to the
organization initially responsible for examination and approval of the preliminary
design, for further approval of the necessary modifications or alterations.
18.1.3 Prevention and control of environmental impact, pollution from the waste gas,
waste water, ash and slag, noise etc, as well as the planning of greenery to improve
the production and living environment, shall be undertaken in the power plant design.
18.1.4 The methods adopted for assessment of the existing environmental

conditions and the forecast of environmental impact, and the means selected, shall be
in accordance to the related regulations in the State and profession standards in force.
18.1.5 For treatments of waste water, waste gas and waste residue, the agents
selected shall be non-toxic, less toxic, most effective and less pollutive. If secondary
pollution results from the waste treatment process, relevant measures shall be taken
for the treatment and control of the secondary pollution.
18.2 Prevention and Control of Atmospheric Pollution

18.2.1 The power plant flue gas emission shall be in accordance to the State
promulgated standard GB13223 Emission Standards of Air pollutants for Coal-fired
Power plants, GB3095 Quality Standards of Environmental Air and the
environmental quality requirements. For power plants located in districts with
particular regulations, the atmospheric pollutant emission shall also conform to the
related local emission standard.
18.2.2 Coal-fired power plant boilers shall be equipped with high efficiency ash
collectors, and its flue gas emission concentration and dedusting efficiency shall be in
accordance to the standard GB13223 Emission Standards of Air Pollutants for
Coal-fired Power Plants, in force. The startup of boiler flue gas emission shall be in
accordance with the standard GB13271 Emission Standards of Air Pollutants for
Boilers, in force.
18.2.3 For power plants located at the acid rain control regions and sulfur dioxide
(SO2) control regions, the sulfur dioxide (SO2) emission of entire power plant shall
not be larger than the discharge concentration and amount permitted in the standard
GBJ3223 Emission Standards of Air Pollutants for Coal-fired Power Plants, in force,
and shall also conform to the standard GB3095 Quality Standards of Environmental
Air and the requirements of emission total amount.
18.2.4 The height of chimney in the power plant shall be considered, by calculation,
according to the factors, such as the meteorological parameters, sulfur dioxide (SO2)
emission of entire power plant, emission concentration of sulfur dioxide, and falling
concentration of sulfur dioxide, etc, and shall also optimize and determine the height
of chimney, number of chimneys, number of chimney inner shafts and outlet inner
diameter, desulfurization amount of sulfur dioxide (SO2) and desulfurization
efficiency.
The height of chimney shall be at least 2 times taller than the tallest building in the
power plant site.
18.2.5 Measures for reducing the oxides of nitrogen (NOX) shall be taken into
consideration in the combustion design of power plant boiler (s).
18.2.6 For the coal wharf, coal yard and ash disposal area, measures for prevention
of secondary pollution of flying dust shall be taken into consideration.
18.3 Waste Water Treatment

18.3.1 Based on the principle that the clean and polluted effluents shall be collected
and handled separately, the various waste and polluted effluents from various
production work places in the power plant shall be collected and treated according to
their degree of pollution and emission requirements. The treated waste water quality
must conform to the national standards, in force, such as the standard GB8978
Sewage Comprehensive Discharge Standards, GHZB1 Environmental Quality
Standards of Surface Water, GB3097 Quality Standards of Sea Water, GB11607
Quality Standards of Fishery Water Utilization, GB15618 Quality Standards of
Soil Environment and GB5084 Quality Standards of Agricultural Land Irrigation
etc., for waste water discharge, as well as the local standard of the district where the
power plant is situated. The polluted waste effluents which are not conformed to the
waste water discharge standard must not be discharged into the natural water bodies,
nor be randomly disposed.
1 The acidic and alkaline waste water shall be neutralized prior to
re-utilization and discharge.
2 The coal yard drainage and the flushing water from coal conveying facilities,
shall be treated with sedimentation process, and the treated water shall be
re-utilized. The rushing water containing suspended matter shall be adopted
with the dosing and precipitation treatment, and the treated water shall be
re-utilized or discharged.
3 The waste water containing metallic ion shall be discharged into the waste
water centralized treatment system to oxidize, adjust the PH value and
flocculate, and treated water shall be re-utilized or discharged.
4 In chemical cleaning of boiler, the method for the treatment of discharged
water shall be determined according to the boiler cleaning scheme. When
ammoniated citric acid is chosen as boiler cleaning medium, the incineration
method for waste liquid treatment shall be adopted.
5 The ash and slag water from the ash and slag storage yard shall be
considered for recovery and re-utilization in priority; if discharged, it must
conform to the standard Slag water shall be reutilized.
6 The oil contaminated water shall be treated with the oil and water separation
process. The water shall be considered for re-utilization in priority; if
discharged, it must conform to the standard GB8978 Standards of Sewage
Comprehensive Discharge.
7 The domestic sewage from power plant shall be treated in accordance with
the standard, prior to discharge. When the power plant is located in the city,
to discharge the domestic sewage into city sewage system shall be the
priority choice. However, the quality of the domestic sewage shall conform
to the requirements stipulated in the standard CJ18Quality Standard of
Sewage Discharged into City Sewerages,in force.
18.3.2 In districts where the quality requirement for waste water discharge is
stringent, waste water treatment facilities of the relatively centralized type shall be
adopted for power plants with generating units of 300 Mw and above.
18.3.3 When surface water is adopted as the water source for the direct flow or
mixed flow water supply system of the power plant, preventive measures shall be
taken to avoid the harmful thermal pollution impact to the principal aquatics in the
affected zones of the water body which accepts the warm water efflux discharged
from the power plant.
18.3.4 For the treatment of infrequent boiler waste water, a waste water pond of
suitable volume shall be provided in the power plant. The volume of such pond shall
be determined according to the following factors, viz, the boiler water volume, the
boiler cleaning medium, the quantity of flushing water for cleaning air-preheater, the
way of waste water treatment, etc.
18.3.5 When the protective objects, such as the resident and potable water source
etc. are surrounding the ash water yard, the assessment of water ash yard impact on
the underground water shall be carried out; if necessary, the seepage-proof facilities,
such as the collecting passage, passage-proof layer etc., shall be considered, and shall
also provide the monitoring well. When the cost of passage-proof facilities is high, it
shall carry out the technical and economical comparison with dry ash storage yard
scheme for determining at last.
18.4 Ash and Slag Treatments and Comprehensive Utilization

18.4.1 It is forbidden to dispose the ash and slag into water bodies, such as rivers,
lakes, seas, etc.
18.4.2 The selection of unit outside ash delivery scheme and corresponding ash and
slag handling system shall be comprehensively optimized and determined according
to the factors submitted in the investigation report upon ash and slag comprehensive
utilization, such as the class of ash delivery to outside, quality, quantity and save
ash storage yard storing capacity etc.
18.4.3 When conditions for utilizing the warm discharged water exist in the project,
the approach for such comprehensive utilization shall be facilitated in the design.
18.5 Noise Prevention and Control

18.5.1 The impact of power plant noise upon its surrounding environment shall be in
compliance with the stipulations in standard GB12348 Standard of Environmental
Noise at Boundary of Industrial Enterprises and the standard GB3096 Standard of
Environmental Noise in Urban Area, in force.
18.5.2 The power plant noise shall be controlled primarily at its source. It is required
that the equipment manufacturer shall supply qualified equipment that comply with
the State standard for noise control. For the noise generated during production
operation, which is ineradicable at its source, control measures for effective isolation,
elimination, absorption, etc, of the noise shall be adopted.
18.5.3 It shall be optimized for the total plane arrangement of power plant and sound
isolation, noise elimination and sound absorption for both building and afforestation
to reduce the noise impact of power plant.
18.6 Environmental Protection Monitoring

18.6.1 For boiler capacity of 1000t/h and above, the dilution sampling or
concomitance heat sampling type gas continuous monitoring system shall be adopted;
for boiler capacity of 420t/h670t/h, the inline type or electrochemical type gas
continuous monitoring system can be adopted; for boiler capacity of 410t/h and below,
the portable flue gas monitoring equipment can also be adopted.
18.6.2 Waste water external drainage outlet of power plant (including water ash
storage yard) shall be designed according to the specifications, and shall also be
equipped with water rate monitoring device.
When power plant waste water and circulating water are discharged into the same
receiving water system, they can incorporate and discharge into the outside after
economic and technical comparison and obtaining the approval from the local
management department of environmental protection. However, the water rate and
quality continuous monitoring device must be installed prior to incorporation.
19. Labor Safety and Industrial Hygiene

19.1.1 The design of power plant must execute the related laws, standards and
regulations of labor safety and industrial hygiene in force and shall realize the policy
of Safety first and taking precaution measures principally. Labor safety and
Industrial hygienic facilities must be simultaneously designed, simultaneously
reviewed and approved, simultaneously constructed and simultaneously
commissioned for operation with the main engineering installation.
19.1.2 Newly built, extension and renovated power plant project, shall have the
content of studies about the labor safety and industrial hygiene at the feasibility study
stage. Special section of labor safety and industrial hygiene with required depth of
content shall be presented in the preliminary design stage.
19.1.3 Labor safety and industrial hygienic design must be incorporated in the
design of various disciplines, and various measures taken in project design shall
conform to related prevailing state standards and stipulations in the standard DL5053
Design Regulation of Labour Safety and Industrial Hygiene for Fossil Fuel Power
Plant in force.
19.2 Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention

19.2.1 The design of power plant production building, working area, auxiliary and
ancillary building, livelihood building, and areas vulnerable to explosion and fire, as
well as fire prevention zone of underground building, fire prevention isolation, fire
prevention spacing, safety evacuation and fire fighting passages, shall all be in
accordance with the regulations in the standard GBJ16Code for Fire Protection
Design of Buildingsand standard GB50229Fire Protection Code for Fossil Fuel
Power Plant and Substation Design,in force.
19.2.2 Safety evacuation facilities of power plant, shall have adequate lighting and
distinctive evacuation indicating marks.
19.2.3 Equipment with explosive hazard, and related electrical installation, process
system and plant building process and civil design, must be provided with respective
explosion preventive and protective measures, according to different type of
explosion sources and dangerous factors. Explosion prevention design shall conform
to the standard Code for Fire Protection Design of Buildings, Code for Design
of Electrical Installations within Explosion and Fire Hazard Environment ,
Electrical Safety Code for Explosion Hazard Area, P.R.C.,Technical Supervision
Supervision
Code for Safety of Pressure Vessel, Technical
Code for Utility Boilers,
Regulation for Safety of Pressure Deaerator in Power Plant,and other related
standards, codes and regulations in force.
19.3 Prevention of Electric Injury

19.3.1 The arrangement of electric equipment shall satisfy the safety protection of
energized equipment, and shall be provided with necessary isolation protective
facilities and measures for prevention of misoperation. There shall be provided with
protection from direct lightning stroke and safety grounding devices.
For the design of prevention of electric injury, the following standards and codes shall
be conformed to:Technical Code for Design of High Voltage Switchgear Technical
,
Code for Design of Electrical Equipment Grounding,Code for Design of Lightning
Protection of Buildings,Safety Operation Code for Electric Power Industry,
Safety Guideline for Design of Electrical Equipment, etc in force.
19.4 Prevention of Mechanical Injury and Falling Down Injury

19.4.1 The design for prevention of mechanical injury and falling down injury shall
conform to theSafety and Hygienic Code for Factories,Safety Requirement of
Protective Cover for Mechanical Equipment,General Requirements for Safety and
Hygienic Design of Production Equipment Fixed
, Type Vertical Steel StairsFixed
,
Fixed
Type Industrial Protection Railings, Type Industrial Steel PlatformBuilding
,
Stair Standard,etc, in force.
19.4.2 In power plant design, measures shall be taken to prevent mechanical injuries
from mechanical equipment at production places, repair shop, etc, For all exposed
portion of mechanical rotating elements, protective hoods (covers) and necessary
interlock devices shall be provided.
At the sides of the operation passages for conveyors in the coal handling system,
protective railings shall be provided, and at places for personnel crossing-over the
conveyor, crossing bridge (crossing stair) shall be provided. The conveyor head drum
shall have protective hood, and grating plate shall be provided at coal discharge ports.
Besides, interlock emergency stop-pushbutton must be provided at the head drum and
tail drum of the belt conveyor, emergency cord switches and alarm devices shall be
installed along the whole length of belt conveyor.
Coal conveyors in the coal handling system shall have interlock device with startup
warning bells.
19.4.3 At the sides of platform, walking platform (walking passage), lifting opening,
hauling opening, valve well and at sides of ditch and pond, etc, where there are danger
of falling down, railing or grating shall be provided. At places necessary to climb up
for inspection or maintenance, protective facilities shall be provided.
19.5 Injury prevention from Dust, Toxin and Chemicals
19.5.1 In power plant design, measures shall be taken for preventing flying coal dust.
Coal storage yard may be equipped with water sprinkling device, and at coal
unloading place, coal wetting device may be provided. The coal handling system shall
take comprehensive preventive measures with water as the principal medium.
Pulverized coal shall be prevented from dust flying in the course of conveying and
storage. Pulverizing coal system and ash handling system shall have measures to
prevent leakage of coal dust and ash dust.
Boiler house( or boiler) shall be equipped with negative pressure dust remover and be
in charge of the cleaning measures without water at appointed time.
19.5.2 In the coal handling system, the comprehensive dust control design shall be
conformed to the following standards:
1 When coal dust contains free SiO2 exceeding 10%, the dust concentration in
air in working site shall not be greater than 2mg/m3, and the respirable silica
dust in air shall not be greater than 1mg/m3.In case that the respirable silica
dust in air is greater than 1mg/ m3, individual preventive measures shall be
taken. The emission concentration of the dust collecting system to outdoor
shall not be greater than 60mg/ m3.
2 When coal dust contains free SiO2 less than 10%, the dust concentration in
air in working site shall not be greater than 10mg/ m3, and the respirable coal
dust concentration in air shall not be greater than 3.5mg/m3. In case that the
respirable coal dust concentration in air is greater than 3.5mg/m3, individual
preventive measures shall be taken. The emission concentration of dust
collecting system to outdoor shall not be greater than 120mg/ m3.
19.5.3 For places storing and generating harmful gas or corrosive mediums, respective
safety protective measures for toxin prevention and for chemical injury prevention
must be taken, and shall conform to prevailing related standards, codes and
regulations of TJ36 Hygienic Standard for Design for Industrial Enterprises.
19.5.4 Chlorination system shall be installed with chlorine leakage alarming devices,
chlorine absorption devices, etc, as safety protection facilities, the design of which
shall conform to the regulations in prevailing related standards and codes.
19.5.5 SF6 high voltage switchgear room and SF6 switchgear maintenance room shall
be equipped with mechanical draft facilities. Concentration of SF6 content in indoor
air shall not exceed 6000mg/m3. The design of safety protection facilities shall
conform toSafety Operation Code for Electrical Power Industry, in force,DL/T639
Tentative Safety Protection Regulation for SF6 Electrical Equipment Manufacturing,
Operation, Testing and Maintenance personals, as well as regulations of other related
standards and codes.
19.5.6 When the control oil of the governing system and by-pass system of the steam
turbine employs non-inflammable oil, necessary safety protection facilities shall be
provided. The concentration of harmful matter in indoor air shall not exceed
prevailing related hygienic standard regulation of the State.
19.6 Noise and Vibration Prevention

19.6.1 In power plant design, the noise in boiler house, turbine house and in coal
handling system shall be controlled. Noise resulting from the equipment during
production process, shall first be controlled from the noise source. Control measures
of isolation, silencing and absorption of noise, and vibration suppression, shall also be
taken. The design of noise control shall conform toGBJ87Code for Noise Control
Design of Industrial Enterprisesand regulations of other related standards and codes,
in force.
19.6.2 Prevention of vibration hazard shall first be controlled from the vibration
source, and measures of vibration suppression shall be taken. The vibration
suppression design shall conform to theGB50040 Specification for Design of
Dynamically Loaded Foundation ,GB10434 Hygienic Standard for Localized
Vibration at Working Site,and other regulations in related standards and codes, in
force.
19.7 Prevention from Heatstroke, Cold Wave and Humidity

19.7.1 The design for the prevention from heatstroke, cold wave and humidity, shall
conform to TJ36Hygienic Standard for Design of Industrial Enterprises, GBj19
Code for Design of Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning, and the regulations
of other related standards and codes, in force.
19.7.2 The underground coal unloading trench for power plant, coal conveying tunnel
and underground transfer station etc. shall be equipped with moisture-proof
facilities.
19.8 Protection from Ionizing Radiation and Electromagnetic
Radiation
19.8.1 The installation and the protection design against ionizing radiation(such as
X-ray,-ray, etc)working room, radiation source storage room, etc, must conform to
the regulations of related standards and codes, including GB4792Fundamental
Standard for Radiation Hygienic Protection,State Council Ordinance(1989) 44
Regulation for Protection Against Radioactive Isotope and Radioactive
Installations, and GB8703 Regulations on Radiation Protection, etc, in force.
19.8.2 The protection design against microwave radiation, shall conform toGB10436
Hygienic Standard for Microwave Radiation at Working Site,GB8702Regulation
for Electromagnetic Radiation ProtectionDL5025 Technical regulations on Design
of Microwave Communication Projects for Electric Systems and regulations of other
related standards and codes, in force.
19.9 Labor Safety and Industrial Hygienic Organizations and
Facilities
19.9.1 Basic monitoring station, safety education department and medical hygienic
organization shall be established according to regulations of related State and
professional standards in force.
20 Fire-fighting
20.1 General Requirements

20.1.1 The fire-fighting design of power plant shall execute the policy of Fire
prevention first, and combining it with the fire-fighting
20.1.2 The power plant shall be provided with a complete fire-fighting water supply
system, and also with automatic fire alarm and special fire extinguishing devices
according to the actual conditions of the objects to be protected. The fire-fighting
design shall be complied with the regulations of GB50229 Code for Fire Protection
Design Power Plants and Substations, GBJ16 Fire Prevention Code for Building
Design and other State and profession standards in force.
20.2 Water Fire-fighting System

20.2.1 The design of water fire-fighting system for the power plant shall consider the
fire possible to be happened at the same time as one fire. The water quantity of
fire-fighting system for power plant area shall be calculated according to the
maximum water fire-fighting system of the fire possible to be happened at the same
time as one fire, i.e. the sum of indoor water fire-fighting and outdoor fire-fighting.
20.2.2 The power plant fire-fighting water shall be supplied from water piping
network, natural water source or fire-fighting water pond. The selected water source
and mode of water intake must ensure the reliability of the fire-fighting water supply.
20.2.3 The combined production service water and potable water supply system may
be used for the fire-fighting water supply of power plant with unit capacity of 100MW
and below, and the independent fire-fighting water system shall be adopted for the
fire-fighting water supply of the power may with unit capacity of 125MW and above.
20.2.4 The capacity of the fire-fighting pond must satisfy the demand of the total
water consumption for indoor and outdoor fire-fighting within the continuing time
period of the fire disaster. Reliable measures shall be taken for the water pond which
is common for production and potable water to ensure the fire-fighting water supply.
In case the capacity of the pond exceeds 1000m3, it shall be divided into two ponds.
20.2.5 The time to fill up the fire-fighting water pond shall not exceed 48h, but it can
be extended to 96h in the district lack of water.
20.2.6 The ring-fighting water piping network shall be provided around the main
power building, coal yard, and oil tank area. The number of the water inlet pipe leading into
the ring type piping network shall not be less than two; when one of the inlet pipe is in fault, the
other pipe shall be able to supply 100% of the total amount of fire-fighting water consumption.
The ring piping shall be divided into several sections by valves.
20.2.7 Indoor water hydrants shall be provided in the following buildings:

(1) Main power building(each floor of turbine house, ground floor and
operating floor of the boiler house, each floor of the coal bunker bay,
operating floor and deaerator floor of deaerator bay. each floor of the
elevator and staircase compartment, etc);
(2) Coal conveying building;
(3) Production and administration building;
(4) Material storage;
(5) Startup boiler house;
(6) Diesel generator house.
The installation of indoor water hydrants in the other buildings shall be executed in
accordance with the related State standards and codes in force.
20.2.8 When the high pressure fire-fighting water system is used, the elevated water
tank may not be provided, if the water flow and water pressure of the hydrants at the
most unfavorable position and at the automatic sprinkling fire extinguisher can be
guaranteed.
20.3 Special Fire Extinguishing Installation

20.3.1 The foam fire extinguishing facilities shall be provided at the oil unloading
platform, oil unloading wharf, fuel oil pump station and fuel oil tank area, and its
design shall be in accordance to the relevant requirements stipulated in the standard
GB50151 Design Code for Low Multiple Foam Fire Extinguishing System, GBJ74
Design Code for Fuel Oil Store House and GB50156 Design Regulations for Small
Fuel Oil Store Houses and Filling Stations.
20.3.2 For power plant with unit capacity of 300MW and above, the gas extinguisher
installation shall be provide of the control room, computer room, electronic
equipment room and relay room within the centralized control building and network
control building. The gas extinguisher installation shall be designed to the relevant
national specifications.
20.3.3 The oil immersion transformer with capacity of 90000kVA and above shall be
equipped with the water sprinkler cooling installation and other extinguisher
installation.
20.3.4 Water screen fire protection isolating facilities shall be provided for the
locations where coal conveying trestle is connected with transfer station, coal crusher
room and main power building. For power plant with unit capacity of 300MW, which
combusts with the lignite or self-combustible and high volatile coal, its trestle with
length greater than 200m shall be equipped with the automatic water spray
extinguisher installation.
20.3.5 For power plant with unit capacity of 300MW and above, the water supply
intensity of the water sprinkler system and drenching water spray extinguishing
installation shall be provided for main oil tank and oil storage tank in the main power
building.
20.3.6 For power plant with unit capacity of 200MW and below, beside the oil
immersion transformer with greater capacity, its fire extinguishing installation for
main building (structure) and equipment shall be adopted with the mobile fire
extinguisher and hydrant.
20.3.7 For power plant with unit capacity of 300 MW and above, beside the special
fire extinguishing installation which must be provided as stated above, appropriate
special fire-fighting devices may also be provided for electric equipment, cables, oil
system and coal conveying system according to the requirements in the standard
GB50229 Fire Protection Code for Coal Fired Power Plant and Substation Design.
20.3.8 The water supply intensity of the water sprinkler system and preact, wet type,
dry type fire extinguishing installation for the power plant shall be designed in
accordance with the relevant requirements in the standard GB50129 Design Code for
Water Supply Intensity of the Water Sprinkler System and GBJ84 Design Code for
Automatic Water Spray Extinguishing System.
20.3.9 When water sprinkler system is provided for indoor electric equipment and oil
system, the possibility of drain off the fire-fighting waste water shall be considered,
and measures to prevent spreading of fire disaster shall be taken.
20.4 Fire-fighting Water Pump House

20.4.1 Fixed type fire-fighting water pumps shall be provided with standby pump with
its working capability not less than the largest one of the main fire-fighting water
pump house. If it is difficult to obtain dual power sources or double loop power
supply, internal combustion engine may be used as standby.
The fire-fighting water pump shall be directly coupled to the prime mover.
20.4.2 The fire-fighting water pump shall be designed as positive pressure inflow type.
Not less than two suction pipes shall be provided for each group of firefighting water
pumps. When one of the pipes is damaged, the other pipe(s) shall be able to pass
through all the fire-fighting water consumption. In high pressure and temporary high
pressure fire-fighting water supply system, an independent suction pipe shall be
provided for each operating pump.
Not less than two discharge pipes shall be provided for the fire-fighting water pump
house and connected directly to the ring type piping network. When one of the pipes
is under maintenance, the other pipe(s)shall be able to supply all the fire-fighting
water consumption.
20.4.3 Anti-freezing measures shall be taken for the fire-fighting water pump house.
20.5 Fire Engine

20.5.1 The power plant shall calculate and list out the investment used for installing
fire engine and its garage, and shall submit to the local fire fighting department for
united using.
20.6 Fire Detection and Automatic Fire Alarm

20.6.1 The fire detection and automatic fire alarm devices shall be provided at the
locations of the power plant where the fire is vulnerable to happen, and the type of
detector and its installation place shall conform to the relevant provisions stipulated in
the standard GB50229 Fire Protection Code for Fossil Fuel Power Plant and
Substation Design, in force.
20.6.2 The design of fire alarm system and fire-fighting control device and its
function shall be in accordance to the standard GB50116 Design Specifications of
Automatic Fire Alarm System, in force.
20.6.3 The central control panel for fire-fighting may be installed in the central
control room.
Appendix A (standard appendix)
_______________________________________________________________________________
Words used in this regulation
A.0.1 during performance of this regulation, strictness is expressed by flowing

different words:
1. Express very strict, must be done accordingly

The positive word, must
The negative word, not to do not allowed
2. Express strict, under normal condition, shall be done accordingly
The positive word, shall, must
The negative word, shall not, cant
3. Express not too strict, have little choice, when possible, shall done firstly
The positive word, suitable, advisable
The negative word, not suitable, not advisable
4. Express have choice, under certain condition can be done like this
The word, may, can
A.0.2 In this article, when some performance shall be done as requested by a certain
regulation, it writes like, according to.., shall be up to .regulations. When
it is not a must to perform according to certain regulation, it writes like, takeas
reference, as already done by
A.0.3 The expression between two connected meanings writes like up to following
requirement, or regulations , comply with following regulations, or the following
regulations be satisfied.
Appendix B (Appendix to Suggestion)
_____________________________________________________________________
Fuel Gas-Steam Power Co-generation Technology
B.0.1 In case that oil and fuel gas can be guaranteed and techno-economic indexes are
reasonable, fuel-gas-steam co-generation units can be adopted.
B.0.2 Gas-turbine selection shall comply with the following rules:
1. For the gas turbine with small unit capacity and less utilizing hours,
single-generation can be adopted and it shall be determined after
techno-economic comparison whether a space for installation of heat recovery
heat recovery steam generator (HRSG) and gas-turbine shall be reserved.
2. In case that co-generation units are used and gas turbine and steam turbine are
installed in the same phase, in-line arrangement can be adopted. Whether
in-line or off-line arrangement shall be adopted will be determined according to
the engineering details.
3. In case that heavy oil, low calorific value gas and light oil, or a mixture of
crude oil and diesel oil is used and the number of annum utilizing hours is high,
heavy duty gas-turbine shall be selected.
B.0.3 Selection of heat recovery steam generator shall be in compliance with the
following rules:
1. For fuel gassteam cogeneration, one gas turbine and one heat recovery steam
generator shall be adopted without stand-by unit arrangement.
2. Heat recovery steam generator shall be designed according to the requirements
of steam circulation and flue gas characteristics and shall be suitable for quick
start-up of the gas turbine.
3. The type of the heat recovery steam generatorforced circulation or natural
circulation, shall be determined after techno-economic comparison is made
and based on the construction condition.
4. Chimney arrangement shall be based on the mode of unit circulation, type and
arrangement of the heat recovery steam generator, etc. and the height of the
chimney shall meet the environmental requirements. For single-generation
units, one steel chimney shall be arranged for each unit; for co-generation
units, it is advisable to set a by-pass chimney and heat recovery steam
generator chimney. In case that vertical heat recovery steam generators are
used, steel chimneys shall be adopted and be arranged on the top of the boilers.
In case that horizontal heat recovery steam generators are used, one chimney
shall be arranged for each generator or for multi-generators.
B.0.4 Steam turbine shall be selected based on the following rules:
1. For co-generation units, only one steam turbine shall be provided for each
unit, i.e. a unit is formed by one or more gas-turbine and one heat recovery
steam generator.
2. Inlet steam amount of the steam turbine shall match the sum of maximum
evaporation of the associated heat recovery steam generators; for steam
circulation, single-pressure, double-pressure or tri-pressure, and no-reheating
or reheating shall be selected based on the results of techno-economic
comparison; for the parameters matching of the steam turbine and the heat
recovery steam generator, relevant regulations under Article 8 can be
followed in principle.
3. For a co-generation unit comprised of more than one gas-turbines and one
steam turbine, main pipe shall be adopted for the main steam system of each
unit; for in-line arranged co-generating units, unit system shall be adopted for
the main steam system.
4. In the thermal power system of co-generating units, only deaerator is
necessary.
B.0.5 Arrangement of the main building shall be based on the following rules:
1. For gas-turbines, open arrangement shall be adopted, noise-proof and
anti-vibrating measures shall be taken, and the current standards and codes
shall be met. In-door arrangement also can be adopted, if necessary.
2. It is advisable to adopt open arrangement for heat recovery steam generator
and in-door arrangement also can be adopted, if necessary.
3. In case that exhaustion of the steam turbine is in axial direction, low level
arrangement shall be adopted and no operation floor will be arranged, while
in case that exhaustion of the steam turbine is downward, an operation floor
shall be arranged.
4. For a co-generation plant, it is advisable that a centralized control room is
arranged; the control room for a single cycle generation plant can be arranged
locally, or the control room for more than one gas turbines is arranged
centrally.
B.0.5 Selection of the fuel system shall observe the following rules:
1. According to the work condition, equipment condition and results of
techno-economic analysis, natural gas, fluidized gas, light oil, crude oil or
heavy oil can be selected for gas turbines. In case that crude oil or heavy oil is
adopted, light oil shall be used in the phase of turbine start-up and stoppage.
2. The total capacity of the main crude oil ad heavy oil tanks, including the
capacity of the purified oil tanks shall not be less than 15-day oil consumption
of the whole plant. The number of light oil tanks shall not be less than 2, and
the number of crude oil and heavy oil tanks shall not be less than 3. It is
advisable to have 3 purified oil tanks and the capacity of each purified oil
tank shall meet the total oil consumption for 24 hours on the planned capacity.
3. Quality of the treated fuel shall meet the operating requirements of the gas
turbine; there shall be 2 oil treatment units. In case that the unit with the
highest capacity is in stoppage, the treatment capacity of the other units shall
not be lower than the total oil consumption of the gas turbines of the whole
plant.
4. The type of the oil delivery pumps shall be determined based on the oil
quality and oil unloading mode and the pumps shall be grouped or main pipes
shall be arranged according to the requirements of the gas turbine operation.
2~3 oil pumps shall be provided for each group or the whole plant, one of
which standby.
5. The type of oil unloading pumps shall be determined based on the oil quality
and oil unloading mode, etc. and the number of such pumps shall not be less
than 2. In case that one of the two or more is in stoppage, the capacity of the
others shall be able to complete oil unloading within the fixed time. In case
that the oil comes in by water, total capacity of the oil unloading pumps shall
be determined according to the negotiated tonnage and laycan time of oil
tankers; and in case that the oil is delivered by rail, it shall be determined
based on the condition that the oil unloading platform can accommodate
12-24 oil tank trucks and unloading time of 6-12 hours.
6. Design pressure and the technological design requirements of the natural gas
pipe line shall be determined based on techno-economic analysis on gas
source conditions, gas turbine requirements and environmental conditions,
etc.
7. Arrangement of the natural gas system and the pressure regulating station
shall meet the requirements of the technological process and technological
design. The pressure regulating station shall be arranged in the open air or
semi-open air. In cold or sand-windy areas, in-door arrangement can also be
adopted.
B.0.7 For a co-generating plant, distributed control system (DCS) is adopted to fulfill
monitoring and control of the main technological systems, independent
monitoring systems can be arranged for other auxiliary systems, but necessary
interface for DCS shall be reserved.
B.0.8 Design of the feed water system shall meet the following requirements:
1. In case that ground surface water is used for water supply, i.e. water is taken
from a natural river, river way regulated by reservoir or a reservoir, guarantee
factor of designed low water flow rate shall be selected based on the steam
turbine capacity and shall meet the following rules:
For steam turbines of 50MW and lower: P=90%;
For steam turbines of 50MW and higher: co-generation unit with peak
regulating load: P=95%; co-generation unit with basic load: P=97%.
2. If underground water is adopted for water supply, amount of water-take shall
not exceed the permitted extraction amount that is calculated based on the
balance of the runoff of low water year and continuous low water years.
B.0.9 Water treatment system shall be selected according to the following rules:
1. Make-up water demineralization system (including pre-demineralization
system) shall be selected based on source water quality, water quality
standards for gas-turbines and heat recovery steam generators, chemicals
supply condition and environmental requirements, as well as the results of
techno-economic analysis. For a single cycle generation plant, water used for
gas-turbines can be simply purchased, and no make-up water
demineralization system in needed.
2. Total output of the make-up water treatment system shall be calculated and
determined based on the normal steam and water (including the water used
for gas turbines) losses and additional output of the water treatment
equipment for unit start-up or emergent cases as well as running hours per
day.
3. Total effective volume of the demineralization water tank shall match the
output of the water treatment equipment to meet the demand for water used
for pickling of one biggest heat recovery steam generator or unit start-up. In
case that no regeneration standby is arranged, water amount for spare use
necessary in stoppage period of the regeneration system shall also be taken
into account.
B.0.10 Design of civil construction shall meet the following requirements:
1. For gas-turbines or an in-line arranged gas-turbine and steam-turbine power
generating unit, large block reinforced concrete foundation shall be adopted.
2. For a multi-line arranged co-generation unit, it is advisable for reinforced
concrete frame-work structure or large block reinforced concrete foundation to
be adopted for the steam-turbine unit.
3. Gas-turbine generating unit foundation or gas-turbine steam-turbine
generating unit foundation shall be separated from the surrounding
foundations or necessary vibration isolating measures shall be taken.
Appendix C (Appendix to Suggestion)
_____________________________________________________________________
Flue Gas De-sulfuring Technology

C.0.1 Technological system for flue gas de-sulfuring shall be selected based on such
factors as unit capacity, fuel sulfur content, requirements for desulfuring efficiency,
assortment and transportation conditions of available absorber, ash yard capacity,
utilization of the by-product of sulfuring process and perfectness of desulfuring
technology, etc. and based on the results of techno-economic analysis. For a rebuilt or
expended power plant, site arrangement shall also be taken into account.
Desulfuring technology shall be selected based on the local conditions. In case that
the requirement for desulfuring efficiency is high, it is advisable to adopt limestone
gypsum wet process; if fuel coal has low sulfur content, conditions are advisable and
techno-economical indexes are reasonable, damp-dry process or other proved
technology can also be adopted.
C.0.2 Absorber supply shall be reliable and it shall be tried to purchase directly from
market product fines of proper grain size; if there are proper conditions and the
solution is reasonable, a self-service absorber preparation shop can be built by the
power plant; in case that a new absorber fines preparation plant has to be built, the
highest priority shall be given to regional coordination, i.e. to build a central plant,
and comprehensive techno-economical argumentation shall be conducted based on
investment and management mode, process technology, site location and
transportation conditions, etc.
Absorber storage capacity inside the plant shall be determined based on supply
continuity, source distance and transportation conditions, etc. and it shall not be less
than the consumption for three days.
For the absorber preparation, storing and conveying systems, proper measures shall be
taken to prevent dust rising again.
C.0.3 Rated capacity of the absorbing tower for de-sulfuring works shall be designed
based on the flue gas amount of the boiler, and no additional capacity or allowance
shall be considered. Whether heat exchangers shall be provided will be determined
based on the temperature of the outlet flue gas of the absorbing tower and whether hot
flue gas is introduced. Inlet flue gas temperature of the absorbing tower shall be
designed based on normal working flue gas temperature plus 10 allowance (instant
allowance can reach 50) and proper measures shall be taken under the boiler
abnormal running condition to prevent any damage to the equipment.
The number of absorbing towers shall be determined based on boiler capacity,
absorbing tower capacity and reliability, etc. In case that wet process is adopted, it is
advisable for each boiler of 300MW or higher to be provided with one tower; for each
two boilers of 200MW or lower with one tower. For damp-dry sulfuring process, one
boiler can be provided with towers more than one.
Reliable anticorrosion measures shall be considered based on technological
characteristics for the interior of absorbing towers.
C.0.4 In case that boosting fans are provided for a de-sulfuring system, the capacity
shall be selected based on the flue gas amount, the air flow margin shall not be lower
than 10% and air pressure margin not be lower than 20%.
By-pass stack shall be arranged for the de-sulfuring system and the flashboard or the
baffle door at the inlet and outlet of the de-sulfuring unit shall be operated smoothly
and highly air-tight.
For the low temperature stack from the outlet of the absorbing tower to the chimney,
necessary and proper anticorrosion measures shall be taken based on different
de-sulfuring process.
C.0.5 When de-sulfuring process design is done, comprehensive utilization of
de-sulfuring by-products shall be considered. If it is proved to be reasonable through
argumentation on techno-economic indexes, by-products of the sulfurizing process
can be put into market after proper treatment. The processing-depth, variety and
amount of such by-products shall be determined based on the reliable results of
market investigation.
In case that such by-products can not be utilized, they can be transported to a stack
yard, but shall be stacked separately from ash and slag in order to reserve the
possibility for future utilization, in such a case, proper measures shall be taken to
prevent the by-products from being contaminated for a second time.
C.0.6 Blockage-preventive measures shall be taken for the delivery systems of
absorber and slurry or fluid by-products of de-sulfuring process and pipe line cleaning
units shall be provided.
C.0.7 De-sulfuring control room shall be arranged in collision with other control
rooms. In case that the de-sulfuring control room can not be built in the same phase of
construction or in case that two boilers are provided with one tower, the control room
can also be arranged separately.
Control level of the de-sulfuring system shall not be lower than the unit control level.
C.0.8 For power supply of the de-sulfuring system, wiring from a special on-site
transformer or from the unit on-site transformer can be adopted, and the engineering
details shall be determined based on the work condition and the results of
techno-economic analysis.
C.0.9 It is advisable for the absorbing towers to be arranged at the boiler rear end
stack or near the chimney, the site for absorber preparation and de-sulfuring
by-product processing to be arranged centrally at the rear end of the boiler, or at any
other proper location.
In case that de-sulfuring place is reserved as required by the evaluation on
environmental impact, room for de-sulfuring towers shall be reserved at the outer
flank of the chimney and room area shall be determined based on the de-sulfuring
process possibly adopted in the future.
It is not allowed to arrange any facilities inconvenient for future removal on the
reserved site.
It is advisable for absorbing towers to be arranged in the open air, but necessary
protective measures shall be taken.
Appendix D (Appendix to Suggestion)
_____________________________________________________________________
Clean Coal Fired Power Generation Technology
D.0.1 The design of a power plant equipped with circulating fluidized bed boiler
(CFBC) shall meet the following rules:
1. For 300MW and lower than 300MW units, circulating fluidized bed boiler
can be selected in case that high sulfur content coal, hard-fired coal or
inferior coal is adopted, requirements for environmental protection are more
strict, and in case that the existing boiler need to be modified. The type of
the circulating fluidized bed boiler shall be selected based on such factors as
fuel coal quality, boiler capacity, environmental requirements and the
perfectness of boiler type, etc. and according to the results of
techno-economic analysis.
2. The arrangement of the screening equipment in the coal conveying system
shall meet the requirements for grain size of the coal incoming into the
boiler and mixture of coal of different sizes. And it shall be determined
whether second-step screening is needed based on the coal grain size. A
third-step iron-removal shall be arranged for the coal conveying system.
Jamming prevention measure shall be taken for crude coal bunkers.
3. It is advisable for limestone fines to be purchased on the market. Capacity
of the limestone fines bunker shall not be less than the consumption for
three days. In case that pulverizing equipment is needed inside the plant, it
is usually arranged in the coal bunker bay. Storing capacity of the limestone
storage yard inside the plant shall not be smaller than the consumption for
7days. Limestone bunker capacity shall not be lower than the consumption
for 8 hours at the maximum continuous evaporation of the boiler. Limestone
fines bunker capacity shall not be lower than the consumption for 4 hours at
the maximum continuous evaporation of the boiler. Jamming prevention
measure shall be taken for both limestone bunker and the limestone fines
bunker. And whether anti-freezing measures shall be taken will be
determined through argumentation based on the local conditions.
4. Number, capacity and pressure head allowance of fans shall meet the
Each 220t/h or lower than 220t/h boiler shall be provided with one
primary fan and one secondary fan and each 410t/h or higher than 410t/h
boiler shall be provided with two primary fans and two secondary fans,
no standby fans shall be arranged. In case that a boiler is provided with
tubular pre-heaters, the capacity allowance shall not be less than 20%. In
case rotary pre-heaters are used, air leakage of such rotary pre-heaters
shall be taken into full consideration when the capacity is selected. The
pressure head allowance shall not be less than 20% for primary fans, and
not less than 30% for secondary fans.
Each 220t/h or lower than 220t/h boiler shall be provided with two high
pressure fluidizing fans of 50% capacity and each 410t/h or higher than
410t/h boiler shall be provided with three fluidizing fans of 50% capacity.
Neither capacity allowance nor pressure head allowance shall be lower
than 20%.
Coal-feeding of boilers shall be symmetrical. At least 2 sets of coal
feeders shall be provided, and total capacity of such coal feeders shall be
able to meet the need of 200% consumption at the maximum evaporation
of the boilers.
5. Design of ash handling system shall meet the following rules:
Output of bottom ash conveying system shall be 250% ash amount at
maximum evaporation of boilers.
It is advisable for ash removing temperature of cold ash to be not higher
than 200 .
6. For a circulating fluidized bed boiler unit, it is advisable to adopt a DCS
system, and for the main technological systems, centralized control system
shall be adopted. The following thermal control systems shall be provided in
addition to that for conventional boilers:
Furnace bed temperature and pressure check and flue gas analysis;
Sequence interlock of primary fan, secondary fan, draft fan, high
pressure fluidizing fan, coal-feeding equipment, limestone feeding
equipment in case of start-up, shutdown and emergent strip;
Interlock of primary fan, secondary fan, draft fan, high pressure
fluidizing fan and associated baffles;
Limestone feed quantity and bed pressure regulation;
7. Elevation of the feeding floor of the coal bunker bay shall be determined
based on the elevation of the feed opening and location. In case that the coal
bunker bay and deaerator bay are arranged closely to each other, it is
advisable for the feeding floor to be arranged at the same level as the
deaerator bay, so as to facilitate maintenance.
D.0.2 Design of integrated gasifying combined cycle generation unit (IGCC) shall
meet the following rules:
1. IGCC power generating technology is advisable for acid rain control areas
and sulfur dioxide control areas as well as fossil-fired power plants that
use high sulfur content coal as fuel. This technology can also be adopted in
case that conventional power plants are modified for capacity upgrading
and in case that co-generation power plants change gas or oil firing into
coal firing, provided that the results of techno-economic indexes are
reasonable.
2. For a newly expended IGCC power plant, it is advisable to adopt unit
capacity of 300MW and over. For a capacity upgrading project or a project
for changing oil firing into coal firing, IGCC technology can also be
adopted if the results of techno-economic analysis are reasonable.
3. For a large-capacity gasifying furnace, it is advisable to adopt fluidized
bed oxygen injection and wet or dry feeding and adopt chilling and
complete heat recovery. And decision on which mode to be selected shall
be made after techno-economic analysis.
4. For an IGCC power generating unit of 400MW or lower, each power
island shall be provided with one gasifying furnace and no standby is
arranged. If two 50% capacity gasifying furnaces are needed,
determination shall be made based on the results of techno-economic
argumentation.
5. It is advisable for each gasifying furnace to be provided with a purifying
system, including de-dusting and de-sulfuring, and it is advisable for
purification to be performed at ambient temperature. It is advisable to
adopt wet de-sulfuring mode and to recover element sulfur. Determination
on whether it shall be made into sulfuric acid shall be made according to
market condition and the results of techno-economic analysis. It is
advisable for each furnace to be provided with one set of post sulfur
recovering facility and one tail gas treatment system, and the option of two
furnaces sharing one set of such system can also be accepted.
6. It is advisable for full low pressure molecular sieve boosting expansion to
be adopted for air separating process. Oxygen amount generated by air
separating island shall match the maximum oxygen consumption by
gasifying furnaces, and the margin shall not be smaller than 10%. The
integration rate for air supply of air separating facilities and power
facilities shall be determined based on techno-economic analysis. It is
advisable to provide only one air compressor and one oxygen compressor,
and it is advisable for the nitrogen compressor to be provided according to
function requirements. Additional rectifying and argon extracting facilities
can be provided in case that there is a need on the market and
techno-economic analysis indexes reasonable.
7. The heat recycling system of the gasifying island shall be considered in
combination with the steam-water system of the power island, to reach
heat balance. Heavy duty gas-turbine shall be selected, which is suitable
for firing low-calorific-value gas mixture and start-up/spare fuels, is able
to make the best use of return flow of nitrogen coming from the air
separator, and is provided with NOx lowering measures.
8. IGCE power plant shall be provided with unit/system control room
according to the technological characteristics, and monitoring over the
main technological systems shall be performed by DCS system.
D.0.3 Design of pressurized fluidized bed boiler combined with co-generation unit
(PFBC-CC) shall meet the following rules:
1. It is advisable for PFBC-CC technology to be adopted for power plants
using high sulfur content coal or hard-firing coal. It can also be adopted for
newly expanded or capacity upgraded projects which are restricted by site
condition. Decision shall be made according to the techno-economic
analysis.
2. The mode of fuel feeding of pressured fluidized bed boiler, i.e. dry mode or
wet mode, shall be determined according to coal quality, plant area and
main building arrangement and based on techno-economic analysis.
3. Grain size mixture of the crude coal and de-sulfuring agent coming into
their bunkers shall be able to meet the operation requirements of the
pressurized fluidized bed boiler.
4. In the design of the steam-water system for the cogeneration part of a
PFBC-CC power plant, heat exchanging equipment for the pressured
fluidized bed and impact of heat recycling shall be taken into consideration.
And the solution shall be optimized.
5. Gas-turbine selected for a PFBC-CC power plant shall be able to meet
requirements for dust content and metallic ion content of the inlet flue gas.
DL
Electric Power Industry Standard
Peoples Republic of China
P DL 50002000
Design Technology Code for Fossil-fired Power Plant
Terms Illustration
Compiled by: China Electric Power Construction Engineering Consulting Co.

Approved by: the State Economic and Trade Commission of P.R.C
Electric Power Publisher of Peoples Republic of China
Beijing 2000
Table of Contents
1 Scope175
3 General Provisions176
4 Site Selection177
5 Overall Planning180
6 Arrangement of Main Power Building186
7 Coal Handling System196
8 Boiler Equipment and Systems201
9 Ash and Slag Handling Systems 219
10 Steam Turbine Equipment and Systems225
11 Water Treatment Equipment and System233
12 Thermal Engineering Automation236
13 Electrical Appliances and Systems241
14 Water Supply Facilities and Systems254
15 Auxiliary and Ancillary Facilities258
16 Building and Structure260
17 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning264
18 Environmental Protection272
19 Labour Safety and Industrial Hygiene276
20 Fire-fighting279
1 Scope
As construction of medium and small size condensing power generating units must be
strictly controlled, the illustration on 50MW and 1000MW condensing units has to be
eliminated from the scope, with the exception of clean power generation technology
being adopted.
3 General Previsions
3.0.1 This item expresses mainly purpose of this Code. To suit with development
of socialist market, the modified items shall help increase economical profit and
social profit. Therefore set up more suitable and practical requirements for the
fossil-fired power plant. Viz. safety, reliable, economically suitable, meet demand of
Chinese situation, so as to satisfy the continuous social development.
3.0.2 To cope with market situation of division of plant and net work, price
competition, it is required to increase competition ability of the plant during its design
work.
3.0.3 Because there are various types of construction investment for a power plant,
the original design sequence of a power plant has been changed. Following are design
sequence of a project based on the condition of state investment. Principium
Feasibility study, feasibility study, principium design, design of construction drawing.
For those projects with foreign investment, additional feasibility study shall be added.
(pre-design stage of the original principium feasibility). With change of the mode of
investment, the regular division of design can be possibly changed. So detailed
explanation of design sequence has been deleted from this item. Only the principle
stipulations are shown here.
3.0.4 For those projects with foreign capital or with imported set of equipment, this
item stipulates that the principle and flexibility of these projects can be combined
together.
3.0.5 To satisfy requirement of persisted development, this item puts forward the
principle environmental requirements to the double control zones by the government.
3.0.6 The high efficiency big capacity unit mentioned in this item refers to the
units with 300MW or above and of inferior critical parameters. With extension of
production ability of 600MW, continuous advance and indigenous of the super critical
parameters units, the proportion of 600MW unit and super critical parameters unit in
the electrical net work will be increased.
3.0.7 Reference design and model design are experiences drawn in past years by
the designers. These give active help in improving design quality and in speeding up
the design schedule. With development of socialist market economy, there will be a
great variety of design schemes. So this item stipulates that innovation in design work
shall be praised. And advanced design methods shall be taken actively.
4. Site Selection
4.0.2 After implementation of new administration methods on large scale power

plants by electric power industry, fixed number of staff has been largely reduced. In
addition, the house reform policy made living and life requirement of staffs become
relatively low. So there is no need to put forward the request that site of power plant
shall be near to town or city.
4.0.5 In order to cope with flood preventing standards put forward in the
GB50210Prevent Flood Standard, this item divides power plants, according to
capacity of which, into three classes (same as general division like specially large,
large and medium. There are other technical regulations for small class). Also the
prevent flood standard is shown here in the table (table 4.0.5). In 1998, from August
to September, there had been serious flood around Yangtze River. But there was no
problem with site of fossil-fired power plant which shows the original prevent flood
standard is suitable. For the Haibin power plant that locates in place of serious storm
and tide with a capacity of over or equal to 2400MW, it stipulates a high water( tide)
level standard with a reoccur cycle of 200 years. This is done based on the principle
of above national standard and the Report on Study of Class Division of Fossil-Fired
Power Plant and Prevent Flood Standard given by Huabei Electric Power
Engineering Institute. The serious storm and tide zone refer to coastal places in
Guangdong, Guangxi, Fujian, Zhejiang, Shanghai, and Jiangsu.
Originally it is stipulated that height of the prevent flood bank in the power plants
near storm and tide affected areas shall be decided with reference to that of Haibin
power plant. But because there is usually no such affections in these areas, so usually
reckon tide through wind. So, 50 years more is added to the reoccur cycle in order to
make the calculation easier.
About height of the prevent flood bank, the original regulation was decided according
to the historical highest flood level. In order to make it same with prevent flood
standard, frequency is taken as the control standard. Now one more regulation is add
which regulates that height of the prevent flood bank shall be designed according to
flood level of such occurrence in hundred years cycle running.
The original regulation only regulated to set up the prevent flood bank in one time. It
said nothing about how to build it up in the early period. In order to have a safety
construction in the beginning and to protect site resource of the power plant, the
modified item adds that it shall be constructed according to planned scale and to be
completed in one time.
4.0.7 This item stipulates that when deciding basic crack of earthquake on the
power plant site, it shall be done not only according to the zone division on the
Chinese earthquake crack (1990) but also according to the law on quakeproof and
decrease disaster of the peoples republic of China. This law was issued by the
Chinese peoples committee and put in force since March, 1st of March 1998.
According to electric power engineering situation, the stipulation in article 3 of this
item expressed that a power plant with the capacity of over 2400MW is equal to a big
construction project mentioned in the above regulations. The neighborhood places
near the quake division zone refer to places within 8km on both sides.
In order to have a proper way to mention the earthquake evaluation, analysis on
danger is substituted by estimation on earthquake safety This estimation refers to
detailed study on geological earthquake conditions, the earth physics, earthquake
movement and change of earth-shape around the construction site. The analysis on
earthquake danger probability is to give, according to danger probability of the
engineering work, basic information and earthquake trends, and parameters for
earthquake proof work. In case this estimation is passed through, it can be taken as the
earthquake proof requirement of this construction site. Generally, for a fossil-fired
power plant, only checking on the crack is needed in order to fulfill the design work.
Therefore this item puts forwards the necessity of crack checking.
This item adds more regulation on adoption of earthquake acceleration. Adoption of
earthquake acceleration refers to taking the earthquake acceleration value designed for
a basic time period of 50 years cycle which over pass by 10% the original probability.
This adoption was put forward, according to the document issued by the Ministry of
Construction, and named [1992] NO.419, electric power reconnaissance design
technical report (general NO.33) and Stipulations in Adoption of Foreign Related
Electric Power Engineering Work Earthquake Acceleration
4.0.11 In northeast, northwest, and Huabei part of China, there is a great
accumulation of coal, but a shortage of water in the near by coal mines. So in case of
building up power plant around these coal mines, measures of water saving must be
taken. This item gives such regulation only because compared with the ordinary
cooling unit, the air cooling unit can save as much water as over 65%.
4.0.12 Regulations in this item is done according to the document issued by State
Department [1998] NO.5 Official Written reply on the problems of acid rain control
area and sulfur dioxide control area which stipulates that apart from the thermal
fixed power plant, it is not allowed to build up thermal power plant in center of big or
middle cities, neither its suburbs.
Regarding suburbs, cities will have its definitions in its layout book. This regulation
shall be carried out accordingly.
5 Overall Planning

5.1.2 One of our long-time basic state-policy is to treasure and make reasonable
use of every inch of the ground, practically protect plough. The overall amount of
ground used by a power plant shall not exceed the existing regulations in the
construction guideline for projects of electric power engineering work. Also, under
the conditions that technical requirements been fulfilled, production running safely
and stably, upon sufficient discussion, the use of ground by the plant shall still be cut
down.
5.1.3 With the continuous increasing of unit capacity of the plant the groundwork
treatment will be more difficult. So the content of make reasonable use of geology
and landform is added.
Besides, one more stipulation is added which reads: the overall planning of the power
plant shall satisfy the requirement of environmental protection, safety work and
industrial hygiene put forward by the state.
5.1.4 Upon investigation of percentage of green-land in 35 power plants in our

country, considering the higher requirement of environmental protection of a
fossil-fired power plant and analysis on guideline of usage of ground by the whole
plant site, the percentage of green-land shall be increased to not less than 15%.
Considering the fact that a lot of lime will be stacked in the de-sulfuring agent storage
place of a de-sulfuring power plant, this storage place is considered as power and dust
rising area. So measures of protection shall be taken, or trees shall be planted. For
those plants of strong wind, if it is possible outer shelter belt shall be built. This is
also beneficial to improving plant environment, production and living conditions of
the workers. Therefore these contents are added here.
5.1.5 This item is based on the document of GB50229 Fire- Proof Regulations of
Fossil-Fired Plant and Transformer Station to determine the classification of fire
hazard of buildings (constructions) and fire-resistance class.
5.2 Plant Areas Planning

5.2.1 This item puts forwards the principle of a plant planning. It also regulates that
the management office and the public welfare building shall be arranged together in
one end of the plant. This will also help simplify process of management and save use
of ground.
5.2.2 The fixed part of the main power plant building usually occupied by people. If
possible make it easier to get to town, so as to avoid passing through construction site
by people.
When adopting direct flow water supply, in order to shorten the circulation water and
water pipes, reduce investment and save energy, the main power plant building shall
be arranged near water resource.
Usually the air cooling condenser of the direct air cooling system is arranged on the
outside ground of column A in the steam turbine house. The air cooling condenser is
usually arranged portrait along the steam turbine house. Its cooling efficiency will be
affected by wind direction and air flow of the main power plant building, especially in
summer, when the temperature is high. Thus, during design, direction of power plant
building shall be fully considered, so as to make the air cooling condenser work well.
For the purpose of encouraging possible plant to buy finished hydrogen, the hydrogen
making station is changed into hydrogen supply station.
According to environmental requirement, power plant drainage shall be divided into
fresh water and sewage. Also the reuse of drainage shall be considered.
5.2.3 The fire-proof space distance between constructions is regulated on the

condition that when a construction is on fire, the fireman can reach this site within 20
minutes. Also, when temperature is as high as 800, firemen requirement for
putting out the fire is considered. When temperature is too high within 10km of the
fire place, fireman can not be able to work, but the fire fighting squirt gun usually can
reach only 10m, so when fire-resistant class of constructions is of one or two, the
fire-proof space distance shall be 10m. GBJ16 Regulations on Construction of
Fire-Proof gives limitation to the fire-proof space distance in main power plant
building. Because that fire- resistant class of chimney and trestle of the plant is almost
same as that of the main power plant building, so fire-proof space distance of these
places can be decided accordingly.
Fire-proof space distance listed in Table 5.2.3 was decided according to the existing
document of GBJ16 Regulations on Construction of Fire-Proof combined with
detailed situations of the plant. The following factors are also taken into
consideration:
1 The outside power distribution equipment, the storehouse of wood coal, all
are considered as possible sparkling places, therefore decided the distance
with first and second class constructions.
2 Distance between hydrogen container and constructions is decided as if total
storage of hydrogen container equal to or less than 10003m. Total volume of
hydrogen storage is calculated by multiplying air pressure and summation of
total hydrogen container water volume (m3) together with its working
pressure (absolute pressure).
3 Distance between in the open oil warehouse and constructions is decided as
if total storage volume of oil equals to or less than 1000m3. Flash point of
steam turbine oil is considered as less than or equal to 1800c. Flash point of
transformer oil is considered as 1350c.
4 Distance between sparkling oil container and construction is considered as
total volume of oil storage less than or equal to 5000m3. Usually this kind of
oil is heavy diesel oil. So its flash point is equal to or higher than 600c.
Shortest distance between constructions listed in Table 5.2.3 also takes consideration
of the following factors:
1 Upon special study of distance between in the open coal discharge
equipment and outside electric distribution equipment, when wind speed is
9m/s-12m/s, dust only falls within 50m. In order to avoid accident caused by
coal dust, reduce time of outside electric distribution equipment cleaning,
the shortest distance between in the open coal discharge equipment and the
outside electric distribution equipment is regulated as 50m.
2 According to GBJ16 Regulations on Construction Design Fire-proof Work,
distance between coal store house and class 1-3 constructions shall be
8m-10m, this is quite enough for fire proof work. But considering the
requirement of sanitary protection, it is suitable to make it longer. According
to actual running condition of plant, this table increases the distance to 15m.
3 Distance between air cooling tower and constructions of class1-3 is 20m.
This is based on the actual practice that the air cooling tower is equipped
with dehydrator, its mirage has little affect on the around environment.
About distance between air cooling tower and other constructions, affect of
heating power and yawp shall be considered. According to actual domestic
practice, when distance between main control building, unit control building,
computer room, which have strict request on highest continuous yawp, and
the air cooling tower is 30-35m, requirement will be satisfied. For those
constructions that have no strict request on acceptable highest continuous
yawp, distance can be 20-25m.
4 Considering less mirage affect to outside electric distribution equipment and
in order to keep safety running, distance between air cooling tower,
machinery cooling tower and outside electric distribution equipment will be
40m and 60m.
5 Distance between air cooling towers is 0.5D. D refers to diameter of down
end of air inlet tube of the adverse current type air cooling tower. When
diameters of the neighborhood towers are different, the larger one will be
taken as D.
6 Because coal dust will give affect to water quality, the distance between air
cooling tower and coal store house shall be little longer, that is 25m-30m.
Distance between flat, direct railway and constructions of third, fourth, and
fifth listed in this table is based on GBJ12 Regulations on Standard Gauge
of Industrial Enterprise. Distance between roadway and neighborhood
constructions is based on GBJ22 Regulations on Design of Roadway of
Factories and Mines.
In our country, as the design, installation, production running of Power plant
which has over 300MW unit are gradually grown up, after abundant
discussion, it is quite possible to reduce distance listed in this table. At
present, DL5032 Technical Regulations on Design of General Drawing and
Transportation is under revise. The distance will then be adjusted
accordingly.
5.2.5 It is suitable to built wharf at down side of the circling water inlet. Distance
between wharf and cooling water inlet and outlet have something to do with river
situation, sea current, design type of ship etc. These can be finalized through model
test, calculation and discussion.
5.2.8 According to class 3 standard of roadway of factories and mines, the width of
road way might be 7m. Considering the fact that main road of the plant shall mach
entrance road of the plant, it is suitable to build the main road as 7m. Difficult
situation refers to large scale of engineering work caused by construction of
subordinate road with suggest width. As for the road way standard from bridge
approach of heavy cargo wharf to connection road of main power plant building, it all
depends on transportation type of heavy cargo. If taking platen transportation or big
sized flatbed tricycle then the width of roadway will be different. According to stat,
general width of roadway is 6m-7m.
5.2.12 This item shows that the definition of designed high water level mentioned in
the previous chapter is taken as base to decide design of floor level of the outside part
of the main power plant building.
5.2.13 It is stipulated in this item that when height of natural landform is different by
3%, ladder type arrangement can be taken. This is because gradient cant be large,
after striking up of the floor. Otherwise it will bring about inconvenience to
production process and running management. If striking up large area, it will result in
big amount of earth work. Practice tells that when gradient of natural landform is 3%
or over, the ladder type arrangement is quite suitable.
5.2.15Years of experience shows that the stipulation of floor level of base part of
production construction is higher than outside floor level by 150mm-300mm is quite
suitable. It can prevent floor water back flow to inside only because of sedimentation
of construction. In those areas that are very dry, with little rain, but are of good
geology, the lower limit can be taken.
5.3 Off-site Facilities Planning

5.3.1 The off-site facilities planning refer to reasonable arrangement of outside
facilities. These include: transportation facilities, water supply facilities, ash and slag
transport and treatment facilities, power transmission line, heat supply line, living
area, construction area etc. These works can only be done after finalization of plant
address and main technical systems. Therefore, in order to get an excellent design a
detailed study and thorough discussion shall be carried out based on the plant address,
technical systems, and according to capacity and layout.
5.3.2 This is a summary of the off-site transportation conditions.
In recent years, plant freight volume gets increased which results in increased railway
modification work. Some railway departments face deviation in freight volume
program. As a result work site becomes larger. Equipment and spur line station are in
low utilization. Purpose of adding more in first section is to make full use of the
existing facilities and take the increased freight volume as base for modification
work.
Considering the fact that power plant near coal mine usually have railway and
highway transportation. Therefore the final way of transportation shall be decided
only after comparison of different schemes or put forward the reasonable portion that
to be done by combined ways.
As there are loading and discharging facilities on off-site roadway and requirement
on pipes, it is advisable to use 4m. It is also advisable to use 7m for roadway
connecting living areas. This is because safety of workers is highly concerned. When
roadway is not long, bike cycling is also considered. Width standard for special
roadway of ash transportation and coal to main power plant building transportation
depend on freight volume, transportation arrangement, transportation facilities ability
as well as type of trucks.
5.3.4 Water discharge and flood proof program of power plant concerns long-time and
safety running with full capacity, which shall be paid much attention to. In order to
reduce construction fee and use of land, the plant shall make full use of the existing
flood proof facilities and meanwhile select suitable flood discharge dyke or bank or
build up flood ward-off wall.
5.3.6 Originally, electric distribution equipment are arranged off-site of the plant. But
with increasing of capacity, and of class of outlet voltage, high pressure distribution
equipment occupies more and more site places. This can bring about more difficulty
to selection of plant location as well as arrangement of plant site. Under certain
conditions electric distribution equipment arranged off plant site. This is good to
system design and overall arrangement. It is suitable to divide plant and net work.
Therefore the item clearly stipulates that power distribution equipment of 220kv or
over can be arranged off-site.
5.3.8 In order to meet the requirement of house distribution system and socialized
living of workers, it is encouraged that power plant buys commercial house for its
staff. Therefore no independent living area will be set up.
5.3.9 Water discharge and alleyway facilities of the construction site shall be set up on
the principle of permanent facilities. Considering the specialties of construction water
discharge, if possible, it shall be set up separately from the plant water discharge
system.
6 Arrangement of Main Power Building
6.1.4 If technical process is satisfied and it is convenient for repair work, two
column spans can be taken during the design work. As to modular, only assembled
reinforced concrete structure is required. When using onspot casting, column span
can be flexible.
6.1.6 Plant-site landform has great influence on the arrangement. When the
landform is not flat, or there is elevation difference, whether or not to take ladder type
arrangement will be considered. But for large capacity unit it is not suitable to take
ladder type arrangement.
Specialties of equipment also have influence on the arrangement. This refers mainly
to type of boiler (in the open, in closured, or indoor), type of coal mill. If the small
steam turbine of steam driven water supply pump will be arranged into the main
condenser, the high pressure heater will be vertical or horizontal.
Construction conditions influence on the main power plant building refers to
requirements on the main power plant building caused by big piece transportation,
lifting equipment and other construction rigs, construction process and schemes.
6.2 Types of Arrangement

6.2.1 For the general arrangement of main power plant building, based on the
statistics and calculation of the general design and reference design of the 200MW,
300MW, 600MW units, the comparable volume of a main power plant building
(including: the front running down part of the boiler, coal bunker house, desecrator
house, steam turbine house and the centralized control building on side of the boiler)
will not exceed the following volumes:
200MW unit: 0.70m3/kW;
300MW unit: 0.58m3/kW,
600MW unit: 0.39m3/kW,
In recent years, different types of arrangement have been taken in the power plants
with imported equipment but designed by foreigners, and also in the design of model
plants of 2000. Purpose of this is to reduce volume of main power plant building,
shorten length of pipes and cables between boiler and the unit. Therefore, when
techno-economy analysis is reasonable, the new arrangement with low engineering
cost, beneficial to running and construction can be taken.
6.2.2 During the bidding work of unit island and boiler island, in order to reduce
contacts and cooperation between unit island contractor and boiler island contractor,
some arrangements put the desecrator house of the unit island (or steam turbine house)
away from the coal bunker house of the boiler island (or boiler house ) by 2m-3m.
This results in double role of columns between the two islands which is no good to
shortening length of pipes between unit and boiler. So this item stipulates that only
when techno-economy analysis is reasonable, different column spans are used in the
unit house and boiler house, the come away arrangement between steam turbine house
(or desecrator house) and boiler house (or coal bunker house) can be used.
6.2.3 As hot steam of the hot net heater comes from steam turbine, its water will
go back to hot recovery system of the steam turbine, if large space will not be needed
due to arrangement of hot net heater, it shall be arranged inside of the main power
plant building. But big horizontal type hot net heater needs large space, so if in not too
cold area, it can be arranged in the open. This is the experience already drawn from
practice.
6.3 Boiler House Arrangement

6.3.1 Boiler arrangement can be divided into in the open arrangement, semi-open
arrangement, block out arrangement, and indoor arrangement etc. In the open and
semi-open arrangement are usually used in those not too cold areas (the average
accumulative coldest temperature is -100C ).In the open arrangement means the
boiler is proper to be only equipped with top cover and drum room; or boiler is
equipped only with top shelter and drum but no top cover. The top shelter only means
shed for rain proof, it is not enclosure small room. For the down part that below
running part, no mater it is blocked out or not, just in case the other parts are up to the
above mentioned conditions, they can be arranged in the open.
Semi-open means there are small drums of light protective structures on top or
around the boiler. (including drum room of the boiler). For burner and its lower parts,
it will be totally blocked out or the front part be blocked out (whether high block out
or low block out), but end part opened. This is considered as semi-open.
In southern part of China there is much rain. The average yearly rainfall can be over
1200mm. Even if there is shelter on top of the boiler, still the problem of rain
immerge to top of boiler cannot be avoided. In this case semi-open arrangement will
be taken. Besides, for those areas that the accumulated average coldest weather is
nearly -100C, if the top maintenance works or running conditions are not too bad in
winter, semi-open arrangement can be taken.
Both the block out type and the indoor type can be regarded as indoor type
arrangements. The only difference is the size of blocking room. In the cold weather
area, if it is tower type boiler, as its shape is thin and long, the block out arrangement
is more economical than the indoor arrangement. (Take Yuanshan power plant as
example). For other type of boilers it all depends on the detailed situations.
It is also stipulated in this item that when weather condition of the area is suitable,
boilers of better sealing can also be arranged without top rooms or shelter. The
suitable weather means those areas with little rain and not centralized warm heating
conditions. In recent years, some domestic direct flow boiler power plant (like
Shidongkou power plant) adopted no top cover arrangement. And it is running well.
In Japan, in the open arrangement without top small rooms and shelters is widely
adopted. When adopting this kind of arrangement, the top part of boiler must be
sealed well. For drum boiler, the auxiliary equipments like: drum, safety valves, air
exhausting valves, water level meter must be totally rain proof, freezing proof and
corrosion proof. So as to grantee better running and keep less heat loss.
6.3.3 There is usually no big platform on the operation floor of the large capacity
boiler arranged in the open. Whether or not to set up platform depends on type of coal
mill and arrangement. The middle speed coal mill or the tube mill is usually arranged
in the coal bunker house (back of boiler).The boiler adopts island type arrangement
without running big platform. But for wood coal boiler, its furnace is surrounded by
fan type coal mill. A big platform will be set up on the coal feeder floor. For instance,
the 600MW units in Yuanbaoshan power plant, because there 8 fan type coal mills are
arranged around the furnace of a tower type boiler, in order to set up the coal feeder, a
big platform on 20 elevation high is set up. This is also convenient for coal feeder
maintenance.
If lower part and auxiliary equipment of boiler proper is not suitable to be arranged
with island type or there are other requirements, then the block out type can be taken
for lower part. Viz. set up big platform on the operation floor of the boiler and block
out lower part of the operation floor of the boiler.
For boilers in the open or semi-open, usually water supply operation platform,
temperature reducing water operation platform and fuel oil operating platform are set
up on the operation floor in front of the boiler. In order to improve the running
conditions, the low block out type can be adopted.
Distance in front of the boiler refers to the distance between boiler rack k1 column and
main power plant building column. On the condition that requirements of arrangement,
installation running are satisfied, efforts will be made to reduce space in front of the
boiler. Boiler front space affects greatly on the engineering cost. In addition to main
power plant building volume, it will also affect main steam, reheating, water supply
pipes, primary air duct and hot air duct as well as length of cables. So this item
stipulates that boiler front space shall be reduced on the conditions that requirement of
equipment, pipe arrangement, installation, running and maintenance are satisfied. It is
advisable that the power plant can cooperate with boiler manufacture to study the
arrangement of combining the boiler front column and coal bunker column. Front
distance of the 600MW units in Beilun port power plant and No.2 Power Plant in Hua
nengshidongkou imported from abroad is zero. The boiler front column is coal bunker
column. These two plants bring together the main passage in front of the boiler and
the maintenance lifting passage of the coal mill. Meanwhile locate them in the side of
the desecrator house. The boiler front distance shall usually consider lifting space of
the water circulation pump. For middle speed coal mill, the arrangement of cold and
hot primary duct, flow meter, pulverized coal duct and running path shall be
considered. For fan type coal mill, path of its blades maintenance car shall be
considered. For coal tube mill, the transportation path for motor maintenance shall be
considered.
6.4 Coal Bunker Bay Arrangement
6.4.1 In the main power plant building arrangement, height of coal feeder floor is
mostly same as that of main power plant building operation floor. But with the
development of capacity and increasing of coal mill types, it is possible that the height
of coal feeder floor is higher than that of steam turbine house and boiler house on the
operation floor. For coal bunker house height of coal feeder depends on arrangement
of coal mill. If it is MPS coal mill, when the unit is highly automated, height of coal
feeder floor can be higher than operation floor of the steam turbine house.
6.4.3 Presently, power plants with big capacity in our country use double belt
conveyor running with 3 shifts, one for running, another one for stand-by. For
direct-fired pulverizing system, when the total effective storage capacity of the crude
coal, according to designed kind of coal, is over 8h the coal consumption of boiler
maximum continuous evaporation, then it can meet the running requirement of boiler
conveyor. For store type coal pulverizing system, when the effective storage capacity
of crude coal and pulverized coal, according to designed kind of coal, is over 8h the
coal consumption of boiler maximum continuous evaporation, it can also meet the
running requirement of boiler conveyor. Thus, it stipulates like this.
The total effective pulverized coal storage capacity shall meet demand of more than
2h consumption of boiler on maximum continuous evaporation. According to
practical running situation, it can guarantee safety running of the pulverized coal
feeder.
For the purpose of reducing personnel but increasing efficiency, the storage capacity
of the crude coal and pulverized coal can be considered as if production runs in two
shifts. It is required that the effective coal storage capacity of direct-fired pulverizing
system or total storage volume of store type coal pulverizing system of crude coal
together with the pulverized coal storage can meet, according to designed kind of coal,
over 10h the coal consumption requirement of boiler on maximum continuous
evaporation. Though coal will not be feed in later part of night, at this time, boiler
load is not high. There is still some balance coal in storage before the next shift. So it
can meet coal transportation of two shifts. Whether or not two shifts of coal
transportation are needed, in order to design the capacity of coal bunker, depend on
techno-economical analysis. Viz. compare the deference between the saved costs
bring about by reducing one shift, and increased investment due to enhanced storage
capacity.
6.4.4 This item puts forward the requirement on characteristics and functions of
crude coal bunker. It also stipulates that the lining materials can be other velvet,
anti-combustion and wearing-proof materials. Thus, new materials can be used.
6.4.5 This item also adds that, a part from anthracite, the pulverized coal bunker
must have explosion-proof measures.
6.5 Desecrator Bay
6.5.1 About installation height of the desecrator and water supply box, apart from
detailed conditions of main power plant building, it shall also be considered that at the
moment when steam turbine throw off some load, the inlet side of the low pressure
water supply pump will not be vaporized, so as to guarantee safety running of the
water supply pump.
Whether or not the desecrator and the water supply box shall be arranged in open,
depend on weather and arrangement conditions. For those power plants that have
boilers arranged in open, if conditions suitable, the desecrator and the water supply
box can also be arranged in open.
For those power plants that have no centralized control buildings between two boilers,
the unit control cabin shall be arranged on the operation floor in the desecrator house.
In order to guarantee safety of the operation people and the equipment, apart from
necessary measures been taken on the desecrator and its system, the ceiling of unit
control cabin must be done by on the spot, whole casting. It also requires that the
reliable water-proof measures shall be taken on the top of desecrator floor.
For fixed pressure running of the desecrator, it is also required that there shall be
some measures to guarantee that inlet side of water supply pump and the primary
water supply pump will not be vaporized.
6.5.2 Presently, all foreign power plants of big capacity install the horizontal
heater, primary pump of steam type water supply pump, as well as the motorized start
up pump and stand-by pump in the desecrator house. The advantages of this
arrangement are: close and reasonable, up to technical process and make full use of
different floor spaces in the desecrator house.
6.6 Steam Turbine House Arrangement

6.6.1 Large units of over 200MW can be arranged in lateral direction, if conditions are
available and it is regarded as reasonable through techno-economic analysis. Lateral
direction arrangement has already been adopted by the 500MW unit of the
in-operation Shentou No. II Power Plant, the 300MW unit of the under-construction
Laibin Power Plant and 300MW units of 2000 coal-fired demonstration power plants
designed by some designing institutions.
Air cooling heat radiators of directly air-cooled units are normally arranged on the
ground surface platform at the outer side of Column Row A of the steam turbine
house, lengthways along the main building due to their large radiation area and large
number of groups and occupying big length of the main building. So the units shall
also be arranged lengthways and in order to meet the requirements of radiator
arrangement and facilitate leading-out of the main steam exhaust piping of the steam
turbine.
6.6.2 Elevation of the operation floor of the units has been raised with unit capacity
being increased. For the 300MW units, the elevation of the operating floor has been
raised to 12m. If island-type arrangement is still adopted, the disadvantage of low
space utilization rate of the main building will be more obvious. If large platform
arrangement is adopted, the middle level can be used as plant power distribution room.
In this case, the increased civil work cost for construction the big platform can be
compensated by saving of the total volume of the main building, and in addition, there
will be large enough area for maintenance, which can facilitate maintenance work. Of
course, it is better to adopt dry-type transformer and oil-free breaker if the middle
floor is used for arrangement of plant-used power distribution equipment. At the same
time, if large platform arrangement is adopted for the steam turbine operation floor,
necessary additional maintenance and lifting equipment shall be provided for the
auxiliary equipment on the bottom floor that are not reachable for the overhead crane.
For the 125MW and lower than125MW units, the disadvantage of low room
utilization rate of island-type arrangement is not so obvious due to the low elevation
of the operation floor, and the advantages of island-type arrangement, such as saving
civil construction cost, etc. can be developed, and the equipment on0.00 level can
be lifted by the overhead crane in the steam turbine house. So it suggested that for the
125MW and lower than 125MW units, island-type arrangement shall be adopted.
In case that adoption of large platform arrangement is stipulated, requirements for
natural ventilation, heat and moisture exhaustion as well as material lifting shall be
considered.
6.6.3 For the small steam turbine of the steam-driven water supply pump of 300MW
and higher than 300 MW units, it is advisable for the exhausted steam to be led out
downward and introduced into the main condenser. In this case, it is advisable for the
steam driven water supply pump to be allocated on the operation floor of the steam
turbine house. Another solution is to arrange the steam driven water pump on the
bottom floor of the steam turbine house along the side of column row B or on the
bottom floor of the dearator house. But in this case, relevant means for lifting the
small steam turbine for maintenance shall be taken into consideration.
Under suitable conditions, for example, there is enough room for piping installation
above the water supply pump and enough room for lifting operation, the water pump
can also be arranged on the level above 0.00m, so as to facilitate the arrangement of
such auxiliary equipment as oil tanks of the water supply pump and so on.
6.6.4 In order to ensure operation safety of the oil system of the steam turbine, the
main oil tank, oil pumps and oil coolers, etc., shall be allocated far away from high
temperature piping. For high capacity units arranged lengthways, it is advisable for
such equipment to be arranged on the 0.00m floor of the steam turbine house at the
side of Column Row A, because it is far from high temperature piping.
Steam turbine system fire accidents show that steam turbine oil system must be
provided with different measures to prevent fire accidents from occurring. Beside
fire-fighting water source and other fire fighting equipment according to the
fire-fighting requirements, the oil must be quickly discharged to a proper safe place,
but it shall not be discharged into any open channel, neither into any sewer, so as to
avoid flame form spreading, and to avoid accident developing and environmental
pollution.
According to investigation, if the emergent oil-discharging door is not allocated
properly, in case of a fire of the oil system, it will be impossible to get close to it to
operate and to handle it in time. For the above reasons, when arrangement of the
emergent oil-discharging door is made, the following factors shall be considered: i.e.
the valve shall be able to be operated in a safe and convenient place and there shall be
two access ways for people to get close to it.
6.6.5 For the indirect air cooling system of a combined condenser, circulating water
pump is allocated in the circulating water system at the outlet of the condenser, the
circulating water is saturated water under the working pressure of the condenser, and
is easily evaporated. The circulating water system at the inlet of the condenser is
provided with a hydraulic turbine, and there is negative pressure in the piping from
the hydraulic turbine to the condenser. To reduce the piping length, lower pipe
resistance and to minimize the chance for air to get in, it is required that the
circulating water pump be allocated as closely as possible to the condenser.
6.6.6 The condensate water piping of the inlet and outlet condensate water
de-mineralization devices is made of expensive rubberlined steel tube, so, to lower
investment and operation cost, it is advisable for the condensate demineralizing
devices to be arranged in a proper location inside the main building.
6.7 Central Control Building and Unit Control Room

6.7.1 Disadvantage of the arrangement of two units with one control mainly refers
to negative affect of construction on operation. It has been proved by many-year
experience of power plants that this problem can be solved. Under proper
conditions means that it needs certain conditions for the central control building to
extend into the deaerator bay. For example, the length of the coal bunker bay of each
boiler shall be basically the same as the width of the boiler, and the length of the
steam house is bigger than that of the deaerator coal bunker bay. Otherwise, it is not
reasonable from the view point of land occupation. In case there is no central control
building arranged, unit (or central) control room can also be allocated in other proper
position (e.g. operation floor of the deaerator coal bunker bay).
6.7.2 This item has simplified the regulations for inner arrangement of the central
control building and the unit control room, and only general requirements have been
raised. Generally speaking, in case of two units with one control arrangement, if
network control is in the unit control room, its area shall not exceed 350m2, and if
network control is outside the unit control room, its area shall not exceed 300m2. The
area of each floor of the central control building can be determined according to the
unit control room, electronic equipment room and other associated facilities. And it
can not be enlarged for allocation of any other equipment that have nothing to do with
the control room or for arrangement of excessive living facilities.
6.7.3 It is specified under this item that the clearance of the unit control room is not
lower than 3.2m. Though it is the minimum, there is no need to adopt excessive high
clearance.
In order to avoid flame from spreading in case of a fire, it is stipulated under this item
that the the part of the cable mezzanine next to the main building shall be enclosed.
In case that the unit control room is allocated in a combined framework with the
dearator coal bunker bay, there shall not be structural seem between this part of the
framework and the dearator floor-slab. At the same time, an integrated water-proof
top shall be arranged for the unit control room, so as to enhance its safety.
6.8 Maintenance and Repair

6.8.1 In case that large platform arrangement is adopted for the operation floor of the
steam turbine house, such maintenance area on the operation floor is large enough to
meet maintenance work of the steam turbine proper. Therefore, it is only need to
arrange a 0.00m maintenance floor between each two units. And the area of the
maintenance floor can be fixed based on the need of turning cylinder.
6.8.2 The stipulations under this item have the following advantages:
1. Flexibility of the overhead crane is enhanced when maintenance is
performed;
2. It is possible to use two overhead cranes of the same lifting capacity to lift
generator stator during installation;
3. Contradiction between installation and maintenance can be avoided in the
expansion phase of the power plant, and there is no need to install any
additional overhead crane for the installation purpose only;
For 100MW and higher than 100MW heat supply units, the number of units, for
which a second overhead crane can be installed, shall be fixed based on the specific
conditions of the units of the project, and it can be more than
6.8.4 For 670t/h boilers, if the adjacent two boilers are apart from each other or close
to each other as mentioned under Item 3 refers to the distance between the platforms
of these two boilers. In case that the steam turbine is arranged lengthways, the
distance is big, therefore, the platform of the walkway from elevator to the boiler is
difficult to be arranged, and the investment is increased, therefore, it is advised that
each boiler shall be equipped with one elevator. Contrarily, in case that the steam
turbine is arranged widthwise, the adjacent two boilers are close to each other, and in
this case, one elevator can serve the two boilers.
6.8.5 Under Item 4: In the places inside the building where it is not convenient to
arrange fixed maintenance platform and fixed lifting facilities, movable lifting
facilities can not be used for all purposes. But they are suitable for lifting small
equipment or parts, which are of less weight and are placed on a less high level.
Under Item 5: It is not mandatory for fixed lifting equipment to be provided for the
equipment arranged in the air, therefore, selection of movable or fixed lifting
facilities can be made based on surrounding conditions. For the induced draft fan, a
movable crane can be used for its lifting, or fixed lifting equipment can be installed by
using the surrounding flue duct supports. Since maintenance work of most power
plants will be contracted to special maintenance companies, maintenance equipment
of the power plants shall be able to meet such reform. For example, there are always
different ideas about whether inner boiler maintenance devices shall be provided in a
project, so, based on the above principle, such devices are not recommended here.
6.8.6 Item 1: it is stipulated under this item that inside the boiler house, electric lifting
devices and lifting opening shall be provided for material, mainly isolating material
and valves of the boiler proper, to be lifted from 0.00m level to the platform above the
boiler. These valves are normally of welded structure, there in no need to cut off the
whole valve for maintenance or repair, and only valve cartridge and sealing surface
need to be maintained or repaired. And such valve cartridge weight is not higher than
3t, so 1t~3t lifting capacity of such lifting devices is recommended under this item.
6.9 Combined Facilities Requirements

6.9.1 It is clarified that it is not suitable to set up integrated basement in the steam
turbine house of big capacity unit, because much earth work and concrete work will
have to be done and large amount of capital construction investment will be needed. It
is difficult to do water proof treatment in the places of high under-ground water level.
6.9.3 This item stipulates that setting up of large areas of glass windows shall be
avoided, because large area of glass window will bring about increased amount of
capital investment and heat loss in the plant building will also be increased, which is
not good to heating and energy saving. It will also increase the difficulty in window
cleaning, which is no good to civilized production.
6.9.4 In case that explosion occurs to transformers, oil shall be discharged into its
downward oil pit and be led to the main emergent oil basin, so as to avoid large
amount of emergent oil from being discharged into sewer and polluting environment.
6.9.5 Item 2: whether or not to build up evacuation steps depends on the principle
stipulated in the fire-prevention regulations of the state.
Item 4: Air cooled condenser of air cooled units, circulating water pump and hydraulic
turbine installed outside the steam turbine house, and the radiator in the air cooling
tower, all are closely related to running of the steam turbine. Therefore, access road
shall be available at Column Row A to facilitate maintenance by workers.
6.9.6 For those big capacity units in unit arrangement, there is less relationship
between the units, but the boiler, power generation unit and electric equipment of each
one unit are closely associated. Therefore, structure of the main power plant building
can be divided into different units.
Arrangement of the extension seam in lengthways of the main power plant building
depends on the length of the building. It is suitable for the extension seam to be
arranged between two units, so as to simplify the structure.
7 Coal Handling System
7.1.1 Under precondition that safety and reliability can be guaranteed, it is advisable
for the coal handling system to be constructed in phases, so as to save money. It can
also be completed in on phase if tech-economic analysis shows that it is reasonable.
7.2 Coal Unloading Facilities

7.2.1 To fix the length of coal unloading trough (channel), this item defines the
meaning of a whole train as 50 wagons.
7.2.2 It is advised that the allowance for bottom opening wagons shall not be less than
15%, normally not higher than 20%.
7.2.5 In recent years, the average load of a wagon is 60t. As the level of reliability and
automation of dumpers is rising, the average consolidated output can reach 25
wagons/h, and unit annual utilization has been reduced to lower than 6000h, daily
utilization is 20h. Under such circumstances, at the coal consumption of 350t/h,
annual dumping amount is only 2.1 x 106t. Under this condition, the average
utilization of a dumper is even lower than 25%, and the highest daily utilization is
also only about 30%. Obviously, there is still potential output that can be used. For the
above reasons, this item does not stress that two dumpers shall be arranged in case
that coal consumption is over 350t/h.
In recent years, there are less abnormal incoming coal cars that are not suitable for
dumpling. Therefore, it is advised that about 50m ground surface shall be hardened at
the no-load car side. For some individual power plants, associated unloading facilities
can be arranged only in the case that there are too many abnormal incoming coal cars.
7.2.6 For the power plants in freezing areas, freezing of coal cars is mainly related to
mining mode, and surface moisture, surrounding temperature and time length of the
car being in the freezing weather. It is claimed in the report by the Northwest Electric
Power Design Institute Conditions And Requirements For Arrangement Of
Defreezing Facilities that freezing of coal cars is serious only when coal surface
moisture is over 6%, transportation distance is longer than 500km and winter
temperature in the plant area and coal supply area is lower than -15. In this case,
thickness of frozen layer is normally about 300mm~500mm, and the coal car must be
defrozen before it can be mechanically unloaded.
Since defreezing facilities are seasonal, the investment and operation cost is high but
utilization is low, defreezing mode needs to be deeply studied. The defreezing
facilities of many power plants have been used for other purposes due to the results
were not so good. Therefore, it stipulates under this item that in case that defreezing
facilities are needed, a report on the subject shall be submitted for argumentation.
7.2.7 According to the experience in using ship-unloading equipment at large wharfs

for unloading the coal incoming by water, overhead bucket type and cable towed ship
unloader not only is suitable for unloading raw coal of uneven sizes, but also can
largely reduce the investment in wharf equipment and capital construction. Therefore,
comments on wharf mechanical equipment are put forward in this item and
continuous ship unloader and self-discharging ship system have been specified in
principle.
7.2.8 Coal car unloading on the coal piles of bucket wheel or grab bucket type coal
yards will cause difficulties for bucket wheel or grab bucket reclaiming operation in
case that coal piles are compacted by incoming and outgoing vehicles and people.
Therefore, coal car unloading on the coal piles of the coal yards equipped with bucket
wheel or grab bucket stacker-and-reclaimer is not advisable. Since part of fuel coal is
transported by highway and thus amount of coal transported by railway is reduced, the
size of railway coal unloading facilities shall be decreased properly.
1. According to the experience of local power plats, in case that small
amount of fuel coal of the power plants are transported by truck (annual
incoming coal quantity less than 3 x 105t), mainly self-discharging trucks,
mechanical discharging equipment will not be considered for the
coal-receiving station. But arrangement of simple unloading equipment is
advisable for the coal-receiving station, in case that the transportation
vehicles are mainly trucks. In this case, it is advised that output of the
coal-receiving station shall be shared by the coal yard and its capacity shall
mach the capacity of the main system.
2. Results of investigation shows that it is appropriate for multi coal
receiving buckets to be arranged in series or to adopt short shallow seam
type coal trough arrangement. But the number of coal-receiving buckets
and the length of the troughs shall be fixed at a reasonable basis so as to
save money.
In case that the fuel coal is transported mainly by truck, hydraulic truck
tilting or moving truck unloading machine, etc. can be adopted (refit from
tyre-type or pedrail-type loader). Overhead truck unloaders can also be
selected, if possible.
3. Results of investigation show that in most cases, seam type coal trough
unloading equipment are adopted for discharging of coal incoming by
truck if 3 x 105t~6 x 105t of coal is delivered to the plant by truck every
year. Since seam type coal trough unloading equipment can meet such
characters as great variety of vehicles and large quantity of discharged coal,
etc. and has buffer function, it is suitable for large power plants which have
a large quantity of coal coming in by truck.
7.3 Belt Conveyer System

7.3.1 According to the practice of all the power plants newly built in recent years and
experience of all the designing institutes, it is specified that the output of each belt
conveyer shall not be lower than 150% of total coal consumption at the maximum
continuous evaporation of boilers of the whole plant. For a power plant modified on
the basis of the existing systems, the output of each belt conveyer shall not be lower
than 135%.
7.3.4 The relevant regulations in GB50229 Fire-Prevention Code For Design Of

Fossil-Fired Power Plans and Substations shall be observed in engineering design.
7.4 Coal Storage Yard and Equipment

7.4.1 Detailed Instruction is as follows:
1. Results of investigation show that for power plants, the coal for which comes
in through national railway lines or by water, based on their different
conditions, design capacity of the coal storage yard normally is total coal
consumption amount of the whole plant for 15 days~30 days. For the plants,
coal for which comes in by rail, coal supply interruption due to climate
condition, etc. shall not be longer than 7 days, interruption of coal supply
during spring festival shall not be longer than 15 days, and in normal cases
coal can be supplied on time. But the power plants, coal for which is supplied
through water, are badly influenced by climate conditions, such as heavy fog,
cold snap, frost and typhoon, etc. So for such plants, the lowest design
capacity of the coal storage yard is fixed at 15 days.
2. For high capacity power plants, proper allowance shall be reserved for the
capacity of their coal storage yards, which is advised to be coal consumption
of the whole plant for 20 days.
3. For the power plant built in the area where there are complex landform and
difficult working conditions, coal supply interruption is advised to be coal
consumption of the whole plant for 10 to 15 days. Argumentation shall be
conducted in case that it is less than the above number of days. For
modification of old power plants built in the area where there is less reserved
space, capacity of the coal storage yard shall be fixed on argumentation basis.
4. For wood coal storage yards, it is advised that the capacity is not higher than
coal consumption of the whole plant for 10 days due to their big storage loss
and its self-ignition nature. And it shall not excess 15-day coal consumption of
the whole plant in case that there are no effective self-igniting prevention
measures.
5. According to the Survey And Study Report On Dry Coal Shelter Arrangement,
Structure Type And Storage Capacity compiled by Guangdong Provincial
Power Design & Research Institute, there are more than ten power plants
storage capacity of which dry coal shelters higher than 3-6 days in Shanghai,
Guangdong and Central China area. And such coal storage capacity is
sufficient for plant safe operation. So the minimum storage capacity of dry
coal shelter is fixed at 3 days.
7.4.5 For cylindrical storage fire-prevention measures, see GB50229 Firing

Prevention Code For Design of Fossil-Fired Power Plants And Substations.
As coal storing facilities, compared with cylindrical storage, open coal storage yards
and enclosed coal shelters have more advantages, such as high safety and reliability as
well as saving money, etc. Therefore, the conditions suitable for allocation of
cylindrical coal storage of power plants have been defined as municipal heat supply
power plants and areas where environmental requirements are strict. According to the
operation experience of the in-operation of Shijingshan Thermal Power Plant and
Zhengzhou Thermal Power Plant, etc., total capacity of cylindrical coal storage for
7day consumption of the whole plant can meet production requirements. For those
with higher than the above capacity, full argumentation shall be conducted.
7.7 Control Mode

7.7.1 The PLC controller has been used in the coal conveying system of fossil-fired
power plants for more than 10 years. It has been proved by practice that this kind of
control mode is of high reliability, and can reduce the number of staff and rise
efficiency. Therefore, combined with the overall control level of the whole plant and
complexity of the coal conveying system, priority shall be given to PLC control
system for the coal conveying system of newly built power plants.
7.8 Coal Conveying Auxiliary Facilities

7.8.1 According to investigation, quality of coals used for power plants has been
greatly raised and their contents of Three Bigs have been reduced. Furthermore, a
coal grate usually is provided at the inlet of raw coal conveying system, such as
seam-type coal trough, dumper receiving hopper and receiving hopper of ship
unloading machine, etc., which can retain large coal and stone blocks. Therefore,
decision on whether setting up of Three Bigs treatment facilities is needed shall be
made according to coal conditions and system equipment configuration.
7.8.2 For the power plants which coal comes in by water, quantity of the incoming
coal is measured by water. At present, metering results of belt-type electro-scale can
not yet be used as settlement basis, therefore, this item does not stress the necessity of
using any material calibration devices. Since the rail scale used for metering coal
coming in by rail and the truck scale used for metering coal coming in by truck are
regularly calibrated by the relevant state metering and measurement department,
arrangement of material calibration devices is not necessary.
The former Ministry of Electric Power Industry stipulated that the in-operation
300MW power generation units and newly designed or built 300 MW and higher than
300 MW fossil- fired power generating units must be equipped with all the devices
necessary for calculation of coal consumption on the basis of positive balance of the
coal entering the furnace, including fuel coal metering device, mechanical sampling
device, coal level meter and material calibration devices, etc.
But, according to investigation, the target of calculating coal consumption on the basis
of positive balance of the coal entering the furnace has not been realized, and
equipment of some power plants has long been idled due to unreasonable
technological process design, poor equipment quality or imperfect management.
Furthermore, entering coal calculation is used only for inner-plant management, so the
requirement for accuracy can be a little bit lower. Therefore, this item has defined
only the necessary calibration means.
7.8.3 At present, for most power plants that use coal coming in by water,
mechanical sampling devices can be arranged at the middle or the end of the belt
conveyer to realize mechanical sampling of the incoming coal. For the power plants
using coal coming in by highway or rail, the installed train or truck mechanical
sampling devices still need to be tested in commercial operation due to big difference
of coal qualities. Therefore, under present conditions, it is still difficult to adopt
mechanical sampling in a wide way, so it is stipulated under this item that it is
advisable to arrange mechanical sampling devices for the coal coming into the plant if
conditions are available.
8. Boiler equipment and system
8.1 Boiler equipment
8.1.1 These terms give following detailed explanations

1. Terms require that the type of boiler shall accommodate the characteristics of
the kind of coal to be used. It shall also accommodate the content of the
existing regulations for allowed scope of change of coal quality. This is
also the requirements to boiler selecting, design and production, regulated in
the following documents: Boiler Technical Conditions for a Coal-Fired
Power Plant, Technical Instructions on Equipment of a Imported Big
Capacity Fossil-Fired Power Plant Equipment, (simplified asnegotiations ) ,
Stipulations to Intensify the Management of a Big Coal -Fired Boiler issued
by the Ministry of Electrical Power in 1993. The allowed scope of change in
the existing regulations refers to the warp between the actual used coal and the
designed coal or the difference between the actual used coal quality and the
quality requirements in the bidding book (or the enquire book). When this
warp or difference reaches a certain scope, the boiler shall reach a rated steam
parameter. And it shall also be able to carry out a safety, reliable and stabilized
running with maximum continuous steam load (BMCR). Its granted efficiency
can be modified according to the modification curve.
Regarding the allowed scope of change of the coal quality in the existing
regulations, parameters in the above three documents are basically same.
Please refer to Table 1:
Table 1. Allowed Scope of Change for Coal Quality

Coal quality Dry without Ash as Moisture as Low Ash
ash received received Calorific fusion point
Vdaf basis basis value as
Aar Mar received
basis
Qnet.ar
Anthracite -1% 4% 3% 10% Distortion
Meager coal -2 5% 3% 10% temperature
Low 5% 5% 4% 10% DT1)
volatilized allowing
soft coal 50 low
High 5% 5%, 4% 10% intenerate
volatilized -10% temperature
soft coal ST2)
Wood coal - 5% 5% 7% allowing
8%
Note:
1.The volatilization, ash, moisture, and distortion temperature DT in this table refer to
the absolute deviation with the designed value; The caloricity, intenerate
temperature ST refer to the relative deviation with the designed value.
2. In addition to the above scope of change of coal quality which will affect selection
of type of boiler, there are some other points that shall be paid attention to like:
sulfur content change, grindability change of coal, scope of change of wearing
index of coal. There shall be two or more analysis data fort those kinds of coal that
designed with high grindability index and high wearing index.
1) Adopted from Instruction on negotiations
2) Adopted from Stipulations to Intensify Management of a Big Coal Fired-Boiler
Regarding characteristics of coal quality, this item simplifies it as regular

characteristics and non-regular characteristics about which the regular
characteristics refer to analysis of coal element, analysis of coal industry,
analysis of coal caloricity, grindability, ash fusion point, ash element and ash
specific resistance etc. These are basic information of coal quality
characteristics.
The non-regular characteristics refer to the hot analysis data of coal fire
catching burning and out of burning; characteristics of coal slagging, including
comments on coal slagging tendency and contamination, data on coal grinding
characteristics, data on ash wearing characteristics, adhesive characteristics of
crude coal etc. For low volatized kind of coal, coal with high tendency of
slagging, boilers which possible to be equipped with a medium or high speed
coal mill, as well as selection of coal mill, the above non-regular information
of coal shall be collected according to actual work requirements.
As for mixed coal, it shall depend on the practically measured information and
the reliable experienced way of calculation. Especially to those non-regular
characteristical data, the simple result through weighted mean will bring about
deviation from actual value.
2. For power plant with intermediate reheating condensation unit, it is suitable to

match one machine with one boiler. The main steam and the reheating steam
will take single unit system. The maximum continuous evaporation (BMCR)
of a boiler shall be matched by quantity of steam inlet when adjusting valves
of the steam turbine are totally opened. If unit allows over pressure, then it can
be matched by quantity of steam inlet when adjusting valves of steam turbine
are totally opened under over pressure. Because of standards of the
manufacturer, when allowance of the above mentioned steam inlet becomes
larger, the relevant boiler isnt necessarily become bigger. As the boiler can
keep continuous running with maximum evaporation, so it is not necessary to
reckon in the allowance. Only design error, manufacture error by the
manufacturer, the age of running as well as its influence on steam
consumption shall be reckoned. According to years of allowance level and
requirements of negotiation for imported boiler, it is not less than 103% of
inlet quantity of TMCR.
3. For intermediate reheating heat supply type power plant, main steam and
reheating steam use single unit system. When one boiler stops running,
content in item 3 of 8.1.1 shall be fulfilled. Viz, requirement on the
non-intermediate reheating heat supply type unit, the heat supply to outside
reduced more. So it is necessary to rely on other heat resource from the same
heat supply net work, in order to solve the problem of balance of heat load.
Therefore when select installation scheme, heat supply ability of the same
local net work shall be considered at the same time.
8.1.2 Set the temperature reduce at 3 -5 , modify the temperature of reheating hot
pipe at not lower than 2 . This is because temperature reduction between unit and
boiler is caused by equal enthalpy temperature reduction due to lowered pressure.
Then, it is temperature reduction because of heat loss. According to theoretical
analysis, the pipe temperature reduction caused by heat remove is less than 0.5 . But
the equal enthalpy temperature reduction caused by pressure reduction is big in high
pressure zone, small in low pressure zone. When pressure reduction in main steam
pipe is 5%, equal enthalpy temperature reduce, at this time, to super high pressure
reference unit, to inferior critical and super critical reference units are 2.2 , 3.2 , and
4.5 . So the main steam temperature reduction of the super critical reference unit
shall be 5 . But when the temperature reduce of reheating hot pipe is 3.5% ,the equal
enthalpy temperature reduce is only less than 1 . So set 2 as the temperature
reduction of the reheating steam pipe. There are already successful examples in
imported units.
8.1.3 In order to increase automation level of the management of boiler, prevent boiler
from explosion, all boilers with capacity of 220t/h and over shall be protected by
boiler safety supervise system. Boiler and its heating, pulverizing system as well as its
equipment shall be able to meet the requirement of this control.
8.2 Pulverized Coal Preparation

8.2.1 The main points that shall be considered in mill and pulverizing system
selection are coal quality characteristics and its scope of change. Among these the
volatility Vdaf and wearing index Ke are the main points to be considered. At the
same time, mill applicability shall also be considered, because different mills have
different performances and problems. Besides, selection and design of mills and
pulverizing system will directly affect design of structure of boiler hearth and the
burner. So it must be done in close cooperation with the boiler manufacturer.
The suitable kind of coal mentioned in this item means soft coal, flushing wearing

index Ke of which 5.0%, high volatile meager coal and hard low moisture wood
coal (surface moisture Mf15%). All above mentioned coals can use reliable medium
speed mill. According to the experience from abroad, for some wood coal with
comparatively high moisture (total moisture Mt40%), medium speed mill can also
be adopted.
Less wearing loss wood coal refers to soft wood coal with high moisture and hard
wood coal with high ash content.
There are two types of tube mill, including conventional type (negative pressure
single inlet and single outlet) and double inlet and outlet type (positive pressure). Both
these types of mill are suitable for various coals , grain size of pulverized coal is small
and there is no problem of removing coal gangue and problem of thermal load
changing caused by mill reversing run, but their unit power consumption is high.
Usually conventional tube mills match bunker-type pulverized coal preparation
systems, and the initial investment is low. Such mills are also suitable for the coal
having bad firing character in case they are used together with a hot air pulverized
coal delivering system, but such system is complicated, and is not good for explosion
prevention. For large units, the conventional tube mill is selected only in case that
other types of mills or direct-firing pulverizing system are not suitable. Usually
double inlet and outlet tube mill is used together with direct-firing pulverizing system,
which is of high availability, occupies less land area and the system is not complicated.
With more and more mills are made domestically, cost of the mills has been reduced.
And since no standby is needed, the initial investment for boiler is comparable to the
case when medium speed mills are used. But since its unit power consumption is
high, it is mainly used for explosive (Vdaf 35% or Bc70%) soft coal with bad wearing

property (Ke 5.0%), or for anthracite and meager coal (the coal kinds, firing
temperature of which IT900) for which direct-firing pulverizing system can be
adopted.
For the soft coal (Ke=3.5~5.0) and high volatile meager coal, double inlet and outlet
tube mill can also be selected based on coal source stability and techno-economic
analysis.
8.2.2 Number and output of mills for a direct-firing pulverizing system shall be
determined based on boiler capacity, number of burners, fuel coal slagging tendency
and thermal load of the combustion area, arrangement of the main building, running
condition, etc. and in combination with techno-economic analysis. Too many mills
will bring about difficulties to equipment and building arrangement, and hence
operation and maintenance will be complicated. If there are too less mills, unit mill
output will be high, and operation will not be flexible, which will cause negative
impact on the control of heating-up during boiler start-up process and on the normal
load adjustment. This problem will be very serious in case that MSP medium speed
mill is selected and its lowest load rate reaches 40% (at present, the lowest load rate
of new MPS type medium speed mill can be lowered to the level close to the level of
HP type mills, but its operation reliability is low). In case that too less mills are used,
the mill size will be large, which will probably cause such problems as high thermal
load of burners and insufficient maintenance room, etc. For the above reasons, the
lowest number of mills is defined under this item.
The calculate output of mills refers to the output in the middle and post phase of
wearing of both high and medium speed mills (according to the information provided
by foreign and domestic manufacturers, the output lowering rate is 10% for the
middle and late wearing phase of mills. The wearing rate is 5%~6% for MPS mills
and the maximum rate can reach 15% for ZGM95). For the above reasons, the
calculation of output allowance of high and medium speed mills has taken the impact
of coal quality instability into account. Based on the condition that coal quality on the
domestic market is getting stable, when coal kind is selected for the mill in a
direct-firing pulverizing system, the calculated output allowance of 10% can be taken
for all the mills, except standby mills.
8.2.3 Under this item, standard for the number and calculated output of tube mills are
specified.
The basic allowance of the calculated output of tube mills is selected based on the
kind of coal coming into the plant, variety of coal quality and the factor that the mills
in a bunker-type pulverizing system can work with interruptions, etc. Test results of
Hanchuan and Yangzhou power plants show that the actual outputs of DTM350/600
and DTM380/830 mills, etc. are much higher than their calculated outputs, in addition,
the adoption of the new type axial classifier has made the output of tube mills raised
apparently. Therefore, it is more than enough in normal condition to take the basic
allowance of tube mills as 15%.
Large mill under this item refers to mill size 320/470 and over.
If it is tech-economically reasonable, output allowance of tube mills higher than the
basic values is allowable, but it shall not be too high. Especially in case that
bunker-type pulverizing system with hot air pulverized coal delivery system is
adopted, the problem that excessively large output allowance of the tube mills will
bring about excessively large tertiary air flow rate, and it will impact negatively on
boiler combustion shall be taken into consideration.
8.2.4 When type of coal feeder is selected, its operation reliability shall be taken into
account, furthermore, good regulating performance and metering function of the coal
feeders in a direct-firing pulverizing system are also required. Therefore, in
combination with metering requirements is specified.
The electro-metering belt coal feeders by gravity are widely used for large capacity
units of direct-firing pulverizing system. This kind of system can perform not only
automatic regulation, but also accurate metering, and thus consumption of coal
coming into boilers can be calculated. But since it is expensive, it is mainly suitable
for medium speed mills, for which high coal feeder metering accuracy and air-coal
ratio trace control is required.
Scraper type coal feeder, which is simple in structure and has good tightness, can be
used for high-speed mill. Most of our MPS medium speed mills introduced from
Germany is provided with scraper type coal feeders. For the direct-firing system of
double inlet and outlet tube mill, coal feeder metering accuracy requirement is not as
high as for the medium speed mill, so coal feeder with electronic scale is not
necessary. Based on the experience of Yangcheng and Jingyuan power plants, it is
specified under this item that ordinary scraper type coal feeder can be selected for
double inlet and outlet tube mills.
Under normal condition, each mill is provided with one coal feeder, but for the double
outlet and double inlet mill and some large capacity mills, it is possible that one coal
bunker has two coal feeding openings, and in this case, each mill shall be provided
with two coal feeders.
Calculated output of coal feeders shall be higher than that of mills, and certain
allowance shall be given so as to meet the change of coal kinds and improve the
adjusting performance of the coal feeders. It is specified under this item that for
double inlet and outlet tube mills, calculated output of unit coal feeder shall not be
lower than the calculated output when the mills run at one side, for this is the
maximum output of the associated coal feeder. Normally, manufacturers do not
recommend one-side running for such mills (for example, Japanese Mitsubishi
specified that one-side coal feeding can not be longer than 2 hours). But, if the new
one-side running mode recommended by FW Company is adopted for the double inlet
and outlet tube mill (i.e. the mill is divided into two halves, and the shut-gate of one
pulverized coal outlet of the four at each side of the mill is open and connected with
the burners of one level), the mills can run for a long time in one-side running mode.
In this case, output of unit coal feeder can be as high as 110% calculated output of the
mill.
8.2.5 According to the experience of Gehuang and Jiangyou power plants, etc. it is
feasible for one pulverized coal feeder to be connected to two primary fan tubes in
case that double pulverized coal feeder is adopted. In case that there are many primary
air vents in the plant design, double pulverized coal feeders can be selected.
8.2.6 For the arrangement and capacity of the pulverized coal feeders, it is not
mandatory for installation of inter-delivery system between adjacent boilers due to
their limited length and low utilization rate, etc. Actually, at present, almost all the
300MW units are equipped with 4 tube mills and two pulverized coal bunkers, and it
is sufficiently flexible when the two pulverized coal bunkers of a boiler are connected
with the pulverized coal conveyer. In order to simplify the pulverizing system and
according to the design and production experience of the 200MW unit of Jiaozuo
Power Plant and the 300MW unit of Shimen Power Plant, it is acceptable to adopt
proper arrangement solution without installation of pulverized coal conveying
facilities.
In case that bunker type pulverizing system is adopted for high volatile and explosive
soft coal and wood coal, pulverized coal conveying system shall not be provided. This
regulation has been specified in the Anti-Explosion Code For Fuel Conveying,
Pulverized Fuel Preparation And Combustion Equipmentby former USSR, Version
VI, 1990. Here, the defined value of high volatile means Vdaf30%.
8.2.7 Inert agent can be the same as fire extinguishing agent, different agents can also
be used. In case that different agents are used, the interfaces of inert system(carbon
dioxide, steam, or any other inert agents)and fire extinguishing system(carbon dioxide
or any other fire extinguishing agents) of the pulverizing system shall be arranged
separately.
8.2.8 Under this item, selection mode of the allowances of air flow rate and air
pressure of the primary fan is specified. For details, refer to the report by the
Northwest Electric Power Design Institute Selection Of Air Flow Rate, Pressure
Head Allowance And the Number Of Primary Fans And Their Reasonable
Configuration.
If trisector air pre-heater is used, differential pressure and air leakage, which will be
used as the basis for calculation of the basic air flow rate of the cold primary fan, at
the primary air side of the air pre-heater shall be determined by boiler manufacturers
according to the resistance calculation data provided by the design institute.
The allowance of fan air flow rate under this item refers to mass allowance.
Additional temperature allowance refers to the required fan capacity allowance due to
incoming air temperature rising. In this case, basic incoming air temperature can be
calculated based on the thermal power of the boiler or selected according to the
standard calculation temperature provided by the air fan manufacturer. Temperature
allowance coefficient shall not be higher than 0.14 in normal cases.
Composition of air allowance for the cold primary air fan is given in Table 2. In this
table , air pre-heater leakage increase refers to air leakage rate changing before and
after boiler overhaul, which is mainly is related to the type of air pre-heater. Change
of mill air flow rate or primary air flow rate is taken as positive offset. The
consideration is based on the following: to meet coal quality change; to reduce gangue
coal discharge of medium speed mill, or to avoid revising air coal ratio curve due to
burner slagging; to avoid coal from jamming due to complicated arrangement of
pulverized coal feeding pipe line or due to uneven distribution of pulverized coal.
Table 2 Composition of Allowance for Cold Primary Fan Air Flow Rate
Pulverizing system and operation mode Positive pressure direct-firing Bunker
pulverizing system storage type
Normal Switching pulverizing
operation system
Comp Air pre-heater leakage increasing 20%~26% 20%~26% 13%~15%
osition Air flow rate or primary air flow 7.5% 2%
rate of mill rising
Leakage loss of pipe network of 3%
standby mill
Air flow rate rising during mill 15%
switching
Fan output rising during mill -5%
switching
Network cycle lowering 3% 3% 3%
Total air flow rate allowance 33.55~39.5% 33%~39% 18%~20%
Selected value for air flow rate allowance 335%~40% 20%
For the cold primary air fan provided to the medium speed mill, the lowest air flow
rate allowance is 35%. In case that there is a big change in air leakage rate of the air
pre-heater and a big change in coal quality, and the arrangement of pulverized coal
delivery pipe line is complicated, it is recommended to change it into 40%.
For the cold primary air fan of direct-firing pulverizing system provided with tube
box type air pre-heater, item 3.1may be taken as reference, but it is advised that the air
flow rate allowance of the fan is not lower than 20%.
8.2.10 Sealing fan shall be provided for both medium speed mill and double inlet and
outlet tube mill, so as to perform equipment sealing under normal operating condition
of the mill and the coal feeder, etc. In case that coal pile above the coal feeders is not
high enough, it is allowable to raise sealing fan allowance and pressure head
allowance to 20% and 40% respectively.
8.3 Smoke and wind system

8.3.1 According to the suggestions of the most technique and economic reports, the
selection of the large capacity wind transmission is in the following order: shaft flow
type with the adjustable rotated blades, shaft flow type with the adjustable motionless
blades, or single speed centrifuge type, single speed centrifuge type with the hydraulic
coupling. For the double speed centrifuge type, its reasonableness shall be determined
by the ratio of the motor to be selected. For the wind transmitters matched to the unit
of 600MW, as the rotating speed is too big, its difficult to find an adaptive single
suction centrifuge fan. If adopting double suction centrifuge fan, the dimensions is
very large, and it is obviously not as good as the shaft flow fan. Thus, this term is that
for the wind transmitters used for large capacity of the furnaces, the shaft flow type
fan with adjustable rotated blades shall be the first selection. For the layout of
adopting double speed centrifuge fans, the ratio of the selected motor shall meet the
following requirements: the lower speed stop can drive the turbine, heat consumption
can assure the load in operation and it can operate in efficient areas.
When selecting the speed adjustable centrifuge type wind transmitters, it shall be
determined by the economic and technique comparison and proving on the base of the
proven reliability of the facilities.
The base value of the wind amount of the wind transmitter and the allowance of the
pressing head are fixed at 5% and 10%. For the wind transmitter that the air
pre-heating unit with three (four) partial rooms (two grade fan), as the wind amount of
the first grade leaking into the side of the second grade is almost equal to the wind
amount of the second grade wind leaking into the smoke side, the allowance standard
can be reached generally. For the wind transmitter that the air preheating unit with
two partial rooms (two grade fan), the allowances of the wind amount and the
pressing head are fixed at 10% and 20% separately.
For the system that the wind transmitter is series connected with the one grade cold
fan, the wind amount allowance of the fan can be determined according to the
following rules:
1. The wind amount allowance of the one grade cold fan shall be used
according to the 1, 2 of the item 3 in Clause 8.2.8.
2. The wind amount allowance of the wind transmitter shall be calculated
integrally according to the leakage balance data of the air preheating unit
provided by the furnace plant. As some of the wind amount of the one grade
fan returns to the second grade wind side by the leakage of the air preheating
unit in the one grade side, the load of the transmitter is lightened. As the
result, the wind amount allowance of the wind transmitter in this system is
not only the sum of the second grade wind allowance and the one grade one.
According to the theory analysis, the wind amount allowance of the wind
transmitter shall not be lower than 10%. See the special reports on the one
grade fan of the North-west Power Design Institute for the detail.
8.3.2 When selecting the suction fan, the anti-wear performance shall be taken into
consideration at first, then the efficiency properties of the fan, the facility investment,
check and maintenance conditions and anti-exploration of internal furnaces and other
factors. After comparison, it is selected.
Recently, the AN series suction fan of shaft flow type with adjustable non-motion
blade made in China according to the German KKK technique had been put into
operation for 5000 hours and 4000 hours separately in the 1# and 2# furnaces in the
power plant of the dam without any changes of the turbine wheel. The interval had
exceeded the repair one. Among the technical and economic analysis reports, the shaft
flow type fan with adjustable non-motion blade is recommended to be the first
selected fans used in large furnaces.
About the usage of the shaft flow type suction fan with adjustable rotated blades, it
has been developed in recent years. For example: the fan with adjustable rotated
blades made in China according to German TLT technique that adopted anti-wear
coated forged blades had been operated for above 20000 hours at the condition of the
smoke that contained dust of 350mg/m3 in Shidonglou NO.1 Plant, and it showed the
advantages of wide adjusting range, higher efficiency when the working condition
changed, convenient checking and repairing. But the manufacturing cost is much
higher. So it is recommended to be used in the conditions of the reasonable technique
and economics.
Generally, 2 suction fans shall be selected. When adopting centrifuge suction fan for
the large capacity unit, for solving the problems of too large start torque as a result of
large volume, 3 or 4 machines can be used. 4 centrifuge suction fans had been used in
the power plant design of Baoshan Steel Ltd. considering the complex fuel instruction
and the large smoke flow. When there are more than two suction fans, if one of them
stops, the rest suction fans can still meet the requirements on the operation with the
loads in the normal working condition (THA).
Refer to the section of one grade fan before mentioned for the instructions on basic
wind amount of the suction fan and the allowance of the fan.
For the furnaces designed according to the imported technique, the wind leakage at
the end part of the furnace and the too small wind leakage in the air preheating unit
had not been considered in the calculations. The wind amount allowance of the
suction fan can be increased to 15%. For the fuel that the ashes tend to block the
low-temperature end of the air pre-heating unit seriously, the wind compression
allowance of the suction fan can be increased to 30%.
The temperature allowance of the suction fan is based on the smoke exhausting
temperature by the thermal calculation of the furnace in the conditions of the
maximum continuous evaporating amount (BMCR) and its environment temperature,
plus not less than the allowance of 10. When the heating unit needs to be used in
the condition of BMCR, the temperature allowance shall not be less than increment of
the smoke exhausting temperature caused by the usage of the heating unit.
8.3.3 When the furnace is equipped with safety supervision and protection system, the
flame supervision unit needs to be supplied with the cooling wind. Thus the cooling
fan shall be equipped. The allowance of the cooling fan shall be selected referring to
the design specifications of the foreign country.
8.3.4 When the fired oil system is equipped and the starting of the two grade wind
pressure can not meet the requirements, the fired fan can be equipped. The fired fan is
only used when starting the furnace in a short period. That is, the back fan is not
equipped. Generally, the shaft flow fan or centrifuge fan connected to the pipeline can
be selected. The allowance of the fan is selected according to the design specifications
of the foreign country.
8.3.5 The numbers of electrostatic precipitators are determined less than 2 groups to
the furnaces of 670t/h and above. It is considered in the following respects: the
uniformity of distributing the air flow, the safety of the operation, the working amount
of the installation, repair and the operation maintenance, the comparison of the
occupation and the investment, foreign and domestic experiences and etc. For the
furnace of the 420t/h and lower, only one set is allowed to be used according to the
engineering condition.
When the electrostatic precipitators reach the condition of stop the usage one of the
power supplies in the three conditions for assuring the efficiency of the precipitating,
generally it is equivalent that about 10% of positive polar plates dont work. For
example: when one furnace equipped with two four electric field precipitators,
generally there are eight power supply area (for larger electrostatic precipitators, one
electric field is divide into two power supply areas). When stopping one power supply
area, it is equivalent that 1/8 (12.5%) of positive polar plates dont work.
The smoke flow at the entrance of the precipitators shall be calculated according to
the smoke amount in the condition of the designed coal type, maximum continuous
vapor amount of the furnace, exhausting temperature calculated at the exit of the air
preheating unit (including wind leaking amount and the smoke allowance). For the
non-imported units of less then 300MW, when the larger wind leakage factor and
allowance had been used in the smoke flow calculation, the flow allowance of 10%
can not be considered separately.
8.3.6 The number of the furnaces connected to the same stovepipe shall be
comprehensively considered according to the furnace capacity, environment
protection requirements and arrangement. According to the environment protection
requirements, the smoke in the furnace shall be exhausted concentrically. Many
furnaces are connected to one stovepipe, but the lowest rotating speed at the exit port
must be controlled in the condition of the one furnace operation, in order not to be
less than 1.5 times of the average wind speed at the height of the stovepipe exit port.
Thus the number of the furnaces connected to the same stovepipe can not be too much.
Otherwise, the flow speed of the stovepipe will exceed the standard, and the positive
pressure occurs in the exhausting pipe of the stovepipe. According to the theory
analysis and the experiences, the numbers of the furnaces connected to the same
stovepipe had better be limited to 4 furnaces. According to the design and operation
experiences of the power plant of Zou county, connecting 4 units of 300MW to the
same stovepipe is feasible in the laying out and the designing of the stovepipe. So, the
following specifications had been given in the terms: the numbers of the furnaces
connected to the same stovepipe for the unit of 300MW and lower are 2-4. It is 1-2 for
the unit of 600MW.
8.4 Ignition and combustion-supporting system

8.4.1 The selection of the oil type for ignition and combustion-supporting of
coal-burning boiler is relevant to many factors , but mainly depends on the market
research and comprehensive technical economic comparison result. According to the
research result from the investigation into more than 20 coal-burning power plants,
only two power plants, Changshu power plant and Shi Dongkou power plant, adopt
two types of oil source ( light oil for ignition, heavy oil for starting and steady
burning), all the other power plants use only one type of oil. Among them few power
plants such as Panshan and Huaneng Yueyang adopt heavy oil for both ignition and
combustion-supporting. Most power plants adopt light oil for both ignition and
combustion-supporting. Judging form the result of yearly expense calculation from
the technical economic comparison, it is economical to adopt the heavy oil as the
single oil source. But practically, the purchasing of the heavy oil is much more
difficult than that of light oil and the quality of the heavy oil is difficult to guarantee.
All these bring much trouble to the run of boiler. For example, oil-burning system can
not run normally and atomization of the oil-burning nozzle is not good because the
quality of the purchased oil is much lower than the designing requirement and they
are forced to adopt light oil instead of heavy oil in Hanchuang power plant. In
Huaneng Yueyang power plant the out put capacity of the oil-burning nozzle is not
enough due to the poor quality of the heavy oil purchased from the market. Though
the running expense for solution that the single light oil source is used, it offers simple
system, easy production management, clean environment, little investment and less
land covering. It is easy to be stored and transported, and convenient to purchase. It
can just be purchased from the local oil company. For the above reasons, it is
stipulated in the article that only single oil type is considered for the ignition and
combustion-supporting oil system on principle. In common it is better to use light oil.
Heavy oil can be used when the supplying and quality of the heavy oil can be ensured.
For the power expansion, light oil can be used for ignition and heavy oil is used for
starting combustion-supporting and steady burning under low load.
8.4.2 The designed stipulation for the output capacity of the oil-burning system can be
classified as tow cases: for the whole factory and for each boiler.
The designed stipulation for the output capacity of the whole factory is as followings:
In the case of single oil type, it shall be considered in combination of the two working
situations of maximum ignition oil consumption for one boiler and starting
combustion-supporting of another maximum capacity boiler. When different type of
oil is used, Output capacity of ignition oil system shall be considered according to
combustion-supporting oil consumed in maximum ignition for one boiler. The
designed output capacity of combustion-supporting oil system shall be considered
according to oil consumed in the starting combustion-supporting after the ignition of
the maximum boiler. Oil consumed in combustion-supporting for two boilers
simultaneously is not considered when the power plant is carrying basic load or the
number of the units is fewer. When it is peak-adjusting unit or the number of the
boilers is very great, the starting is very frequent. Starting and steadily burning of the
boiler under low load appear simultaneously. The designed output capacity of the
whole factory oil system shall not be less than the maximum oil sum of the oil needed
for starting combustion-supporting one boiler plus oil needed for burning steadily of
one boiler under low load.
Oil burning consumption of each boiler shall be stipulated according to its different
working situation separately as follows,
1. Oil consumption for ignition is considered according to output capacity sum
of the oil ignition nozzle needed to be put into simultaneously in the ignition
of the cold boiler. According to the category in the international standard
NFPA8502-1995, usually the output force of the ignition oil nuzzle only
used for oil (gas) burning appliance is not more than the 4% of the input heat
quantity of the main burning appliance under full load.
2.Oil consumption for starting combustion-supporting the boiler is selected
according to coal type, boiler model, and the layout feature of the boiler. The
maximum oil consumption occurs at before and after the powder being cast
and stage of the ignition charge of the tube. The proportion of the oil
consumption for combustionsupporting to the input heat quantity at the
working condition of maximum consecutive vaporizing volume is 10% to
15% for the soft coal and high volatility lean coal and is 20% to 25% for
blind coal and low volatility. Upper limit can be used for the output capacity
of the combustion-supporting oil when the design of the stove-model and
burning appliance results in poor steady burning capability between each
other flame.
3. Oil consumption for steady burning of the boiler under low load shall be
decided by consulting with the boiler manufacturer according to the specific
situation such as the coal type, the minimum load of steady burning of the
boiler and so on. When it is necessary, the proportion of the oil consumption
for steady burning under low load to the working condition under the
maximum consecutive vaporizing volume is generally 5%.The oil
consumption for steady burning can be properly increased to 10% for the
fire with poor characteristic and steady burning without oil cast under high
load.
4.The minimum oil-returning volume of the system is take as not less than
10% according to the past designing experience. The oil-returning volume
can be properly increased for the high viscosity, heavy oil burning system.
The oil consumption for the above boiler can be decided referring to the the
rational setup of the ignition combustion-support system and the equipment
in the special topic report given by middle-south electric power designing
institute.
8.4.3 The number of the oil tanks for ignition, starting, and combustion-supporting
depends on the oil type. It is stipulated that two oil tanks are set for light oil, one for
oil entry and dehydration, one for running. Three oil tanks are set for heavy oil, one
for oil entry, one for dehydration and one for running.
The capacity of oil tank for ignition, starting and combustion-supporting depends on
the oil consumption and oil-coming cycle. While the oil-burning consumption is
relevant to the situation such as coal quality, installation and commission of the units,
especially at the stage of the installation and commission of the units the oil volume is
biggest and concentrated. According to the previous statistic documentation, the
average monthly oil consumption is 700t during the period of the normal run of two
1000t/h boilers, the maximum monthly oil consumption is 1200t when one is installed
and commissioned, and the other is running normally. The maximum monthly oil
consumption is 1900t for four 1000t/h boilers when one is installed and commissioned,
three boilers are running normally. Oil-burning consumption for one-time normal
starting is about 100t-150t for 1000t/h and 50t-100t for 670t/h. The times of starting
and stopping for each boiler is not more than 20 in the whole year based on the
oil-coming cycle is not more than one month. In recent years the powder shall be cast
at once after the starting of the boiler, oil-burning time is shortened during the
installation and commission and oil consumption has become one checking index for
assessing whether the construction is up to the standard according to the requirement
of working regulation of starting and commission for fire power construction .
With the improvement of the construction technology, especially for the unit adopting
factory tubing installation technology, oil consumption for blowing tube is obviously
reduced therefore oil burning tank with smaller capacity can be adopted.
The lower limit of the oil tank is applicable for power plant with good quality coal
and upper limit is applicable for power plant with poor quality coal or with more than
for the planned capacity units.
In order to meet the need of the safety monitoring-system of the boiler, oil-burning
system is requirement to be at heat-standby state during running. When the oil storage
tank is very far away from the boiler house, one daily used oil tank ought to be set
nearby the boiler house.
Oil cycling between the oil storage tank and daily used oil tank can save the power
consumption of the oil pump and the oil supplying parameter can also be easily
controlled.
8.4.4 Upper limit value is adopted for length of oil-unloading station platform and
oil-unloading time for the incoming-oil in railway when the planned capacity for the
power plant is more than 1000MW.
For coal-burning power plant with oil transported through pipeline, the reliability of
the oil transportation is higher than that in the case oil is transported through railway
and waterway. One oil pipeline can be adopted for the oil-consumption in the whole
year is not very big and the oil-transporting capability can be considered according to
50t/h. The oil-burning consumption in the whole year seldom exceeds 1000t for the
power plant with capacity of 1000MW and lower, therefore the yearly running hour of
the oil pipeline is only 200h.
8.4.5 According to the DL5027 Typical fire-fighting regulation for electric power ,
belt drive device shall not be used in the oil pump house to avoid producing static and
causing fire. This requirement shall be met when selecting the model of the
oil-unloading pump.
8.4.6 For the type of oil-transporting (supplying) pump, centrifugal pump is mostly
used in power plant with domestic made unit and screw pump is mostly used in power
plant with imported unit. According to the result of the investigation, it is thought that
both the centrifugal pump and screw pump can meet the requirement, therefore it is
made clear in the article centrifugal pump or screw pump ought to be selected for the
oil transporting (supplying) pump.
According to the technical economic analysis result made in the special topic
report the rational setup of the ignition combustion-supporting system and
equipment given by the middle-south electric power designing institute, it is consider
that it is best to chose the configuration of the 2100%supplying pump plus circling
pump with capacity of 130% or oil-supplying pump with capacity of 350%. The
first investment increases no very greatly while the yearly power-saving benefit
obviously and it is easy and flexible to examine and repair.
The pressure head of the oil transporting(supplying) shall be calculated according to
the sum of the following items
1. Medium flowing resistance from the oil sucking-in opening to interface of
oil-burning pipeline before the boiler, added 35% abundant volume.
2. The atomization of oil gun needs normal oil pressure (at the interface of the oil
pipeline before the boiler)
3. The height difference between the inlet and out outlet.
According to the result of the investigation, the time interval for the
examination and reparation for the screw-type oil-supplying pump is shorter
than that for the centrifugal oil-supplying pump. The time interval for the
overhaul of the centrifugal pump is generally one to two years in the overhaul
mainly repair or replace sealing element or easily wearing parts. The time
interval for the overhaul of the screw oil pump is six month, and mainly repair
or replace driving/idle rotor, bush, bearing, mechanical seal, filling ,washer,
coupler joint, release valve and so on. It takes very long to conduct the
overhaul therefore it is stipulated that a standby pump for overhaul shall be
added when adopting the screw pump.
8.4.7 Oil-transporting pump is used to transport the oil in the storage tank to the daily
used oil tank, therefore it is ought to be arranged at the area near the oil storeroom.
Oil-supplying pump is used to send the oil from the oil storage tank or daily used oil
tank to boiler house, the oil-supplying pump house for daily used oil tank ought to be
arranged near the boiler.
8.4.8 The writing way for the oil-supplying pipe and oil-returning pipe is
corresponding in the article.
It is stipulated that oil gauge shall be installed at the oil-supplying and oil-returning
pipeline of each boiler. Whether to install the oil gauge on the main pipeline can be
decided according to the requirement.
It is specified in the DL612 supervision regulation for pressure container in electric
power industry boiler that quick cut-off valve is installed on the boiler oil-supplying
pipeline and bypass valve is installed for experiment. When the oil-supplying quick
cut-off valve is switched off, the oil-returning pipeline is required to be cut off
simultaneously to prevent the pressure oil from running back to oil nuzzle of the
boiler. Therefore the check valve or quick cut-off valve is installed on the
oil-returning pipeline. But according to the international standard NFPA8502, it is
considered that the adoption of the check valve for the heavy oil system offer litter
function, therefore it is specified that it is better to install quick cut-off valve on the
oil-returning pipeline of the boiler.
8.4.9 To ensure the condition for translation and atomization of the oil, the oil
unloading, storing, and supplying system for the oil with high viscosity, freezing point
higher than the lowest average ambient temperature shall consider the heating,
blowing and sweeping facility.
The accident of oil pouring into the steam system has occurred in the some power
plant adopting the steam blowing, sweeping and steam atomization. Therefore it is
stipulated that measures shall be taken to prevent back pouring of oil, for example
adding the check valve and supervising valve on the steam blowing and sweep. If
condition permitted, adopt the steam resource with pressure higher than oil pressure.
8.4.10 If the oil heater is arranged in the oil pump house, large heat-radiating quantity
is not in favor of the ventilation and temperature-reduction for the pump house, and
the condition for overhaul is very poor. It is also much more disadvantage for
underground oil pump house. Therefore it is stipulated the oil heater ought to be
arranged in the open air.
Oil heater is generally arranged near the oil pump house. Baoshan Steel Power Plant
arranges the oil heater near the boiler house, its strong points are (1) the running way
without person on duty can be adopted for oil-supplying pump house and it is
convenient for the operating person to make patrol checking. (2) Reduce the heat loss
of the pipeline (3) improve the reliability of the oil-supplying pipeline. The
shortcoming: When the quality of equipment is poor or the management is not good
enough, the nearby environment may be affected due to the oil leakage of the oil
heater and the safety degree of the boiler house is reduced. Therefore it is stipulated
that the oil-burning heater can only be arranged near the boiler house when the
condition is adequate.
When the daily used tank is arranged near the boiler house and the secondary heater is
needed to set due to the high oil viscosity, oil-burning heater can be arranged near the
boiler house.
8.4.12 It is required to take measures to prevent static production and lightening strike
because the friction between oil material and air as well as the impact between each
oil streams may produce high static and cause spark which is often the cause of oil
tank combustion and explosion.
8.5 The auxiliary system of the furnace

8.5.1 It specifies the requirements to the calculation of the water exhausting amount at
furnace emergency and the flow limitation.
According to the specifications in <the safety and technical supervision for the steam
furnaces> issued by Labor Minister, the steam furnace of the power station shall be
equipped with emergency water exhausting tubes. But the standard of flow for the
emergency water exhausting had not given. The diameters of the emergency water
exhausting tubes set by all the furnace plants are large. Generally they are DN100. If
no flow limiting units are not connected to a large container of periodical dirt exhaust
directly, the required container used for the periodically dirt exhausting is rather large.
In fact, a furnace need not such a large emergency water exhausting flow. So the
reasonable emergency water exhausting flow or adaptive procedures of limiting the
flow shall be defined through the discussion with the furnace plant in common.
In the adaptive conditions for the steam furnaces with inferior critical parameters
(such as precisely treating unit, reliable water quality, having the procedures of
avoiding or preventing from the sediment forming in the condition of putting drugs),
continuous dirt exhausting system can not be provided. In fact, most of the units
imported from foreign countries are not equipped with continuous dirt exhausting
systems.
8.5.2 For the units with bypass circuit, no fired steam exhausting tubes to the sky are
equipped generally. But installed pressure release valves to the atmosphere (PCV) are
activated prior to the furnace safety valves. The relative many steam exhausting times
are existed and silencers shall be installed on the steam exhausting tubes.
Considering that the possibility of exhausting steam from all the safety valves in the
furnace is very small and other factors, such a specification had been said in the term:
silencers shall be installed on the steam exhausting tubes of the steam safety valves
having lower start jump pressure, the safety valves of the over-heat unit, as well as the
re-heat unit safety valves of the middle pressure cylinder starting units that exist
larger possibility of start jump.
A practical question is that there is water in the steam exhausting tubes in cold areas.
Because of the serious water appearances, the control room surfaces the exhausting
steam can reach and outer ground surfaces of the main plant room in the some power
plant became ice fields. The thickness reached 300-400mm. According to the
experiences given by Tieling, Shuangliao Power Plant, such a specification had been
mentioned in the term: Separating units of steam and water at the steam exhausting
tubes shall be installed in the cold areas. The noises of the steam exhausting tubes are
relative to the pressure in the large containers. Such a specification had been
mentioned in the term: For the large, periodically dirt exhaust containers that posses
calculated higher pressure, silencers shall installed on the steam exhausting tubes.
8.5.3 According to the specifications in Technical and management rules of the

power industry of original Power Industry Ministry, the air temperature entering the
air pre-heating unit shall be selected according to the contents of sulphur, water
(considering the dew point and the corrosion properties of the smoke). Generally, the
air heating system of the air pre-heating unit shall be taken into consideration. But air
heating systems can not be installed in the following conditions:
1. Good coal quality (content of sulphur: St,ar<1.0%), higher environment
temperature, the loss of the air pre-heating unit resulted by the lower
temperature corrosion is less than the cost of installing air heating systems
and their operation;
2. The anti-corrosion materials are used at the cold end of the air pre-heating
units, and non-corrosion and no ash blocking in the air preheating units can
be assured.
3. Similar experiences can be referred.
The installing location of heating units is generally in the entrances of the air
pre-heating units. In cold area of the North, heating units can be installed at the
entrances of the fan for protecting wind transmitters and one-grade fans.
For the Rongke type three-room air pre-heating unit that the rotor rotates, whether to
install heating units on the first-grade wind side depends on the rotating direction of
pre-heating units. When the rotating direction makes the first-grade wind contact the
heated elements heated by the smoke first, the corrosion can not occur at the cold end
because the heated elements had just been cooled and there is a temperature raises of
above 10 in the fan as the first-grade wind. But for the air pre-heating units of
double flow passage type that their wind housings rotate, because the first and the
second grade wind pass through their own passages, the heating units shall still be
installed on the first-grade wind side.
According to some power plant, some heating units are frozen or blocked in their
operations. Some of the heating units had been corroded by the acid washing drops of
air pre-heating units. Thus it resulted in the bad efficiency or larger resistance. It is
necessary that considering anti-frozen procedures in the constructions and the
anti-blocked ashes and anti-corrosion in the layout. If having adaptive condition, the
vertical layout of the heating units in the horizontal wind passages shall be taken into
consideration first. But the reasonable water drainage lead system needs to be
installed at that time.
Using the heat wind re-cycling system on the tubular air pre-heating units had been
tested. The operation condition of the fans had been worsened when using the heat
wind re-cycling as a result of the hot air with ashes on the rotated air pre-heating units.
According to the experiences of the Wangting Power Plant and other ones, after using
heat wind recycling for a period, the blades of the fans and the wind passage ways are
all worn obviously and stopped. So, it is specified that the selection shall be in the
condition of not too large hot wind recycling rate (for example not exceed 5%-8%).
As the ashes of the hot air result from the rotating direction of the rotor of the air
pre-heating unit, the extracting section and other factors, the hot wind extracting port
is required to be arranged at the section containing less ash in the air.
8.5.4 After putting the heating units into operation in some power plant, there is still
ash blocking in the air pre-heating units. When it is serious, the increase of the smoke
resistance results the insufficiency of the furnace output force. So it is specified that
the requirements on providing perfect ash blowing system to air pre-heating units
(including hot end and cold end) shall be supposed to furnace plants.
8.6 Start furnace

8.6.1 The numbers and capacities of start furnaces depend mainly on the two factors
of the unit capacities and the climate conditions in the area. The area climate
conditions are divided into two kinds in the term: one is heating area, the other is
non-heating and interim area.
8.6.2 The lower pressure (1.27MPa) can be adopted for the steam parameters of start
furnaces according to the experiences in China.
The burning coal is mostly used in heating areas. According to feedback, the
environment pollution or the bad labor condition or other questions occur in some
burning coal start furnaces as a result of the too bad technical designs on coal loading,
ash eliminating, water draining and others, or not perfect layout. The requirements
had been supposed in the terms that the burning coal start furnace rooms shall meet
the requirements of production and the environment protection.
9 Ash and slag handling system
9.1 general regulations
9.1.2 During engineering design the setting up of ash and slag transportation and
storage system shall be done according to the ash comprehensive utilization
conditions. In actual practice, for a short period, only part of the ash comprehensive
utilization can be carried out. So this item specially regulates that the ash
comprehensive utilization system shall meet the requirement of the ash
comprehensive utilization that already carried out, but shall keep conditions for
expansion.
9.1.3 It is clearly regulated here that the ash quantity removed from the ash and slag
handling system shall be calculated according to the maximum quantity of ash and
slag removed when the boiler is on continuous evaporation with the designed kind of
coal. Viz. Under normal designed calculation the accumulation of ash and slag
quantity from different parts shall be calculated on 100% of the ash and slag quantity
of the boiler when the boiler works with the designed kind of coal. When select the
ash and slag handling equipment capacity, multiply the allowance, but because of the
ash difference between the designed kind of coal and the proofread kind of coal, the
normal calculation of allowance will not include the proofread coal. So here, another
meaning of the allowance is that the out put of the ash and slag handling system shall
also fulfill the transportation requirement of the boiler on maximum continuous
evaporation with proofread coal, choose the big value between the two.
9.2 Dry Type Ash and Slag Handling System

9.2.2 Low positive pressure pneumatic ash handling system originally refers to the
system like: Pingyu, Beicanggang imported from US in the eightys. Positive
pressure pneumatic ash handling system originally refers to the storage and pump
system made in China. In recent years some power plants in China gradually use
multiform pneumatic ash and handling system , such as the DEPAC storage and pump
ash handling system in Nanshi power plant, the double bushing eddy flow
pneumatic ash handling system in Jiaxing power plant , the PD pump and AV pump
pneumatic ash handling systems in Qujing power plant etc. All the above belong to
positive pressure pneumatic ash handling system, they are only of different types.
This item entitles all the above systems as positive pressure pneumatic ash handling
system. There is no need to put forward more examples.
9.2.4 Regarding the low positive pressure, negative pressure pneumatic ash handling
system in ported from the US in the eightys, the regulation of systems output
allowance will be hold, viz. When using the designed coal, not less than 100%
allowance of the quantity of the removed ash shall be kept. As for other pneumatic ash
handling system, 100% allowance was also used in the past. But the design and
operating units generally said that 100% allowance was too big. That was a waste.
This only depends on type of system and mode of function. According to the practical
experience and suggestions of overseas manufacturers, when there is not much ash
difference between the designed coal and the proofread coal, 50% of the designed
coal ash out put allowance will meet the requirement. But the actual coal using
circumstances in China is complicated, so there is great ash difference between the
designed coal and the proofread coal. Sometimes it can be as big as one time. In this
case, the out put (including the allowance) of the designed coal ash quantity will not
meet transportation requirement of using the proofread coal. So the calculation shall
be done according to the requirement when using the proofread coal. 20% of the
allowance shall be considered to take. Take bigger value between the above two.
Considering the present situation that the pneumatic ash handling system made in
China are relatively not highly reliable, the actual meaning of when it is necessary,
proper accident treatment measures shall be set up. mentioned in the item refers to
the case when the domestic pneumatic ash handling system is taken as the main
system. The accident treatment measures refer to the simple stand-by system with low
standard. But with the development of the technique and improvement of the
equipment quality, the reliability of the domestic pneumatic ash handling system used
in big capacity power plant will be highly increased. Dalate and Yimin power plant
use domestic pneumatic ash handling system as their main system. There is no
stand-by system. Zhujiang power plant use domestic negative pressure system as their
main system. They have no stand-by system either. (They used to have it in the early
period, but cancelled later on) All of these are running very well.
In this item, the 8h collected ash amount refers to the middle class ash content of
coal. For some other kinds of coal that are of high ash content, it is difficult to
maintain 8h collected ash amount. In this case the collected ash amount in the ash
bunker can be relevantly reduced, but it shall not be less than 6h collected ash
amount.
As for non productive main system, only used as the comprehensive pneumatic ash
handling system, above standards can be taken as the reference, but the allowance can
be relevantly reduced.
9.2.5 The ash storage capacity depends on the use of storage and its external running
conditions.
For transfer and adjusting ash storage, generally the requirement of adjusting capacity
shall be met. It is proper to take system of 8h collected ash amount.
When used as ash storage, it shall not be less than 24h, but it is not suitable to take
remove system of over 48h collect ash amount.
In order to make comprehensive use, the ash storage shall be classified as coarse
storage and fine storage. According to experience from multiple power plants, two
300MV-600MW power units can jointly use one fine ash storage, but each unit shall
have one coarse storage for itself .for special 600MV unit , if there is large quantity of
ash and it is difficult for each unit to have one coarse storage, according to the
engineering conditions, three coarse storage can be jointly used for two units or each
unit has two coarse storage.
9.2.9 In domestic power plants, usually the wearable pipe (alloyed pipe or inner lining
made of special wearable material) or common carbon steel pipe are used for the
straight pipe of the transportation pipe on the pneumatic ash handling system. In the
early period, carbon steel pipe were also used for the domestic storage and pump
system. For instance: Meixi power plant in Zhejiang, Kaiyuan power plant in Yunan
etc. The straight pipe can be used as long as ten years. Originally the imported low
positive pressure system also used the carbon steel pipe. Because of some reasons, in
recent years some domestic power plants use wearable pipes. But its prices are several
times high of the carbon steel pipes. So here, the article stipulates that it is suitable to
use carbon steel pipe for the pneumatic ash handling system.
Regarding transportation of the far away positive pressure ash handling system, flow
speed in end part of the pipe is high, wear and tear are severe.(of course wear and tear
have something to do with specialty of the ash). After technical and economical
comparison, it is also proper to use wearable pipes. According to experience the end
part of the pipe refers to the 1/3 of whole length of the pipe.
The bending pipe of the pneumatic ash handling system shall use wearable pipes.
9.3 water power ash and slag handling system

9.3.1Various kinds of water power ash and slag handling system are widely used in
our fossil-fired power plant. They are getting proofed and experienced. Therefore this
article will not put forward any stipulations on the water power ash handling system.
In our country, especially in the north, there is a shortage of fresh water. However,
water power ash handling system is No 1. water consumer in a power plant. So this
item put forward a principle requirement on the save of fresh water by the water
power ash handling system. Vie. According to the engineering conditions
try to increase the ash and water consistence. Make repeated use of the circulating
water, blow-off water and return flow water of the ash field in the power plant etc. Try
to use little or not to use fresh water.
9.3.5 When using the volume pump for the remove of ash and slag together, there is a
requirement for the granularity of the slag. But in actual practice slag grinding
technique is not commonly used. Because the slag granularity in general power plant
is not so big, also the quality of volume pump is highly improved, so it is only
necessary to screen out the big ones with a screen cloth. The slag grinding system is
not necessarily used. For instance: the Baoshan power plant is adopting this means
and it is very effective.
9.3.6 This item regulates the capacity of transfer or adjusting storage. Compare with
requirement on capacity of the transfer or adjusting ash storage, usually 8h slag
storage quantity may be taken.
9.3.8 About the centrifugal pump, according to the investigation, presently in our
country the ash and slag remove together pump system or solitude slag remove
system are used. Quite a number of power plants have only one (set) stand-by pump
or if they have two (sets) stand-by pumps there is actually one (set) put in use. The
other one (set) is kept unused for long time or seldom used. The main reason is
quality of domestic ash and slag pump, as well as its wearable material have made
great improvements. The wearable components and continuous running time of the
whole pump has increased greatly. So it is possible to use one (set) centrifugal pump
for running and one (set) for stand-by. As for the use of 2-3 (sets) centrifugal pumps
running, the stand-by pump can also be reduced to two (sets). Besides, the wearable
components of the centrifugal ash and slag pump and the continuous running time of
the whole pump itself has almost no relationship with single-stage pump or
multiple-stage pump. So single-stage pump and multiple-stage pumps use the same
stand-by standard. At present the big domestic power plants use plunger-pump as
containment pump. The oil insulated pump and water insulated pump are seldom used.
Investigation tells that life length of main wearable parts of the plunger-pump, the
plunger and the valve components have already been increased highly. For instance:
the 1#-5# plunger-pump in Changshu power plant have already been running for
12590h-19670h. Life length of plunger and padding are as long as 2100h. Life length
of valve components is as long as 1100h-1600h. It needs only two persons and one
day to change the valves components. Four persons and one day are needed to change
the plunger components. Life length of plunger and padding in Huangtai power plant
are as long as 2100h-2700h. Life length of valves components is as long as
1200h-1500h. Life length of plunger components in No.2 fossil-fired power plant in
Taiyuan is as long as 3000h. But generally the plunger-pump shall be overhauled
every three years. 10-15d is needed for each overhaul. So this item stipulates that the
set up standards of the stand-by pumps (plunger-pump) are same as centrifugal pump.
For safety running of the power plant, foundation for one more pump can be
prearranged. This pump will be installed when it is necessary.
9.3.9 It is investigated that most of the big fossil-fired power plant have two or even
more ash and slag pipe for their external water power ash handling system, one of
which is for stand-by. Those power plants that have been investigated all have the
opinion that it is completely ok to have only one pipe for stand-by. It is almost not
possible for production to be affected by ash pipe problem. Some power plants even
consider that the stand-by pipe can be cancelled. Besides, there are more reasons like:
1) When there are three or more running pipes and is fouling (or wearing)
seriously, the No. 2 stand-by pipe can be taken for use. Not only high
investment is necessary, (take DN300 steel pipe as example, about one
million dollars for integrated cost are needed on each km.), but also
increase the complicity of the pipe switch.
2) When fouling or wearing is serious, according to actual situations of these,
some measures can be taken to clear it up. For instance: grind-proof or
fouling-proof pipes can be used for part of the pipes or other chemical or
mechanical measures can be taken for the same purpose.
3) During lifetime of the stand-by pipe (one), there is completely no
problem to fulfill examination and repair work or maintenance work of
other running ash pipes. Practices of most of the power plants certify that
there is no problem to reach this requirement. So this regulation cancelled
the requirement and conditions for setting two stand-by ash and slag pipes.
9.3.11 according to investigation on 300MW of imported type, but locally

manufactured unit, the domestic big fossil-fired plant mostly use water power system
(like water power injector) and mechanical system (like clapper conveyor) to treat the
carpolite-coal . Some other plants make use of accumulator car or take some manual
work clearance. (for instance workers in Pengcheng power plant move the
carpolite-coal with handcart which is also very well) only after comparison on the
conditions technically and economically can final decision be made as to which
means shall be taken. The other mode of transportation mentioned in this item refers
to handcart and manual work clearance etc.
9.4 truck vessel and machinery transportation

9.4.3 Not many domestic big power plant use belt conveyor as their main
transportation system to transport the ash and slag. But Hengshuei and Ezhou power
plants have already set up and Sanhe, Anshun power plants are under construction of
this. Above power plants make single-way conveyor. Only consider the stand-by
capacity. There is no problem to meet the requirement. So this item has set up
principle regulations on design of the conveyor for transportation of ash and slag.
Because the arrangement of belt conveyor is more complicated than that of the pipes,
and it also occupies more spaces, so it is not suitable to set this arrangement through
different times. According to the principle of setting up the coal conveyor, the out put
capacity of ash and slag conveyor shall meet the designed requirement.
Calculation of the out put of the conveyor shall be done as required. And 100%
allowance shall be kept. This is because of consideration of two shifts running. Each
shift will run for 5h-6h. When it is under examination and repair work due to some
error, because there are ash warehouse and slag storehouse with large capacity, it can
be taken as adjusting equipment. If after comparison technically and economically, it
is considered that one shift running is more suitable, then this allowance can be
relevantly increased.
There must be protecting jacket for the ash and slag conveyor. Purpose of this is only
to prevent it from been disturbed by wind and rain. It is not necessary to make it as
big and complicated as the trestle of coal transportation.
9.5 Mode of control, assistant and repair work establishment

9.5.1 With the development of technique and considering the requirement of reducing
number of workers and increasing work efficiency, control for dry ash handling
system in big power plant are presently using sequence control or centralized control,
and its running reliability is high. It is not necessary to set on the sport control unit.
For the convenience of commissioning and accident treatment the necessary on the
sport button shall be kept.
As for the water power ash and slag handling system (including the carpolite-coal
system), according to the conditions of the system and engineering work, on the sport
control or centralized control shall be adopted.
Because of increased control level, all control cabins of the ash and slag handling
system shall be highly consolidated. And in order to reduce running posts, it is
suitable to consolidate with the control cabin of the electro-static dusting catcher.
When it is necessary, workers can carry out temporary on the sport patrol. Some
power plants like Waigaoqiao power plant, its ash and slag control has already entered
into unit control cabin. The purpose of reducing workers and increasing efficiency has
been realized.Whether or not to adopt this mold of control depending on actual
engineering conditions.
10 Turbine equipment and system
10.1 Turbine equipment
10.1.3 Back-pressure type heat-supply unit can run economically under rated load, so
it can be considered to use when stable and reliable thermal load is available.
However, for its energy output is restricted by the heating load, compared with
steam-extraction type heat-supply unit, the allowable electrothermal load range of the
latter is more flexible, and consequently, for the unit to be used in thermal power plant,
the combined system of back-pressure type unit (or back-pressure type unit with
steam-extraction) and steam-extraction type unit can be considered, so as to improve
the safety and economical efficiency of the operation.
10.1.6 The rated back pressure and maximum calculated back pressure of the turbine
is one criteria under rated condition and capacity condition respectively. It is
definitely stipulated that the former shall be in correspondence with the design water
temperature of the circulating water system, and the latter is best to be 11.8kPa.
10.1.7 The turbine maximum continuous rating (TMCR) is the guaranteed rating of
the turbine. When the regulating valve of the turbine is wholly open (VWO), the air
intake shall be 105% of the intake at the time of TMCR, where, the errors during
design and manufacturing process as well as the influence on air consumption with
equipment aging have been taking into account, and appropriate adjustment margin
shall be left.
10.2 Main steam, reheating steam and bypass system

10.2.1 The heat-supply unit bears double tasks of heat supplying and power supplying
with priority given to heat supplying generally, for that, some thermal load must be
ensured. The main steam system adopts header system, in this way, the flexibility of
the operation and dispatching of the boiler and turbine can be increased and the
connection of desuperheating and pressure reducing equipment can be facilitated.
Accordingly, for the plant installed with high-pressure heat-supply units, the adoption
of switchable header pipe system is stressed.
For the plant installed with intermediate reheating condensation type units or
intermediate reheating heat-supply type units, since the unit capacity, the parameters
of the main steam and reheating steam, the control system and etc. are all designed
and manufactured according to unit system, it is definitely stipulated that the main
steam pipeline shall adopt unit system.
10.2.3 The prototypes of home-made 300MW and 600MW introduced units are both
equipped with a 5%BMCR boiler start-up drain bypass; the control logic of the unit
and the program design of DEH are also supporting that. When introducing the
technology, a 30%BMCR second-stage serial turbine bypass is further equipped, and
the DEH program is also revised correspondingly. For the intermediate air valves of
this type of units cannot contribute in adjustment, the turbine bypass will be cut off to
enable the turbine, as a result, in practical operations, the bypass only functions to
promote steam temperature and pressure before the rotation of the turbine as well as
increase boiler combustion rate.
In recent years, under the sponsorship of the State Power, some relevant units have
carried out numerous investigations and tests to the setting and in-service behavior of
the turbine bypass system of home-made 300MW and 600MW introduced unit. In
April 1999, a seminar focusing on bypass system was held, and the opinion of the
specialists is as follows: for the introduced 300MW unit, when the bypass system is
not activated, normal startup is still available, and the influence to the temperature and
pressure rising process of the boiler is insignificant; the 5% start-up drain bypass can
meet the startup requirements of the boiler, however, before the rotation of the turbine,
the smoke temperature at the hearth outlet shall be controlled so as not to exceed
538 (1000). The start-up process of the turbine is in conformity with the start-up
regulation of Westhouse Company. But compared with the situation of bypass
activated, the start-up time of the former is longer: the cold start is about 3-3.5 hours
longer and the hot start is about 0.5-2 hours longer. During cold start process, the inlet
air temperature of the intermediate pressure cylinder is lower, under the rotation speed
of 2040r/min, the time consumed to wait for the inlet air temperature of the
intermediate pressure cylinder to reach 260 for heating the pipes is the major
reason why the cold start process is longer when the bypass system is not activated.
The upstream of the high-pressure major air valve is not sufficiently warmed, the time
necessary to valid the turbine rotation parameters is longer, thus, the cold start and hot
start process of the unit is prolonged. In addition, when the cold boiler is hot started,
the maximum temperature difference between the inlet air of the intermediate pressure
cylinder and the cylinder wall can reach 160.
Through analysis of experiments and comparison of technical economy, the
specialists hold the opinion that the unit can have no bypass system, however, to
shorten the start-up time of the unit without bypass and further improve the stress
state of the rotor, serial drain system (there is currently no such system, a pilot project
is going on in Hunan Yiyang Power Plant) can be equipped in the main steam system
and the reheating steam system, besides, steam exhaust points can be set before the
major air valve.
For the unit having special requirements on peak regulation, bypass can be adopted,
but it shall be simplified under the principle of being practical, reliable and
economical, for example, a one-speed (slow speed), remotely controlled electrical
bypass with appropriate capacity can be employed, and some practical control and
protective equipments necessary for the operation mode can be set.
Presently, of the internal units with large capacity, some have no bypass, some have
bypass of 30%-70%BMCR, and some have 100%BMCR bypass, mainly relating to
the unit characteristics and the power network system requirements. For example,
both the 300MW unit produced by Beijing Heavy Electrical Machinery Plant with
introduced technology and the 300MW unit produced by Oriental Turbine Plant adopt
intermediate pressure cylinder start-up mode, and the capacity and type of the bypass
shall be determined according to actual demands.
10.3 Water supply system and feed pump

10.3.1 For the power plant installed with high-pressure heat-supply unit, to improve
the flexibility and reliability of operation, like the main steam system, the water
supply system shall also adopt switchable header pipe system.
For the plant installed with intermediate reheating condensation type units or
intermediate reheating heat-supply type units, due to its complexity, the water supply
system shall adopt unit system just like the main steam system.
According to the practical experiences from power plants operation in recent years,
when speed adjustable feed pump is used, the main pipe for water supply shall not
install water regulating valve system, while the start-up branch pipe shall have such
valve.
10.3.2 As for drum boiler, the total outlet capacity of the feed pump is based on the
boilers maximum continuous evaporation capacity with the following factors
considered: continuous discharge loss of 1.5-2%, system steam and water leakage loss
of 0.4%, drum water level fluctuation of 2-5%, the rating reduction of 4-5% caused by
pump aging; total of 7.9-12.4%, and generally 10% is chosen, so take 110% of the
boilers maximum continuous evaporation capacity as the total outlet capacity of the
feed pump.
As for concurrent boiler, since there are no requirements on continuous discharge or
drum water level regulation, the feed pumps capacity redundancy can be smaller than
that of drum boiler, and the total outlet capacity of the feed pump can be 105% of the
boilers maximum continuous evaporation capacity.
10.3.4 For the earlier 200MW unit, the internal efficiency of the turbine is generally
low, and is equipped with 200MW electric generator. During technological
transformation, many power plants not only improved the internal efficiency, but also
changed to equip steam feed pump so as to increase the external power supplying
capacity of the unit. For the new unit equipped with 210MW electric generator, this
advantage is no longer existed, which must be differentially treated when comparing
technological economy.
10.3.5 As is investigated, for most of the home-made 300MW units, the configuration
of the operation feed pump is generally of two half-capacity steam feed pumps; there
are also ten units in Shiheng, Shalingzi and other power plants whose feed pump is
one full-capacity steam feed pump. The adoption of full-capacity-operation feed pump
can help to simplify the system and improve the economic efficiency of operation. In
foreign countries, the configuration of full-capacity steam feed pump for units of
300MW or above is already very common, and some mature operation experiences in
the adoption of full-capacity steam feed pump in 300MW unit have been accumulated
at home, so, if allowed by the condition, full-capacity steam feed pump shall be given
priority.
10.3.6 As is investigated, the equivalent availability ratio of the operation feed pump
group for the 300MW unit in 1997 is 91.363%. If running under normal conditions,
the average annual accumulated hrs for each unit when the spare electric feed pump is
in service does not exceed 100h. At the same time, when a steam feed pump is
running together with an electric feed pump in parallel, more than 90% of the rated
load can be maintained. The inconsistency between the power supply and power
demand in our country is gradually alleviated, and the power network capacity is
increased correspondingly, the short-time fall of full output capacity of the unit wont
have big impact on the network dispatching. Compared with the adoption of
50%-capacity electric feed pump, the adoption of 30%-capacity electric feed pump
can lower investment and reduce the load for spare transformer and working
transformer startup for an amount of about 2500KW.
In foreign countries, when the unit of 300KW or above is configured with two
half-capacity steam feed pumps, the capacity of the electric feed pump for spare
startup is generally 25%, and there is a tendency of not mounting any spare pumps. At
home, for the 350MW units of Huaneng (Dalian), Ligang and other ten or so power
plants with complete imported equipments, the capacity configuration of the electric
feed pump is 25-30%. The 300MW unit of Wuting Power Plant is also configured
with a 30%-capacity constant-speed electric feed pump for spare startup.
For 300MW unit, when the configuration of the operation feed pump is a
100%-capacity steam feed pump, once the steam feed pump throw off load, the
electric feed pump needs to go into operation automatically and shall meet certain
load rate, so a 50%-capacity speed adjustable electric feed pump is still necessary to
be configured for spare startup.
As is investigated, at home presently, there are 10 sets of 300MW units, such as in
Zouxian and Wuting, whose feed pumps used for spare startup are constant-speed
electric feed pumps, through setting differential pressure control valve at pump outlet,
the requirements of unit startup and parallel running of steam feed pump and electric
feed pump can be satisfied, however, there are also shortcomings such as not-so-good
adjustment performance, low automatic activation ratio when running with steam feed
pump in parallel, and etc. If is planned to use, specific argumentation shall be carried
out first.
Based on the high operational reliability and the rapid recovery capacity in time of
failure, in foreign countries, a number of 300MW or above large-capacity units are
furnished with full-capacity steam feed pumps, and some do have no electric feed
pumps for spare startup installed. At this time, the unit is started up by the steam feed
pump directly or by a low lift constant-speed electric feed pump with startup function.
As is investigated and reported, Jianbi, Tieling and some other power plants in our
country have the operating experience of frequently starting up unit directly by steam
feed pump and basically not using electric feed pump for spare startup. Therefore, for
the complete imported units, the bidder shall be encouraged to adopt feed pump
configuration scheme that it has mature experiences in. For the home-made 300MW
and 600MW units, the pilot of not mounting any spare feed pumps can be carried out
positively according to the actual conditions.
10.3.7 About the 3X660MW unit imported from France Alston by Shajiao C Plant and
the 300MW gradation unit produced with the imported technology form Alston by
Beijing Heavy Electrical Machinery Plant, the configuration of feed pump is 3X50%
speed adjustable electric feed pumps. For air-cooling unit, since the back pressure of
the turbine is rather high and it varies frequently with the air temperature, if steam
feed pump is adopted and the steam exhaust is connected into the main condenser, the
working condition of the small turbine will change frequently, the adjustment will be
complicated, and the economic efficiency will be lowered, so the 300MW or above
air-cooling units at home and abroad all adopt, without exception, electric feed pump
as operation feed pump. Just on these grounds, the concrete condition for 300MW and
above units to adopt electric feed pumps is stipulated in this article.
10.3.9 According to the reliability of high pressure heater and the operation practice
of power plants, it is definitely pointed out that high pressure heater is best to adopt
large bypass.
10.4 Deaerator and feed tank

10.4.6 For the unit of 300MW or above, feed-activation circulating pump is generally
adopted as the heating mode when the deaerator feed tank is activated. If using reboil
tube to supply heat, the system will be relatively simple, however, water hammer and
vibration will often occur during the operation, so certain measures shall be taken to
prevent that from happening.
10.5 Condensation water system and the equipment

10.5.1 The low pressure heater accident belongs to abnormal phenomenon, and the
emergency drainage shall not be included in the calculation of the maximum
condensation amount, or the necessary capacity of the condensation pump will be
overstated, which is surely uneconomic.
As is calculated, when the capacity of the bypass system is smaller than 37% of the
boilers maximum continuous evaporation capacity, the amount of the steam entering
the condenser from the bypass system will be smaller than the condensation capacity
of the unit under rated condition, thus will not affect the capacity choosing of the
condensation pump; when the capacity of the bypass system is between 37%-75% of
the boilers maximum continuous evaporation capacity, the spare condensation pump
can be enabled to meet the requirement relating to the increase of the condensation
amount; when the capacity of the bypass system is even larger, the capacity of the
condensation pump shall be considered carefully when making choice, so as to ensure
the safety and reliability during the startup and operation process.
10.5.2 For commercial steam extraction type heat-supply unit, it may run under pure
condensation condition or low thermal load condition for a rather long time after
being put into operation, so it is stipulated that three condensation pumps with 110%
of condensation amount under the design thermal load condition or three
condensation pumps with 55% of maximum condensation amount may be furnished
to improve the operation adaptability and economic efficiency of the unit.
If the thermal load of the unit varies largely with different seasons, the condensation
amount under the design thermal load shall be calculated separately, and the biggest
figure shall be adopted.
10.5.3 At present, the condensation desalination facility usually employs medium

pressure system, the corresponding condensation water system usually adopts
one-stage pump, the system is simple and the operation is convenient.
10.5.5 The make up pump enters into operation only when the unit is fed water to
startup; during normal operation, the unit is compensated by negative pressure, so it is
not necessary to setup spares. When the make up tank is located in such a high
position that the compensation requirement of unit startup can be met, the make up
pump may be omitted.
10.7 Industrial water system

10.7.1 The industrial water system includes auxiliary equipments cooling water
system and service water system, where, the cooling of auxiliary equipments include
the cooling of rotary machineries and the cooling of non-rotary machineries, jointly
called as auxiliary equipments cooling water system.
10.7.2 In this article, the use range and condition of open-circulation cooling water
system and closed-circulation cooling water system is defined separately according to
the functional requirements.
Open-circulation cooling water is generally taken from the inlet pipe of condenser
circulating cooling water, after circulation and warming up, it is discharged into the
outlet pipe of circulating cooling water, without causing any additional water
consumption.
When the underground water with sound quality is used as cooling water source for
the condenser of the power plant, the adoption of full-open cooling water system by
the auxiliary equipments can simplify the system and lower the investment; Pingliang,
Yangquan power plants are such examples. According to the concrete engineering
conditions, if found to be reasonable, part of the auxiliary equipments cooling water
can also be made up by directly making use of the circulating water, and then be
discharged into the circulating water system after circulation and warming up.
10.7.3 In some power plants, although the condenser cooling water is not seawater,
the salt content is still too high to be directly used as auxiliary equipments cooling
water, at this time, full-closed desalination cooling system is required.
10.7.4 In this article, the use range and condition of service water system is defined.
Service water is also called sundry-purpose water. The major equipments that need
service water system to provide washing water during overhaul include: air preheater,
electrostatic precipitator, boiler body and etc. Service water is generally discharged on
the spot, and no recycling measure is required.
10.7.5 The heat exchange area of heat exchanger shall be calculated based on the
maximum calculated cooling water temperature. Take two heat exchangers with
exchange area of 65% of the maximum value as example, besides satisfying the pipe
clogging requirements during overhaul period, they can also meet the requirements
that only one for operation and the other for spare in most time of a year and the
operation of the both is only occasional to the extent that the spare one can be
omitted.
10.7.6 According to the experiences from the design and operation of large-capacity
units, in this article, the selection principle of the amount, the capacity and the
pressure head of the open and closed-circulation cooling water booster pump is
defined.
The high-level expansion gear can adopt water tank or pipelines with certain diameter.
If the high-level expansion gear is also used as emergency water supply to the boiler
water circulating pump when power cut, water tank with certain volume shall be
employed.
The make up water to the closed-circulation cooling water system can be taken from
condensation water tank and delivered by condensation water make up pump.
10.7.8 At the place of the closed type water heat exchanger, the closed-side pressure is
required to be higher than the open-side pressure, so as to prevent the open type water
from seeping into the closed type water and destroying the quality of the latter when
the heat exchanger suffers leakage.
10.7.9 When direct air-cooling system is adopted, the steam exhaust of the turbine is
cooled down directly by ambient air in air-cooling condenser, without circulating
cooling water. When indirect air-cooling system is adopted, since the quality of the
circulating water, generally desalinized water, is good, and more importantly, since
the back pressure of the air-cooling unit is high and the maximum temperature of the
circulating cooling water can even reach 60-70, the temperature requirement of the
auxiliary equipments cooling water cannot be met, thus, for air-cooling unit, separate
auxiliary equipments cooling water system is required.
If the power plant possesses air-cooling unit and several regular units at the same time,
since the amount of auxiliary equipments cooling water for air-cooling unit is rather
small when compared with the amount of circulating cooling water for regular units,
the former can be taken from the latter.
10.8 The auxiliary system and equipment for heat-supply unit

10.8.1 Generally, the overhaul of heat network heater can be made during non-heating
seasons; malfunction phenomenon is also not common in heating seasons, even if
occur, leakage of the copper tube of the heater is most probably, which can be
recovered within 8-24h, so, spare heat network heater is not necessary.
10.9 Condenser and its auxiliary facilities
10.9.1 The requirement of taking anti-corrosive measures to the tube plate and tube
end of the copper tube condenser is put forward according to actual demand. When
using seawater as cooling water, titanium tube condenser shall be used.
10.9.2 Air-cooling unit usually adopts desalinized water as circulating cooling water,
thus no scale buildup problems will occur, so rubber ball cleaning system is not
needed.
11 Water treating equipment and system
11.1 Raw water pretreatment
11.1.1 Raw water quality is an important reference for design. In view of the usual
problem of insufficient data or imprecision in engineering design in recent years, it is
specially stipulated that the design institute shall be responsible for the analysis and
validation of the raw water materials that the employer provides. The suggestions that
the design institute put forward for the design and verification of water quality
materials shall be confirmed by the employer first before establishment.
When the normal coagulation and settlement pretreatment or ion exchange
desalination becomes inapplicable for the water quality of the selected water source
due to seasonal deterioration, to ensure safe operation of the unit, alternate water
source may be prepared: to the regular short-time quality deterioration, if allowed by
the condition, a storage tank (reservoir) can be set, so as to avoid taking water during
the deterioration period, thus the pretreatment process can be simplified.
11.1.2 The pretreatment design for the boiler make-up water shall match the water
power engineering and try to avoid repeated setting as best as possible. According to
the water source condition of the power plant, the pretreatment of the boiler make up
water can either be a part of the water supply system of the whole plant or be
separately made as required by actual demand.
In recent years, the problem of water source pollution is relatively common,
especially the organic pollution has already impacted on the safe and economical
operation of the existing water treatment system, and such problems as lower PH
value of the boiler water in the thermodynamic system and ion exchange resin
pollution have come out, thus in this article, some requirements on the organic
removal have been put forward.
11.2 Treatment of boil make-up water

11.2.1 The treatment of boiler make-up water needs to consume chemicals and have
waste water to discharge, so at the time of choosing treating scheme, the related
requirements for environment protection shall be regarded.
Within the applicable scope of this Regulation, the boiler make up water is designed
based on desalinized water, so the related content for softened water is deleted.
11.2.2 Within the applicable scope of this Regulation, the boiler make up water is
designed based on desalinized water.
11.2.3 Revised according to the application scope of this Regulation and the
conclusion made in the special investigation report on boiler make up water rate.
11.2.4 With the development of water treatment technique, the ion exchange
desalinization is no longer the only available way for desalinization. According to the
current domestic conditions, when the dissolved solid in raw water reaches
500-700mg/L, technical economy comparison shall be made to determine whether or
not to employ reverse osmosis or other pre-desalination system; when the dissolved
solid in raw water is more than 700mg/L, reverse osmosis and other pre-desalinization
system can be adopted. This marginal value shall be timely adjusted along with the
price fluctuation of the acids, the alkalis and the membrane module.
11.2.5 The content regarding reverse osmosis and other water treatment methods is
supplemented here. In view of such features as continuous operation and high unit
cost relating to reverse osmosis equipment, the rating design shall be somewhat
different from that of the ion exchanger. However the spare for maintenance is also
not necessary.
The design redundancy of reverse osmosis is better not to go beyond 50%; as for the
mix-bed or the first-stage desalination and mix-bed combined system to be connected
after reverse osmosis pre-desalination, it shall be determined through comprehensive
technical economy comparison according to the concrete materials on water quality.
11.2.6 For condensing power plant, the amount of boiler make up water is relatively
stable. To upgrade the comprehensive control level to the plant, the workshop
responsible for boiler make up water treatment is better to implement double shift
with no person on duty after mid-night. The following points may be considered:
1) The effective volume of the desalination tank shall be able to provide the
amount of make up water necessary for the normal operation of the unit in
double shift.
2) The desalination tank, the inlet header pipe of desalination pump, and the
outlet header pipe of boiler make up water system shall all take shunt mode.
3) The desalination pumps shall be interlocked with each other, besides, the
liquid level signal of the desalination tanks and the operation signal of the
desalination pumps shall be transmitted to the DCS of the unit control room
simultaneously.
11.3 Fine treatment of condensation water

This section is mainly revised according to the conclusion made in the special
investigation report on the fine treatment of condensation water.
11.3.3 Revised according to the Power Construction [1995] No. 420 File and the
approved reference design scheme for 600MW unit.
11.4 The treatment of backwater in production
11.4.1 Both the backwater quantity and quality of thermal consumers in heat-supply
power plant are not stable, thus the treatment mode shall be determined through
comprehensive economic comparison.
11.5 The rectification treatment of condensation water, feed water
and boiler water and vapor sampling to the thermodynamic system

11.5.2 According to the conclusion made in the special investigation report on the fine
treatment of condensation water, the oxygen treatment to the concurrent boiler feed
water is an advanced technology gradually matured in recent years, which can
materially lower the corrosion and scaling rate of the boiler.
11.5.3 The vapor sampling analysis has gradually changed from manpower-focused
towards online instrumentation-focused, and consequently, on-the-spot vapor
controlling laboratory is not necessary. The use of the signal from vapor sampling
analysis on the control of the dispensing system and the condensation waters fine
treatment system can help to avoid repeated instrument setup and provide
convenience for the automation of water quality control.
11.5.4 By coordination with thermal control engineering, with current control

technology level, the individual chemical system can realize centralized control, thus
to reduce labor force consumption while increase efficiency.
11.6 The treatment of circulating cooling water

11.6.2, 11.6.3 The mature circulating water treatment technology is introduced, and
the basic principle for circulating water treatment is put forward combining the
requirements on water saving and environment protection.
Experiences and researches indicate that the suspended matter content in the
circulating cooling water has some adverse effect to the corrosion and scaling of the
copper tubes of the condenser and the auxiliary equipment cooler. The higher
suspended matter content will cause impingement corrosion and affect the dispensing
effect. In addition, the settlement of the suspended matters in the copper tube can
cause deposition corrosion, and it can also settle in cooling tower fillings, thus to
impair cooling efficiency. Therefore, the content regarding the bypath filtration
treatment to the circulating cooling water is supplemented.
11.7 Chemicals warehouse

11.7 The size of the chemicals warehouse is depending upon the consumption of the
product, the conveying distance, the package, the supplying status and the transport
conditions. With the gradual perfection of market economy in our country, the plant
with sufficient supply of chemicals and convenient traffic shall appropriately shorten
the storage period of the chemicals, and 7d around is recommended; for the plant
located at place not so developed with poor traffic, the storage period shall be
generally no less than 15d.
When chemicals are transported by railroad, the size of the warehouse shall be that
the chemicals conveyed by one railway wagon plus the necessary amount for 10 days
operation can be stored.
12 Heat engineering automation
12.1 General regulations
12.1.2 Since the practice that a product can only be produced and marketed after
appraisement will be changed in the future, the requirement to new technology is
accordingly revised as have successful experience instead of verified to be
acceptable.
12.2 Heat engineering automation level

12.2.1 With the development of heat engineering automation technology, the heat
engineering automation level of a power plant is no longer materialized in the
engineering level of a certain system or a certain equipment. A perfect and
comprehensive automation level can only come into being with organic integration of
the control mode, the automatic system configuration, the function, the operation
mechanism, the layout of control rooms, the controllability of main and auxiliary
equipments and etc. in the design.
12.2.2 With the requirements of unit capacity expansion and power network operation,
the relationship between the position and function of a power plant in power network
and the heat engineering automation level of the plant is becoming closer and closer,
and this is also one of the criterions for determining the heat engineering automation
level of the plant.
12.2.3 With the development of computer technology, when the units involved in this
Regulation are monitored by all kinds of decentralized control systems, the service
condition of each unit shall be able to be monitored and adjusted, and the shutdown
and accidents can be treated just in the control room with CRT and keyboard as
monitoring center.
12.2.4 As for 50MW-200MW units, the function shall be simplified appropriately, the
scale shall be limited appropriately, and some differences shall lie between them and
the 300MW or above units.
12.3 Control mode and control room

12.3.3 With the upgrade of control technology level, heat-supply power plant needs
not to have separate heat network control room any more, so as to decrease control
stations as much as possible, reduce labor force consumption and improve efficiency,
and the control can be realized in the unit control room. Separate heat network control
room can only be set when there is special demand.
12.3.4 At present, although most of the auxiliary shops have realized program control,
since the control sites are not centralized, the requirement to operator strength is still
relatively high. Consequently, this article stipulates that the control of the process
systems directly relating to the unit set, such as the control of water circulating pump,
shall be incorporated into the control system of the unit set, so as to make no person
on duty in the shops come true. The control stations of other auxiliary process
systems shall also be incorporated as much as possible (for example, the rectification
control stations inside the main house for the condensation fine treatment, for the
vapor sampling and for the boiler water can be incorporated; the control stations
outside the main house for the boiler make up water, the circulating water, the waste
water treatment and hydrogen supply, the dust removal, ash removal and dreg removal,
and the coal supply can be incorporated into three stations); if allowed by the
condition, the auxiliary shop (such as oil pump room, hydrogen supply station,
sewage treatment station and etc.) can be designed based on the situation that no
person is on duty.
12.3.5 With the upgrade of control level, presently, the incorporation of air-cooling
system control of all kinds of air-cooling units into the control system of the unit set
and to be controlled in unit control room is already realizable.
12.4 Heat engineering detection

12.4.2 When centralized monitoring of the boiler, the equipment and the electricity of
the unit set is realized by decentralized control systems, these three parts shall be
incorporated with each other during the design, thus, the detection of the parameters
and status regarding the electric system and the equipments is also one indispensable
part of unit set detection.
12.4.3 For the boiler of 410t/h or above, the flame monitoring industrial television has
become a necessary facility for hearth flame monitoring, and the application effect is
rather satisfactory.
The turbine vibration and fault diagnosis system and the boiler tube leak detection
system have been used on many units, and the fault alarm function is remarkable, so
long as used properly, they can contribute to avoid heavy economic losses and gain
certain economic benefits, so they shall be installed on units of 300MW and above.
12.4.4 With the development of computer technology, the temperature spots

monitored by small cyclic detectors in the past can now be controlled by decentralized
control system through remote I/O, in this way, not only the quantity of instruments
on the backup panel is reduced, but also the accuracy of the detection data and the
operation level are improved, besides, large quantity of cable is saved, therefore, it is
a recommendable mode.
12.4.5 In this article, the corresponding explosion-proof level of the measuring

instruments for flammable media is stressed, and during the design, attention shall be
paid to the choosing of proper instruments.
12.5 Heat engineering alarm

12.5.4 The phantom alarm signals during the startup and shutdown process of the unit
shall be curbed, so as to improve the alarm accuracy and reduce the false alarms;
during the design, necessary logic circuits shall be used to realize this function.
12.6 Heat engineering protection

12.6.1 With the development of control technology and the adoption of advanced
computer technology in control equipments, more requirements on the design of heat
engineering protection have been put forward, such as, accidental operation and
missing operation protection measures, independence principle, directly connecting
the stop button and blowing out button into the activation circuit, priority principle,
and etc., all of which shall be sufficiently considered in the design.
12.6.3 When the unit set has no FCB function, the step out of electric generator
caused by any reason once occurs, the operation of the unit wont be maintained any
more. This is because that the installed gross capacity of each power network at
present has been left with redundancy, and consequently, the design clew of heat
engineering protection shall also change from power generation maintaining as
priority to equipment safety guarding as priority.
12.8 Heat engineering analog control

12.8.1 In response to the automatic generation control (AGC) requirements to the unit
set by power network, each unit set is required to have the function of participating in
first and secondary frequency modulation.
To improve the reliability of the analog control system, there shall be control
measures designed that can coordinate with the related interlocking protection under
abnormal working conditions or when accidents occur.
12.8.4 With the adoption of decentralized control system, the detection, control,
protection and other information can be shared, and separate transmitter is not
necessary, however, the important heat engineering analog control item shall be set in
twofold (or in threefold) to further improve the reliability of the control system while
have no big influence on the investment.
12.9 Decentralized control system

12.9.4 In this article, the design principle of the monitoring center composed of CRT
and keyboard is described, and the setting of the backup monitoring equipment is
included.
About the issue of whether or not to mount large-screen display in the unit control
room, through investigation and analysis of pilot projects, large-screen display is
found to be somewhat helpful to operators, however, if taking such factors as lifetime,
price, immature technology into account, it is not the proper time to popularize it in
thermal power plants currently, and it shall still be in pilot stage, so it is not covered in
the main body of this Regulation.
12.10 Factory-level monitoring and management information system

12.10.2 Automatic generation control (AGC) is an essential and important function of
modern power network control; it is of closed-loop control established between the
automatic management system for power network dispatching and the coordinated
control system for the unit. The implementation of automatic generation control can,
besides providing high-quality electric energy, realize real-time balance between the
power supply and power demand, improve the economic efficiency of the network
operation, and lower the labor intensity of the dispatching and operation staff. With
the gradual expansion of automatic generation control work in the power network of
our country and the widespread use of decentralized control system in thermal power
plants, it is necessary to add interface requirements between automatic generation
control and decentralized control system into this Regulation.
Through special topic investigation and research, it is recommended that hardwire
(cable) mode be adopted for the transmission of automatic generation control
command.
12.10.4 At present, with the rapid development of computer technology, most of the
newly-built units in thermal power plants have already adopted decentralized control
system, and integral and comprehensive monitoring center has been established. To
upgrade the whole plants management and real-time monitoring level, and to
construct large-scale thermal power plants in our country into new-type plants with
modern management level, some plants are further establishing their own
factory-level monitoring system and management information system, although there
is no mature experience available for the establishment of the system, starting from a
forward looking at technical development, it is necessarily covered in this Regulation.
There are several choices for the step-by-step implementation, for example:
1. Implemented in full as capital construction project, but can appropriately lag

behind the unit in the time of putting into operation.
2. Only as a comprehensive planning during the construction, and the necessary
interfaces and extension conditions be left.
12.13 Crew training emulator (CTE)

12.13.1 In the past, 300MW unit is allocated based on province, 600MW unit is
allocated based on parentzone, and both are unitedly planned by power network
company and provincial power company. With the separation of network and plant, it
shall be decided by independent power generation company, but the regional
cooperation spirit shall not change. For the units of 300MW or below, most of the
provinces have been allocated with CTE, some even have two sets or more, so in
principle, no new ones shall be mounted; for the units of 600MW or above, whether
or not to install CTE can be determined upon the local cooperation conditions, if there
is CTE available in the zone, no new ones shall be mounted in principle.
13 Electrical Equipment and Systems
13.1. Generator and main transformer
13.1.2 This clause makes specific regulations on the several technical requirements
for the generators with the capacity of or above 300MW.
1. Considering that the maximum air in-taking volume working condition
of steam turbine is the allowance kept by the manufacturing plant to
make up the deviation in the process and the aging of the steam turbine,
i.e., when steam turbine is not applicable for long time continuous use
in such a case, this clause provides that under condition of rated power
factor and rated hydrogen pressure, the maximum continuous capacity
of the generator shall match the maximum continuous power
contribution of a steam turbine.
Besides, in order to select the rated and maximum continuous capacity
of the generator in a more rational way, when conforming to the clause
concerning the definition on the power contribution under different
conditions under <Guidance for Technical Negotiation for Import of
Large Capacity Thermal Power Equipment and Technology>, it
provides that The temperature of in- taking water of cooling facility
in the generator shall correspond with that of the cooling water of a
steam turbine under similar power contribution conditions.
2. This clause is made in order to prevent the non circled, negative
sequence sub amount or unbalanced load from the break down current
from exciting the working frequency and two folds working frequency
to resonant from an interaction between the electrical part and the
mechanical part, which will cause damage to the machine.
3. The impact on the oscillation of axial system of the generating unit of a
large steam turbine caused by system disturbance is one of the serious
problems that concern the coordination between the power network
and the large units. It also concerns the inter active function between
the transient state of power system & electro magnetism and transient
state of power system- a comprehensive subject for research. Because
it is only a starting point in our country, there is not yet any condition
for any regulation or standard. This clause can only make following
regulations according to the prevailing standards and on the
preliminary results of the projects, on which the research have begun
( such as Oingyu Power Plant, Har Bin Third Power Plant, Beilun Port
Power Plant and Shi Donkou Second Power Plant, etc.)
1), CIGRE 11.01 The working groups suggestion concerning the
axial oscillation stress design guiding rule that planned
operation( p<0.5P.U) and the normally paratactic ( brake
closing angle <10O, ) working conditions shall not affect the
fatigue life loss of the axial system shall be referred to by each
project during the research and study.
2) According to < Technical Requirements for Turbine Type Parallel
Synchronized Electrical Machinery>, it makes the regulation that
the hardness of the structure of each part of the steam turbine
unit shall bear any sudden short circuit at its end at the rated load
and at the rated voltage of 105 % :
3) In order to enhance the power transmission ability of high voltage
lines and the operational reliability, the power networks in our
country normally adopt single phase double shut brakes.
Therefore it regulates: steam turbine unit shall be able to bear
the single phase double shut brakes of high voltage line breakers
(successful or not). Because of the randomness of the break down
time and the time dispersion between the time of accident
removal and the interval time of the double shut brakes, different
combination brings uncertain impacts on the axial system
oscillation, so an independent appraisal is necessary for the data
of the structure of the unit and the network structure conditions;
4) For those heavily disturbed working conditions(such as three
phase double shut brake -, non same period parataxis, breaking
step vibration and sub synchronized harmonic oscillation , etc),
which have impacts on the appraisal of the unit axial oscillation
each project can work out precautions measures together with the
manufacturing plant by considering the conditions of the
network and unit structure after simulation calculation or
dynamic model test is made.
4. The relevant in coming phase peak adjustment and temporary
excitation-loss asynchronous operating capability, indispensable for
any large capacity generator, all rely on the operational condition of
the power system. If there is not yet any specific requirement,
following considerations can be taken according to regulations in <
Technical Requirements for Turbine Type Synchronous Electrical
Equipment> and <Guide for Technical Negotiation for the Import of
Large Capacity Thermal Power Generator and the Technology>:
1) The operation of in coming phase: generators shall be able to run
with rated load under the condition that power factor ( cos ) is
0.95 ahead.
2) Peak adjustment operation: ensure that peak adjustment units can
start and stop at not less than 10000 times without deformation or
damage within its life time span.
3) Lost excitation asynchronous operation: the allowed operational
way, the time and load shall be negotiated and decided with the
manufacturing plant.
5 This clause makes a regulation on application range of self shunt
wound excitation and static excitation system.
In view of: 1) self excitation system possesses a more reliable
operational feature compared to alternate excitation system in
terms of less maintenance, improved stability of the unit and the
possibility to avoid any impacts on axial vibration caused by
system disturbances and improved static and dynamic stability of
the power system. But the problems do exist, for example, the
accident happening in a nearby place will cause the drop of voltage
pressure at the unit end, bringing problems to the temporary
stability and relay protection and their coordination. 2) the impacts
on the temporary stability of the system will affect the position of
the power plant in the system, on network structure, load special
features, break-down style, the time for ridding the break-down and
top value voltage multiples and climbing speed and control rules
for excitation system when the unit is swinging after the trouble is
ridded of. Right now it is difficult to ascertain the stability
conditions for self excitation system; 3) there are several domestic
thermo power plants that have used self excitation system (like
Dagang Thermo Power Plant, Beilun Port Thermo Power Plant,
Shajioa B Thermo Power Plant, Shi Dongkou 2nd Thermo Power
Plant, Shangan Thermo Power Plant and Chou County Thermo
Power Plant, etc.), but all of their units are imported. The
domestically developed self shunt wound static excitation system is
still in the stage of industrial experiment. Therefore, concrete work
on the selection of excitation systems shall be made on the
consideration of system stability and the mature matching
technology of the plant and on the comparison of technical and
economic factors.
According to regulations from Technical Conditions of Large
Steam Turbine Generator for self combined excitation and static
excitation system, we put forward the requirements for model
selection on the peak value multiples (calculated on condition that
voltage is at the end of the generating unit at the rated value), two
folds of it or more than two folds will be the condition for
selection.
When circumstances allow, animal test can be made on the impacts
caused by the selected model of excitation system on the temporary
stability of power system, in order to validate the result of emulated
calculation.
13.1.3 Considering the fact that three phase transformer connected to 600MW unit has
the advantage of cost saving, low consumption in empty-load run, a light total weight
and little consumption of non ferrous metals, when transport allows and when factors
of technology and economy are rational, it can be selected and adopted. But all
materials must be proved mature products.
The liaison transformer used to connect the power generating plant with the system of
thermo power plants can be single or three phase self coupling transformers according
to transport, manufacturing and technical conditions.
Because if a single phase transformer unit wants to have a reserved phase, the
investment is very big but with low utilization ratio, the decision as to whether or not
to install it shall consider system requirement, equipment quality, and the balanced
relationship between the initial investment and the loss of cost caused by power-off
due to transformer malfunction, etc. If it is really needed, assemble a reserved single
phase transformer with 3-4 units of same capacity, same transformer ratio and same
impedance in the same power plant or in the same region ( if transport allows).
13.1.4 According to the regulation by the Ministry of Power, in future, the Co-
Generation production project shall be based on the principle of Fixing Electricity
on Heat Supply, the thermo power generating units running in the combined
networks shall adhere to the principle of self generating and self consuming to have a
strict restraint on the on- grid electricity supply volume. Therefore, the thermo power
generating units with the capacity of or below 60 MW shall have power supply
mainly from generator voltage.
In order to guarantee a reliable power supply, this clause stipulates that the main
transformers connected to the voltage omnibus of the generator shall not be less than
two sets and the selection of the total capacity shall be based on the gradual load
expansion in the next five years.
13.1.5 National Standard< Power Transformer> regulates that : Under normal

application conditions, ( with sea level not higher than 1000m, the highest
temperature: +40oc and the lowest temperature: 25oc, the average temperature in the
hottest month: +30oc, the average temperature in the hottest year:+20oc, the highest
temperature for cooling water: +25oc),the winding average temperature rise of oil
immersed transformer (with mineral oil or composite isolation liquid as cooling agent
with ignition point not higher than 300 oc )is 65oc at the stable state of continuous
rated capacity (measured by resistance method). Therefore there is a regulation on the
selection conditions of the capacity for the generating unit with the capacity of or
above 200MW with connection to the main transformer.
Deducting the calculated load of the working transformer used by the plant means
the load calculation of electricity consumption of the plant specified by the principle
and methods guiding the calculation of electricity consumption rate.
The temperature rise of the winding transformer means under normal application
conditions, the guaranteed value of the manufacturing plant, and the limit in readings
in temperature rising under special conditions shall be revised according to
regulations in <Power Transformer>.
13.1.7 Due to the many problems with the generator - 3 winding transformer formula
of 200MW unit, if the installation of a generator breaker reduces the reliability of the
main loop operation, it is necessary for the main transformer or the transformer used
by high voltage plant to use voltage adjustment with load. It increased short circuit
level in the medium pressure end and the SF6 generator breaker made in China is
being developed in our country. Besides, liaison transformer formula is better than
that of three winding transformer and can better adapt to the change in load and the
development trend. Therefore it regulates that: It is not proper for units with
capacity of or above 200 MW to use three winding transformer. But when technical
and economic conditions permit, a generator three winding transformer units as a
connection mode can be used.
13.2 Main Electricity Connection

13.2.2 For the power generating plant connected to power generating systems, if the
capacity of the unit is small, it does not match the power system. This means, the
single unit capacity is only 1% - 2% or smaller than the system capacity, while the
level of rising voltage is rather high, like when a 50MW unit is connected to a 220kV
system, or a 100MW unit is connected to a 330kV system, or a 200 MW unit is
connected to a 500 kV system. In order to simplify the system connection formula and
high voltage switchgear connections, after technical comparison, extension of unit
connection or combined unit connection can be adopted.
13.2.5 The selection of formula of generator-transformer-line unit connection has a

comprehensive problem concerning the relationship between plant and networks. It
not only relies on the requirement for system connection, but on many factors such as
the general layout of the power plant, main electrical connecting lines, the guiding
line that starts up the power sources, the dirtiness grade and the control method, etc.
Therefore, the decision on the connection formula must take into account the different
requirements from both the plant and the power networks, to enable a rational
connection formula between the plant and the system.
13.2.6 The lightening arrester of 330kV- 500 kV is mainly used to protect atmosphere
overvoltage. Besides, it helps to put a limit on operational overvoltagei.e. After the
corresponding loop starts operation, it cannot quit the operation any more. So it
regulates that no isolation switch shall be installed. Besides, overhauling and
experiment with 110kV- 500kV voltage inductor, coupling capacitor or capacitor
typed voltage inductor can be carried out in coordination with the corresponding loop
or can be carried out with electrification. Therefore it regulates: it is not suitable to
install isolation switches.
13.2.7 This clause refers to SDJZ < Technical Rules for the Design of Transformer
Substations>, where there are regulations concerning connecting principles for shunt
wound reactors and low voltage shunt wound reactors.
The main function of 330kV -500kV shunt wound reactors is to limit the rated
working overvoltage and undercurrent. Especially in the preliminary stage of the
power network construction it cannot retreat. Hence it is not advisable to install
breakers or load switches at the outlet. If the system is running under certain
operational modes, if after the shunt wound reactor exits from the operation, the
overvoltage level remains at the permitted range or its function can only be phase
adjustment or voltage adjustment, its outlet can be equipped with a breaker or a load
switch.
13.2.8 The necessity to install a breaker or load switch in the outlet of the generator
with the capacity of 600MW relates to many factors. As far as the technology is
concerned, to install a breaker or a load switch at the outlet of the generator can avoid
the switch between working power source and startup power source used by high
voltage plant when the unit is doing its normal starting up or halting. It can also avoid
the extension of the fault inside the main transformers or working transformers for
high voltage plant purpose. (if the sub system adopts switches of rotor loop without
wipe out excitation or wipe-out excitation system with resistance). It can reduce the
influence on the rotor caused by extra large negative sequence current produced by
non full phase movement of the breaker at the side of high voltage in the main
generator and can have the unit stop at malfunction (with machine kiln) without
causing the power off of the entire plant. But the installation of a breaker or load
switch can reduce the operational reliability of the main loop. It is difficult to make
qualitative or quantitative evaluation in term of availability ratio of the unit. Moreover,
installing a breaker or a load switch and the comprehensive economic comparison
involve many other factors, such as the grade of rising voltage, the main connecting
method of the electrical equipment, the start-up/reserve power source connection
solution, the fee charging after the separation from the grids like basic fee and electric
power charges, the type and the number of sets of the transformer for high voltage
plants, the formula of power supply at shared load, configuration standard for
transformers of high voltage plant, connection method of high voltage side of
start-up/reserve transformer and terms and conditions for the manufacturing and
supply of breakers or load switches for the generator, etc. Therefore it is difficult to
make a general rule for a suitable and applicable economic condition. Thus, each
project can make its own decision as to whether or not to install a breaker or load
switch for the generator according its own situation and at the summary of above
factor as well as upon the economic and technical comparison.
When the 600MW unit adopts the connection method of 220vK- transformer-line
group or generator unit, and when the technological and economic factors are rational,
it is advisable to use a formula- making tandem connection of the high tension end of
the main transformer with two sets of breakers and sub- connecting them with a
working transformer of high voltage plant.
For the formula of 600MW generator with a breaker or a load switch at the outlet,
there are advantages and disadvantages with the case when main transformers or the
working transformer used by high voltage plant adopt voltage adjustment with load,
and both ways have gained working experiences from the power plants in operation.
Each project shall have an overall consideration of the demand for the way and range
of voltage adjustment, the reliability of operation, manufacturing and economic
conditions posed by the level of omnibus voltage used by high voltage plant when
power system and units start up or stop in a normal way.
13.2.11 Because of the following factors: The improvement of the quality with
domestic made SF6 breaker and isolation switch, the ease- up of the contradictions
between supply and demand, the relative increase in reserve capacity for the system,
the fact that the structure of grids tends to be rational and closely linked, the double
ensured safety measures and the gradual transition of the overhauling from planned
overhauling to status overhauling as well as the fact that in order to simplify wiring
process, the general trend is to phase out bypass facilities, it regulates: when the
breaker is SF6 type, 110-kV-220kV switch gear with single omnibus line or double
omnibus line does not need bypass facilities.
13.2.12 According to the principle to guarantee the stability of the power system and a
reliable district power supply, referring to the following rules for reliability home and
abroad, a regulation is given for the line section division of the omnibus of 220kV
switchgear used by 300MW unit project. 220kV switchgear uses double omnibus line
connection.
1 When a line- in or line- out breaker is out of order or refuses to function,
one or several circles of lines of 2 units can be cut off.
2 When the sectional or connecting breaker of one omnibus is out of
order, it is advisable to cut off one or two circles of lines of a unit (if the
stability of the system allows).
13.2.13 It regulates that if one and half set of breaker connect with three or more
than three stringsallow same named loop to be connected to the omnibus on the same
side, but there shall be no isolation switch on in coming and out going lines. This is
due to:
1 Same named loop is connected to different side line omnibus line, which
will increase the space of the switchgear, making structure and introduction
line complicated and increasing the areas. Also, when making overhauling
on the breaker in the middle of the string, it is impossible for the same
named loop to end at the same time by the poor probation caused by the
connection of the breaker in the omnibus line end.
2 If one and half set of breaker connect more than three strings
Even if there is no isolation switch on the in coming and out going line, it
will not cause switchgear to run in open circle due to the overhauling of the
loop.
13.3 Auxiliary Power System

13.3.1 The voltage grade of 600MW units used by engineering high voltage plant
adopts one grade- 6kV or two grades- 10kV and 3 kV. Both have its advantages and
disadvantages and both have had the operational experience by the power plants that
have gone into operation. All engineering projects can make technical and economic
comparison on the calculated load of electricity consumption, power on and off
equipment data and the maximum electrical unit capacity before reaching final
conclusion.
In order to improve the reliability of electricity supply of the power grids and to
improve the quality of electricity supply for the lighting networks of the main power
building and to extend the life of the lighting facilities, it is regulatedpower driven
facilities and lighting are separated when electricity is supplied in low voltage plant of
power supply system of the power plant with units of the capacity of or above
200MW.
13.3.2 According to regulations in GB14258 <Technical Requirements for relay

protection and Safety Automatic Equipment>: when single phase grounding
current is above 10A, the protection devices can act on the trip or on the signal. And
it refers to the regulation for power industry standard DL/T620 in Overvoltage
Protection and Insulation Coordination for Alternating Current Equipment, where it
stipulates: The system design for high resistance grounding system shall conform to
the rule: R0 Xoo to restrict the instantaneous overvoltage stemming from the accident
caused by electric arch grounding. The normally used grounding malfunction current
is below 10A. In order to obtain adequate current for fast relay protection low
resistance grounding system, the grounding malfunction current is from 100A
-1000A. In terms of high voltage neutral point grounding, in order to satisfy the
requirement that the transient overvoltage shall not exceed 2.5-2.6 times of rated
phase voltage when intermittent electric arch grounding has malfunction, the allowed
grounding capacitance current shall be 10 A / 2= 7A. This clause makes regulations
accordingly. The different grounding methods used by domestic plants have mature
operational experiences, but the grounding capacitance current shall be below 10A.
When it is above 10 A, there is rarely any experience for non grounding ways. For
non grounding ways, domestic tests on the multiples of voltage with single phase
intermittent electric arch grounding show that it is normally threefold, for individual
cases it may be three and half folds. From the sample test on the neutral point non
grounding electricity consumption by high voltage plant of a power plant, three times
of the test was intermittent short circuit in the 37 single phase grounding accidents. It
signifies that majority of power plants can bear such level of overvoltage in their
electricity consumption. That is why it is regulated non grounding method can be
used.
13.3.3 This clause only regulates that electricity consumption system in low voltage
plant in the main power building shall apply to high resistance grounding method.
In terms of auxiliary plants, in order to facilitate lighting and overhauling the overload
in electricity supply, because the requirement for reliability for the electricity supply
is not that rigid compared to the main power plant, there is no regulation for the
neutral point grounding method.
13.3.4 The purpose of the regulation is to ensure safe operation of the electricity
supply system in the plant
The load for the areas in front of the plant such as production office building in the
close neighborhood of a main power plant, the dormitory for people on duty and the
eatery can adopt transformer supply from special low voltage electricity supply
directly connected to high voltage plant electricity supply, but the load from
household dormitory and other living facilities shall not be connected to plant
electricity supply system.
13.3.7 From investigation to some of the power plants, when the units are under
normal operation, the actual load consumed by the plant is 60%-70% of the rated
capacity of transformers used by high voltage plant. Therefore, Bottom line
principle makes regulation on transformer volume selection of high voltage plant.
13.3.9 The Above mentioned Load grade 1 signifies the load bringing impacts by the
temporary power cut brings upon human body or the safety of the equipment, whereas
causing production break down or the dramatic drop of electricity generation, such as
in water pump, in condenser pump, in wind sending off or drawing in machines. Load
Grade 2 signifies the allowed temporary power-off, but long time power-off may
bring damage to equipment or affect the normal operation, such as coal transport
facility, industrial water pump and letting out water pump etc; Load grade 3 signifies
the load that is caused by long time power-off, which will not affect the production,
such as electricity supply equipment in a lab and central overhauling station.
13.3.10 in the designing of a formula for starting or reserving a power collecting or

connecting to a power plant, all reliable and rather independent requisitions must be
met, moreover, following factors must be considered: with the reform in electricity
system being deepened, in order to carter to market economy, the relation between
power networks and other connecting systems will gradually follow the principle
Separation of plant and grid and getting on the grid by competitive price, i.e.,
Basic electricity fees and kilowatt hour fee will be charged on the power source for
startup/reserve that is connected to district grids as large industrial end users.
According to a preliminary survey, the charging standard for electricity in each power
bureau is not identical, the rough electricity fee ranges from (19-15) Yuan/
(kVA .Month), the kilowatt hour fee is 0.7 Yuan/kilowatt. It will sure affect the power
operation expense, power generated cost and grid connection fee of a power plan and
affect the economy of the operation. Therefore, each project shall obtain the
agreement for electricity supply or purchase in the plant in the stage of feasibility
study. According to the agreement, they can fix electrical main connecting lines and
starting / reserving power resource in a reasonable way in terms of technology and
economy.
13.3.11 for the power generated units of 600MW capacity with breaker or load
switches in the outlet, the reserved transformer in high voltage plant is reserved for
the break down time from an accident or for the overhauling of the transformer. So it
is stipulated explicitly that the capacity of the reserved transformer can be chosen
according to 60%-70%of a working transformer capacity
13.3.12 Presently, in 200 MW 300 MW unit project, the electricity sources of high
voltage plant can be gradeified into two categories: split winding and double winding
transformer. According to a survey, although the operational reliability of double
winding transformer is better than that of split winding transformer, both have the
problem of poor ability against traversing short circuit. The reason of the problem
mainly stems from the fact that manufacturing quality is poor and it has to do with the
quality of low voltage side 6kV switch cabinet, the inspecting standard for the short
circuit and the thermal stability of the transformer of the plant. It also has to do with
the accumulated effects from multi time short circuit and loss of pressure causing the
shock and the type of excitation of the generator, etc. In recent years, the operational
function has been improved due to the science and technology breakthroughs,
improvement and perfection. Considering both types of transformers can satisfy the
reliability in electricity supply for the two sets of auxiliary units and can reduce the
feed back short circuit current value of the electrical equipment in between the two
omnibuses. If it can satisfy voltage adjustment and self starting voltage level, splitting
transformer will be good enough to restrict short circuit current value in the power
system of 6kV plant. And splitting transformer is better than double winding
transformer in terms of preliminary - stage cost saving and can be more easily
arranged. Hence we recommend one set of split winding transformer as a solution.
When 600MW unit adopts two voltage grades used by high voltage plants, in order to
satisfy the requirement of reliability for electricity supply by double sleeve auxiliary
electrical machine, it is better to adopt two sets of 3 winding transformers to supply
plant purposed voltage by way of connecting two sections of omnibuses. When
600MW unit adopts a voltage grade used by high voltage plant, it is better to use two
sets of splitting (or two sets of double winding) transformers, to satisfy the connection
formula of the omnibuses for four sectioned high voltage plant; when the rated open
circuit from breaker equipment of high voltage plant or the rated current from the
line-in breaker line can meet the demand, it is advisable to use one set of split
transformer to satisfy the two sectioned omnibus line connection formula from a high
voltage plant.
13.3.13 For 600MW unit, when the outlet of the generator is not equipped with a
breaker or a load switch, two sets of units can have two sets of start-off/ reserve
transformers for a high voltage plant. Such is suitable for line connection formula for
working transformers used in high voltage plant with each unit equipped with two sets
of transformers. When each unit is equipped with one set of working transformer for a
high voltage plant, the arrangement of start-off/ reserve transformers for high voltage
plant can consider the operational reliability of the transformer used in the public load
power supply method of high voltage plant, etc. All shall be decided upon the
comparison of technical and economic factors.
The regulation is made for the configuration of the transformer reserved for high
voltage plant after taking the following factors into account:
The reserved power source used by 600 MW unit of a high voltage plant, the outlet of
which will be equipped with a breaker or a load switch, is only a reserved power
source to be used for down time and reserved for overhauling of the transformers of
the high voltage plant.
13.3.14 The start up/reserved transformers high tension end line connection of
300MW 600 MW units in a high voltage plant has to do with the selection of the
model, the public load and the connecting method of its reserved power source as well
as the yearly utilization co efficiency loss stemming from the break down rate of start
up/ reserved power lines and the breakers. For this, the clause makes relevant
regulations accordingly.
The power supply of public load is provided by two sets of start up/ mutually reserved
transformers, as is described in the first sentence, includes the following: the two sets
of public shared start up/ reserved transformers in high voltage plant serve as mutual
reserve for each other and the connection formula for the start up/reserved
transformers used by high voltage plant as a working as well as a reserved power
source shared by public.
13.3.15 For the unit with the capacity of or below 125 MW, the setup standard for the
second reserved transformer by a low voltage plant shall be appropriately raised.
13.3.22 the design and operation since 1980s show that the application of the
assembled equipment of a vacuum breaker and a high tension protective fuse string
with a vacuum contactor is of great significance for the oiless operation, the improved
operational reliability and reduced maintenance work load. It also is suitable for
frequent use, helps to reduce investment and save the floor space. According to
investigations:
1 More than 80% of the 3kV-10kV power systems of thermo power plants have
begun using it. 40%-70% of the plants use the method- a high tension protective
fuse string with a vacuum contactor loop.
2 There are problems with the operation in some of the plants such as poor
combustion resistance feature of the insulator in the cabinet, limited or narrow
space between electrical equipment, poor interchangeability and poor reliability
in Five preventions. The plants shall make more improvements in material
selection, processing technology and structure. Therefore, the designing
institute shall pay more attention to the performance of the products. But the
operating units have the affirmative appraisal to these effects.
3 The operational reliability of a vacuum breaker is equal to that of a high
tension protective fuse stringing with a vacuum contactor loop.
Therefore, for the high voltage plant with the unit capacity of or above 200MW, it is
advisable to use the integrated method -a vacuum breaker and a high tension
protective fuse string with a vacuum contactor.
For the unit with capacity of or below 125MW, in order to save as much as possible
the investment provided the thermo power plant is running safely, this clause still
recommends less oily breaker. But for the electricity loop of the high voltage plants
that have frequent start up and stop, in order to reduce maintenance work load and
break- down of the equipment, it is recommended that they use the assembly of a
vacuum breaker and a high tension protective fuse string with a vacuum contactor.
13.5 High Voltage Switchgear

13.5.2 This Clause stipulates the selection principles for 110kV 500kV total closed
circuit electrical unit assembly in the heavily air polluted areas. Except the technical
and economic demonstration, which is a must, it shall also take into account the wet
feature, equivalence covering salt density from both the operational experience and
the real time tests and the grade of dirtiness, so that a strict constraint is exerted on the
applicable conditions.
13.7 Electricity Measuring Instrument

13.7.2 For the presently widely used alternating current sampling instrument, digital
controlled, it stipulates the requirements for the test precision.
13.8 Secondary Wiring

13.8.1 Following are the notes on the conditions:
1 In order to raise automation level, it is recommended that units of 125MW
capacity adopt unit control allowance style;
2 In order to lower the cost and simplify the operation, on the basis of the
operational experience of the many power plants, electrical network control
allowance is not recommended.
13.8.2 Following are the regulations for this clause:

1 For the electrical equipment in unit control allowance, DCS control is
recommended;
2 Because power network control allowance is not recommended, computer
control monitoring and control system is recommended for the part for the
power network;
3 For the units of medium and small capacity that are using main control style,
regular strong electricity control method shall be maintained.
13.8.7 When the electrical equipment adopts DCS control method, the regular
operational method to manually run electrical equipment by shall be discarded totally.
The regular manual para-homochronous operational method cannot be realized, and
the utilization factor for present automatic para-homochronous has reached or
surpassed DCS level. Therefore, the regular manual para-homochronous operational
way can be discarded. Only when there is limit in the operational conditions, or there
is a strong demand for it, the manual para-homochronous instrument can be added.
13.8.13 Principal regulations are given for only the part of electrical equipment
entering DCS control style. For more detailed information, please refer to Technical
Requirements for Secondary Wiring Design for Thermal Power Plants or Transformer
Substations.
13.8.14 Regulations are made for the structure of network monitoring and control
computer system.
13.9 Lighting System

13.9.2 According to the operational experiences of the thermo power plant with the
generators of 125MW or below the capacity, this clause stipulates that the normal
lighting system shall adopt dynamic or shared grid methods usually applied in low
voltage plant that supplies electricity by transformers. If the electricity system in the
low voltage plant adopts non grounding system in the neutral pointthe power supply
and lighting networks shall be separated.
In order to improve the reliability of electricity supply in low voltage power networks
of the power supply plant with the generator of the capacity of or above 200MW , and
to ensure the quality of power supply for lighting system, it stipulates that the normal
lighting supply shall employ the formula of power supply by a special lighting
transformer.
13.9.3 According to regulations in Safe Voltage at international standard: When the

electrical equipment adopts a safe voltage of over 24 V, it must take protective
measures to avoid a direct contact with the body that carries electricity. Therefore
this clause regulates that lighting facilities below 2.2 m, a safe height, can be installed
inside the plant and the safe voltage used for the lighting facilities in cable tunnel
shall be 24 V.
13.9.5 In order to ensure safe operation in the power plant and to prevent the harms
possibly done to water taking or drainage let outs or buildings like docks by ships,
this clause makes corresponding regulations.
13.10 Cable Selection and Laying

13.10.3 Considering the fact that the units with the generators of 300 MW or above
the capacity are all backbone units for electricity grids, in order to improve the safety
of the operation, this clause not only puts forward effective fire proof or fire block
measures, but also provides How to select anti- ignition cable for the main plant, coal
transport, oil burning oil and other places that are vulnerable to inflammation or
explosion. It regulates that Grade C Cable of anti ignition shall be used that can meet
the demand in < Inflammation Trail Conditions for Cables in bundles on the principle
that there is a balance between the increased preliminary investment and the probation
of cable fire disaster that brings the financial loss.
13.10.4 Provided that after a fire breaks out, the important load loops (such as fire
fighting, alarming system, emergency lighting, safety load, breaker that operates
direct current, computer monitoring and control, double safety protection, central
water pump plant and coal transport systems, etc.) must keep power supply for a
certain time duration to prevent the fire from evolving into a whole plant incident, this
clause regulates that fire proof partition shall be employed or cables shall be laid in
at two independent cable channels.
13.11 In Plant Communication
13.11.3 Taking into account that the types of telephone exchange for communication
in the plant are all timing programmed exchanger, it regulates that Programmed
exchangers shall be employed.
13.11.4 For the telephone exchanges for both unit control allowance and network
control allowance, because presently most places use digital program controlled
telephone exchange, here it contains the clause that when using programmed
telephone exchange, the whole plant shall use one programmed exchange with a
separate program desk for each unit control allowance and network control
allowance.
14 Water Supply Facilities and Systems
14.1 Water Management
14.1.3 This clause puts explicit emphasis on water management. It offers a
comprehensive balance and optimized design for the water supply, water consumption
and water drainage of the whole plant in order to raise the ratio of repeated water
usage. For the water that cannot re used, the drainage shall meet the standard.
14.1.4 It provides the designed water consumption standard for the circulation water
supply to the power plant and direct water supply from sea direct current. When
applying for quota for water consumption, 10 % of allowance shall be kept for the
preliminary run of the power plant.
14.1.5 For the units with the capacity of 200MW or below, above water consumption
quota has considered the water quantity needed for has and hot water supply.
14.1.6 It is an imperative measure to raise the level of water management and to have
an effective monitoring and control on the water quantity and quality, to ensure water
management is carried out in the power plant.
14.1.7 In terms of selection of dust collection field for the power plant, when making
decision on whether water dust field is used or dry dust field is used, comprehensive
factors must be taken into account and overall technical and economic factors
considered to have the optimized design and have the project cost under control.
14.2 Water Supply System

14.2.2 River channels are not exclusively used by the power plant, so the water
consumption in the upper reach of water inlets for the present and panned industrial
and agricultural water consumption must be considered and at the same time
permission in written form must be obtained from the water resource management
department for the water consumption.
14.2.3 Because the water resource in our country is scanty, exploration of under
ground water shall be limited. If underground water must be used as water resource
for supplement water supply for the power plant, formal document must be obtained
form water resource management department for water consumption.
14.2.7 Whether the content of suspension particles in water in the earth surface
(50-100) mg/L need to be treated shall be on the basis that the water supply condition
of the whole plant and the requirement for industrial system water quality is compared
technically and financially. If the size of the suspension particles in the supplement
water is smaller than 50mg/L, there is no need for treatment.
14.2.9 It is regulated the extended unit style can be used. Such a way is flexible,
economical but the investment has risen and overhauling will be complicated.
14.2.10 if using direct current, combined current or mixed current water supply, the
position of water intake or output will directly affect the investment of the power
plant, the safe operation and on the water ecology. When there is complicated
condition, physical model test or digital simulated calculation are required in order to
fix the rational arrangement of water in-take and output of the power plant.
14.2.12 Value from preliminary difference in temperature is used in the design of air
cooling system. The running back pressure of air cooling steam turbine changes with
the variation of the local temperature. The difference between saturation temperature
under back pressure when the steam turbine is letting out gas-tn and the temperature of
air dry ball entering cooling tower -ta is called initial temperature difference (ITD).
The value calculation of ITD has to do with genera table power of the steam turbine
(or generated power) and infrastructure investment. Therefore, it shall be decided
upon according to factors such as local weather conditions and the steam turbine
features. ITD value directly affects the selection of the number of radiators in air
cooling system. After optimization, air cooling type, designed temperature and rated
back pressure of steam turbine can be fixed.
14.3 Water Intake Structure and Pump House

14.3.6 Under normal conditions, one steam turbine has two sets of circulation water
pumps. It is appropriate that the total effort amounts to the maximum calculated water
consumption. But there special cases where when the level of resource water changes
dramatically with the change of seasons, it is appropriate to have three sets of pumps
(in summer three are running and in winter two are running).
14.4 Piping and Culvert

14.4.4 The selection of the materials for pipes used in water circulation and water
supplement shall be decided upon through technical and economic comparison. For
the pipes that transport sea water, large diameter water circulation pressure pipes and
pipes for water supplement, pre stressed reinforced concrete pipes are recommended.
14.5 Cooling Tank and Cooling Tower

14.5.1 The State enhanced management on water resource. When you want to make
reservoir, natural lake or river newt work as cooling tanks, you must get approval
document from relevant department in charge. The design shall be based on digital
simulation calculation or observation on the original object.
14.5.5 The purpose of this regulation is to reduce the resistance caused by ventilation
and raise the cooling efficiency.
14.5.11 Based on the experience of the layout in South Africa Power Plant, the
guiding wind direction in summer shall be longitudinally along the plant, thus
avoiding the circumfluence of hot air from the mouth of cold air condenser.
14.6 Off Plant Ash Disposal and Ash Storage Yard

14.6.2 About the road maintenance standard, the clause for simple road shall be
adopted. Refer to the class for Simple Road of road classification in GB 122
Standard for Road Design for Plants and Mines. In other words, the width of the
road shall be 3.5 m, the maximum vertical slope 9%, etc. The surface of the road can
be meddle level road on basis of the standard, say, made of mud mixed with gravel
and with blinding.
14.6.3 Inner lining of thin steel tube (or concrete tube) - the cast stone, is the most
wear-proof tube. When using other wear-proof tubes, a comprehensive argumentation
on the investment and the anti wearable property must be made.
14.6.5 With the demand for environmental protection more stringent, the circulation
water for washing the ash can is re used, which can save water resource and reduce
the pollution on the surface of the earth.
14.6.6 In order to prevent flying ash from polluting environment, a separation zone
made of green belt with width of 10m shall seal around the dry ash yard in plains.
14.7 Portable Water and Waste Water Drainage

14.7.4 Normally a power plant occupies several ha of land and there are large amount
of raw coal stacked around. When it is raining, there will be a stream on the surface of
the coal yard; the small particles of the coal will go to sewer with the water, which is
not conforming to environmental protection standard. Therefore, the power plant shall
set up a rain water dropping tank to contain the polluted rainwater.
14.8 Hydraulic Structure

14.8.3 Construction on hydraulic structure (mainly for hydraulic structure and water
pump house) is heavily affected by natural conditions while working conditions are
hard with a high construction cost. Therefore, a uniformed planning according to
panned volume is recommended. The construction shall be carried out in different
stages with the construction of the main machine, when it is not affected by layout or
construction conditions and when it is feasible economic wise.
14.8.10 Legal person system for a project makes operational income and expense
become one book, which were otherwise two separate books. Therefore the volume of
ash storage yard shall not be too large at the initial stage where ash storage yard was
formed. In order to reduce the cost, in advanced stage, ash slag can be formed into a
dam and can be added on higher.
14.8.13 In order to ensure safe and reliable operation of the ash yard, there shall be
flood detention channels around, which will drain out of the yard the flood beyond
certain standard for drainage area. Because the ash yard has certain ability to absorb
flood, and there are rocks stacked in prim shape in the lower reach to block water, so
the designing standard for flood detention canals need not be too high.
14.8.14 Flood detention dam situates at the upper reach of the valley to stop or
contain flood from upper reach areas, under the dam there are flood letting out culvert
pipes, through which flood is drained out of the ash yard. Therefore the design for
flood detention dam shall consider the shared functions of the flood letting out culvert
pipes.
15 Auxiliary and Auxiliary Facilities
15.0.1 According to relevant regulations on the management and design of new type
thermo power plants issued by the formal Ministry of Power and the National Power
Company, new type thermo power plant shall adopt central overhauling method, so
there need not be any central repair shop inside the plant. For the major overhauling
or small repairs it shall sub contract to an outside company or by bidding invitation.
15.0.2 The overhauling for a 500kV transformer or a transformer below the capacity
shall be returned to the manufacturer for repairs. The regulation of this clause only
relates to the necessary conditions for the repair of the 220kV transformer or
transformer below this capacity in a nearby place. Considering the trend that
overhauling system of a power plant is to be gradually a central repairing shop, it only
gives regulations on necessary conditions for other local & nearby repair places.
15.0.3 Because most equipment in a/m lab or monitoring station are not often used, so
it only points out requirement for an appropriate combination and arrangement.
15.0.5 According to research and study, the compressor used for thermo control or
overhauling in the majority of the power plants are a uniformed arrangement. And the
type and capacity is the same. Air compressors can serve as reserves, which guarantee
the quality and a steady supply of compressed air used in thermo dynamic control. It
also serves to raise the utilization efficiency.
Two working conditions must be considered when deciding the maximum continuous
consumption volume of the air compressor system and in selecting the number of sets
of air compressor:
1 when two sets are in operation, when there is no need for checking the air;
2 one set are running properly while the other set is under overhauling.
According to research and study, in most cases, the air consumption volume used for
instrument in single set of air compressor in the power plant with 300MW(600MW)
unit is 20m3/min (40m3/min). The number of air compressor in operation is normally
2 sets; when one set is under overhauling, the other one is working. So the air
consumption in thermo dynamic control system will not exceed 20m3/min. Because
only one set is working, the sir consumption of thermo dynamic control system will
reduce by nearly 50%, whereas only two sets of air compressors can meet the need.
The unit with capacity of 200MW or below the capacity seldom employs the
pneumatic system. The air consumption in the maximum thermo dynamic control of
two sets will not exceed 6 m3/min.
Accordingly, in 300MW transformer and in 600MW transformer, there are 4 sets of
air compressor of 20 m3/min and 4 sets with the capacity of 40m3/min. Unit of 200
MW and Unit of 125MW are equipped with four sets of air compressor of 10m3/min
separately each or with three sets of air compressors with 6m3/min for thermo
dynamic control and one set of air compressor of 20m3/min for overhauling.
The maximum continuous air consumption in air compressor system in thermo
dynamic control is normally fixed at two folds of the air consumption by pneumatic
equipment out of a general statistical figure.
Presently, many newly established power plants choose to use oil spraying or screw
typed- less oily air compressor. For thermo dynamic control, they use compressed air
for de-dusting and oil filtering to make sure the air quality to be at the level of the
regulations. Oiless air compressor is costly and not good for selection. When the
capacity of a single set of air compressor surpasses 50m3 /m, it is advisable to
consider centrifugal air compressor for technical and economic comparison. Some
power plants like Sanhe Thermo Power Plant has chosen centrifugal air compressor.
In order to ensure the safe running of the compressed air system for thermo dynamic
control, it is advisable to install a reversing shunt valve on the pressure tank of air
compressor used for overhauling in order to prevent the compressed air for
overhauling from entering the compressed air system for thermo dynamic control.
15.0.7 The thermo equipments of 300MW or above the capacity usually have nitrogen
filled protection facilities for idle time. It is said that many power plants installed it
but never used it. Therefore there is no regulation as to what kind of protection
measures shall be taken.
15.0.8 Because the dimension of the oil tank is set according to the system of one set
of unit, the dimension of the oil tank shared by two sets of units is the same with that
of the oil tank used by only one unit, so when condition allows, it is advisable that
two sets of units share one oil tank. The dimension of oil tank means the summation
between oil cleaning room and oil polluting room.
15.0.10 Considering the different media used in chemical cleaning of the boiler, and
the chemical cleaning facility is used only one or twice a year, it is not advisable to
have a fixed cleaning facility.
In the past, in the budget, there were ways to collectively invest in car acid
washing. But after it goes to the market to select the company for acid washing, it is
not listed into the plan any more.
16 Building and Structure
16.1.3 GB50229 Regulations for the Design of Thermo Power Plants and
Transformer Substations has been implemented. Hence thermo power plants must
follow this regulation and other prevailing standards or regulations on fireproofing in
their design on fireproofing. If there is any contradiction to the content of the
regulations prescribed by the state, those regulations that are issued lately shall
prevail.
16.1.7 The use of the construction materials such as hollow clay brick and steel
windows shall be subject to state and local policies and regulations and these
regulations must be taken into careful consideration when selecting the materials.
16.1.8 According to the design experiences for steel structure housing home and
abroad, it is beneficial for the reasonable force taking of the parts in the structure if
space function is considered in the design, it will also contribute to the full play of
the intensity of the materials to reach the goal of material saving and cost effective. As
far as the structure made of reinforced concrete, the present space analytic methods
are being maturing. Hence it is advisable to give full consideration to space function
and adopt 3-D analytic method to optimize structure design when conditions allow.
16.1.9 The temperature extension seam set by the structure design is to avoid
deformation and crack in structure brought about by temperature difference and the
shrinkage of the concrete. The maximum space between the seams shall be decided by
the regulations for design and shall consider the features of the power plant as well as
the experiences in design.
16.1.10 In terms of corrosion resistance, the normal way is to reduce as much as

possible the chance of outside exposure of the steel structure. It is a must to have anti
corrosion coating on the surface of the steel structure; for the reinforced concrete that
is exposed outside, the thickness of protection layer for the R-bars shall be increased.
16.2 Seismic Resistant Design

16.2.2 GBJ11 Regulations for Seismic Resistance Design in a building is partially
revised in 1993.
16.3 Main Power Building Structure

16.3.1 According to our national conditions, reinforced concrete structure is still the
priority in the structure design of the power plants in our country. The platform for the
operation of steam turbine adopts the combination of steel girder concrete plate and
we have had many experiences in it. It saves 20% of materials compared to steel
structure. So it is recommended.
16.3.2 The structure of the main building of the power plant normally uses without-
purlin system like in roof truss and large roofing. But the self weight of the structure
is heavy and is not good for seismic resistance. With the capacity increase of the unit,
the emergence of new building construction materials and the improved level of
construction technology, it is increasingly common for more and more large and
medium sized power plants to have the roofing of their main buildings made of steel
purlin bars and pressed section steel as base and upon the base there are instantly run
reinforced concrete plates with wood system. Hence, the type of the roofing system
shall involve the trait of the engineering project, the construction conditions and the
material supply, etc.
16.3.3 It is feasible for the roofing system of steam turbine workshop to use network
structure, but because the unit price of the steel product for the structure is rather high,
the specific project shall make decision after the technical and economic performance
comparison is made.
16.3.7 Due to the fact that the foundation design for 600MW unit is a late start in our
country, the experience are lacking for sure, therefore, it is better that the foundation
of the first new type of unit serve as model test.
16.4 Foundation Base and Foundation

16.4.1 This clause is the general requirement for the design of foundation base and
foundation. As for the design of foundation base and foundation, it shall first pursue
the suggestions put forward in the engineering geological prospecting report. Also it
shall combine the distinctive features of the project, construction local experiences
and adopt an optimized design scheme to improve the quality of the design.
16.4.2 The foundation base design of the main building normally shall adopt same
typed foundation base. But it can also adopt different foundation base according to its
specific conditions. Like when engineering boiler adopts piling base while the steam
turbine workshop adopts natural base. It is a different story with another project: the
boiler adopts natural base while the steam turbine workshop and de oxygen coal
storage house adopt piling base. Practice shows that due to different structure units, if
different foundation base is adopted, it will only help reduce the differential
degradation between each unit but also brings obvious economic results.
16.4.3 In terms of soft foundation base, different kinds of artificial bases can be
applied on the basis of safety and economy, against the importance of the building and
the requirement for the carrying capacity of the foundation base. The normal measures
to strengthen the shallow layer of the foundation are tamping by heavy hammers,
reinforced tamping, consolidating by water drainage, vibration-compaction method,
pushing tight rock piling, ash piling and tick matting method etc. When the
reinforcing of the shallow layer cannot meet the demands of the design, the soft
foundation base can also adopt piling method.
Those important building that are required to make original object test are main power
plant, chimney, cooling tower and other large buildings that are rather difficult for
foundation base treatment, or of which the volume of engineering work is huge.
16.4.5 In the past, when setting up a coal storage yard, normally no level off or
push-down tight is required. The base is normally the large amount of coal that is
underlain at the bottom and the thickness varies from 0.5m to 1m. In order to avoid
such a waste, it regulates to level off and push down tight. Besides, when the
foundation base has a poor carrying capacity, engineering geological treatment shall
be made.
16.5 Lighting and Natural Ventilation

16.5.1 In order to keep certain lighting coefficient for the natural lighting of the plant,
side windows shall be cleaned and kept clean. For energy saving purpose, there shall
not be many glass window of large dimension in the main building of the plant.
16.5.2 In light of the scientific research item-<Research on Natural Lighting of the

Main Buildings> assigned by Power Planning and Design General Institute and the
achievement out of the research, and by combining the specific conditions of the
power plant, the natural lighting standard for thermo power buildings are worked out.
16.6 Water Prevention and Drainage

16.6.2 According to the investigation into the in-room trenches and tunnels, most of
which have the problem of bleeding, leakage and seeper. The main reason is that in
making the design, no reliable water prevention measures were taken. Therefore, it
emphasizes that: There shall be proper water drainage design and reliable water
prevention and drainage measures. To ensure safe production of the thermo power
plant.
16.7 Indoor and Outdoor Finishing and Decoration

16.7.1 DL/T5092 Designing Standards for Building Decoration of Thermo Power
Plants contains detailed regulation regarding the indoor and outdoor decoration, but
some of the standards seem to be too rigid, so thee plants can take the lower limit of
standards.
16.8 Doors and Windows

16.8.1 There shall be measures to prevent small animals from entering the buildings
in terms of the door and windows of the buildings, which would otherwise cause
problems to a safe production.
16.8.2 It is more reasonable to use steel plastic or aluminum alloy doors and windows
due to the consideration that there is special requirement for the craftwork of a house,
such as central control room, computer room and communication room, where it
requires sound- proof and dust proof. If plastic and steel or aluminum alloy doors and
windows are used, it is more rational.
16.8.3 There may be flammable gas in the oxygen supply station. If metal doors and
windows are installed, metal objects collide with metal door and windows and
produce sparks, which will cause explosion. Therefore it is regulated that the
materials that will not produce sparks can be used.
16.8.4 Because there is acid gas in the storage battery and acid mix room and it has
corrosion effects on metals. If metal doors and windows are used, anti acid paint must
be used for protection.
16.8.5 Because there are salty fogs at seaside, it has corrosion effects on steel doors
and windows. Therefore the doors and windows of the power plants near seaside must
be corrosion resistance.
16.10 Chimney
16.10.1 The height of the chimney and the diameter of the outlet in the top are
normally provided by specialized process. In order to conform to the modulus and
become suitable for the project the dimensions are put forward for selection.
16.10.2 The structure type of the chimney is vital to its property and cost of
manufacture. Hence, it is very important to consider different working conditions with
different process and select economical and reasonable structure model.
Multi pipe chimney has a high production cost, therefore it requires a special technical
and economic argumentation.
16.11 Coal Conveyor Trestle

16.11.1 When the width of coal conveyor trestle is larger than 24m, it is difficult to
promote because the structure of pre stressed reinforced concrete is confined by
construction conditions and due to the on-site requirement. Hence it is preferable that
for its longitudinal structure, steel trestle is applied while for the bracket of the trestle,
concrete method can still be chosen.
16.11.2 Our country is a frequently seismic place. According to a survey on

earthquake disasters, the severer cases are with the brick structured trestles. Therefore,
from the point of the anti earthquake conditions and reduction of the pressures from
the earthquake, it is more reasonable for coal conveyor trestle to adopt a light fencing
structure.
16.11.3 From engineering practice, dry coal lookum of a big span adopts a newt work
frame. Its technology and economic feature are obviously better than others of a plane
structure. Therefore it is recommended for application.
17 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
17.1. General Regulations
17.1.3 This clause specifies that construction heating of the auxiliary buildings for
production outside the power plant areas shall conform to the local construction
standards instead of carrying out the building standards inside plant areas.
17.1.4 Because of the rigid quality demand for boiler water, in order to reduce the loss
of gasified water and ensure the safe operation of the boiler, it is not proper to absorb
gas by steam turbines to provide direct heating. The present way of central heating for
the heating areas has changed and developed from small scale, scattered service and
low temperature to large scale, centralized service and high temperature. High
temperature water heating system has the features of long term usage life and easy for
regulating and maintenance. For a thermo power plant, it is appropriate to
enthusiastically promote and adopt high temperature water heating.
According to above mentioned points, when regulating a thermo power plant adopts
steam as heat media for the heating, it is regulated that in extremely cold areas, the
temperature must be strictly below 160oc while for cold areas the temperature must be
limited under 130oc. It both suits the production features of a thermo power plant and
stimulates the areas with appropriate conditions to adopt as much as possible high
temperature water heating.
17.1.5 The cooling source of air regulating system shall adopt natural cooling
resource as it priority according to the principle of energy - saving. Using industrial
water as cooling water for refrigeration equipment is an optimized suggestion based
on comprehensive consideration of water management-one water resource with
multiple utilizations, saving the preliminary investment and running cost of the
facility.
17.1.6 This clause is a necessary measure to ensure safe production and the life
security of the workers. For the workshops that are under the threat of a sudden
emission of harmful gas or the gas with possible explosion in the process of transport,
storage or production, it is strictly forbidden to use open flame or heating by electrical
heater.
17.1.10 In order to prevent fire disaster from spreading through ventilation pipes, fire
proof measures must be considered. In order to let out the smoke from fire disaster
and all kinds of hazardous gas from all kinds of fire extinguishers after the fire is put
out, smoke discharge measures must be considered. Fire proof and smoke discharging
measures must conform to the contents in fire proof regulations such as
GB50229<Regulations for Fire Proof Design of Thermo Power Plants and
Transformer Substations>; GBJ16<Fire proof Regulations in Building Design> and
other regulations concerning fire proof. It is emphasized that fire proof and smoke
discharging shall be linked to fire fighting system, so that when a fire disaster happens,
ventilation and air conditioning will be shut off automatically.
17.1.11 the regulation in this clause means that when there is no special requirement
for the process in a workshop, from the point of labor protection and industrial
hygiene, it is requested that the temperature in the working place inside the workshop
in summer shall conform to the regulations in the prevailing TJ36 Sanitary Standard
for Industrial Enterprises Design.
For the workshops that have overall ventilation facilities, for the part of the place
where it cannot meet the sanitary standard for working place, local ventilation
measures shall be taken. The air used for the ventilation shall be from outdoor or
introducing air from underground. Upon calculation, after the local ventilation facility
is set up, if the temperature in the working place is still very high, the air that is sent
in shall go through cooling treatment.
17.1.13 For the thermo power plants that are in non heating areas, because the
temperature difference outdoor and indoor is not big in winter, and the humidity is
high, the dry ball temperature is high required by human bodys Equivalent
Efficiency Temperature. In order that the operational staff do not feel too cold to
concentrate on their work, there shall be heating facilities where there are posts people
must stick to in order that they will not use open flame to get heating, thus causing
accident.
Equivalent Efficiency Temperature is a kind of comprehensive data combining dry
ball temperature, wet ball temperature and the effects of air traveling speed. It reflects
the hot or cold feelings.
17.1.14 With the improvement of the technology level of the entire thermo power
plants, a higher demand is raised for all kinds of personnel with operation control or
production management. Therefore, creating a nice working and relaxing environment
is beneficial for the staff to concentrate on work and raise their working efficiency
and also contributes to avoidance of the loss arising from misplay of the staffs in work.
At the same time, all kinds of control and management facilities make pose certain
requirement for indoor environment.
17.1.15 For the workshops where there is a huge volume of heat emission or humidity
emission, in summer, when making design for natural ventilation or mechanical
ventilation, temperature in the working zone shall be fixed according to heat intensity
inside the workshop and the calculated temperature from summer outdoor ventilation
design. As for the working zones, to maintain the temperature inside a 2 m room
above the ground is considered. Within this zone, the temperature is allowed to
surpass the design permitted value in partial non working place the place around the
heating sources. If there is a fixed working place in a workshop, according to the
principle that the overall ventilation for a working zone can include several partial
ventilation, the measures shall be taken to supply ventilation in that working place.
17.1.16 This clause provides basic principles for ventilation design for all kinds of
buildings in a thermo power plant. The ventilation design is done in accordance with
the demand for sanitary conditions by production environment. In the decision
making process for the way of ventilation, according to the process requirement and
the feature that it emits hazardous element to the equipment, the decision shall be
made in closed circuit combination of the thorough knowledge of production, upon
obtaining/collecting data for all kinds of hazardous elements and considering the
specific conditions of the local plant- in one word-to adjust measures to local
conditions in deciding ventilation design formula.
17.2 Main Power Building

17.2.3 The present way of natural ventilation in main power buildings mainly uses
high windows in de oxygen room and ventilation by polygonal roofing that is gaining
grounds fast. No matter which way is adopted, it shall make careful technical and
economic comparison taking into account the special features of the plant and
combining engineering meteorology conditions.
17.2.5 According to the special topic research report -< Survey on Power Plant
Refrigeration and the Real Time Working Conditions of Air Conditioning and the
Optimization of cooling water resources>, an investigation is carried out on the air
conditioning of large scaled thermo power plants set up in recent years. The
investigation shows that with the development of science and technology, computers
and electronic equipment have had a strong adaptability to the ambient temperature
and humidity. But from the point of Equivalent Efficiency Temperature, which
conforms to the human body hygiene comforts, and from the point of de dusting for
the electronic equipment, there are certain requirements for the temperature, humidity,
the volume of fresh ventilation and the degree of indoor cleanness. Therefore, it is a
must to install air conditioning facilities in rooms mentioned above. The data for
interior design given by this clause is a reference design data for the uniformed
arrangement made for the central control room and electronic equipment room - the
two rooms shall adopt same design data so that it goes with the design principles for
air conditioning and easy for a uniformed arrangement. For the special case with
electronic room that requires a separated arrangement, the interior design data for it
shall be decided according to the requirement of the process.
17.2.6 By setting up a spray room, many ways for air treatment can be exerted. For
those thermo power plants that use underground water as their water resource, from
the point of one water resource can be used in a multiple way, double spray room
can be used for air treatment facility for the cooling equipment of the air conditioning
in order to save energy. This clause does not only apply to air conditioning but also to
all kinds of temperature dropping or ventilation systems in various kinds of
workshops.
17.2.7 This clause regulates the basic principle for the setup of air treatment facilities
in central air conditioning of the thermo power plant. It is based on the principle that
the rooms with air conditioners with most of the staff in it, such as central control
room and unit control room shall have air change rate per hour as n=5~8 times. At the
same time, non stop operation of air conditioning is considered.
17.2.8 With the improvement of automation in all processing systems of each and
every thermo power plant, it specifies the control method and the level of automation
in refrigeration, heating system and air conditioning. As for the machinery and
electrical equipment becoming integrated or for the air conditioning of a combination
unit, the way of control shall be decided in a rational way considering the intrinsic
functions of the unit.
17.2.9 DL5030< Design Regulation on Labor Safety and Industrial Hygiene in the
Thermo Power Plant> puts forward a principal regulation for the arrangement of
vacuum cleaning equipment. Because the selection and arrangement of vacuum
cleaning equipment and piping rely on the arrangement of the boiler (whether it is
arranged in a closed circuit way or not), unit capacity and the way of de dusting. The
number of posts to be de-dusted, the length of piping and the degree of vacuum as
well as the way of ash- discharging is all very different and will have an impact on the
effects of the application. Therefore, when deciding the vacuum cleaning equipment
and the piping, the setup shall be fixed upon technical argumentation. Besides, the
selection of the equipment shall pay attention to the impacts on the vacuum cleaning
equipment caused by sea level.
17.3 Electrical Buildings and Electrical Equipment

17.3.1 With the increase in unit capacity, the operation of the electrical equipment in
central control room and network control room does have a more rigid demand for the
operational environment. Meanwhile, there are electrical components or IC in the
relay room, excitation adjustment room and generator protection room. They have
certain demands for the temperature, humidity and cleanness of the surrounding areas.
In order to ensure a safe operation, it is regulated that there shall be an air
conditioning facility in a/m rooms.
17.3.2 The storage battery used presently is mainly anti-acid explosion partition type
as the first kind and closed circuit; valve controlled lead-acid storage battery without
maintenance as the second kind. Because there is a big difference in inner structure
and the materials, they have different environmental requirements. Therefore in
designing, the property of the storage battery and the impacts of local weather
condition shall be fully considered and the way of ventilation or air conditioning must
be decided according to process requirements.
17.3.3 The extreme high indoor temperature is a prevailing problem for many years
for the electrical equipment room, notably switch gear room with high voltage cabinet
and with dry type transformers. According to special topic report< The Problems and
Solutions for Ventilation and Fire Proof in Electrical Equipment Rooms in Hot and
Wet Areas>, this clause points out the summer indoor design standards and specifies
the range according to certain weather conditions. Within this range, the ventilation
systems in the thermo power plant shall take cooling measures for the air sent into the
room. The maximum allowed temperature shall not be over 40oc for the environment
of the normal electrical equipment. The time for non guaranteed designed temperature
in ventilation design shall not be too long, so it regulates the design temperature shall
not be higher than 35oc.
17.3.4 Ventilation facilities for trouble shooting in a switch gear room of the plant
must be considered. The ventilation facilities can also be used in summer for the same
purpose. But there must be difference in the volume of exhausted wind in troubled
time and the volume of normal wind. The volume of the exhausted wind may not
satisfy the demand of normal ventilation.
17.3.5 It mainly emphasizes fire proof measures in ventilation and air conditioning
system. Besides the intrinsic function of fire proof and anti smoking, the nature of fire
protection measure in the electrical buildings and in electrical rooms and the
coordination and consistence with the relevant field must be considered.
17.4 Coal Handling and Ash Handling Buildings

17.4.1 According to regulations in GBJ19<Design Regulation for Heating Ventilation
and Air Regulation>, for the areas whose winter outdoor calculated temperature is at
or lower than -10oc, when it is impossible to set up a door socket or an atria because
of the frequent opening and shutting of the door in the main gate, and since the time
for the opening of the gate is normally 40 min, it is advisable to set up a hot wind
screen. The gate of dumper room of a thermo power plant usually opens for a long
time in winter, so it is impossible to set up a door socket. Also because there are water
pipes in the room (for production, spray de dusting and living purpose), it is not
allowed for the room temperature to drop below 0oc.Hence it regulates that a hot wind
screen is set up in the dumper room of the areas with the temperature of or below
10oc.
For the areas of which the calculated out door ventilation temperature is a little high
then -10oc, when the water spray de-dusting produces mist or frost is to affect the
operation, a hot wind screen can be set up upon technical and economic comparison
made according to the specific conditions.
17.4.2 In the areas that use heating for transition, frost can be possibly inside the coal
conveyor building, causing the belt of the conveyor to be slippery. In order to ensure a
normal operation, heating can be set up in coal grinding room and in transit station.
17.4.3 The underground area of coal transport system of a thermo power plant
(including underground coal discharge groove, underground coal transport channel
and underground transit station) is cold and wet in summer. And it is very dusty in
coal transport. So the labor condition is poor. Hence it regulates that there shall be
ventilation system there. For the areas that adopt heating, winter ventilation and heat
compensation measures shall be considered from the point of view of energy saving
and wind sending system, upon many years design experiences, such as if use the
volume of ventilation in winter as the volume for summer ventilation, the heat energy
consumption will be huge and radiator and hot wind shall be the equipment for a
common compensation. The proportion by the two methods shall abide by the
maximum allowed dust containing density, first, according to which, ventilation
volume will be calculated as per hygiene standards, and secondly, when there is no
assured preliminary dust containing density, the time for ventilation can be set at 5
times as minimum per hour. The volume of exhausted wind in winter shall correspond
with that of wind supplied.
17.4.4 It contains regulations for the ventilation and de dusting of closed circuit coal
transport and grinding layer in Coal storage yard. The purpose of ventilation is to
reduce the density of floating dust in the closed circuit space and prevent the density
of dust from overvoltage explosion limit. De dusting facility is set to purify exhausted
air with dust and guarantee that out door air conform to national emission standard.
17.4.5 With the improvement of the reliability and automation of coal transport
equipment, there are relevant regulations from real demand concerning way of control
and setup of control signals in de dusting, spraying and vaporizing facilities.
17.4.7 Because mortar pump houses are normally underground buildings, in summer
there are large amount of heat emitted from the equipments causing huge wetness.
Therefore, there must be mechanical ventilation and the volume of ventilation shall be
calculated according to heat emission volume.
17.5 Chemical Buildings

17.5.1 The piping and electro motors in electricity penetrating room in the water
treatment house, anti penetrating room, filter and plasma exchanger will all emit heat.
Also because the water temperature in filter and plasma can be as high as 40oc, the
heat emission area is large and the equipment cannot contain wetness, therefore in
designing ventilation for them, it is advisable to consider ventilation volume of these
equipments and remove remaining heat. In winter heating design, the temperature of
the workshop shall be set at + 5oc, that is to say the design is made provided the
equipment is in cold state and when calculating heating load, heat emission volume
of equipment and piping are neglected.
17.5.2 In the prevailing TJ36 Hygiene Standard for Industrial Design, it requires the
density of hydrochloric acid not higher than 15mg/m3 and the density of vitriol not
higher than 2mg/m3. As per such a requirement, there shall be mechanical ventilation
equipment in acid bank and acid computation room to let out in time the acid gas in
the rooms. According to real time tests, a ventilation facility is installed with
minimum 15 time of ventilation per hour in acid bank and acid computation room to
meet the hygiene requirement. For the areas that use centralized heating or transit
areas where there are thermo power plants, it provides regulations that acid and
alkaline bank shall be separately set up in order to reduce the heat load for hot wind
compensation in winter. For the areas that do not adopt heating and where there are
thermo power plants, they shall also have a separate acid and alkaline room so that a
separate ventilation facility will be arranged for each accordingly.
17.5.3 It regulates the principle for the way of ventilation and the volume of
ventilation in the chemical buildings of a thermo power plant. The implementation
time shall conform to the principle in Clause 17.1.16.
17.6 Other Auxiliary and Auxiliary Buildings

17.6.1 The ground arrangement for fuel pump shall be single layered building with a
small span. There shall be enough side windows in the outer walls. Summer natural
wind shall basically satisfy the function of letting out remaining heat and oily air. For
underground or sub underground fuel pump house, due to uneven distribution and the
direction of the current in summer, a whirlpool is formed in the lower half, causing
great difficulties for hot air and oily air to be exhausted in a natural way. Therefore, a
mechanical ventilation facility must be installed. In cold areas, winter ventilation shall
have compensation by hot wind.
17.6.2 Circulation water pump and water pump at a bank are mostly sub underground
arrangement. The natural ventilation conditions are poor. Because of the large
capacity of the generator in the room, it requires huge amount of heat emission and
wetness emanation. The real time testing of the temperature of incoming and
exhausting wind in some of the water pump houses, when the temperature of the
incoming wind is 29oc, wind exhausting wetness reaches 55oc. If the remaining heat is
spreading in the room, the temperature of the room in summer will be very high. And
large amount of wetness will have big impact on the insulation property of the
generator. Therefore, this clause regulates that ventilation facility shall be installed in
the circulation water pump house or in water pump house at a bank.
In heating areas, if we maintain the temperature in water pump houses at + 5oc for
heating, it is out of the consideration that in winter when the equipment stops running,
the on- duty heating temperature of the equipment and piping cannot be damaged by
freeze.
17.7 Plant - Area Refrigeration, Heating and Heating Network
17.7.4 According to specific working conditions, such as local weather, hydrology,
geology, buildings and the density of traffic and out of the comprehensive
consideration of these factors, it regulates the way to lay the piping in order to have
the best coordination with the general horizontal layout. It also takes into account the
rationality of technology and economy and easy maintenance, etc.
17.7.7 For the thermo power plants using artificial cooling source, it is more
convenient if the setup of the refrigeration station combines with the heating station of
the plant from both the design and operational point of view. It can serve to fully
utilize or save construction areas. For the refrigeration station that needs to have an
independent refrigeration station due to process reasons, in order to reduce the length
of the piping and the coldness losses, when delivering the overall arrangement, it shall
be close to a building with a big refrigeration load as near as possible.
17.7.8 Centralized refrigeration has obvious advantages over the scattered

refrigeration. Therefore thermo power plants shall uniformly consider the volume of
the source of refrigeration as per refrigeration load of each air conditioning system
and arrange cold water pipes.
17.7.10 this clause regulates the principle for the arrangement of refrigeration units in
the thermo power plants. It is mainly based on the feature that the setup of the
refrigeration best adapts to the refrigeration load of the air conditioning system that
changes with the change of seasons. In the special subject report Real Operational
Working Conditions of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning of a Thermo Power Plant
and Optimization of cooling Water Resource, analysis/argumentation have been
made on the refrigeration and air conditioning operational situations in thermo power
plants located in northwest, mid south and Shandong. It finds out in these plants there
are universal problems caused by over size of the single unit like regulating difficulty
and poor economic efficiency. That is why it makes explicit regulations for the setup
of the refrigeration unit.
1 For compressor typed cooling water unit, considering its flexibility in
application and easy to adjust, at the time when refrigeration load of the air
conditioner is low, they can be a reserve for each other, it regulates the model
selection as per 2 x 75% or 3 x 50%.
2 For bromized lithium cooling water units, after a certain period of operation,
when there is a layer of bilge in the inner wall of heat exchange pipe of the evaporator,
absorber and condenser, the thicker the bilge, the bigger the heat resistance,
deteriorating heat conducting working conditions and reducing the volume of
refrigeration. Therefore, in the selection of the unit, single set unit shall increase 10%
as the allowance volume. Compared with compressed cooling water unit, bromized
lithium cooling water unit is more reliable in operation and has low downtime ratio
and it can neglect to consider the reserve of the equipment.
3 The other types of cooling water units this clause points out mean cooling water
units of module type or air cooling type. Assembled air conditioning unit means
cabinet typed or roof typed air conditioner. For module and air cooling typed cooling
water units, because these equipments can be reserve for each other, it is okay to only
consider the capacity reserve of the equipment. For assembled air conditioner,
equipment reserve shall be considered.
17.7.11 there are certain requirements on the quality of cooling water by refrigeration
equipment. Presently, the thermo power plants with single unit of the capacity of or
above 300MW all use closed circuit or open end cooling tower for the cooling water in
refrigeration equipment. For closed circuit cooling tower, because the cooling water is
in closed circuit circulation and isolated from the atmosphere, the water quality is
good. But the heat emission pipes of the closed circuit cooling tower uses circulation
sprayer for evaporating and cooling, so the quality of the reused water cannot be
guaranteed. There is a certain amount of bilges on the surface of the heat emission
pipes and the cooling effects are affected. For open end cooling tower, if no water
quality control facility is considered to be installed, but just to put into the water
chemical medicament to prevent scaling, corrosion and to check algae and bacterium
propagation according to water quality supervision and the timely removal of bilges
will affect the water quality. Therefore, a rational cooling formula for cooling water in
the refrigeration system of a thermo power plant shall be decided in closed circuit
combination of production and technical features in order to conform to
GB50050<Industrial Circulation Cooling Water Treatment Design Standard> and other
equipment requirement for water quality.
18 Environmental Protection
18.1.2 It puts forward various kinds of requirements for environmental protection
according to design program and adds the requirement for water and soil preservation.
18.1.2 It emphasizes to use clean technical process to reduce the production of

contamination. At the same time, it requests disposition and treatment of the produced
contamination.
18.2 Prevention and Control of Atmosphere Pollution

18.2.1 According to Law on Atmosphere Pollution Prevention and Treatment of PRC
and the matching statutes, the requirement for control of total volume of
contamination emission is added.
18.3.2 According to GB13223<Atmosphere Pollution Emission Standards of Thermo

Power Plants>, for the soot emission density of the unit with the capacity of or above
50 MW, calculate the required efficiency of de dusting machine, and the result shows
that all thermo power plants within the specification of this clause will need to adopt
electrical de-dusting, or use other kinds of mature and high efficiency de-dusting
machine.
One requirement is added that is the staring up of boiler soot emission shall execute
the requirements in GB13217 Emission Standard for Boiler Atmosphere
Contamination.
18.2.3 According to the state written document (1998) Official Written Reply to
Questions concerning Acid Rain Control and Sulfur Dioxide Pollution Control Zone
by State Council, assorted control is exerted. The emission of sulfur dioxide shall at
the same time satisfy emission standards, environmental quality standards and overall
volume control requirements. The thermo power plants within the acid rain control
zone and sulfur dioxide pollution control zone must satisfy the emission density
standards. If it fails to meet the demands, it shall install de-sulfur equipment.
18.2.4 According to the requirements in GB13223 Thermo Power Plant Atmosphere

Contamination Emission Standards, the control of the emission volume of sulfur
dioxide is based on the overall emission volume of the plant. The allowed emission
volume of sulfur dioxide is the calculated result of chimney height, the number of
chimneys, heat emission ratio in smoke and conditions for atmosphere diffusion.
In order to prevent open air boiler in boiler house from washing smokes from above,
the height of chimney shall be two times above the highest building inside the plant.
Because water tower in the plant is far away from chimney, it normally will not affect
the rising of the smoke. Therefore water tower is not included in this requirement.
When water tower (building) is arranged behind the boiler and is near the chimney,
the impact from water tower shall be calculated.
18.2.5 Because the quantity of nitrogen oxide has to do with the nitrogen content in
coals, the temperature of classification combustion in the hearth of the boiler, the
density of oxygen and the combustion gas stay- time in the high temperature zone, the
low nitrogen oxide combustion technology and equipment differ with different coal
grade and different types of boilers. Right now domestic and foreign made units with
the capacity of or above 300MW are all equipped with mature technology and
equipment for low nitrogen oxide combustion. According to the regulations in
GB13223<Atmosphere Contamination Emission Standards for Thermo Power Plants>,
Units with the capacity of or above 300 MW shall use low nitrogen oxide combustion
technology and equipment and must have the contamination from nitrogen oxide
reach the standards.
18.2.5 One requirement is added on the production and storage system of de-
sulfurizing absorbent.
18.3 Waste Water Treatment

18.3.1 First of all the waste water in the plant shall be considered to be return. It can
save water and reduce emission volume. To consider return water, the priority shall
be on the waste water that is hard for treatment. In terms of emission, priority shall be
on the waste water with less pollutant in it. It will thus save sewage treatment fees and
reduce the total volume of pollutant emission. It can be realized by the arrangement in
general lay out and in the design for the piping and channel arrangement through
research and study on the re-use of the waste water, its treatment and the emission.
The ash water in Ash Washing Yard shall first use closed circuit recycling system for
repeated used. When there is any difficulty in adopting closed circuit recycling system,
it is a must to take any measure to ensure the emission reach the standard of GB8979
Comprehensive Sewage Emission Standards.
18.3.2 There shall be not more than two out lets, meaning there shall not be more than
two outlets except the outlet in direct current water emission outlet and rain water
emission outlet in plant area.
18.3.4 The waste water from washing the boiler and the discontinuous waste water for
washing the air pre heating equipment shall be first stored and re used and then
emitted. Therefore there shall be a water storage tank, the design of which shall abide
by the regulations in <Regulations for Waste Water Treatment Design for Thermo
Plants>. For old thermo power plants, for the thermo plants nearby and for the thermo
plants that has an acid washing company with waste water storage facilities, they do
not need to set up a waste water storage tank.
18.3.5 This clause is based on a conclusion from a special subject report- <Impacts
Caused by Ash Water on Underground Water in the Water Ash Yard of a Thermo
Power Plant>.
18.4 Ash and Slag Treatment and Comprehensive Utilization

18.4.2 The comprehensive utilization of ash and slag is enterprise behavior and the
following factors shall be decided through investigation and analysis on an optimized
workout and comprehensive utilization research report: the economic efficiency
against the market demand for ash and slag(grade, quality and quantity of ash and slag
supply),the resulted benefits, saving the investment on the capacity of ash and slag
storage yard and operation expense and the investment on ash and slag supply system
and the operation expenses, etc.
18.4.3 The positive and negative effects of warm water emission on aqua bio plants
and aqua ecology will be fixed by an evaluation on environmental influence. When
warm water emission is required by environmental influence evaluation, the design
shall support and create conditions for it.
18.5 Noise Prevention and Control

18.5.2 There are tow methods to control impacts caused by engineering noise to the
environment-from source of noise and from the noise promulgation channels. First of
all according to state regulation, control noise from the source of the noise. The noise
will be controlled by state regulated noise products noise standard. If the noise is not
within the state regulated standard for product noise, when signing product agreement
with the manufacturer, following data can be referred to:
Wind introducing machine (3m in front of the wind incoming outlet) 85db (A)
Wind exhausting machine (3m in front of wind absorbing outlet) 90db (A)
Steel ball coal grinding machine 90-105db (A)
Other medium or high speed coal grinding machines 86-95db9A)
Generators and excitation machines (1 m from the noise source) 90db (A)
Steam Turbines (including oil filling machine, 1 m from the noise source) 90db (A)
Material discharging machines 9 1.5 m from the shell of the machine) 85db (A0
Pneumatic water pumps 101db (A)
In case the nose cannot be ridded from the noise sources, a noise insulation cover can
be used for the equipment. A muffler can be installed in the air emission valve and put
noise absorbing materials in the buildings for the control of the noise.
18.5.3 For some thermo power plants the water tower operation noise surpasses the
standards and some individual plants the noise from the valves in equipment piping is
beyond the standards, these problems can be solved in the general layout arrangement,
by afforesting the environment around the buildings and by setting up a noise
blocking screen to reduce the noise and to meet the standards.
18.6 Environmental Protection Monitoring
18.6.1 According to the requirement in GB13223<Atmosphere Contamination
Emission Standards for Thermo Power Plants>, which is worked out on basis of
mature smoke monitoring system used by thermo power plants, to reach the standard
requirement and to enable a rational investment.
18.6.2 According to the overall contamination emission volume of the thermo power
plants, there shall be a monitoring device at the outlet of the sewage discharging
facilities. When sewage from the thermo power plants is discharged with circulation
water into the same container, the discharges can be combined in the plant. But before
the combination, a continuous monitoring device for water quantity and quality shall
be installed. It satisfies the requirements from environmental department, meets the
standard for discharging and the control on the total volume of discharge and
contributes to the self cleaning of the pollutant and the pervasion. At the same time, it
helps to reduce the number of pipes used for discharge and the number of pipes
passing dams and railways and helps to control cost. But in the design, technical and
economic comparison must be made and the agreement from local management
department must be sought.
19 Labor Safety and Industrial Hygiene
19.1 General Requirements
19.1.1 It is one of the important policies of our country to improve labor conditions
and maintain safety and health for the workers. Since the foundation of new China,
The party and the government have worked out a series of guidance and policies on
safety production.
Constitution of The Peoples Republic of China in 1982 regulates explicitly
Strengthen labor protection and improve labor conditions. Some of the
conferences of the National Peoples Congress and national planning also emphasizes
on the strengthening of labor safety.
Every relevant ministry, bureau of State Council and Labor Trade Union have worked
out and issued in successions a series of regulations, standards and norms.
In 1994 the eighth Conference of the National Peoples Congress passed< Labor Law
of the Peoples Republic of China>, where it clearly regulates Labor safety facilities
must conform to the standards specified by the country. The newly built, renovated or
expanded labor safety facilities must be designed, constructed, put into operation and
utilized simultaneously with the principal part of the project.
The guiding ideology for the Three Simultaneous is to carry out the guideline of
Safety First and Prevention Most Important, to ensure the thermo power plant to
conform to the requirement about labor safety and industrial hygiene (occupational
hygiene) after it went into operation in order to ensure the workers to have safety and
health in the labor process and to radically protect and develop productivity and
promote the development of production. In the Three Simultaneous design comes
first. Only when the design is carried out in accordance with the prevailing laws and
regulations of the state concerning safety labor and industrial hygiene, can the labor
conditions be improved fundamentally.
19.1.2 In all specialized fields in the design of the thermo power plant, there are
requirements for safety labor and industrial hygiene. But there is not a comprehensive
for labor safety and industrial hygiene, all kinds of measures and facilities of which
will be exhibited the design for each specific field. Therefore, it must be implemented
in all specialized designs.
19.1.3 For the standards concerning safety and hygiene that this clause does not
include, these standards shall conform to the prevailing national standards, norms and
regulations in DL 5053 Labor Safety and Industrial Hygiene Design Regulations for
Thermo Power Plants.
19.2 Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention

19.2.1 GB50222 Fire Prevention Regulation for Interior Decoration Design of a
Building is added in order to guarantee the fire proof property of the interior
decoration in a building.
19.2.3 According to recent years revisions on the regulations, the name of the
regulation has been revised and some more standards and regulations are added for
observation.
19.3 Prevention of Electric Injury

19.3.1 According to recent years revisions on the regulations, some more standards
and regulations are added for observation.
19.4 Prevention of Mechanical Injury and Falling Down Injury

19.4.3 In order to guarantee the safety of the inspection personnel and prevent
accidents such as falling down or injury from falling down and to create a reliable
condition for safety operation, this revision make some supplementary requirements
on the design of the protective measures according to relevant state regulations.
19.5 Injury Prevention from Dust, Toxin and Chemicals

19.5.1 To prevent and deal with coal dust shall begin with blocking of the headstream.
The dust prevention measures such as putting a seal on the winch, putting a
blocking screen at the outlet of the coal discharging trough, reducing fall ( not bigger
than 4m) and no water to be used on belt conveyor speed control. To spray water on
raw coal is part of the dust prevention measures. Therefore, the slogan is more
appropriate and comprehensive: Focus on Prevention and Combine Prevention and
Treatment. The water on the surface of raw coal is on the low side, which is the
fundamental cause for the birth of coal dust. To make the raw coal wet and raise the
water containing level to a certain degree is one of the effective measures to prevent
the flying dust in the coal yard. For coal storage yard (dry coal lookum), it is
advisable to install a spray facility which can cover the whole of the coal yard. Vapor
sprayer to make the coal yard wet or making hydraulic cleaning of the ground are also
effective measures for the prevention and treatment of the coal dust. All kinds of
prevention and treatment measures for coal dust shall conform to <Comprehensive
Coal Dust Prevention and Treatment Design Regulation in Coal Transport System for
Thermo Power Plants>.
Concerning the way of cleaning for all workshops in coal transport systems, this
revision is made upon the investigations in 52 thermo power plants. These plants put
forward suggestions for future cleaning work. 40 plants recommend hydraulic
cleaning, accounting for 82%, 6 plants recommend dry and wet combined way for
cleaning, accounting for 12 %, 3 plants recommend dry type cleaning, accounting for
6% and 3 plants do not give any suggestions. That is why it adds the content better
to use hydraulic cleaning method. Only when there is a difficulty in hydraulic
cleaning, other measures can be used according to local specific conditions.
Right now the incidence of anthracosis is high with the workers working in boiler
inspection and maintenance and with boiler operation. Therefore it is a must to install
a vacuum de dusting device in the boiler house (or boiler), clean the dust inside boiler
itself and on the roof and make regular dry cleaning on the places where hydraulic
cleaning cannot work.
19.5.2 This clause contains the standards for dust containing density in the commonly
fixed working places and the standards for outdoor emission standards of de-dusting
systems as well as the measures for the case when in real operation the data is beyond
the designed standards. It is worked out on the base of joint negotiation and
cooperation between thermo power system and the Ministry of Health and National
Environmental Protection Bureau according to TJ36Industrial Enterprise Design
Hygiene Standards, GB16248 Hygiene Standards for Respiratory Coal Dust in the
Air in Working Places, GB16255 Hygiene Standards for Respiratory Silicon Dust in
the Air in Workshops and GB16297Comprehensive Emission Standards for
Atmosphere Contamination.
19.5.3 TJ36 Industrial Enterprise Design Hygiene Standards contains concrete

regulations for the allowed density of various kinds of hazardous substances in the air
in workshops.
19.5.5 According to regulations in GB8777 Hygiene Standards for SF6 in the Air in
Workshops, the allowed density of SF6 in the air of the workshops shall not exceed
6000mg/m3.
DL/T639 Details for Prevention and Protection of the Workers with SF6 Electrical
Equipment Operation, Experiment and Inspection and Maintenance is the current
implementation standard.
19.6 Noise and Vibration Prevention

19.6.2 To prevent damage from vibration shall begin with the control of the vibration
source. Besides isolation measures, additional requirements for vibration reduction is
provided.
19.9 Labor Safety and Industrial Hygienic Organization and
Facilities
19.9.1 The safety education room and the housing areas for hygienic organizations
and other requirements concerned shall temporarily follow the standards and
regulations in the following documents: the formal Power Ministrys<1988>126
document, formal Safety and Environment Protection Divisions <1992>52 document
and State Power Corporations(1998)94 document as well as current TJ36 Industrial
Enterprise design Hygienic Standard.
20 Fire Fighting
.1 The fire fighting in thermo power plants are critical. The design for fire fighting
shall closely follow national standard requirements such as GB50229 Design Fire
Fighting Standards for Thermo Power Plants and Transformer Substations.
20.2 Water Supply for Fire Fighting

20.2.1 This clause regulates the designed times of fire disasters and the way of
calculation for fire fighting water quantity.
The areas of thermo power plants in our country are normally less than 1 km3. The
population in the residence areas belonging to the thermo power plant is normally
under 15000. The fire disaster cases since the founding of the country show that the
fire disaster that happened in the same time range happens only once.
20.2.3 The unit with the capacity of or below 100MW of a thermo power plant has
rather a small height in it main buildings so the combined system for living and
consumption is adequate for portable water and for fire fighting water. The unit with
the capacity of or above 125MW has a large main building with much more height
and the water pressure for fire fighting water is bigger, if combining it with portable
water, it may bring damage to hygienic utensil and hence it is necessary for it to have
an independent fire fighting water supply system. The static water pressure of the
mouth of hydrant in the room shall not be over 800kPa. If it surpasses 800/kPa,
pressure diversion water supply system shall apply. When the pressure of the water at
the mouth of hydrant surpasses 600kPa, there shall be a pressure reduction facility.
Because the pressure at hydrant in the room is extreme big, plus the fact that when in
fire fighting, the open and close of the water gun can produce the function like a water
hammer, very possible to cause damage to the water supply system. When the out
going water pressure surpasses 600kPa, due to the reversed force from the water gun,
it is difficult for the fire fighting personnel to operate.
20.2.7 According to process features, indoor fire fighting facilities shall be installed in
diesel powered generating house and the start up boiler house.
20.2.8 Fire fighting water tank, air pressure water vessel and water tower are all water
reserves which can be used when putting down an open flame in the early stage of fire
fighting. In these facilities normally 10min fire fighting water shall be stored That is
the amount of water needed in the extermination of a fire disaster in the early stage. If
the calculated volume of the water tank is very big, it can be reduced to save cost.
Therefore, when water flow for fire fighting does not exceed 25l/s, 12m3 can apply.
While if it surpasses 25l/s, 183m can apply.
20.3 Special Fire Extinguishing Installation
20.3.2 Presently used fire extinguishing gas are haloalkane 1031carbon dioxide,
FM200 and Yangejinetc. They are suitable for extinguishing fire disasters in
electrical equipment or valuable instruments. According to international ozone
protection convention, our country will stop the production of haloalkane fire
extinguishing agent. When adopting haloalkane fire extinguishing system, the phase -
out time limit and the replaceable medical agent after the haloalkane are eliminated.
There are two systems with carbon dioxide fire distinguishing system- high pressure
and low-pressure systems. When the consumption of the amount of carbon dioxide is
huge, low-pressure system is more economical. Where there are people in the place
where fire disaster happens, carbon dioxide can cause a person to suffocate. Yangejin
(IG541) is composed of nitrogen, oxygen and carbon dioxide in a right proportion. It
has not bad effects for the ozone layer of the atmosphere. Under regulated fire
distinguishing density (37.5%-42.8%), Yangejin gas has little side effects on human
body. The molecular formula for FM200 is CF3 CHFCs (Pf7) and it has very little bad
effects on ozone layer and its chemical property is close to 1301.
20.3.3 Transformer is kind of facility where fire disaster happens more frequently. It is
better to use water spray fire fighting device in large oil immersed transformers. If a
thermo power plant situates at a place where there is water shortage and very cold, it
can adopt oil discharging-nitrogen filling fire fighting facility.
20.3.4 Coal transport trestle is also a place where there are frequent fire disasters. So
for better protection purpose, an automatic water spray fire distinguishing facility
shall be used for the long trestle of a large scaled thermo power plant, which is using
easily self combustion coals.
20.3.6 Stipulates the principle for the deployment of a fire distinguishing facility for a
single unit with the capacity of or below 200MW of a thermo power plant.
20.5 Fire Engine

20.5.1 The fire fighting principle for a thermo power plant is that when the fire
disaster happens, it can provide for or help itself. There are adequate fire fighting
water supply, alarm and automatic fire distinguishing system. The investment for the
listed or planned fire engine of the thermo power plant and the garage for the fire
engine can be discussed and coordinated with local fire fighting authorities and put to
the uniformed application under the jurisdiction of the fire fighting authorities.

DL5000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DL5000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DL5000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P61

Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel Power Plants

Issued on Nov.13, 2000 Effective 2001-01-01

State Economic & Trade Commission of the Peoples Republic of China

Technical Code for Designing Fossil Fuel Power Plants

Compiled by: China Electric Power Construction and Consultant Company

China Electric Power Publishing House

It is a new development orientation of electric power industry in 21 century to

This code is put forward by the State Electric Power Company.

GBl50-1998 Steel Pressure Vessels

GB/T1596-1991 Coal Ash Used in Cement and Concrete

GB3095-1996 Ambient Air Quality Standard

GB3096-1993 Code of Environmental Noise in Urban Area

GB3097-1997 Quality Standards of Seawater

GB3838-1998 Environmental Quality Standards for Surface Water

GB4053.1-1993 Safety Specifications for Fixed Type Steel Vertical Ladders

GB4053.2-1993 Safety Specifications for Fixed Type Steel Inclined Ladders

GB4053.3-1993 Safety Specifications on Fixed Type Industrial Guard Rails

GB4053.4-1983 Fixed Type Industrial Steel Platforms

GB/T4064-1993 Safety Design Guidelines for Electrical Apparatus

GB4792-1984 Fundamental Standard for Radiation Health Protection

GB4830-1984 Pressure Range and Quality of Gas Sources for Industrial

GB5083-1985 General Rules for Safety and Health Design of Production

GB5084-1992 Quality Standard o Farm Irrigation Water

GB5749-1985 Hygienic Standard for Drinking Water

GB/T7064-1996 Technical Requirements for Turbo Synchronous Motors

GB8173-1987 Standard for Control of Pollutants in Agricultural Coal Ash

GB8196-1987 Safety Requirements for Protective Hoods of Mechanical

GB8702-1988 Regulations on Electromagnetic Radiation Protection

GB8703-1988 Regulations on Radiation Protection

GB8978-1996 Code for Sewage Composite Discharge

GB9137-1988 Maximum Allowable Concentration of Air Pollutants against

GBl0070-1988 Code for Environmental Vibration in Urban Area

GBl0434-1989 Hygienic Standard for Local Vibration at Operational Fields

GBl0436-1989 Hygienic Standard for Microwave Radiation at Operational

GBll607-1989 Quality Standard for Fishery Water

GBl2348-1990 Criteria for Noise around Factories of Industrial Enterprises

GBl2523-1990 Limitation of Noise around Construction Sites

GBl2525-1990 Limitation and Measuring Scheme for Noise at Railway

GBl2941-1991 Quality Standard for Landscape and Recreational Water

GBl3015-1991 Codes for Pollution Control of Wastes Containing Polychlorinated

GBl3223-1996 Discharge Standard for Air Pollutants from Thermal Power

GBl3271-1991 Discharge Standard for Air Pollutants from Boilers

GBl4285-1993 Technical Regulations on Relay Protection and Safety Automation

GBl5618-1995 Environmental Quality Standards for Soil Irrigation

GB50033-1991 Standard for Lighting Design for Industrial Enterprises

GB50034-1992 Standard for Illumination Design for Industrial Enterprises

GB50040-1996 Code for Design of Dynamic Machine Foundation

GB50050-1995 Code for Design of Industrial Circulating Cooling Water

GB50057-1994 Code for Lightning Protection Design for Constructions

GB50058-1992 Electrical Installations Design Code for Explosive

GB50059-1992 Design Code for (35-110) kV Transformer Stations

GB50060-1992 Design Code for3-100kV high voltage electrical installation

GB50065-1994 Code for Grounding Design for AC Electric Apparatus

GB50116-1998 Code for Design of Automatic Fire Alarm System

GB50129-1995 Code for Design for Water Spray Extinguishing Systems

GB50151-1992 Code for Design for Low Expansion Foam Extinguishing

GB50156-1992 Code for Design of Small Petroleum Deposits Automobile

GB50191-1993 Design Code for Anti-Seismic of Special Structures